Avaya S8700 Series Maintenance Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 1386 / 2618

background image

Maintenance-Object Repair Procedures

555-233-143

8-664

Issue 1 May 2002

DS1 Interface Options

The following DS1 Interface options must be set with fiber link administration. To
set the values, check the number of the fiber link via the list fibers command.
Execute the change fiber-link command and set the following fields:

Facility Installed

This field determines if the DS1 facility is installed. The field is set to yes if the
facility is installed.

For TN574 DS1 CONV boards, facility A must be installed before the others.
Facilities B, C and D can then be installed in any order desired since the primary
facility can reside on any of the four facilities.

For TN1654 DS1 CONV boards, facility A must be installed first, then B, then C or
D. This is required since the primary facility can only reside on facilities A or B.

Passes Far-End Clock

This field determines if the DS1 facility can be used as a clock reference for the
receive fiber signal. The field is set to yes unless the DS1 facility cannot be used
as clock reference signal.

This field appears on the fiber-link form only for TN574 DS1 CONV circuit packs.
On the TN1654 DS1 CONV board, none of the facilities can be used as a clock
reference for the receive fiber signal thus administration of this field is not
applicable.

DS1 facilities cannot be used as system synchronization sources.

Digital Data Compatible

This field determines if the DS1 facility is suitable for carrying packet traffic. The
field is set to yes unless the DS1 facility is not digital data compatible.

This field appears on the fiber-link form only for TN574 DS1 CONV circuit packs.
The TN574 circuit pack allows any of the four facilities to be used as the primary
facility that carries the packet traffic. The TN1654 DS1 CONV board, however,
allows packet traffic only on facilities A and B. Thus there is no need to administer
this information as it is already predetermined.

«
...
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
...
»

Summary of Contents for S8700 Series

Page 1: ...Maintenance for the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations Volumes 1 2 and 3 555 233 143 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 2: ...ces labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its net worked equipment rests with you Avaya s customer system adminis trator your telecommunications peers and your managers Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including b...

Page 3: ...FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should n...

Page 4: ...iant with FCC Part 68 but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at http www part68 org by conducting a search using Avaya as manufacturer European Union Declarations of Conformity Avaya Inc declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the CE Conformité Europeénne mark conforms to the Europ...

Page 5: ...r Technical Support xxiv 1 Maintenance Architecture 1 1 Maintenance Objects 1 3 Alarm and Error Reporting 1 4 Basic Server and IPSI Connectivity 1 7 Power Interruptions 1 8 Protocols 1 10 Signaling 1 17 Service Codes 1 23 Facility Interface Codes 1 24 Multimedia Interface MMI 1 25 2 Hardware Configurations 2 1 Multicarrier Cabinets 2 2 PNC Cabling Fiber Hardware 2 3 Circuit Packs 2 8 Duplication f...

Page 6: ...ster 4 16 Fault Isolation for Fiber Links 4 19 ATM Tips 4 28 Unusual ATM Trouble Conditions 4 58 Multimedia Call Handling MMCH 4 61 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI 4 69 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI Endpoints Wideband 4 71 Troubleshooting ISDN BRI ASAI 4 73 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI Test Calls 4 77 Troubleshooting the Outgoing ISDN Testcall Command 4 80 Isolating and Repairing Packet Bus Faults 4 81 5 Addition...

Page 7: ... 9 Contention Between Simultaneous Commands 7 12 Busyout and Release Commands 7 13 Common Abort and Fail Codes 7 15 Alarm and Error Categories 7 17 add atm pnc 7 38 add ipserver interface 7 39 add station 7 41 busyout cdr link 7 42 busyout data module 7 43 busyout ds1 facility 7 44 busyout fiber link 7 45 busyout ipserver interface 7 46 busyout journal printer 7 48 busyout link 7 49 busyout pms li...

Page 8: ...ssor channel 7 109 display errors 7 111 display events 7 117 display failed ip network region 7 132 display fiber link 7 133 display firmware download 7 134 display initcauses 7 135 display ipserver interface 7 138 display node names 7 139 display system parameters duplication 7 141 display system parameters ipserver interface 7 143 display system parameters maintenance 7 144 display test schedule...

Page 9: ...dsp resource 7 197 list measurements ip signaling group 7 201 list pms down 7 204 list registered ip stations 7 205 list skill status 7 206 list station 7 209 list sys link 7 210 list trace 7 212 mark port 7 214 monitor bcms 7 215 monitor health 7 219 monitor security violations 7 221 monitor system 7 222 monitor traffic 7 230 monitor trunk 7 232 netstat arp 7 233 netstat ip route 7 237 ping 7 238...

Page 10: ...set signaling group 7 283 set snc 7 284 set synchronization 7 285 set tdm 7 286 set time 7 287 set tone clock 7 289 status access endpoint 7 290 status administered connection 7 291 status attendant 7 293 status bri port 7 294 status cabinet 7 304 status cdr link 7 305 status clan port 7 306 status conference 7 307 status data module 7 344 status firmware download 7 345 status hardware group 7 346...

Page 11: ...dministered 7 404 status tti 7 406 status val ip 7 409 test alarms 7 410 test analog testcall 7 419 test board 7 420 test cdr link 7 421 test customer alarm 7 422 test data module 7 423 test ds1 facility 7 424 test ds1 loop 7 425 test eda external device alrm 7 429 test environment 7 432 test failed ip network region 7 434 test fiber link 7 435 test firmware download 7 437 test hardware group 7 43...

Page 12: ...ts 555 233 143 xii Issue 1 May 2002 test signaling group 7 453 test synchronization 7 454 test sys link 7 457 test tdm 7 459 test tone clock 7 460 test trunk 7 461 test tsc administered 7 462 traceroute 7 463 ...

Page 13: ...4 L 24 Port Analog Line 8 63 ANL BD Analog Line Circuit Pack 8 80 ANL LINE ANL NE L 8 Port Analog Line 8 81 AN LN PT Analog Line Port 8 101 ANN BD Announcement Circuit Pack 8 120 ANN PT Announcement Port 8 136 ASAI BD Multi Application Platform Board 8 144 ASAI EPT 8 146 ASAI PT 8 155 ASAI RES E DIG RES TN800 reserve slot 8 167 ATM BCH ATM B Channel Trunk 8 168 ATM DCH ATM D Channel Port 8 183 ATM...

Page 14: ...ifier Circuit Pack 8 428 CLSFY PT Call Classifier Port 8 429 CO BD Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack 8 434 CO DS1 DS1 CO Trunk 8 435 CO TRK Analog CO Trunk 8 452 CONFIG System Configuration 8 476 CUST ALM Customer Provided Alarming Device 8 483 DAJ1 Server Duplication Memory Board 8 485 DAT LINE Data Line Port 8 489 DC POWER Single Carrier Cabinet Environment 8 498 DETR BD Tone Detector Circuit 8 ...

Page 15: ...ce Alarm 8 827 FIBER LK Fiber Link 8 830 FW DWNLD Firmware Download 8 869 GPTD PT General Purpose Tone Detector Port 8 883 H323 BCH H 323 B Channel 8 888 H323 SGRP 323 Signaling Group 8 890 H323 STN H 323 IP Station 8 897 HYB BD Hybrid Line Circuit Pack 8 903 HYB LINE Hybrid Line 8 904 INADS INADS Link 8 925 IPMEDPRO IP Media Processor Circuit Pack 8 929 IPSV CTL Ipserver Interface Control 8 950 I...

Page 16: ...ance Test Digital Port 8 1161 M T PKT Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port 8 1175 NO LIC No License 8 1180 OPS LINE DS1 Off Premises Station Line 8 1183 PDMODULE Processor Data Module TDMODULE Trunk Data Module 8 1196 PE BCHL PRI Endpoint Port 8 1213 PKT BUS Packet Bus 8 1230 PKT INT Packet Interface 8 1238 PLAT ALM Platform Alarms 8 1269 PMS LINK Property Management System Link 8 1270 PMS PRNT JNL PR...

Page 17: ...9 TBRI PT ISDN Trunk Side BRI Port 8 1557 TBRI TRK Trunk Side ISDN BRI 8 1577 TDM BUS TDM Bus 8 1588 TDM CLK TDM Bus Clock 8 1604 TDMODULE Trunk Data Module 8 1619 TIE BD Tie Trunk Circuit Pack 8 1620 TIE DS1 DS1 Tie Trunk 8 1621 TIE TRK Analog Tie Trunk 8 1638 TIME DAY Time of Day 8 1658 TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit 8 1659 TONE PT Tone Generator 8 1682 TR LN BD Trunk Line Board 8 1691 TSC ADM Admin...

Page 18: ...Contents 555 233 143 xviii Issue 1 May 2002 VC SUMPT 8 1860 WAE PORT Wideband Access Endpoint Port 8 1865 XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack 8 1872 IN Index IN 1 ...

Page 19: ...increased capacity For more information refer to the Overview of the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations These system s extensive background testing and technician demanded tests allow many problems to be addressed before they severely disrupt call processing Duplication options further enhance this reliability giving the technician an opportunity to provide a high level of s...

Page 20: ...information in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures will generally suffice to address these needs Certain complex elements of the system such as fiber links and the packet bus require a more comprehensive approach Special procedures for these elements appear in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting This document is not intended to solve every level of trouble When the limits of the...

Page 21: ...ect Repair Procedures contains specific troubleshooting and repair instructions for every component in the system The maintenance objects are listed alphabetically by name as they appear in the Alarm and Error Logs Under each maintenance object appears a description of the object s function tables for interpreting alarm and error logs and instructions on how to use tests commands and replacements ...

Page 22: ... information about the usable vintages of specific circuit pack codes including the suffix in a Release 10 or later system Admonishments used in this book are as follows CAUTION This sign is used to indicate possible harm to software possible loss of data or possible service interruptions WARNING This sign is used where there is possible harm to hardware or equipment DANGER This sign is used to in...

Page 23: ...d trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Amphenol registered trademark of Amphenol Corporation Ascend registered trademark of Ascend Inc Audichron registered trademark of the Audichron Company ConnectUPS registered trademark of Powerware MS DOS registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation MicroChannel registered trademark of IBM Systems MULTIQUEST registered trademark of Telecommunications S...

Page 24: ...585 For help with maintenance and repair Avaya National Customer Care Center Support Line 1 800 242 2121 Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Avaya Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 1 925 224 3401 Avaya Centers of Excellence North America 1 800 248 1111 United Kingdom 44 1483 308 000 Canada 1 800 387 4268 Bahrain 973 218 266 Budapest 36 1238 8334 Moscow 7095 363 6701 Saumur 33 241 534 000 ...

Page 25: ...ti Connect maintenance strategy and presents background information about the system s overall functions For detailed descriptions of components and subsystems refer to related topics in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures Sections on the following maintenance objects MOs are particularly useful for gaining an understanding of how the system works PNC DUP PNC Duplication on page 8 1283 ...

Page 26: ...1 2 Issue 1 May 2002 This chapter includes the following topics Maintenance Objects Alarm and Error Reporting Basic Server and IPSI Connectivity Power Interruptions Signaling Service Codes Facility Interface Codes Multimedia Interface MMI ...

Page 27: ...clock TDM CLK Tone Generator TONE PT and Tone Clock TONE BD Tone Clock circuit pack TONE BD found in non IPSI connected port networks only TDM bus clock TDM CLK and Tone Generator TONE PT Other MOs represent larger subsystems or sets of monitors such as an expansion port network EXP PN or a cabinet s environmental sensors CABINET Finally some MOs represent processes or combinations of processes an...

Page 28: ...al degradation of service and require immediate attention Major alarms can occur on standby components without affecting service since their active counterparts continue to function MINOR alarms identify failures that cause some service degradation but do not render a crucial portion of the system inoperable The condition requires attention but typically a minor alarm affects only a few trunks or ...

Page 29: ...ery major or minor alarm is reported to the Avaya alarm receiver system to generate a trouble report in the Avaya Services Ticketing System Some warning alarms can be upgraded in conjunction with the Enhanced Remote Support ERS offer These alarms are external to the product and the customer can choose these options for an additional charge See the following flowchart Table 1 1 Multiple Alarms Agai...

Page 30: ...leted Yes Yes No No No Yes Call retried in 7 minutes Fifth retry attempt One hour wait Has test been repeated six times New alarm raised Yes Every timer and count is reset Call to successful alarm receiving system fcdsinar LJK 030102 At customer s request can downgrade some classes of alarms to lower levels alarm receiving system No Acknowledge light on console flashes steadily alarm not reported ...

Page 31: ...ervers connect to each of the control networks via the Ethernet switches Each of the Ethernet switches connect to each of the IPSIs in the port networks Each of the port networks connect to the single bearer network A port network can be IPSI connected or non IPSI connected In the high reliability configuration all IPSI connected port networks must have duplicated IPSIs The non IPSI connected port...

Page 32: ... node carrier all service to port networks connected to that switch node is dropped Single carrier cabinets which can be used for EPNs also have no battery backup If power is interrupted for more than 0 25 seconds all service is dropped and emergency transfer is invoked for the EPN In the above cases the cabinet losing power is unable to log any alarms However in the case of an EPN going down whil...

Page 33: ...t can be connected to external equipment These are located on the Maintenance circuit packs If the switch is under warranty or a maintenance agreement EXT DEV alarms are generated by the equipment connected to these leads and reported to the Avaya alarm receiving system These may be used to report failures of UPSs or battery reserves powering the switch They are also commonly used to monitor adjun...

Page 34: ...ta communications contains seven layers each with a specific function Communications to and through the system concern themselves only with layers 1 and 2 of the model Layer 1 or the physical layer covers the physical interface between devices and the rules by which bits are passed Among the physical layer protocols are RS 232 RS 449 X 21 DCP DS1 and others Layer 2 or the data link layer refers to...

Page 35: ...LE DATA MODULE DATA MODULE DATA MODULE DTE DTE DATA MODULE DS1 PORT 1 D I G I T A L P O R T RAW BITS RS232C DS1 FORMAT DCP DMI ASCII 2 P O R T D S 1 DTE T R U N K P O R T A N A L O G ADU ADU DTE E I A P O R T E I A P O R T DTE DMI ASYNCH ASCII ASYNCH ASCII 2 3 7 USER DEFINED RS232C RS232C ADU PROT ADU PROT 1 RAW BITS 3 7 USER DEFINED VOICE GRADE DATA ASCII ASCII 2 ANALOG ANALOG 1 PCM RS232C RS232C...

Page 36: ...se protocols consist of codes inserted at the originating DCE and stripped at the port The DS1 protocol can be inserted at the originating outgoing trunk port and stripped at the destination port Digital Communications Protocol DCP A standard for a 3 channel link This protocol sends digitized voice and digital data in frames at 160 kbps The channel structure consists of two information I channels ...

Page 37: ...line Countries outside the United States use CEPT1 protocol Inside the system data transmission appears in one of two forms 1 Raw digital data where the physical layer protocols like DCP are stripped at the incoming port and reinserted at the outgoing port 2 Pulse Code Modulation PCM encoded analog signals analog transmission by a modem the signal having been digitized by an analog to digital code...

Page 38: ... on page 1 15 Table 1 3 Protocol States for Data Communication Transmission Type Incoming DTE to DCE OSI Layer Protocols DTE to DCE DCE to System Port Inside System Analog Modem 1 RS 232 RS 449 or V 35 analog PCM 2 8 or 10 bit code voice grade data voice grade data ADU 1 RS 232 ADU proprietary raw bits 2 asynchronous8 bit code asynchronous 8 bit code DMI Digital Data Module 1 RS 232 RS 449 or V 35...

Page 39: ...port data is identical to digital line data Data entering the system at a DCP line port can exit at an EIA port Conversely data entering the system at an EIA port can exit at any DCP line port The destination data module must be set for Mode 2 DMI communication Voice grade data can be carried over a DS1 facility as long as the destination equipment is a modem compatible with the originating modem ...

Page 40: ... the system at a digital port and exits the system at a digital port The signal then reenters the system through a modem pool connection data module to modem to analog port and exits the system again at an analog port Although DS1 is commonly called a trunk speed here it names the protocol used at layer 1 for digital trunks Some trunks use different signaling methods but use DS1 protocol at layer ...

Page 41: ...s The incoming trunk is restricted from being transferred to a party without disconnect supervision on the terminating node This is because through messaging the terminating node knows the originating node cannot provide disconnect supervision This messaging is not possible with non DCS tie trunks and the direct call is denied Some 2 wire loop start trunks outside the United States provide busy to...

Page 42: ...ansfer two parties together by pressing the release key the release link trunk is released and the branch attempts a transfer by going on hook Station Conference Dropout If a station conferences every party the conference is allowed since the station has disconnect supervision When the station is dropped from the call the call is dropped since the other parties do not have disconnect supervision S...

Page 43: ...g to digital frequency response of the system for station or CO trunk to digital interface DS0 relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United States Table 1 6 Analog to Analog Frequency Response Frequency Hz Maximum Loss dB Minimum Loss dB 60 20 200 5 0 300 to 3000 1 0 5 3200 1 5 0 5 3400 3 0 Table 1 7 Analog to Digital Frequency Response Frequency Hz Maximum Loss dB Minimum Loss dB 60 20 200 3 0 300 to...

Page 44: ... analog and analog to digital up to 9 6 kbps data Table 1 8 Insertion Loss for the United States Typical Connections NominalLoss dB at 1 kHz On premises to on premises station 6 On premises to off premises station 3 Off premises to off premises station 0 On premises station to 4 wire trunk 3 Off premises station to 4 wire trunk 2 Station to trunk 0 Trunk to trunk 0 Table 1 9 Overload and Crosstalk...

Page 45: ...able 600 Ohms nominal or complex Z 350 Ohms 1 k Ohms in parallel with 0 215uF Impulse Noise On 95 or more of all connections the impulse noise is 0 count hits in 5 minutes at 55 dBrnC decibels above reference noise with C filter during the busy hour Table 1 11 Quantization Distortion Loss Analog Port to Analog Port Signal Level Distortion Loss 0 to 30 dBm0 33 dB 40 dBm0 27 dB 45 dBm0 22 dB Table 1...

Page 46: ... above reference noise with C filter Analog to digital 19 dBrnC Digital to analog 13 dBrnC Echo Path Delay Analog port to analog port 3 ms Digital interface port to digital interface port 2 ms Station to station ERL should meet or exceed 18 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 12 dB Station to 4 wire trunk connection ERL should meet or exceed 24 dB SFRL should meet or exceed 14 dB Station to 2 wire trunk...

Page 47: ...minal equipment ports Private line service codes are as follows 7 0Y Totally protected private communications microwave systems 7 0Z Partially protected private communications microwave systems 8 0X Port for ancillary equipment 9 0F Fully protected terminal equipment 9 0P Partially protected terminal equipment 9 0N Unprotected terminal equipment 9 0Y Totally protected terminal equipment The produc...

Page 48: ...Trunk Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Service Order Code Network Jack TN742 and TN747B Off Premises Station Port and TN746B Off or On Premises Station Port 0L13C 9 0F RJ21X TN760 B C D Tie Trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX Table 1 14 Digital Trunk Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Service Order Code Network Jack TN1654 and TN574 DS1 Converter TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk and TN767 and TN464 DS1 Interface 04DU9...

Page 49: ...tional Standards Institute ANSI H 221 Includes H 230 H 242 H 231 and H 243 protocol BONDING Bandwidth On Demand Interoperability Group Mode 1 ESM HLP HDLC Rate Adaptation The Vistium Personal Conferencing System is supported either through the 8510T BRI terminal or directly through the Vistium TMBRI PC board Using the World Class Core WCC BRI interface most desktop multimedia applications are supp...

Page 50: ...Maintenance Architecture 555 233 143 1 26 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 51: ... This chapter includes the following topics Multicarrier Cabinets PNC Cabling Fiber Hardware Circuit Packs Duplication for Reliability Required System Components The S8700 Multi Connect uses the following hardware components Intel Server IP Server Interface Card IPSI TN2312AP Cajun Ethernet Switch P13X or P33X ConnectUPS 700VA 1500VA online UPS USB Modem ACM Compliant Media Gateways MCC1 SCC1 and ...

Page 52: ...Hardware Configurations 555 233 143 2 2 Issue 1 May 2002 Multicarrier Cabinets For information on multicarrier cabinets and the carriers in them refer to Avaya MultiVantage Solutions Hardware Guide ...

Page 53: ...ither a 62 5 micron or 50 micron fiber connection Standard fibers are available in various lengths up to 150 feet 46 m for single mode fiber and up to 200 feet 61 m for multimode fiber These fibers are used to connect lightwave transceivers to each other when they are close enough together or to optical cross connect facilities for greater distances The lightwave transceivers are powered from I O ...

Page 54: ...ave Transceiver 9823 Type Lightwave Transceiver TX RX TX RX To I O Connector Plate FL2P P xx Fiber Optic Cables FL2P P xx Fiber Optic Cables FL2P P xx Fiber Optic Cables To I O Connector Plate TX RX TX RX 9823 Type Lightwave Transceiver 9823 Type Lightwave Transceiver To I O Connector Plate 100A LIU Optical Cross Connect Facility 100A LIU ...

Page 55: ...nverter DS1 CONV circuit pack serves as the interface between the network and an EI or SNI on the switch DS1 cabling on a carrier consists of a Y cable that connects a DS1 CONV to an EI or SNI and to the network The following cables may be used depending upon where the DS1 CONV and the EI or SNI are located Part No Length Intended use H600 278 G1 13 inches 33 cm From an EI in slot 1 of a switch no...

Page 56: ...twave transceiver attached to the I O plate connector of the EI or SNI An H600 348 cable connects the DS1 CONV cable to a CSU channel service unit which connects to a wall field Alternatively connection is sometimes made directly from the Y cable to the wall field See the pinout for the 50 pin connector at the end of the Fiber Fault Isolation Procedure in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshootin...

Page 57: ...for a TN574 use a 847245768 within a cabinet between carriers for TN1654 Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch TN570 circuit pack TN570 circuit pack TN570 circuit pack TN570 circuit pack TN573 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack TN573 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack TN573 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack TN574 circuit pack 846448637 or 846448645 846448637 or 846448645...

Page 58: ...Hardware Configurations 555 233 143 2 8 Issue 1 May 2002 Circuit Packs Refer to Avaya MultiVantage Solutions Guide for information on circuit packs supported by S8700 Media Server products ...

Page 59: ...tical reliability The following sections describe these different reliability levels and their configurations For more details about how the system is able to interchange between duplicated components see Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures To troubleshoot interchange problems also see Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting Duplex Reliability Configuration In a duplex reliability c...

Page 60: ...ove see next page IPSI PN 1 11 100bT LINK TRMT RCV 12 BBI LINK TRMT RCV IPSI PN 2 11 100bT LINK TRMT RCV 12 BBI LINK TRMT RCV 1 12 13 24 CONSOLE 1 12 13 24 CONSOLE Ethernet 4 Ethernet 4 Ethernet 2 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 0 Ethernet 0 Ethernet 3 PN cydsmar1 KLC 0319402 IPSI 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 9 11 10 10 13 13 13 100bT LINK TRMT RCV 12 BBI LINK TRMT RCV ...

Page 61: ...l signals for the PNs when the primary control network is unavailable Control network B connects to the secondary IPSI board in a PN When the system problem is resolved primary control is returned to control network A 9 Ethernet switch at least one is required to support each control network 10 UPS Keeps the S8700 Media Servers and Ethernet switches functional through brief power outages Usually U...

Page 62: ...h reliability configuration described above but it also has a duplicated bearer network This configuration requires that not only the IPSI connected port networks have duplicated IPSIs but also the non IPSI connected port networks must have duplicated Tone Clock boards Also duplicated in this configuration are the expansion interface TN570 and the switch node interface TN573 ...

Page 63: ...nd transfers control to it Phase 1 of LILO was read into memory by the BIOS When Phase 1 begins executing it reads in the rest of the LILO program including the Linux kernel s location LILO reads in the Linux kernel uncompresses it and transfers control to it 3 Linux Kernel The Linux kernel initializes the Pentium processor s registers initializes its own data structures determines the amount of a...

Page 64: ...cally tells the Hardware Sanity device how long to wait before rebooting the system If the Hardware Sanity driver doesn t receive an update within that interval then the HW Watchdog s timer resets the processor 7 Arbiter The Arbiter decides whether the server goes active or standby Active Server s Initialization These steps are executed on the active server 1 Avaya MultiVantage The Watchdog proces...

Page 65: ...ve server s PCD shadows into the standby s PCD so the standby s PCD does not to write to shadowed memory The standby s PCD handshakes with every administered PN and counts accessible PNs to include in state of health reports to the Arbiter Shutdown The entire system can be gracefully and manually shut down using the stop command with various arguments stop r Graceful reboot shuts down software pow...

Page 66: ... involves sending a SIGTERM signal to the application s leader process The application receiving the SIGTERM signal is responsible to shut itself down cleanly For MultiVantage the Process Manager sends a SIGTERM signal to its own pamshut thread The thread checks whether any critical SAT commands like save translations are active If so the thread waits a few seconds and checks again If not either i...

Page 67: ...etry interval the Watchdog runs the application s total failure script For MultiVantage the recovery script kills every MultiVantage process Its total failure script kills off the MultiVantage processes and causes a Linux reboot Watchdog and Linux The Watchdog also monitors several Linux services daemons Since the Linux init process originally started these processes Watchdog can t use the SIGCHLD...

Page 68: ...more than 100 instances of the same monitored process is running HiMonitor reboots Linux 3 Does nothing and waits for the system to recover on its own If LoMonitor does not respond to a preset threshold currently 5 of 7 of HiMonitor checks then as a final recovery action HiMonitor reboots Linux CAUTION Escalate to an Avaya engineer for explicit guidance with this recovery since it is potentially d...

Page 69: ... server continually reboots This repeated rebooting increases the difficulty of diagnosing the problem The Watchdog handles this with MaxReboots and MaxRebootInterval parameters in the watchd conf file The default values are currently set to 3 reboots within 60 minutes Watchdog logs a message to syslog and does not start any processes if it detects the software is rebooting too quickly When runnin...

Page 70: ...ttempting a demand reset NOTE If a reset fails to recover normal system operation the firmware that controls reset will escalate to the next higher level up to reboot if necessary Hot restarts are not supported for S8700 Multi Connect servers An on demand planned or scheduled interchange results in a warm restart of the standby server if it is in a refreshed state or a reboot if it is not refreshe...

Page 71: ... the standby server and busyouts Stable features are preserved Transient calls not yet connected and some user stimuli are dropped New calls are not processed during the reset G3 MT logins including remote access and system port logins are dropped Every administrative session except those over the TN799 C LAN are dropped If the reset resulted from a spontaneous server interchange memory shadowing ...

Page 72: ...in progress a SAT requested cold 2 restart would be aborted A software requested cold 2 restart would result in an unsuccessful save trans operation and possibly corrupt translations Every G3 MT login including remote access and system port logins is dropped Initialization firmware runs diagnostics and displays results on the G3 MT screen Server memory shadowing is turned off leaving the standby s...

Page 73: ... Duration Typically 11 to 14 minutes Causes reset system 4 command from MultiVantage SAT ASA command line Escalation from SAT s reset level 2 Power up Recovery attempt from server down mode Effects System software boot image is reloaded and every process is re initialized MultiVantage processes are reloaded Before reboot the system attempts to save the alarm and error logs After reboot error and a...

Page 74: ...Initialization and Recovery 555 233 143 3 12 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 75: ...ing a BIU or Rectifier on page 4 9 Troubleshooting a Duplicated Server on page 4 10 Executing a Server Interchange on page 4 15 LA85 Port Tester on page 4 16 Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 ATM Tips on page 4 28 Unusual ATM Trouble Conditions on page 4 58 Multimedia Call Handling MMCH on page 4 61 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI on page 4 69 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI Endpoints Wideband on pag...

Page 76: ...a Site Administration ASA be aware that alarm notification is normally disabled Log off ASA as you leave the system Always busy out a server before you power it down Do not power down either a switch node or port carrier to replace a board Handle fiber optic cables with care Bending piercing or cutting a cable can sever communications between major subsystems To disconnect a fiber optic cable gras...

Page 77: ... heartbeat indication on the display continues to flash Manually Power Up AUDIX System 1 Using a pointed object such as a paper clip or a pen do not use a pencil press the Boot Shutdown button 2 Hold the Boot Shutdown button in until the display indicates the message BTEST steady on 3 Release the Boot Shutdown button The EMBEDDED AUDIX system takes approximately 5 minutes to power up The display h...

Page 78: ...e grab the outside panel of the cabinet with one hand before touching any components and keep your extra hand grounded throughout the procedure Handle a circuit pack only by its faceplate latch or top and bottom edges Do not touch a board s components leads or connector pins Keep circuit packs away from plastic and other synthetic materials such as polyester clothing Do not place a circuit pack on...

Page 79: ...Safety Precautions Issue 1 May 2002 4 5 555 233 143 Figure 4 1 shows the location of the grounding jack Figure 4 1 Wrist Strap Jack for ESD Grounding on Multicarrier Cabinet ESD JACK ...

Page 80: ...reports any unresolved alarms to the alarm receiver Web based administration process The suppression of alarm origination is optional Also while logged in as craft an idle terminal is automatically logged off after 30 minutes At that time any unresolved alarms are reported to Avaya s alarm receiving system If you are logged in as craft at two terminals the logoff occurs when the second terminal is...

Page 81: ...d by thoroughly testing and observing the component in operation When a port board is removed from the backplane no alarm is logged for about 11 minutes to allow for maintenance activity to proceed After that a minor on board alarm is logged If the port board is not administered no alarm is logged WARNING This procedure can be destructive resulting in a total or partial service outage WARNING Proc...

Page 82: ...uire special procedures TBP cross reference TN2312 IP Server Interface IPSI providing Packet Interface circuit equivalent to TN1655 Tone Clock circuit equivalent to TN2182 TN768 TN780 or TN2182B Tone Clock for an EPN without an IPSI TN570 Expansion Interface TN573 Switch Node Interface TN572 Switch Node Clock DS1 CONV ...

Page 83: ... break contact with the backplane connector Use steady even force to avoid disturbing the backplane 4 Carefully slide the BIU or rectifier out of slot To install a BIU or rectifier first attach a grounding strap from the cabinet to your bare wrist and then perform the following steps 1 Insert the back edge of the BIU or rectifier making sure that it is horizontally aligned Slide the unit into the ...

Page 84: ...entry is recorded in the initcauses log The occurrence of a recent interchange is displayed in the Bash shell s server screen There are two possible causes of a spontaneous interchange Major hardware failure Failed recovery that has been software escalated If the interchange was fault driven there are two ways of finding the cause Using alarm and error logs in conjunction with the timestamp descri...

Page 85: ... m The standby server B transitioned into active mode with a WARM restart reset level 1 Examining the Alarm and Error Logs The system may have had time to log alarms or errors against the fault that caused the interchange Proceed through the steps summarized in Figure 4 2 Examine only major alarms with a timestamp near the time of interchange and whose carrier designation is the current standby se...

Page 86: ...pack yes yes Consult CARR POW in Chapter 9 yes yes If handshake is down check status spe replace the alarmed standby circuit pack If handshake is up execute a test long clear of the alarmed component and consult documentation for that MO in Chapter 9 Proceed to the next flowchart Testing the Standby SPE Is there a TAPE error 3585 with aux code 408 Is there a PKT INT error 100 Is there an error 150...

Page 87: ...identified the faulted component consult the section for that maintenance object MO Testing the Standby Server The server system s SPE may not have had time to log errors against the failed component that caused the spontaneous interchange If you have progressed through the preceding flowchart without determining the cause of interchange test the standby for faults by proceeding through the follow...

Page 88: ...ucceed Busyout the standby SPE and enter f HBtest dupint long fH Do all tests pass Do all tests pass Do all tests pass Run the long test sequence on the active SW CTL Enter f HBtest stored data long fH yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Have you completed the steps in the preceding flowchart no no no no no no no Follow normal esclation procedures Enter f HBstatus spe fH Is the standby SPE fully refre...

Page 89: ...The duration of the interchange is approximately one minute Prerequisites Several conditions must be met to guarantee a non disruptive interchange If these are not met the system will not execute the interchange All of the following conditions are expected to be met during normal operation The standby server must be fully in service That is handshake is up shadowing is on memory is refreshed and s...

Page 90: ...4 1 Port fault isolation using the LA85 Port Tester To begin the isolation procedure at the You may need this preliminary information or equipment And if Then Wall field in equipment room Use display errors command Off board errors indicated Verify wiring from switch to equipment room wall field Station terminating end 1 Unplug station cord from terminal and plug it into the BRI or Other jack on t...

Page 91: ... an active circuit for an extended period of time Resistors in the tester can burn out LED indications for the various port types are listed in Table 4 2 on page 4 18 Abbreviations are as follows R Red G Green N Not lighted N A Not applicable Intermediate closet wall field Isolate part of the wiring span either to the switch or to the terminal Table 4 1 Port fault isolation using the LA85 Port Tes...

Page 92: ...he set is still operable Determine whether off hook pulls a dial tone that can be broken by dialing N N N N N A N A DCP N G G G G N A N A DCP 2 wire G N N N N N A N A MFET G G G G G N A N A MFAT N R2 2 Some LA85 port testers may indicate that W O should appear green Information in this chart is correct R R G3 3 Some LA85 port testers may indicate that G W should appear red This chart is correct N ...

Page 93: ...tandby before busying out a standby Fiber link FIBER LK Expansion Interface EXP INTF Switch Node Interface SNI DS1 Converter DS1C The end of this section describes the pertinent loopback tests and shows a pinout of the cable used to connect the DS1C to DS1 facilities CAUTION Busying out any of these components in a standard duplex or high reliability system unduplicated PNC is destructive CAUTION ...

Page 94: ... s 2 Enter display errors for category pnc Check for any of the following errors If one or more of the previous errors are present proceed with step 3 If not look for SNI PEER errors If there is one SNI circuit pack with many different SNI PEER error types replace the indicated SNI circuit pack MO Error Type FIBER LK Any SNI BD 513 EXP INTF 257 769 770 1281 1537 3073 3074 3075 3076 3585 3841 3842 ...

Page 95: ...stered to the fiber link DS1 CONV is y use the display fiber link command to get the physical location of the DS1 CONV circuit packs on the fiber link 4 Execute busyout fiber link FP followed by test fiber link FP long If any tests in the sequence fail proceed with step 5 If every test passes clear alarms by executing test board UUCSS long clear for every alarmed EXP INTF circuit pack Wait 5 minut...

Page 96: ...or 989 SNI fail If yes replace the lightwave transceivers and their fiber optic or metallic cable and return to step 4 The faulted component can be further isolated using the SNI EI Manual Loop Back Procedure on page 4 23 NOTE If a fiber out of frame condition exists and lightwave transceivers are used verify that both lightwave transceivers are the same type 9823a or 9823b If not replace one of t...

Page 97: ...and Test 789 fail or abort If yes execute test ds1 facility UUCSS long command for each administered and equipped DS1 facility If No did Test 797 fail If Yes run the test ds1 facility UUCSS external loopback command for each administered and equipped DS1 facility This test requires manually altering the external connections of the DS1 facility Place the loopbacks at as many points as your CSU capa...

Page 98: ...nes 5 At the front of the cabinet observe the amber LED on the looped back circuit pack If the amber LED flashes once per second the circuit pack or transceiver should be replaced If the amber LED flashes five times per second the circuit pack or its lightwave transceiver may need replacement This condition may also be due to a faulty system clock on the port network for an EI or the switch node c...

Page 99: ...ws only part of what Test 242 does If no lightwave transceiver is connected to the EI circuit pack an on board loopback is performed on the EI circuit pack For more information about Test 242 see EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 762 Figure 4 4 Tests for Isolating Fiber Faults Tone Clock Tone Detector Test 242 fiber optic cable TDM BUS back skin of cabinet lightwave transceivers ...

Page 100: ...verter Circuit Pack Loopback Test 788 on page 8 707 Far End Lightwave Transceiver Loopback Test 789 on page 8 709 For more information about DS1 Facility Loopback tests 797 and 799 see Far End Internal Loop Back Test 797 on page 8 676 Near End External Loop Back Test 799 on page 8 679 Figure 4 5 DS1 CONV Loopbacks Tests 788 780 797 and 799 start here Test 797 loops at internal interface for the DS...

Page 101: ... 03 BL W Facility D Line Out LOD 39 W O 09 W O Facility D Line Out LOD 14 O W 01 O W Plug 03 Facility C Line In LIC 41 W G 11 W G Facility C Line In LIC 16 G W 03 G W Facility C Line Out LOC 42 W BR 09 W BR Facility C Line Out LOC 17 BR W 01 BR W Plug 02 Facility B Line In LIB 44 W S 11 W S Facility B Line In LIB 19 S W 03 S W Facility B Line Out LOB 45 R BL 09 R BL Facility B Line Out LOB 20 BL R...

Page 102: ...he ATM switch Table 4 5 on page 4 29 for a high level status of the system Table 4 4 TN230X LED reference LED color Interpretation Red Green Amber Off Off Off Normal state for EPN s standby ATM EI board Off Off 2 sec on 2 sec off Normal state for EPN s active PNC archangel ATM EI board 100ms on 100ms off Loss of signal on the OC 3 fiber Either the TN230X receive top or TN230X transmit bottom fiber...

Page 103: ...ick Reference Component Label Color State Meaning Switch Processor Board LK Green Intermittent blink Normal state Traffic is being sent or received over the Ethernet LAN link RX Green Steady on Normal state Carrier is received over the Ethernet LAN link DIAG Green Off Normal state NBOOT Green Off Normal state MGT Green Off Normal state RUN Green Steady on Normal state The switch processor is runni...

Page 104: ... connections are present but no talk paths are up perhaps because no calls are in progress RX Green Steady on ATM cells are being received frequently enough that the LED is lit constantly This is a typical pattern for S8700 Multi Connect if CBR constant bit rate talk paths are present CD Green Off Loss of carrier on the fiber The A500 detects only if the A500 receive right hand fiber is not workin...

Page 105: ...ured correctly Is the A500 powered up If you are administering the A500 through a locally attached console is there a local console terminal connected to the console port on the A500 switch processor board with the correctly pinned RS232 serial cable If you are administering the A500 through Telnet over the Ethernet is there an 10BaseT Ethernet drop plugged into the Ethernet port on the A500 switc...

Page 106: ... key to continue A500 System Status A500 System Ace_200 01 Copyright 1996 1997 Avaya Inc Built Tue Dec 2 08 45 26 EST 1997 by jdoe in view cm_ace_200 __________________________________________________ System name System time date Wednesday December 3 1997 15 59 07p System Uptime days 1 hours 1 minutes 1 Ethernet IP address 123 1 123 12 Ethernet IP mask 255 255 255 0 LEC IP address 0 0 0 0 LEC IP m...

Page 107: ... the admin gateway command d If the customer is providing an Ethernet connection to the A500 and intends to upload to or download from a TFTP server does the TFTP server field have the customer provided Internet address as configured using the tftp setserver command e Does the ATM address field have the customer provided or Avaya provided network prefix the first thirteen bytes set by using the mo...

Page 108: ...control cabinet at the S8700 Multi Connect SAT This command tells you in more detail what boards are in which slots in each cabinet and carrier Verify that the TN230Xs are physically located in the slots indicated on the display Figure 4 11 on page 4 35 shows the output for the display circuit packs 1 command Figure 4 12 on page 4 36 shows the output for the display circuit packs 2 command status ...

Page 109: ...inet 1 Carrier B Cabinet Layout five carrier Carrier Type port Slot Code Sfx Name Slot Code Sfx Name 00 11 TN464 C DS1 INTERFACE 01 12 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 02 TN2305 ATM PNC EI 13 TN767 F DS1 INTERFACE 03 14 TN767 C DS1 INTERFACE 04 TN754 C DIGITAL LINE 15 TN760 D TIE TRUNK 05 TN746 B ANALOG LINE 16 TN760 D TIE TRUNK 06 TN753 DID TRUNK 17 07 TN771 D MAINTENANCE TEST 18 08 TN747 B CO TRUNK 19 09 T...

Page 110: ...red in the A500 See A500 Administration on page 4 39 for more information Administered with hard coded PNNI routes If the port networks are addressed using hard coded PNNI routes in the A500 the display looks like Figure 4 13 pnc 1 and Figure 4 14 pnc 2 display circuit packs 2 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 2 Carrier A Cabinet Layout single carrier stack Carrier Type expansion control Slot Code Sfx Name Sl...

Page 111: ...ed using End System Identifiers ESIs the display looks like Figure 4 15 pnc 1 and Figure 4 16 pnc 2 display atm pnc 1 ATM PNC Connection Number 1 Location 01B02 Name Address Format ICD ATM AFI 47 ICD 0005 HO DSP 80FFE1000000F2071B02 ESI 000000000000 SEL 00 display atm pnc 2 ATM PNC Connection Number 2 Location 02A01 Name Address Format ICD ATM AFI 47 ICD 0005 HO DSP 80FFE1000000F2072A01 ESI 000000...

Page 112: ...m pnc 2 with End System Identifiers display atm pnc 1 ATM PNC Connection Number 1 A PNC Location 01B02 Name Address Format E 164 ATM Private AFI 45 E 164 0001013035381053 HO DSP 00000000 ESI 000000000011 SEL 00 display atm pnc 2 ATM PNC Connection Number 2 A PNC Location 02A01 Name Address Format E 164 ATM Private AFI 45 E 164 0001013035381053 HO DSP 00000000 ESI 000000000012 SEL 00 ...

Page 113: ...ered using hard coded PNNI routes to identify each endpoint enter show signaling routes on the A500 console Figure 4 18 on page 4 40 shows the screen output from the command Field Value IntType Network If it is User links will not come up between the EPNs Signaling UNI3 1 If it is UNI3 0 links will not come up between the EPNs ILMI Preferred value of is No however this alone does not prevent links...

Page 114: ...er is missing or incorrect on the A500 port associated with the IPSI connected EPN the EAL and PACL links will come up but 1 way talk paths may result The ATM network can route from the IPSI connected EPN to another EPN which creates the bidirectional EAL and PACL signaling channels and one side of the talk path A500 show signaling routes Number of Local Static Routes Allowed 30 Current number of ...

Page 115: ...present STS_3c MultiMode A1 7 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A1 8 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 1 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 2 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 3 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 4 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 5 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 6 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 7 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 8 down down ...

Page 116: ...ted EPN and its controlling IPSI connected EPN TN230X Did the TN230X come up correctly 1 Review the LED conditions for the TN230X Do the TN230X LEDs see Table 4 4 on page 4 28 indicate a normal operational state any of the following Archangel mode in the EPN Standby in the EPN 2 If after board insertion or a demand reset Do the TN230X LEDs indicate that it is booting Do the TN230X LEDs indicate it...

Page 117: ... u 01B07 MAINTENANCE TEST TN771D 000006 u 02 03 04 01B08 CO TRUNK TN747B 000018 u u u u u u u u 01B09 BRI LINE TN556B 000003 u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u 01B10 DS1 INTERFACE TN767C 000003 u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u list configuration carrier 2a SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p psa 02A01 ATM PNC EI ...

Page 118: ...Field Value Board Type ATM PNC EI Vintage The TN230X vintage If Vintage is no board then either the board is in the incorrect slot or board insertion was not completed correctly Refer to Reseating and Replacing Circuit Packs on page 4 7 test board 1b02 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01B02 ATM EI 316 PASS 01B02 ATM EI 598 PASS 01B02 ATM EI 1258 PASS 01B02 ATM ...

Page 119: ... on the fiber Note that the A500 detects continuity problems only with the Receive right hand fiber the state of the Transmit left hand fiber is not detected 3 Enter show signaling summary on the A500 console Figure 4 25 shows the screen output Figure 4 25 A500 show signaling summary screen Ensure that the fields have the following indicated values SAP State Up If it is PHY_DOWN or DOWN then there...

Page 120: ...3c MultiMode A1 8 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 1 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 2 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 3 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 4 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 5 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 6 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 7 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 8 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A3 1 down down invalid STS_...

Page 121: ...wer So a transmission problem could indicate an unreceived carrier signal at the same end The A500 does not recognize that there is a port board in the slot It may be necessary to re administer the A500 port boards Refer to the Cajun A500 Quick Reference for further information Recommended Action 1 Plug in swap repair or replace the fiber as necessary 2 Verify that the port board is inserted SONET...

Page 122: ... not increasing this may be because the port was administered with no UNI signaling admin link command Use the show signaling summary command to ensure that Signaling is UNI3 1 The error counters may not be zero but should not be large either compared to the receive and transmit cell counters If the counters are large and increasing check the fiber integrity Make sure the fiber pairs are securely ...

Page 123: ...ported only for UNI 3 0 line for the SDP PDUs field means that the port was administered for UNI3 0 signaling admin link command Use the show signaling summary command to verify that Signaling is UNI3 1 The POLL PDUs and STAT PDUs counters should be increasing if the TN230X is actively sending and receiving Q SAAL Protocol Data Units with the A500 This occurs even if the TN230X did not achieve boa...

Page 124: ...NI signaling admin link command Use the show signaling summary command to verify that Signaling is UNI3 1 Connect Messages Setup Messages Release Messages These counters should be non zero if the A500 is handling Q 93B protocol layer messages sent by the PPN and EPN They may not increase during troubleshooting unless calls are being made since the PPN initially sets up control connections to the P...

Page 125: ...ignaling cause 31 4 At the S8700 Multi Connect SAT type display errors and press Enter Set the Error List to errors and Category to PNC on the input screen Figure 4 31 and press Enter to display any cause codes see following Table 4 6 returned from the ATM network to a TN230X on the PPN and to a TN230X on an EPN This is successful only if the links between the PPN and the EPN remain up so that the...

Page 126: ...l a From To EQUIPMENT TYPE Choose only one if any of the following Cabinet Port Network Board Number Port Category PNC Extension Trunk group member display errors Page 9 SPE A HARDWARE ERROR REPORT Port Mtce Alt Err Aux First Last Err Err Rt Al Ac Name Name Type Data Occur Occur Cnt Rt Hr St AT01A ATM NTWK 41 1 11 12 16 59 12 09 15 10 14 0 0 n n AT01A ATM NTWK 31 0 11 13 18 27 11 20 20 02 5 0 0 n ...

Page 127: ...0 console Figure 4 33 shows the screen output Table 4 6 Observed Cause Codes Cause Code Definition Observed Cause 3 No route to destination The ATM addresses administered in the ATM switch show signaling routes or show signaling esi or in S8700 Multi Connect display atm pnc are incorrect 31 Normal unspecified This is a normal return 41 Temporary failure This try again later cause code has been obs...

Page 128: ... other applications for example data network traffic CaPro Layer Are control channels being established from the PPN to an EPN Diagnostics Do you get a dial tone from a set on the EPN in question Can you ring a set on this EPN dialing from the PPN and vice versa A500 show switch circuit table _______________________________________________________ Input Output Connection port vpi vci port vpi vci ...

Page 129: ...ow switch circuit 3 Enter table on the A500 console Figure 4 35 shows the screen output Link Type Channel One PACL to each TN230X in either a PPN or an EPN and one EAL to each TN230X in an EPN State up list sys link SYSTEM LINKS INFORMATION Location Link Type State Current Faulted Last Fault Channel Path Path Recorded 02A0101 EAL up present present 12 06 1997 16 20 01B0202 PACL up present present ...

Page 130: ...dia and video conferencing systems CaPro Layer Are talk paths being established between port networks Diagnostics Can you talk both ways on a set on one port network dialed from another port network and vice versa 1 Enter show switch circuit on the A500 console Figure 4 36 on page 4 57 shows the screen output A500 show switch circuit _______________________________________________________ Input Ou...

Page 131: ...e the VC can be reused for another call between the same two EPNs In early version of the Release 2 A500 firmware these connections incorrectly identified as pmp UBR There may be other CBR virtual circuits between A500 ports that are not associated with S8700 Multi Connect EPNs A common CBR application is circuit emulation where T1 T3 etc circuits are carried over ATM A500 show switch circuit ____...

Page 132: ...n an EPN Swapped Routes End System Identifiers or Fiber between two EPNs Incorrect EPN Route or End System Identifier A500 Symptoms One way talk paths from the PPN to an EPN You can hear tones from the PPN s end station to an EPN s end station but not vice versa Since a signaling channel is a bidirectional VC established from the PPN to an EPN these can be routed correctly and come up just fine Ho...

Page 133: ...onnected EPN but actually connected logically or physically to the PPN that should not exist Action Correct the ATM addresses or swap fibers on the A500 between the incorrectly connected PPN and EPN Swapped Routes End System Identifiers or Fiber between two EPNs Symptoms Every TN230X completes board insertion The PPN cold starts both incorrectly connected EPNs as usual Both EPNs log many WRONG BOA...

Page 134: ...The PPN establishes links to what it thinks is the active TN230X on the EPN As normal it reboots this TN230X When complete it resets the EPN When this happens the active instead of the standby TN230X reboots dropping the links To recover the PPN re establishes links to what it thinks is the active TN230X and the cycle repeats indefinitely Diagnostics The status pnc command on the S8700 Multi Conne...

Page 135: ... S8700 Multi Connect system Troubleshooting Before troubleshooting any problems associated with the S8700 Multi Connect MMCH always be sure that the endpoint is operating correctly audio video and data by making point to point test calls If possible make the test calls over the network to test the connectivity and routing of network calls from the endpoint This eliminates problems such as disconne...

Page 136: ...ccur then 64 kbps calls from the site are blocked Solution Administer the conference for connection at 56 kbps Calls Terminate with No Audio Description To support endpoints that do not support Multipoint Command Conference MCC the S8700 Multi Connect MMCH changes its capability set and initiates a capability set exchange with the endpoint when the Selected Communications Mode SCM changes If the e...

Page 137: ...n check the circuit packs for active amber LEDs If any of these are unexpected such as on a VC board try replacing the board and then bringing the conference up again Calls Terminate with No Video Description Generally loss of video can be divided into two types The first occurs when the S8700 Multi Connect MMCH switches to the endpoint but nobody sees them The receivers see either black video or ...

Page 138: ...oints seem to be the most sensitive to instability The Avaya Vistium disconnects fairly infrequently The CLI Rembrandt II VP freezes video and waits for framing to be recovered Network Configuration Concerns with Synchronization When auditing a network for synchronization avoid unnecessary hops Thus a switch providing star configuration synchronization is preferred over a daisy chain configuration...

Page 139: ... has stopped talking The new broadcaster will see the last speaker as its video The system can also learn about the noise coming from an endpoint to help prevent false switches adapting both to noise level and repetitive sounds such as a fan This adaptation occurs over approximately 10 seconds No Switching Full Motion Video If a room is excessively noisy The S8700 Multi Connect MMCH may receive su...

Page 140: ...rticular Party Description Verify that the endpoint is a valid video source as described in Calls Terminate with No Video on page 4 63 If it is then the audio from the endpoint may not have sufficient voice signal for the hardware to determine that the parties at the endpoint are speaking Check the Talk field on page three of the Status Conference X Endpoint Y form to see if the talking bit is y N...

Page 141: ...nces that have the Rate Adaptation flag set to y When a downgrade does occur information on the Status Conference form indicates the success or failure of the 64 kbps endpoints that are participants to properly rate adapt to 56 kbps As a general indication that the conference has rate adapted the Conference Transfer Rate and Effective Transfer Rate fields show initial and current transfer rates re...

Page 142: ...ure Endpoint or I MUX in Loopback Mode Some endpoints have a loopback enable feature This makes S8700 Multi Connect MMCH data loopback at the MMCH when a connection is in progress The loopback can be enabled prior to or during a connection The MMCH does not detect the loop and continues to VAS In most scenarios the switch occurs but within a few seconds the broadcaster s return video becomes its o...

Page 143: ... diagnosed on Page 2 of the flowchart For problems with PRI endpoints wideband see the following section Figure 4 38 Troubleshooting ISDN PRI Page 1 of 2 ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST UDS1 BD OR DETERMINE PRESENT STATUS OF DS 1 FACILITYVIA UDS1 BD OR DS1 BD MO SECTION ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST ISDN LINK OR ISDN SGR IF MULITPLE ALARMS EXIST INVESTIGATE IN FOLLOWING ORDER ISDN LINK ISD...

Page 144: ...ORD INDICATED FACILITY AND IF THIS CONTINUES TO OCCUR CONTACT FACILITY OR EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT PROVIDER THEN ESCALATE THE TI FACILITY UNSTABLE AWAY FROM IT NO YES SEE UDS1 BD OR DS1 BD MO FOR REPAIR PROCEDURES IF SYNC PROBLEM IS DUE TO SLIPS OTHERWISE FOLLOW REPAIR PERFORM AN IN DEPTH ANALYSIS OF T1 FACILITY INCLUDING TRANSMISSION FACILITY EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT DACS CSUs ETC AND ANY OTHER NOISE PRODUCI...

Page 145: ...e order listed at left by following procedures for the appropriate MO in Chapter 9 NO Check the status of the endpoint equipment or terminal adaptor Do this at the endpoint not at the G3 MT Does the adaptor or endpoint indicate problems NO YES Follow repair procedures recommended by the provider of the terminal adapter or endpoint equipment Check administration at the endpoint and on the switch fo...

Page 146: ... 143 4 72 Issue 1 May 2002 Check for alarms and errors against SYNC Has a synchronization source been unstable or has the system switched synch sources YES Follow procedures described in SYNC in Chapter 9 NO Follow normal escalation procedures ...

Page 147: ...es the steps needed to isolate and resolve an ISDN BRI problem The order of examining maintenance objects MOs can be determined by assessing how wide spread the failure is For example since every ISDN BRI device in the scope of an IPSI connected EPN communicates with the TN2312 IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit its MO should be examined early in the sequence On the other hand a failure ...

Page 148: ...by the flowchart to refer to the maintenance documentation for a specific MO keep in mind that the repair procedure for that MO may refer you to another MO s repair procedure The flowchart tries to coordinate these activities so that a logical flow is maintained if the ISDN BRI problems are not resolved with the first set of repair procedures These following status commands may also be useful when...

Page 149: ...ARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST M T PKT YES IS THE PROBLEM ISOLATED TO ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST EXP INTF THE PPN A TO PAGE 2 IS THE ISDN BRI PROBLEM RESOLVED END ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST PKT INT IS THE ISDN BRI PROBLEM RESOLVED NO YES YES DUPLICATED PNC NO YES NO TO PAGE 2 NO B FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR PKT INT FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR M T PKT YE...

Page 150: ...UIT IS THE PROBLEM AFFECTING MULTIPLE MOs ON THE SAME BRI BD CIRCUIT A NO FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR BRI PORT BRI DAT ABRI PORT BRI SET OR ASAI ADJ AS APPROPRIATE IS THE ISDN BRI PROBLEM RESOLVED FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR BRI BD YES FOLLOW THE REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR PKT BUS PAGE FROM 1 B THESE MOs WOULD BE BRI PORT ABRI PORT BRI DAT BRI SET OR ASAI ADJ PACKS PACKS ESCALATE THE PROBLEM YES...

Page 151: ...cribe to Test Type 108 service and have the correct far end test call number administered on the Trunk Group form for the call to be allowed Synchronous Method One command is used in this method to start stop and query an ISDN PRI test call In the synchronous method an outgoing ISDN PRI test call may be part of one of the following long test sequences entered at the terminal test trunk grp mbr lon...

Page 152: ...ch enables you to specify a specific the trunk on which to originate the ISDN PRI test call An optional qualifier can be used that specifies in minutes 1 to 120 the duration of the test call If no duration is specified the default is either 8 4 or 9 6 seconds Screen 4 1 shows a typical response to the test isdn testcall command Screen 4 1 Test ISDN TestCall Response The displayed fields have the f...

Page 153: ... you to cancel an in progress ISDN PRI test call and allow another test call to start list isdn testcall Enables you to list every ISDN PRI trunk in use for an ISDN PRI test call in the system status isdn testcall Enables you to check the progress of an outgoing test call When an outgoing ISDN PRI test call completes in a specific EPN another ISDN PRI trunk from the same EPN is available for testi...

Page 154: ... service so that a network facility message can be sent across the ISDN PRI network If the outgoing ISDN PRI test call keeps aborting make sure that the far end device can handle DCP Mode 0 or DCP Mode 1 NOTE Before attempting to make an ISDN PRI test call to the public network that is the network is the far end make sure that test call service is provisioned by the network The user must subscribe...

Page 155: ...On Site Maintenance on page 4 82 Discusses the strategy and the requirements for performing remote maintenance and on site maintenance for the packet bus Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation Correction on page 4 83 Discusses the tools that are needed to isolate and correct packet bus faults What is the Packet Bus on page 4 83 Describes the packet bus its use in G3r and the types of faults that can...

Page 156: ...ction procedure will require an on site technician These procedures are presented with this requirement in mind The flowchart refers to the repair procedures in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures for various MOs When a decision point is reached a remotely located technician can refer to the appropriate section and attempt to resolve any fault conditions Some procedures require on site ...

Page 157: ...cket Bus MO PKT BUS for each EPN Unlike the TDM bus the packet bus is not duplicated However it has several spare leads and in a critical reliability system duplicated PNC these spare leads are used to recover from some packet bus faults The packet bus carries various types of information Signaling and data traffic destined for other port networks and or Center Stage Switches CSSs The TN570 EI cir...

Page 158: ... more details see Maintenance Object Repair Procedures for the following MOs TN2312 IP SVR IP Server Interface on page 8 959 PKT INT Packet Interface on page 8 1238 TN570 EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 762 TN556 ISDN BRI BRI BD LGATE BD ISDN BRI Line Circuit Pack on page 8 321 BRI PORT ISDN BRI Port ABRI PORT ASAI ISDN BRI Port on page 8 330 BRI SET ASAI ADJ BRI DAT on page 8 ...

Page 159: ...198 or TN2208 ISDN BRI BRI BD BRI PORT ABRI PORT BRI SET BRI DAT ASAI ADJ carries signaling information for ISDN BRI station sets and data modules as well as signaling information and ASAI messages between the server and an ASAI adjunct An ISDN BRI circuit pack has the same fault detection capabilities as a TN570 EI circuit pack TN464F Universal DS1 circuit pack UDS1 BD ISDN LNK supports ISDN PRI ...

Page 160: ...acement of the circuit pack may be required before service can be restored TN570 Expansion Interface EI A failure of an EI circuit pack typically causes all packet traffic in the connected EPN or CSS to fail If the failure is on its packet bus interface the packet bus may be alarmed as well If an active EI failure causes a packet bus disruption in a critical reliability system duplicated PNC a PNC...

Page 161: ...uit all packet traffic within the IPSI connected EPN and its scope are disrupted EI circuit pack may disrupt all packet traffic in its EPN ISDN BRI circuit pack every device connected to the circuit pack fails to function This failure may also disrupt the entire packet bus whenever the circuit pack tries to transmit data Such a disruption may be indicated by Intermittent packet bus alarms Intermit...

Page 162: ...SDN BRI ASAI and ISDN PRI signaling traffic is disrupted The significance of this distinction depends on the customer s applications A customer whose primary application requires ASAI would consider the switch to be out of service while a customer with a Large number of digital analog hybrid sets Small number of ISDN BRI sets would probably not consider the packet bus fault a catastrophic problem ...

Page 163: ...TA PT ISDN LNK All in line errors for the following MOs are neither logged nor acted upon BRI SET BRI DAT ASAI ADJ Circuit pack and port in line errors that are not related to the packet bus or that indicate a circuit pack failure are acted upon in the normal fashion Periodic and scheduled background maintenance is not affected Foreground maintenance for example commands executed from the terminal...

Page 164: ...have open leads replace bus terminators and cables If this does not resolve the problem reconfigure the carrier connectivity of the EPN to attempt to isolate a faulty carrier Maintenance Test Circuit Pack TN771D The TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack provides the following functions Analog Trunk ATMS testing Digital Port Loopback testing ISDN PRI Trunk testing Packet Bus testing Packet Bus recon...

Page 165: ...l switch operation the Maintenance Test circuit pack provides visual feedback of the packet bus state When in stand alone mode see next section these visual indications are still present but the packet bus is never reconfigured The amber LED either blinks or is off Flashing Flashing of the amber LED once per second indicates that there are too many faults for the Maintenance Test packet bus port t...

Page 166: ...on the terminal s options setup menu This menu is accessed on most terminals by pressing the CTRL and F1 keys together On the 513 BCT press SHIFT F5 followed by TERMINAL SET UP Remember to restore the original settings before returning the G3 MT to service 355A EIA 232 adapter Comcode 105 012 637 258B 6 port male Amphenol adapter Comcode 103 923 025 A 258A adapter and an extension cable can also b...

Page 167: ...258A 6 port male Amphenol adapter to the Amphenol connector behind the carrier corresponding to the TN771D s slot Connect one end of a D8W 8 wire modular cable to port 1 of the 258A Connect the other end of the cable to a 355A EIA 232 adapter Plug the EIA 232 adapter into the terminal to be used and turn the terminal on 3 Reseat the TN771D circuit pack NOTE On a critical reliability system this ca...

Page 168: ... the message TN771 circuit pack failed is displayed and no further input is accepted on the terminal The circuit pack must be replaced To exit stand alone mode 1 Remove the 258A adapter from the Amphenol connector 2 If the TN771D was installed for this procedure remove it Otherwise reseat the TN771D 3 If change system parameters maintenance was used to disable alarm origination re enable it now Us...

Page 169: ...leads on the backplane The bottom line indicates the following NOTE This information is available only from the stand alone mode It is not available from the MT or a remote login O Open lead S Shorted lead blank No fault L L L L L L L L L L H H H H H H H H H H S S S L P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S F B F _______________________________________________ S S O Command ...

Page 170: ...cket bus leads for a given slot as seen from the front and back of the carrier Figure 4 43 Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane Front View Front View Backplane Separation GND GND L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 SS CLK 5v 5v 5v 5v 5v L5 LP L2 L4 L1 5v L7 GND LF GND GND GND L3 GND L6 GND HP H1 GND H3 GND H5 L0 GND GND ...

Page 171: ... Issue 1 May 2002 4 97 555 233 143 Figure 4 44 Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane Back View 5v LP L2 L4 L7 L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 GND SS CLK GND GND 5v 5v 5v 5v 5v L5 L1 GND L3 GND L6 GND HP H1 GND H3 GND H5 GND LF GND GND GND Back View L0 ...

Page 172: ...resolved If not correct them by using the procedures in the sections that follow 2 If the Maintenance Test circuit pack was not replaced enter test pkt P Record the results PASS FAIL ABORT and error codes for Test 572 3 Enter status port network P Record the information listed for PKT BUS 4 Busyout the Maintenance Test circuit pack with busyout board UUCSS 5 Replace the Maintenance Test circuit pa...

Page 173: ...hat the repair procedure for that MO may in turn refer to another MO s procedure The flowchart tries to coordinate these procedures so that if a packet bus problem is not resolved by the first set of repair procedures a logical flow is maintained However some packet bus faults can lead to a somewhat haphazard referencing of the various MO procedures resulting in either repetitive or unnecessary st...

Page 174: ...K C Is only a single PN affected D Are there alarms or errors against PKT INTF F Are there alarms or errors against EXP INTF B Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolved Is packet bus use enabled Refer to maintenance related system parameters form in chapter 5 Follow the repair procedure for TDM CLK Follow the repair procedure for...

Page 175: ... this port network J Does the TN771 indicate packet bus faults K Is the problem isolated to a single board H Are there alarms or errors against M T PKT Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolved M Follow the packet bus fault isolation and correction procedures L Follow the board port and or endpoint repair procedures Follow the re...

Page 176: ...ted adjunct and ISDN PRI D channel link in service Does the Maintenance Test packet bus port in normal or stand alone mode still indicate a packet bus fault c If only one EPN is affected its Packet Interface circuit is probably not causing the problem Nonetheless if every ISDN BRI and Universal DS1 circuit pack resides in the same EPN Assume that the answer to this question is No Check the IPSI s ...

Page 177: ...ults Status Port Network Command Status port network P displays include the service state alarm status and if the Maintenance Test packet bus port is present the number of faulty and open leads for the specified port network s packet bus This information can be used to determine the urgency of the repair In general a service state of out indicates extreme urgency while a service state of reconfig ...

Page 178: ...plicated server unduplicated PNC TN2312 IPSI circuit packs are unduplicated in a duplex configuration and duplicated in a high reliability configuration A TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack is optional in an EPN Maintenance Test packet bus reconfiguration is not enabled Whereas in a critical reliability system duplicated server and PNC TN2312 IPSI circuit packs are duplicated TN771D Maintenance ...

Page 179: ...re are both shorts and opens start with Procedure 4 Isolating Failures and return to Procedure 1 if shorts persist after the open leads are fixed CAUTION Packet bus fault isolation procedures involve removing circuit packs and possibly disconnecting entire carriers These procedures are destructive Whenever possible implement these procedures during hours of minimum system use To replace the follow...

Page 180: ...dure 2 Removing and Reinserting Port Circuit Packs Procedure 2 Removing and Reinserting Port Circuit Packs Procedure 2 removes and reinserts port circuit packs purple slots and the EI circuit pack one or several at a time Use Procedure 2 for each port circuit pack in the EPN until every port circuit pack has been tried or the problem is resolved NOTE An EI circuit pack should be the last one check...

Page 181: ...problems with the backplane pins It is sufficient to determine whether the problem is resolved by removing circuit packs If you decide to remove multiple circuit packs consider working with an entire carrier at a time to more quickly and reliably determine which circuit packs are not the source of trouble Any circuit packs packet or non packet that have been recently inserted should be checked fir...

Page 182: ...backplane wiring TN2312 IP Server Interface IPSI TN768 TN780 or TN2182 Tone Clock EPN s TN775 Maintenance These are the only EPN control circuit packs that are likely to cause a packet bus problem in a stable system Perform this procedure on only these circuit packs If the TN771D stand alone mode does not indicate packet bus faults Perform Procedure 3 for only the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack D...

Page 183: ...aults It attempts to isolate the failure to a particular set of carriers and checks only the circuit packs in those carriers In Procedure 4 the TDM LAN cable assemblies and TDM LAN terminating resistors are replaced If this action does not resolve the packet bus fault the carriers are reconfigured by moving the terminating resistors on the carrier backplanes in such a manner that certain carriers ...

Page 184: ...ork 2 Replace every TDM LAN cable assembly and both of its TDM LAN terminators 3 Restore power to the port network 4 Determine whether the packet bus fault is still present 5 If the packet bus fault is resolved the procedure is completed Otherwise go to Part 2 Part 2 1 Place the Maintenance Test circuit pack into the carrier where the active EI circuit pack resides to isolate the failure to the sm...

Page 185: ... packet bus fault is not present extend the packet bus to another carrier and repeat the procedure in the previous step When a carrier that causes the fault to recur is added and if there are shorts perform Procedure 2 Removing and Reinserting Port Circuit Packs and or Procedure 3 Removing and Reinserting EPN s Control Circuit Packs for only the circuit packs in that carrier 5 If the packet bus fa...

Page 186: ...Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting 555 233 143 4 112 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 187: ...this book It includes the following topics DS1 CPE Loopback Jack T1 Only on page 5 2 Facility Test Calls on page 5 15 Preventive Maintenance on page 5 24 Analog Tie Trunk Back to Back Testing on page 5 26 Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing on page 5 31 Removing and Restoring Power on page 5 32 Automatic Transmission Measurement System on page 5 34 ...

Page 188: ...on of the loopback jack is at the interface to the smart jack This provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote tests are run using the loopback jack If the smart jack is not accessible install the loopback jack at the extended demarcation point 1 If there is no extended demarcation point install the loopback jack directly at the network interface point as shown in Figure 5 1 on page 5 8 2 ...

Page 189: ...orm change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y NOTE Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility This allows a technician to determine that the facility is available for remote testing 4 Enter save translation to save the new information DS1 Span Test This test should only be performed after the DS1 circuit pack and the 120A2 or later ICS...

Page 190: ...lement the changes or press Cancel to change nothing 4 Enter test ds1 loop location cpe loopback jack This turns on simplex power to the loopback jack and waits about 20 seconds for any active DS1 facility alarms to clear A PASS or FAIL displays on the terminal This is the first of the two results A FAIL indicates a fault is present in the wiring between the ICSU and the loopback jack The loopback...

Page 191: ...nchronized Y or N If y displays the DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to the looped 3 in 24 pattern and is accumulating a count of the bit errors detected in the pattern until the test has ended If n displays retry the test five times by ending the test per step 11 and re starting the test per step 4 If the circuit pack never synchronizes substantial bit errors in the 3 in 24 pattern are likely Th...

Page 192: ...he smart jack If the service provider successfully looped and tested the span up to the smart jack this condition isolates the problem to the wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack Refer to Loopback Jack Fault Isolation Procedures for information about how to proceed in this case The test cannot be successfully terminated until a good signal is received To properly terminate the test ...

Page 193: ...cks can do this a The local ICSUs line loopback which is typically activated tested and then deactivated by the DS1 service provider at the CO end b The local DS1 interface s payload loopback activated and tested by the DS1 service provider at the CO end c The far end ICSU s line loopback This test is activated at the management terminal by entering test ds1 loop location far csu loopback test beg...

Page 194: ...erface at Smart Jack Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Loopback Jack 7 Network Interface Smart Jack 8 Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 9 Central Office ...

Page 195: ...art Jack Inaccessible Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Loopback Jack 7 Dumb Block Extended Demarcation 8 Network Interface Smart Jack 9 Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 10 Central Office ...

Page 196: ...sible Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Dumb Block Extended Demarcation 7 Loopback Jack 8 Network Interface Smart Jack 9 Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 10 Central Office 11 Dumb Block to Smart Jack RJ 48 ...

Page 197: ...wo sections See Figure 5 4 and Figure 5 5 on page 5 12 1 ICSU to the loopback jack 2 Loopback jack to the CO Figure 5 4 Network Interface at Dumb Block Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 4 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 5 Loopback Jack 6 Dumb Block Demarcation Point 7 Interface Termination or Fiber MUX 8 Central Of...

Page 198: ...k demarcation point part of the loopback jack This is the only portion of section 2 that is part of customer premises wiring but is not covered in the loopback jack s loopback path Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 4 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 5 Loopback Jack 6 Dumb Block Demarcation Point 7 Repeater 8 Fiber M...

Page 199: ...egin The test is terminated by entering test ds1 loop location end loopback span test Bit error counts are examined as described in the DS1 Span Test section This test only isolates problems to section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the far end CO and the far end ICSU Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider If any of the above tests a b or c fail a problem is in...

Page 200: ...lems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX 2 Be aware that there are installations that use repeated metallic lines between the MUX and the dumb block These lines require DC power for the repeaters and this DC power is present at the dumb block interface to the CPE equipment A loopback jack is required in this configuration to properly isolate and terminate the DC power To check for ...

Page 201: ...ses specific tie or CO trunks including DS1 trunks If the trunk is busied out by maintenance it will be temporarily released for the test call and returned to busyout afterwards Before making the test call use list configuration to determine the location of the trunk ports that you want to test DID trunks cannot be accessed NOTE Do not use this trunk test call procedure to test ISDN PRI trunks To ...

Page 202: ... second page of the System Parameters Maintenance form No special hardware is required When the test call extension is received by the PBX a non inverting 64 kbps connection is set up on the PBX s time division multiplexed bus More than one loop around call can be active at the same time For calls routed over the public network using the ACCUNET Switched Digital Service SDS or Software Defined Dat...

Page 203: ...number 00 20 pp Port circuit number DTMR ports are numbered 01 02 05 and 06 3 Listen for one of the following tones 4 Dial the sequence 1234567890 If the sequence is entered and received correctly dial tone is returned and another test call can be made If the test fails intercept tone is returned A failure may indicate a faulty DTMR port or circuit pack a faulty voice terminal or an error in the e...

Page 204: ...s A are reserved to carry the system s dedicated tones Time slots 000 004 and 256 260 bus B carry control information and are not addressable Time slots 254 and 510 are not addressable due to a hardware constraint At any given time only one of the TDM busses A or B carries the dedicated tones with B being the default Entering status port network will display which TDM bus is currently carrying the...

Page 205: ... Bus A time slot TDM Bus B time slot Tone Heard 000 256 Reorder 001 257 Reorder 002 258 Reorder 003 259 Reorder 004 260 Reorder 005 261 Touch Tone 1 697 Hz 006 262 Touch Tone 2 770 Hz 007 263 Touch Tone 3 852 Hz 008 264 Touch Tone 4 941 Hz 009 265 Touch Tone 5 1209 Hz 010 266 Touch Tone 6 1336 Hz 011 267 Touch Tone 7 1447 Hz 012 268 Touch Tone 8 1633 Hz 013 269 Dial Tone 014 270 Reorder Tone 015 2...

Page 206: ... and the two digit tone identification number from the following table 3 Listen for one of the following tones NOTE For a definition of call progress tones see Overview for Avaya MultiVantage Software Reorder tone There are no out of service time slots on the specified port network Confirmation tone Connection is made to an out of service time slot Intercept tone The number entered is not a valid ...

Page 207: ...one 3 15 Touch tone 4 16 Touch tone 5 17 Touch tone 6 18 Touch tone 7 19 Touch tone 8 20 Chime 21 350 Hz 22 440 Hz 23 480 Hz 24 620 Hz 25 2025 Hz 26 2225 Hz 27 Counter 28 External call waiting 29 Priority call waiting 30 Busy verification 31 Executive override intrusion tone 32 Incoming call identification 33 Dial zero 34 Attendant transfer 35 Test calls Table 5 3 System Tone Identification Number...

Page 208: ...ignaling tone 50 Digital milliwatt 51 440 Hz 480 Hz 52 Music 53 Transmission test sequence 100 54 Transmission test sequence 102 55 Laboratory test tone 1 56 Laboratory test tone 2 57 Disable echo supervision dial tone 58 7 seconds of answer tone 59 4 seconds of answer tone 60 Restore music or silence 61 Warning tone 62 Forced music tone 63 Zip tone first of 2 sent 64 Incoming call ID first of 2 s...

Page 209: ...t Calls Issue 1 May 2002 5 23 555 233 143 66 CO dial tone 67 Repetitive confirmation tone 68 Conference bridging tone Table 5 3 System Tone Identification Numbers Continued Number Description Continued on next page ...

Page 210: ...ash it with warm water and a mild detergent A vacuum cleaner can be used if one is available If there is no facility for washing or vacuuming the air filter then replace the filter For information about air filters and fans see CABINET Cabinet Sensors on page 8 383 Media Gateway Batteries The backup batteries in the power distribution unit in the bottom of the cabinet should be replaced every four...

Page 211: ...NANCE LOG Air Filters1 1 Inspect annually clean or replace Scheduled Date Date Completed Completed By Scheduled Date Date Completed Completed By Single carrier cabinet Multicarrier cabinet Battery Packs2 2 Replace every four years Scheduled Date Date Completed Completed By Scheduled Date Date Completed Completed By Single carrier cabinet Multicarrier cabinet ...

Page 212: ...ting and Replacing Circuit Packs on page 4 7 4 Insert the circuit pack back into the slot 5 Enter display trunk xxx p for each trunk group identified in step 3 This command displays the specified trunk group on the administration terminal screen and prints a hard copy on the printer Save this data for later use 6 Remove every member defined by these ports from the trunk group s using the change tr...

Page 213: ...other voice terminal using the tie trunk ports assigned Dial TAC and extension For example if TAC of tie trunk group is 110 and station number is 5012 then dial 110 5012 If the call cannot be made either one of these ports could be defective There are four ports on the TN760 Try different combinations to determine defective ports 15 If there is a defective port on the circuit pack try to switch to...

Page 214: ...8 R2 R2 9 T12 10 R12 11 E2 12 M2 13 T3 T3 14 R3 R3 15 T13 16 R13 17 E3 18 M3 19 T4 T4 20 R4 R4 21 T14 22 R14 23 E4 24 M4 25 T5 26 R5 27 28 29 30 31 T6 32 R6 32 Table 5 4 Carrier Lead Appearances MDF Continued 110 Connecting Block Terminals CO Trunk TN747 Tie Trunk TN760 Continued on next page ...

Page 215: ...ting Issue 1 May 2002 5 29 555 233 143 33 34 36 37 T7 38 R7 39 40 41 42 43 T8 44 R8 45 46 47 48 49 50 Table 5 4 Carrier Lead Appearances MDF Continued 110 Connecting Block Terminals CO Trunk TN747 Tie Trunk TN760 Continued on next page ...

Page 216: ...he analog tie trunk ports and mark the disconnected wires for later when the tie trunk ports are placed back into normal operation The D impact tool AT 8762 is required to perform this step 6 Use jumper wires DT 24M Y BL R G and the D impact tool to connect wiring between the two ports assigned in step 4 at the cross connect field For example if the two ports on the analog Tie Trunk circuit pack a...

Page 217: ...em Parameters form Test Type 100 ___ Test Type 102 ___ Test Type 105 ___ Test Type 100 provides 5 5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB Quiet until disconnect disconnect is forced after 1 minute Test Type 102 provides 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB 1 second of quiet This cycle is repeated until disconnect disconnect is forced after 24 hours Test Type 105 provides 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 16dB 1 s...

Page 218: ...lowing In an AC powered multicarrier cabinet set the circuit breaker to OFF at the power distribution unit In a DC powered multicarrier cabinet turn off the DC power supply In an AC or DC powered single carrier cabinet stack turn off the power for each affected carrier individually The ON OFF switch is located behind the AC carrier s WP 91153 power unit DC carrier s 676B power unit 3 Power is rest...

Page 219: ... not wait for processes that are running to terminate normally before it shuts the server down When you shut the server down immediately data may be lost 3 If you want the server to reboot after shutdown click the check box next to After shutdown restart system 4 Click Shutdown If you selected a delayed shutdown you will see the shutdownproc accepted message indicating that the global shutdown is ...

Page 220: ...erent ways when a trunk fails to perform within the administered thresholds Alarms and errors may be logged and the trunk can be automatically busied out When a trunk fails an unacceptable threshold twice the system will busy it out if the trunk group is so administered and doing so will not exceed an administered limit 25 50 75 or 100 of the members in the group This limit is not applied to later...

Page 221: ...Group form before the command can execute Table 5 5 ATMS Administration Form Field Entry Remarks System parameters customer options ATMS y If this field is not enabled must be enabled via license file Station Extension At least one TN711 analog port must be assigned Port Number UUCSS01 where UUCSS is the location of any TN771 Port Type COR 105TL The number of a COR that has testing enabled see nex...

Page 222: ...number without a member number every member of the group is tested full This executes the most comprehensive test call available using the administered test set type Full is the default supervision This test takes about 10 seconds and simply confirms the presence of testing capability at the far end no selftest This executes the full test but skips self test sequences This saves about 20 seconds o...

Page 223: ...ear End x x x x x Loss at 1004 Hz Near End to Far End x x Loss at 404 Hz Far End to Near End x x x Loss at 404 Hz Near End to Far End x x Loss at 2804 Hz Far End to Near End x x x Loss at 2804 Hz Near End to Far End x x C Message Noise Near End x x x x C Message Noise Far End x x C Notched Noise Near End x x C Notched Noise Far End x x Return Loss1 Near End 1 Return Loss includes Echo Return Loss ...

Page 224: ...queued and run when the maintenance activity finishes Measurement data gathered by analog testcalls can be retrieved with the list testcalls command as described in ATMS Reports List Testcall Command on page 5 39 The measurements that are made and recorded depend on the type of test that is specified and the capabilities of the far end TTL Screen 5 1 shows a typical result for test analog testcall...

Page 225: ... administered to log errors and alarms and to busy out the failed trunk in response to such results Port The physical location of the port supporting the trunk being tested The format is UUCSSpp where UU is the cabinet number C is the carrier letter SS is the circuit pack slot and pp is the port circuit number Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object tested TIE TRK or CO TRK Alt Name Th...

Page 226: ...e indicates that no test data is available for that trunk or group The number of pages of each report is dependent upon the selection criteria and the number of outgoing trunks in the system About 10 measurements can be listed on a page on the administration terminal or about 50 measurements can be listed on a printer By default reports list every measurement Filtering can be used to limit the out...

Page 227: ... grp this is the ending trunk group in a range mem Used with grp this qualifier specifies a report showing measurements for a specific trunk group member When used with to mem this is starting trunk group member in a range to mem Used with grp this qualifier specifies display of measurements for every trunk group member from one up to the specified trunk group member entered When used with mem thi...

Page 228: ...s that were in use at the time of testing Abort codes for trunk in use are 1000 and 1004 Trks Not Test The number of trunks that were not tested due to error conditions other than trunk in use Abort codes are given in the detailed report Busied Out Trunks The number of trunks that were busied out in response to test failures These may be caused by hardware problems incorrect threshold values and s...

Page 229: ...from its defined threshold ATMS TRUNK MEASUREMENTS Group 78 Type co Vendor AT T TTL Type 105 w rl THRESHOLD VALUES Loss dev at 1004Hz loss 404Hz 2804Hz C msg C ntch SRL SRL Min Max Noise Noise LO HI ERL Marginal 2 21 9 9 9 9 55 74 0 0 0 Unacceptable 2 21 9 9 9 9 55 74 0 0 0 Trk Test Test Test 16dBm OdBm Mem Date Time Rslt FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE 1 10 04 14 25 pass 7 7...

Page 230: ... Trunk measurements exceeded the marginal threshold but not the unacceptable fail Trunk measurements exceeded the unacceptable threshold xxxx A numerical error code indicates the reason for an aborted test call The codes are explained in the CO TRK and TIE TRK sections of ABRI PORT ASAI ISDN BRI Port on page 8 3 blank A blank line indicates that no measurements have been made on this trunk since t...

Page 231: ...e group are failing this could indicate the failure of some common equipment such as a carrier system test line or cable or erroneous information in the threshold tables When a test call can be successfully made but not completed either the OTL or TTL is probably defective For this failure type further ATMS testing might be seriously impaired but the system is not otherwise affected If a test call...

Page 232: ...Additional Maintenance Procedures 555 233 143 5 46 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 233: ...otification Attendant Console LEDs Circuit Pack LEDs Expansion Interface Circuit Pack LEDs Maintenance Circuit Pack LEDs Switch Node Interface LEDs DS1 CONV TN574 TN1654 Circuit Pack LEDs Tone Clock Circuit Pack LEDs Server LEDs IPSI LEDs Duplication Memory Card LEDs For information on interpreting LEDs and testing procedures during installation refer to Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for...

Page 234: ...cial portion of the system inoperable This condition requires action but its consequences are not immediate Problems might be impairing service to a few trunks or stations or interfering with one feature across the entire system Warning alarms Failures that cause no significant degradation of service or failures in equipment external to the system Alarms are communicated to the system users and te...

Page 235: ...rm active pr awu alm Auto Wakeup Journal Printer alarm The automatic wakeup journal printer has a major minor or warning alarm active off bd alarm DS1 or ATM Facility alarm An off board major minor or warning alarm is active on a DS1 BD UDS1 BD or ATM TRK board trk ac alm Facility Access alarm The facility access trunk test feature is activated major alrm Major alarm The system has logged a major ...

Page 236: ... and ACK The ALM LED lights steadily when there is a major or minor alarm at the switch cabinet The ACK LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported If the system is unable to report the alarm the LED flashes this signals the attendant to call the Avaya alarm receiving system and report the alarm ...

Page 237: ...led system several alarm indicators may remain lit until the circuit packs are administered These alarms should be ignored until administration is completed Boards with a P suffix have downloadable firmware If such a board has both its green and yellow LEDs lit simultaneously a download may be in progress and the board will not appear to be recognized Use either the SAT command status firmware dow...

Page 238: ...when a circuit pack is properly administered and present in its slot but there is an error type 1 logged against it To determine whether this is so proceed as follows 1 Issue the list configuration board UUCSS command If the system does not detect the circuit pack this command will return identifier not assigned or no board If the documentation for the associated maintenance object gives no specia...

Page 239: ...e LEDs labeled ALARMS reflects maintenance conditions throughout the system and indicates alarms reported against other components as shown in Table 6 2 Table 6 1 Expansion Interface Yellow Led Flashing Codes LED on LED off Condition 0 1 sec 0 1 sec Fiber Out of Frame This state indicates a failure of test 989 This may be caused by absence of the opposite end EI or Switch Node Interface SNI a brok...

Page 240: ...ponent in another cabinet solid MINOR Minor alarm against a component in another cabinet flashing MINOR Minor alarm against a component in the same cabinet Yellow flashing WARNING Warning alarm against a component in the same cabinet solid WARNING Warning alarm against a component in another cabinet Green on ACK Acknowledged alarm has been reported Red on EMERGENCY TRANSFER Emergency transfer has ...

Page 241: ...ck LEDs Issue 1 May 2002 6 9 555 233 143 These LEDS are illustrated Figure 6 1 Figure Notes 1 Alarm LED Red 2 Test LED Green 3 Busy LED Yellow 4 Latch Pin 5 Locking Lever Figure 6 1 Circuit Pack LEDs on Faceplate ...

Page 242: ... green LEDs on the bottom indicate the status of the DS1 facilities see following section The yellow LED is used to indicate the state of the fiber interface the fiber channel and the DS1 channel in the following manner and order of priority Table 6 3 DS1C Yellow Led Flashing States LED on LED off Condition 0 1 sec 0 1 sec Fiber Out of Frame or Fiber Loss of Signal 0 5 sec 0 5 sec In Frame fiber c...

Page 243: ...onds to each LED If a green LED is off there is a Loss of Signal condition on the DS1 facility associated with that LED The presence of a signal does not guarantee that the signal is using the correct framing format or line coding an Alarm Indication Signal indicating that the opposite end of the DS1C complex is out of service may be present Figure Notes 1 Alarm LED Red 2 Test LED Green 3 Busy LED...

Page 244: ...s closer to being fully operational 1 If the fiber is Out of Frame or if a Fiber Loss of Signal condition exists the yellow LED will flicker at a 5 Hz rate on for 100 mS off for 100 mS 2 If the fiber channel is down DS1 Converter circuit pack fiber endpoint communications the yellow LED will flash at a 1 Hz rate on for 500 ms off for 500 ms 3 If the DS1 control channel is down between the two DS1C...

Page 245: ...running alarm free If the facility is detecting either a red alarm loss of signal or loss of frame a yellow alarm remote frame alarm or a blue alarm AIS signal then the LED is lit red The SPAN SELECT switch on the TN1654 faceplate is for future use Pushing the switch will have no effect on the board See Figure 6 3 on page 6 13 for a view of the faceplate on the TN1654 DS1CONV circuit pack Figure 6...

Page 246: ...ional meaning The yellow and green LEDs flash in specific patterns to indicate the status of the circuit pack The standby status applies only to systems with a duplication option Table 6 4 Switch Node Interface Yellow Led Flashing States LED on LED off Condition 0 1 sec 0 1 sec Fiber Out of Frame This state indicates a failure of test 238 which may be caused by absence of the opposite end EI or Sw...

Page 247: ...States LED State1 1 It takes 5 to 10 seconds for the yellow LED to respond to a change in the state of the packet bus TN771D Mode Condition Solid off Normal The Maintenance Test circuit pack detects no packet bus faults Solid on2 2 Because the yellow LED on the Maintenance Test circuit pack can also be on steady when the digital and analog test ports on the circuit pack are in use exact interpreta...

Page 248: ...n standby mode Figure Notes 1 Power 2 Configuration fault 3 Disk activity 4 Network activity not used 5 Service configuration health not used 6 Active or standby mode indicator 7 U2 not used 8 4 NIC ports the numbers indicate their assigned Ethernet ports 9 LEDs for the NIC ports 10 LEDs for fiber optic duplication connectivity 11 Status LED not used Figure 6 4 Media Server LEDs Front and Back 1 S...

Page 249: ...ck Test LEDs 3 Observe the Active Standby LED on your server and the transmit LED on your duplication card to ensure they are blinking Interpreting the test results An abnormal condition is indicated if an LED shows any of the following flashing patterns LED flashes red This indicates that the green element is either burned out or not controlled LED flashes green This indicates that the red elemen...

Page 250: ...ule is the Cajun P33x stack master Figure 6 5 Cajun Ethernet Switch LEDs The following three LEDs are the ones you re most concerned with SYS shows whether this module is the Cajun P330 stack master OPR shows CPU boot status PWR shows when power is on 1 13 2 14 LAG 3 15 4 16 9 21 10 22 LAG 11 23 12 24 CONSOLE 5 17 6 18 LAG 7 19 8 20 51 EXPANSION SLOT 59 FIV 55 63 LNK OPR SYS PWR COL Tx Rx FC Hspd ...

Page 251: ...te that they are powered on or off LEDs on imply the device is powered on LED off implies the device is powered down The Powerware front panel has the LEDs shown in the figure Figure Notes 1 Normal mode indicator 2 Battery mode indicator 3 Bypass mode indicator 4 Test Alarm reset button 5 Off button 6 On button 7 Bar graph indicators 8 Alarm indicators Figure 6 6 UPS LEDs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ledlups K...

Page 252: ... on the second row are the Battery mode indicators and the LED on the third row is the Bypass mode indicator When the Normal mode LED is steady green it has power If the LED is flashing the UPS is in standby mode For information on the other LEDs refer to the UPS user s guide that came with the Powerware UPS unit ...

Page 253: ...the TN 2182 Tone Clock yellow LED The archangel flashes the yellow LED when active 2 seconds on and 200 msec off Figure Notes Figure 6 7 IPSI Board Display showing connectivity status Connectivity Status 1 2 3 4 5 IPSI is connected to Cajun switch no yes yes yes yes IPSI has an IP address no no yes yes no Laptop computer is connected to IPSI services port no no no yes yes ledlipsi KLC 030502 1 2 4...

Page 254: ...ation 555 233 143 6 22 Issue 1 May 2002 Figure Notes 1 IPSI using DHCP 2 IPSI has connectivity and an IP address Figure 6 8 S8700 IP Connect IPSI Board Display ledlip1 KLC 030502 1 2 CLK S E R V I C E N E T W O R K ...

Page 255: ...ay 2002 6 23 555 233 143 Figure Notes 1 Switch identifier 2 Cabinet 1 64 3 IPSI has connectivity and an IP address Figure 6 9 S8700 Multi Connect IPSI Board Display ledsa01 KLC 030502 1 2 3 CLK S E R V I C E N E T W O R K ...

Page 256: ...abnormal condition is indicated The following table describes the condition and suggests actions to take to resolve it LED Color Behavior Indication Resolution Red Flashes 1 second off 3 seconds in a repeating pattern The green element is burned out Replace the server Green Flashes on 1 second off 3 seconds in a repeating pattern The red element is burned out Replace the server LED remains off con...

Page 257: ...nd Release Commands Common Abort and Fail Codes Alarm and Error Categories Many commands can be run from the newly designed web application interface For more information on using the web interface refer to Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software S8700 Media Server SAT Screens For this release some information is specific to the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuratio...

Page 258: ...ntrol Network CN traffic to either IPSI in high or critical configurations or to CN a or b Events that could bring this about are a need to service switch hub or subnet elements in one of the CNs As long as there is an equal state of health in the IPSIs or CNs executing the command to force CN traffic should have no service impact The following SAT commands are new for the S8700 Multi Connect and ...

Page 259: ... 1 May 2002 7 3 555 233 143 Platform Server Commands For a list and explanation of these commands refer to the section on network time protocol in Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations ...

Page 260: ...it is noted in the section describing the command Note the following changes License Commands The list configuration license command has been replaced by the serialnumber shell command Refer to the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software The remove license command is not available for the S8700 media servers because you can manually delete license files from the operating system rese...

Page 261: ...or example test alarms step short clear can be entered as t al st sh c Drop leading zeroes from numerical entries For example cabinet number 03 can be entered as 3 Pressing the HELP key displays every available command If an incomplete command is entered press HELP to display every valid qualifier for the command NOTE When the successful execution of a command is prevented an error message that is...

Page 262: ...rrier for S8700 Media Server you want to test UU 1 64 1 digit to 2 digit cabinet number C A E Letter designation of a carrier For many commands relating to EPN Control circuit packs this defaults to A the control carrier SS 1 21 1 or 2 digit number identifying a circuit pack s slot in a carrier For many commands relating to EPN Control circuit packs this usually defaults to the only possible slot ...

Page 263: ...unk group number used to address trunk maintenance objects group member 1 255 Group number followed by a slash and a 1 to 3 digit member number of an individual trunk used to address trunk maintenance objects extension The extension number assigned to the port or other maintenance object The number of digits in an extension is determined by the system dial plan The list and display commands are us...

Page 264: ...ear combination clears every alarm against the maintenance object if no errors are encountered The short clear combination clears only alarms pertinent to the tests in the short sequence CAUTION If every tests passes the long clear combination clears every error counter If firmware counters are cleared while an actual problem exists customer service may degrade due to calls being routed over fault...

Page 265: ...e test result The length of this variable differs for the various types of commands A port circuit requires a full length address such as 11C1502 indicating circuit number 2 on the circuit pack in cabinet 11 carrier C slot 15 A control carrier component such as an IPSI is designated simply as 01B indicating the component in carrier B of cabinet 1 Some MOs such as TDM BUS are addressed by PN number...

Page 266: ... The output screens of many commands list an alternate name for certain MOs in addition to their port address physical location The meaning of the name depends upon the type of the object as shown in the following table Maintenance Object Alternate Name Example Station extension 84140 Trunk trunk group member 001 666 001 255 45 3 Personal CO line P personal CO line group 001 200 P 23 ...

Page 267: ...the MO is inaccessible The expansion archangel link may be down DISABLED The MO or test has been disabled by the tier 3 disable command NOT ASSIGNED The location specified does not have a circuit pack administered to it EXTRA BOARD This result can appear for the Maintenance Test Call Classifier Tone Detector Announcemen and Speech Synthesis circuit packs Each of these circuit packs has restriction...

Page 268: ...ity can be acted upon by only one command at a time This restriction applies to such action commands as busyout change clear recycle release set test When an action command is acting on a circuit pack that circuit pack and every maintenance object located on it are unavailable for other commands Display only commands such as the following generally do not conflict with any other commands display s...

Page 269: ... 7 111 The matching release command returns the maintenance object to service providing the object is not otherwise incapacitated NOTE Two new busyout and release commands have been added busyout ipserver interface and release ipserver interface A variety of self explanatory error messages may be displayed if the command cannot be executed as entered In addition to these there are a number of nume...

Page 270: ... display shows a typical result for most maintenance objects for busyout link 1 See Common Output Fields above for an explanation of the fields displayed COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Result Error Code 01A0617 ETH PT PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 271: ... object that was not first busied out 1015 ABORT A reset of this circuit pack requires that every maintenance object on it be in the out of service state Use the busyout board command to place every object on the circuit pack in the out of service state and try the reset again 1026 ABORT The specified TDM bus cannot be busied out because the control channel or system tones are being carried on it ...

Page 272: ...system TN750 Announcement 1 system Remove any extra circuit packs 1 FAIL For reset commands the circuit pack was not successfully halted 2 FAIL For reset commands the circuit pack was not successfully restarted after being halted For both results replace the circuit pack FAIL See the applicable maintenance object in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures PASS The requested action successfu...

Page 273: ...ory The report can be further narrowed down by using the other fields on the form Table 7 4 is a list of the categories showing which MOs are included Table 7 5 on page 7 28 is sorted by MO and shows the categories containing each MO Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Error Category Maintenance Objects adm conn ADM CONN announce ANN PT ANN BD ANNOUNCE bri asai ASAI ADJ ASAI BD ASAI PT ASAI RES A...

Page 274: ... POW DC POWER EMG XFER EXT DEV POWER RING GEN esm ESM exp intf AC POWER CARR POW DC POWER EPN SNTY EXP INTF MAINT SYNC TDM CLK TONE BD ext dev CUST ALM generatr STRAT 3 SYNC TDM CLK TONE PT TONE BD inads link INADS infc EXP INTF Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 275: ...LNK ISDN SGRP ip MEDPRO IPMEDPRO MEDPROPT H323 SGRP H323 BCH H323 STN DIG IP STN RDIG STA RANL STA NR CONN REM FF ASAI IP ADJLK IP SIP SGRP lic file NO LIC LIC ERR maint MAINT Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 276: ...LEV MMI PT MMI SYNC mnt test M T ANL M T BD M T DIG M T PKT modem MODEM BD MODEM PT pkt M T PKT PKT BUS pms jrnl JNL PRNT PMS LINK pnc DS1C BD DS1 FAC EXP INTF FIBER LK PNC DUP SN CONF SNC BD SNC LINK SNC REF SNI BD Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 277: ...UP SN CONF SNC BD SNC LINK SNC REF SNI BD pnc peer SNI PEER procr PROCR quick st ABRI PT ADXDP PT ANL 16 LINE ANL LINE ANL NE LINE ANN PT ANNOUNCE ASAI ADJ AUDIX PT AUX TRK BRI PT BRI SET CDR LINK CLSFY PT CO DS1 CO TRK CONFIG Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 278: ...1 FAC DS1C BD DTMR PT EPN SANITY EXP INTF EXP PN FIBER LNK GPTD PT HYB LINE ISDN LNK ISDN TRK JNL PRNT MAINT MET LINE MODEM PT OPS LINE PDATA PT PDMODULE PKT BUS PKT INT PMS LINK PMS PRNT PNC DUP PRI CDR S SYN PT Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 279: ...PRNT SYSLINK SYSTEM TDM BUS TDM CLK TDMODULE TIE DS1 TIE TRK TONE BD TTR LEV sch adj SCH ADJ s syn S SYN BD S SYN PT stabd ABRI PORT ADXDP BD ADXDP PT ANL 16 LINE ANL BD ANL BD ANL LINE ANL NE LINE ASAI ADJ AUDIX BD AUDIX PT Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 280: ... MET LINE stacrk ADXDP PT ANL LINE ANL 16 LINE ANL NE LINE AUDIX PT DIG LINE HYB LINE MET LINE OPS LINE stations ABRI PORT ADXDP PT ANL 16 LINE ANL LINE ANL NE LINE ASAI ADJ AUDIX PT BRI PORT BRI SET DIG LINE HYB LINE MET LINE Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 281: ...m TDM BUS tone CLSFY BD CLSFY PT DETR BD DTMR PT GPTD PT STRAT 3 SYNC TDM CLK TONE BD TONE PT TTR LEV trkbd AUX BD AUX TRK CO BD CO DS1 CO TRK DID BD DID DS1 DID TRK DIOD BD DIOD TRK DS1 BD ISDN TRK PE BCHL TIE BD TIE DS1 Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 282: ...TRK DID DS1 DID TRK DIOD TRK ISDN LNK ISDN TRK TIE DS1 TIE TRK trunks CO TRK AUX TRK CO DS1 DID DS1 DID TRK DIOD TRK ISDN LNK ISDN TRK PE BCHL TIE DS1 TIE TRK WAE PORT vc VC BD VC DSPPT VC LEV VC SUMPT vsp MMI BD Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 283: ...MMI LEV MMI SYNC VC LEV VC BD VC SUMPT VC DSPPT VP BD VP PT VPP BD VPP PT DI BD DI PT MEDPRO IPMEDPRO MEDPROPT wide band PE BCHL WAE PORT wireless RC BD RFP SYNC WFB CAU WT STA Table 7 4 Alarm and Error Categories Continued Error Category Maintenance Objects Continued on next page ...

Page 284: ...i asai quick st stabd stations AC POWER environ exp intf ADJLK IP ip ADM CONN adm conn ADXCL BD ADXCL PT ADXCL RS ADXDP BD quick st stabd ADXDP PT quick st stabd ADXDP RS ANL 16 L quick st sta bd stacrk stations ANL BD stabd ANL LINE quick st stabd stacrk stations ANN BD announce ANN PT announce quick st ANNOUNCE quick st announce Continued on next page ...

Page 285: ...ck st stabd stacrk stations AUDIX RES AUX BD trkbd AUX TRK quick st trkbd trkcrk trunks BRI BD bri asai sta bd BRI DAT data mod quick st BRI PORT bri asai quick st stabd stations BRI SET bri asai quick st stabd stations CABINET environ Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 286: ...t CO BD trkbd CO DS1 quick st trkbd trkcrk trunks CO TRK quick st trkbd trkcrk trunks CONFIG misc quick st CUST ALM ext dev DAT LINE data mod quick st DC POWER environ exp intf DETR BD detector tone DI BD di vsp DID BD trkbd DI PT di Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 287: ... DIG BD sta bd DIG IP STN ip DIG LINE quick st stabd stacrk stations DIOD BD trkbd DIOD TRK quick st trkbd trkcrk trunks DS1 BD trkbd DS1 FAC pnc pncmaint quick st DS1C BD pnc pncmaint quick st DT LN BD data mod DTMR PT detector tone Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 288: ... exp intf infc pnc pncmaint quick st EXP PN quick st EXT DEV environ ext dev FIBER LK pnc pncmaint quick st GPTD PT detector quick st tone H323 SGRP ip H323 BCH ip H323 STN ip HYB BD stabd HYB LINE quick st stabd stacrk stations INADS inads Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 289: ...st trkbd trkcrk trunks JNL PRNT quick st LIC ERR lic file MAINT exp intf maint quick st MEDPRO ip vsp MEDPROPT ip vsp MET BD stabd MET LINE quick st stabd stacrk stations MIS misc MMI BD vsp MMI LEV vsp MMI PT vsp MMI SYNC vsp Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 290: ... file NR CONN ip OPS LINE quick st stacrk stations PDATA BD PDATA PT quick st PDMODULE data mod quick st PE BCHL trunkbd trunks wideband PKT BUS pkt quick st PKT INT quick st PMS LINK pms jrnl quick st PMS PRNT quick st PNC DUP pnc pncmaint quick st POWER AC Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 291: ... OFF ip RING GEN environ S SYN BD quick st S SYN PT quick st s syn SCH ADJ sch adj SIP SGRP ip SN CONF pnc pncmaint quick st SNC BD pnc pncmaint quick st SNC LINK pnc pncmaint quick st SNC REF pnc pncmaint quick st SNI BD pnc pncmaint quick st Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 292: ... LINK sys link SYS PRNT quick st sys prnt SYSTEM misc quick st TDM BUS quick st tdm TDM CLK exp intf generatr quick st tone TDMODULE data mos quick st TIE BD trkbd TIE DS1 quick st trkbd trkcrk trunks TIE TRK quick st trkbd trkcrk Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 293: ... tone TONE PT generatr tone TSC ADM TTR LEV quick st tone UDS1 BD trkbd VD BD vsp VC LEV vsp VC DSPPT vsp VC SUMPT vsp VP BD vsp VP PT vsp VPP BD vsp VPP PT vsp WAE PORT trunkbd trunks wideband WFB wireless WT STA wireless Table 7 5 Alarm and Error Categories Sorted by MO Continued Maintenance Object Error Categories Continued on next page ...

Page 294: ...ts Feature Interactions add atm pnc number next Number to assign to new atm pnc Next number automatically assigned to new atm pnc Examples add atm pnc 23 add atm pnc next init inads craft none none Location 5 character board number UUCSS cabinet 1 44 carrier A E slot 0 20 Name 16 character alpha numeric characters for identification Address Format DCC ATM E 164 ATM Private or ICD ATM E 164 Up to 1...

Page 295: ...d administers a port network n to be IPSI controlled Host Name and DHCP ID are display only fields This command applies to both S8700 Media Server Multi Connect and IP Connect Configurations However only the S8700 Multi Connect will show a secondary IPSI Parameters port network 1 64 Examples add ipserver interface 12 ...

Page 296: ... Parameters Location 1A02 Call Control 802 1p 4 Host ipsi A01a Call Control DiffServ 42 DNCP ID ipsi A01a Secondary IPSI Location 1B01 Host ipsi A01b DHCP ID ipsi A01b add ipserver interface 2 Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 2 Socket Encryption y Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 2A02 Call Control 802 1p 6 Host 172 22 22 175 Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi...

Page 297: ...gainst the remote office stations limit administered on the Customer Options form change station 67403 Page 1 of 3 STATION Extension 67403 Lock Messages n BCC 0 Type 8410D__ Security Code 1234____ TN 1 Port X______ Coverage Path 1 ____ COR 1 Name Vphone______________________ Coverage Path 2 ____ COS 1 Hunt to Station _____ STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2_ Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 67403 Media Co...

Page 298: ...e established later when returned to service See the description of status link for more information about links Parameters Examples busyout cdr link busy cdr secondary For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters on page 7 6 Common Output Fields on page 7 9 and Busyout and Release Commands on page 7 13 primary secondary This qualifier is used to specify one of the two p...

Page 299: ...ata modules or over the data channels A list of every data module administered on the system can be displayed with list data module This form gives the extension port type and other data for each data module The following table gives the maintenance object name for each type of data module listed in the Type field on the list data module form Type Maintenance Object adm t BRI SET announcement DAT ...

Page 300: ...When the override is used all packet and circuit traffic on the packet facility is switched to one of the other three facilities all traffic that was on the destination facility before the switch is dropped There is no way to tell which facility is carrying the packet and control traffic without attempting to busy it out If there is only one facility left in service on the circuit pack it cannot b...

Page 301: ...stem with duplicated PNC the command is allowed only on a fiber link on the standby PNC does not impact service and requires that the standby PNC be busied first For more information about fiber links see FIBER LK Fiber Link in Chapter 8 Parameters If neither PNC is specified the command defaults to a pnc Examples Critical Reliability System duplicated PNC busyout fiber link 01 b pnc busyout fiber...

Page 302: ...al control where the EI is the AA and the PKTINT functionality is moved to an IPSI in another port network If the IPSIs are duplicated in the port network then the active IPSI cannot be busied out IPSI also busies out the standby Tone Clock The required argument is a cabinet carrier Parameters Examples busyout ipserver interface 6b U cabinet 1 64 Specify the cabinet number you want to test c carri...

Page 303: ...out ipserver interface Issue 1 May 2002 7 47 555 233 143 Output busyout ipserver interface 6b COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Result Error Code 06B IP SVR PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 304: ...oftware may put a component that is part of a link in a busy state causing link set up to fail and resulting in attempts by the system to reestablish the link If a maintenance test requires that the component be idle frequent attempts at re setup may delay the recovery of a faulty component Busying out the link will prevent re setup attempts Parameters Examples busyout journal printer pms log busy...

Page 305: ...c dependent on that link The application adjunct or switch connected to the link will be inaccessible and the link will have to be re established later when returned to service See status link for more details on links Parameters For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters on page 7 6 Common Output Fields on page 7 9 and Busyout and Release Commands on page 7 13 Link A ...

Page 306: ... Far end data module Simulated data channel Manager that initiates and maintains the link Controller protocol that services the link For information about what a property management system PMS is and does see status pms link Feature Interactions Maintenance of a particular component on a link sometimes interferes with the maintenance of the link itself For example maintenance can put a link compon...

Page 307: ... link from the switch to an external printer This link is created by administering the system printer extension and setting up a call to the system printer The following is an example of the results of the busyout sp link command For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters on page 7 6 Common Output Fields on page 7 9 and Busyout and Release Commands on page 7 13 busyout...

Page 308: ...ed or not Entering only the group number busies out every member in the group Although not recommended entering a group number and a slash without a member number to busyout the member with the lowest numbered port location Examples busyout trunk 78 busyout trunk 78 1 For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters on page 7 6 Common Output Fields on page 7 9 and Busyout an...

Page 309: ...ardware group test will be logged off However after logging back on the system you can still restart the canceled hardware group test command with resume hardware group command Scheduled and Periodic Maintenance When a test hardware group is entered all activity related to scheduled background maintenance periodic background maintenance and data audits is suspended for the duration of the executio...

Page 310: ... is displayed Hardware group command successfully canceled If a test hardware group command executing in the foreground is successfully canceled with a cancel hardware group command from another terminal the following response will be displayed on the terminal where the hardware group command was executing Hardware group command aborted with cancel command entered from another terminal ...

Page 311: ...riptions Table 7 8 change atm pnc command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions change atm pnc number Number assigned to the atm pnc Example change atm pnc 23 init inads craft none none Name 16 character alpha numeric characters for identification change atm pnc 2 Page 1 of 1 ATM PNC Connection Number 2 Location 01D01 Name dup atm pnc Ad...

Page 312: ...owing five screens were taken from an S8700 Multi Connect configuration UU The number of the cabinet containing the circuit packs to be modified Default is 1 For S8700 IP Connect configurations the number applies to port slots 1 10 only change circuit packs Page 1 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier A Cabinet Layout five carrier Carrier Type expansion control Slot Code Sf Mode Name Slot Code Sf M...

Page 313: ...IGITAL LINE 04 15 05 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 16 06 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 17 TN771 D MAINTENANCE TEST 07 TN754 C DIGITAL LINE 18 TN2181 DIGITAL LINE 08 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 19 TN464 D DS1 INTERFACE 09 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 20 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 10 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE indicates circuit pack conflict change circuit packs Page 3 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier C Cabinet Layout five carrier Ca...

Page 314: ...de dup switch node or not used Slot The carrier slot numbers 1 10 Code The TN or UN part number of the circuit pack This number identifies the circuit pack type to system software Sfx The letter suffix of the circuit pack if applicable Name The name of the circuit pack This field aids in entering the circuit pack codes change circuit packs Page 4 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier D Cabinet Layo...

Page 315: ...t 15 Carrier A Cabinet Layout rack mount stack Carrier Type rmc port Slot Code Sf Mode Name 01 TN556 D BRI LINE 02 TN2312 IP SERVER INTFC 03 04 TN760 D TIE TRUNK 05 TN2302 IP MEDIA PROCESSOR 06 TN2224 B DIGITAL LINE 07 TN556 D BRI LINE 08 TN799 C CONTROL LAN 09 TN2224 B DIGITAL LINE 10 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE indicates circuit pack conflict ...

Page 316: ...Code Sf Mode Name Slot Code Sf Mode Name 11 01 12 TN572 SWITCH NODE CLOCK 02 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 13 03 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 14 04 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 15 05 TN573 SWITCH NODE INTF 16 06 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 17 07 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 18 08 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 19 09 TN573 B SWITCH NODE INTF 20 10 TN572 SWITCH NODE CLOCK 21 indicates circuit pack conflict ...

Page 317: ... Enter key is pressed Pressing CANCEL any time before pressing ENTER to enter the changes returns you to the command line without changing any translation data When you enter a command that changes translation data two checks are made You must have permission to administer the feature No other user may be executing a change add or remove fiber link command To change the endpoint board locations yo...

Page 318: ... locate a port network If this is the case a second page displays for administration of the DS1C complex attributes Fiber Translation Enter multi mode or single mode This field is used for faster remote diagnosis Converter Enter y or n This field is used for faster remote diagnosis Type of Transceivers Enter A or B This field is used for faster remote diagnosis Converter Type Enter Avaya or other ...

Page 319: ...ne coding format for each facility Valid entries are zcs and b8zs There are 2 line coding options supported by the DS1 Interfaces to meet ones density requirements in the data stream Zero Code Suppression ZCS line coding is the default and is in place following an initialization until changed by administration Note that either line coding option may be used on the DS1 Interface that carries the pa...

Page 320: ...ge 1 of 1 FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION Fiber Link 1 ENDPOINT 1 ENDPOINT 2 A PNC A PNC Board Location 01E01 Board Location 01E02 Board Type ei Board Type sni Fiber Translation converter Converter Type of Tranceivers Converter Type Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex n ...

Page 321: ... Page 1 of 1 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Location Firmware Image File Name Target Board Code Suffix Firmware Vintage Schedule Download y Remove Image File After Successful Download y Start Date Time Stop Date Time Target Target Target Target Target Location Location Location Location Location 1 11 21 31 41 2 12 22 32 42 3 13 23 33 43 4 14 24 34 44 5 15 25 35 45 6 16 26 36 46 7 17 27 37 47 8 18 ...

Page 322: ... be automatically removed following the successful download of every specified target board If set to y and every board was successfully downloaded the image file will be removed and the file system on the source board will be disabled Start Date Time This field only appears if the Schedule Download field is set to y The date portion of the field is formatted mm dd yyyy mm 2 digits for the month d...

Page 323: ...Server Multi Connect and IP Connect Configurations Parameters Examples change ipserver interface 2 Output for S8700 Multi Connect n port network 1 64 change ipserver interface 2 Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 2 Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 2AXX Call Control 802 1p 6 Host ipsi A02a Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi A02a Secondary IPSI Location 2B01 Host...

Page 324: ... for S8700 IP Connect change ipserver interface 1 Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 1 Socket Encryption y Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 1A02 Call Control 802 1p 6 Host 135 122 50 13 Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi A01a ...

Page 325: ... appears the fields are automatically populated to show connectivity with ip network region 9 See the Avaya MultiVantage Administrator s Guide for field definitions for this screen Output change ip network region 1 Page 1 of 2 IP Network Region Region 1 Name net1 Audio Parameters Direct IP IP Audio Connections n Codec Set 1 IP Audio Hairpinning n Location UDP Port Range RTCP Enabled y Min 2048 RTC...

Page 326: ...network regions 1 7 indicates the preferred codec set that you should use between these network regions change ip network region 1 Page 2 of 2 Inter Network Region Connection Management Region Group Of 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 001 032 1 2 3 033 064 065 096 097 128 129 160 161 192 193 224 225 250 ...

Page 327: ...unt against the remote office stations limit administered on the Customer Options form change station 67403 Page 1 of 3 STATION Extension 67403 Lock Messages n BCC 0 Type 8410D__ Security Code 1234____ TN 1 Port X______ Coverage Path 1 ____ COR 1 Name Vphone______________________ Coverage Path 2 ____ COS 1 Hunt to Station _____ STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2_ Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 67403 Med...

Page 328: ...mmand parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions change synchronization cabinet number 1 64 init inads craft none none change synchronization 1 Page 1 of 2 SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN CABINET 1 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum 4 Primary 01B02 Secondary 01A08 CIRCUIT PACKS AVAILABLE FOR SYNCHRONIZATION Location Type Name Slip Loca...

Page 329: ... for errors Primary Multi Connect only Enter ATM SW or 5 character board location Secondary 16 character alpha numeric characters for identification Cabinet The cabinet number applies only for S8700 IP Connect systems Valid range is 1 64 For IP Connect the list of circuit packs can span two pages The maximum number of sync sources available per cabinet is 40 equivalent to the number of available s...

Page 330: ...administer the switch identifier and turn on off IPSI control of port networks NOTE You must run this command before running add ipserver interface Output for IP Connect change system parameters ipserver interface Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION IPSI Host Name Prefix Primary Control Subnet Address 198 152 254 0 Secondary Control Subnet Address 198 152 255 ...

Page 331: ...r interface Issue 1 May 2002 7 75 555 233 143 Output for Multi Connect change system parameters duplication Page 1 of 1 DUPLICATION RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Enable Operation of PNC Duplication y Enable Operation of IPSI Duplication y ...

Page 332: ...screen displays the message Command successfully completed NOTE When finished working on the switch be sure to return every field to its original setting Output Page 1 The following output example shows a display of page 1 of the change system parameters maintenance command Table 7 11 change system parameters maintenance command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions ...

Page 333: ...re blank 1 6 hours The default is 2 hours The blank option indicates that the time out feature is not active Control Channel Interchange Each port network has a pair of TDM busses A and B Each has a set of time slots dedicated to the control channel One bus at a time carries the control channel in each PN Daily days of the week or no prevents interchanges no System Clocks IPSI Interchange For high...

Page 334: ...ld is formatted mm dd yyyy mm 2 digits for the month dd 2 digits for the day and yyyy 4 digits for the year The time portion of the field is formatted hh mm hh 2 digits for the hour and mm 2 digits for the minutes If this field is left blank the download will continue until completion Target Location These fields contain the target board locations ppcss of the boards that will receive the download...

Page 335: ...field blank MMIs The MMIs field contains the minimum number of MMI ports needed for the Multimedia Call Handling MMCH feature to run efficiently The MMCH feature must be enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form before the MMIs field can be changed to a number greater than zero If the number of in service Multimedia Interface MMI ports falls below the minimum port capacity valid entri...

Page 336: ...ype 105 tests 2 way loss gain slope and C message and C notch noise by sending 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 second of quiet 9 seconds of 404 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 second of quiet 9 seconds of 2804 Hz tone at 16 dB 30 seconds of quiet second of 2225 Hz test progress tone approximately 5 seconds of quiet forced disconnect ISDN Maintenance ISDN PRI Test Call Extension This field indicates the ex...

Page 337: ...ng DSO channels associated with non ISDN PRI trunks The loop around is activated by dialing the test extension number multiple DSO loop around connections can be established by placing multiple calls to the loop around extension For more information see Facility Test Calls in Chapter 6 Additional Maintenance Procedures Continued on next page change system parameters maintenance Page 3 of 3 MAINTEN...

Page 338: ...y making room for new incoming error messages which might otherwise be dropped This command does not clear active alarms from the alarm log Cleared error entries are the first entries overwritten when additional room is needed to log new entries To retrieve cleared errors use display errors clear WARNING Use this command with care Cleared data will be lost if the logs fill up ...

Page 339: ...PNC that is busied out can be cleared This command is useful for quickly clearing lingering alarms after a hardware problem has been fixed Test clear commands do not clear alarms on SNI SNC and DS1C circuit packs WARNING This command can mask actual hardware problems since firmware is cleared and appears as if no problems were ever encountered Parameters For more information see Common Output Fiel...

Page 340: ... 84 Issue 1 May 2002 clear link n This command clears the counters associated with a numbered PPP C LAN link The clear clan port command accomplishes the same thing The statistical counters cannot be cleared for a C LAN s Ethernet link ...

Page 341: ...css to remove the memory file system This command will fail if there are any files present on the file system and an error message filesystem still has files will be displayed on the SAT To disable the file system remove every file on the file system by using the remove file path board ppcss SAT command This command fails if the file system is already disabled ...

Page 342: ...ay 2002 disable firmware download disable firmware download This command stops the current firmware download If a target board is currently downloading the download is first completed for the current board but the remaining boards are not downloaded ...

Page 343: ...instead An alarm can occur for any hardware object when it has been determined by the maintenance subsystem that a problem definitely exists The impact of the problem is indicated by the alarm type Warning alarm A problem which has been deemed important enough to log or may be external to the system but not severe enough to cause a noticeable degradation of service Minor alarm A problem which coul...

Page 344: ...echnician to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification 4 for more details When no parameters entered on the command line parameters are selected on the Hardwa...

Page 345: ... carrier slot If the cabinet number is omitted the system will default to 1 Port This allows the technician to display every alarm associated with a particular port on a circuit pack Alarms for a port circuit are referenced by port location cabinet carrier slot circuit If the cabinet number is omitted the system will default to 1 Category Alarms for a particular equipment category Extension Alarms...

Page 346: ...n 0 59 Cabinet Enter cabinet number 1 3 Port Network Enter port network number 1 3 Board Number Enter 5 character board number cabinet 01 3 carrier A E slot 00 20 Port Enter port number cabinet 1 3 carrier A E slot 0 20 circuit 01 31 Category The category field help is a list of objects This list includes the following adm conn announce bri asai cdr data mod detector di environ esm exp intf ext de...

Page 347: ...or x is an invalid entry please press HELP Warning x is an invalid entry please press HELP Interval x is an invalid entry please press HELP From month Entry must be all digits From day Entry must be all digits From hour Entry must be all digits From minute Entry must be all digits To month Entry must be all digits To day Entry must be all digits To hour Entry must be all digits To minute Entry mus...

Page 348: ... circuit pack Alt Name The alternate means of identifying the MO This field contains the extension when the object is a station and it contains xxx yyy when the object is a trunk where xxx is the trunk group number and yyy is the member number It contains P xxx when the object is a private CO line where xxx is the private CO line group number Alarm Type MAJOR MINOR or WARNING This is an indicator ...

Page 349: ...alarms that the switch has attempted to send to OSSN2 the column will be consistent with the column under the 1 heading Service State RDY ready for service OUT out of service or IN in service This is the current service state of the station and trunk ports shown If a blank is displayed in this field it means that no service state is associated with the MO Ack The columns under the 1 and 2 headings...

Page 350: ...lay atm pnc 2 command Table 7 12 display atm pnc command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display atm pnc number print schedule The administered number of the atm pnc init inads craft none none display atm pnc 2 ATM PNC Connection Number 2 Location 01D01 Name dup atm pnc Address Format ICD ATM AFI 47 ICD 0005 HO DSP 80FFE1000000F21C...

Page 351: ... 7 13 display capacity command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions display capacity print schedule Report sent to printer Command validated first then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed is sent to...

Page 352: ...bbreviated dialing entries for both group and personal lists AD Personal Lists Per System The number of abbreviated dialing personal lists For further information refer to Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software and Overview for Avaya MultiVantage Software Continued on next page display capacity Page 1 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY Current System Memory Configuration G3rV6 System Used Availab...

Page 353: ...est Notification Requests The number of requests ASAI can make to monitor call activity at a split or VDN Simultaneous Active Adjunct Controlled Calls The number of calls that can be controlled by ASAI adjuncts Continued on next page Page 2 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Used Available Limit ATTENDANT SERVICE Attendant Positions 2 26 28 Queue Length 0 300 300 Authorization Codes 0 90000 90000 BASIC C...

Page 354: ...s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Basic Call Management System BCMS Measured Agents Per System The number of agents the Basic Call Management System BCMS is measuring Measured Splits Skills The number of hunt groups BCMS is measuring VDNs The number of vector directory numbers BCMS is measuring Page 3 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Used Available Limit CALL COVERAGE Coverage Answer Groups 0 750...

Page 355: ...ll Records The maximum number of active calls at a given time This field does not display real time data just the system limit and is not administrable Call Vectoring Call Prompting Vector Directory Numbers The number of system VDNs For further information see DEFINITY Call Vectoring Expert Agent Selection Vectors Per System The number of vectors per system For further information see DEFINITY Cal...

Page 356: ...nd TEGs UDP Extension Records The number of 4 digit or 5 digit extension numbers that allow a user to call from one PBX to another using that number Digital Data Endpoints The number of digital serial communication devices that permit the asynchronous transfer of data This also includes the number of analog adjuncts Expansion Port Networks The number of port networks connected to the TDM bus and p...

Page 357: ... being measured by CMS Queue Slots Per System The number of hunt group queue positions Queue Status Buttons The number of hunt group queue status buttons administered on stations There are four types of queue status buttons attendants use the last two queue status buttons q calls Queue Calls q time Queue Time atd qcalls ATD Queue Calls atd qtime ATD Queue Time Page 5 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Us...

Page 358: ...refer to Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Recorded Announcement Analog Queue Slots The number of calls in queue for the system s analog announcements Maximum VAL Boards Indicates the maximum number of VAL integrated Announcement circuit packs allowed in this system Page 6 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Used Available Limit Recorded Announcement Analog Queue Slots 0 1256 1256 Maxi...

Page 359: ...entries administered for trunk groups ISDN CBC Service Selection Trunks The number of call by call trunk groups Trunk Groups The number of trunk groups administered Trunk Ports The number of trunk ports administered Page 7 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Used Available Limit VOICE TERMINALS Station Button Memory units 0 100 5260000 Station Records 35 24965 25000 Stations 29 Stations With Port 29 Stati...

Page 360: ...ations with specific administered ports Stations Without Port The number of voice terminals not having an administered port such as AWOH Other Stations The number of ports used as conversion resources agent login ID MASI and analog announcements TTI Ports The number of ports assigned by TTI features Auto Moves Stations The number of stations available to move using ACTR ISDN BRI Endpoint and Trunk...

Page 361: ...m one prior to G3V4 load 71 or early G3V5 loads unknown no trans displays Memory Configuration The platform on which the translations were saved Can also be unknown if no flash card is present or translations made on old load This is important because platforms are not always compatible Offer Category The offer category that was set when the last save translation was done before upgrade or reboot ...

Page 362: ...f subscribed wireless terminals System Wide Registration Counts IP Stations The number of IP stations currently registered in the system Remote Office Stations The total number of remote office stations currently registered in the system Page 9 of 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY TOTAL SUBSCRIBED PORTS System Used Available Limit Station and Trunk Ports 9 183 192 Radio Controllers 0 0 0 Wireless Terminals 0 0 0 ...

Page 363: ...tion interface links command Screen 7 9 Interface links screen Table 7 14 display communication interface links command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permission Defaults Feature Interaction list com munication interface links Example list communication interface links init inads craft none None display communication interface links Page 1 of 2 INTERFACE LINKS Link Enable...

Page 364: ...sor interface and PPP Ext Extension number of the local data module for this link Type Protocol for this link ppp ethernet Destination Number Destination of the link as administered on the data module forms processor interface and PPP DTE DCE Processor interface administration from data module form processor interface only Conn Mod Connected data module administration from data module form process...

Page 365: ... Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 2 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 3 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 4 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 5 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 6 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ ...

Page 366: ...k if the type of interface link is x 25 r model or procr intf si model This field cannot be blank if the type of interface link is ethernet or ppp Valid entries are client server or blank default Interface Link Identifies the physical link carrying this processor virtual channel Links numbered 1 through 4 times the number of PI circuit packs for the si model can be either x 25 or tcp ip The rest o...

Page 367: ...Prev Page key is pressed Press CANCEL to abort or NEXT PAGE for next page The following help message will be displayed after the Next Page key is pressed and there are more pages of alarms errors to be displayed Press CANCEL to abort NEXT PAGE for next page PREV PAGE for previous page The following help message will be displayed after the Next Page key is pressed and there are no more alarms error...

Page 368: ... which the logs were last saved In such a case the logs will not show the errors and alarms that have been logged since the last time a save was made to the server that became active with the reboot When looking at errors that precede the last reload look for indications preceding the reload to determine whether the logs restored at reboot are complete System resets less severe than a reload rarel...

Page 369: ...e log are displayed To Specifies every error record up to the time specified by mm dd hh mm If no to date is entered every error up to the current date is displayed Equipment Type To limit the report to a specific group of components enter the location of a type of equipment in one of the following fields If no entry is made errors for the entire system are displayed Cabinet Enter the cabinet numb...

Page 370: ... identifying the MO Error Type Numerical error code that identifies the type of problem The meanings of these codes are explained under the name of the MO in Chapter 8 Aux Data Additional numerical information about the error type Only the most recent auxiliary data for each error type is displayed First Occur Month day hour and minute and second if the high resolution command line option is used ...

Page 371: ...n the error occurred a dummy date will be stamped in the log so as to distinguish it from reliable data It appears as 00 00 01 07 Err Cnt The total number of times that the error type has occurred The maximum entry displayed is 999 Err Rt Average hourly rate at which the error has occurred from the first occurrence to the present The maximum entry displayed is 999 Rt Hr An approximation of the rat...

Page 372: ... 31 20 26 01 31 20 28 5 150 5 a y 02A0201 TONE PT 0 01 31 20 34 01 31 20 34 1 0 1 a y PN 02B TDM BUS 18 0 01 31 14 53 01 31 21 12 1 0 1 a n 1 A PNC FIBER LK 18 0 01 31 21 55 01 31 21 55 1 0 1 a y Command successfully completed display errors high resolution Page 1 HIGH RESOLUTION HARDWARE ERROR REPORT ACTIVE ALARMS Port Mtce Alt Err Aux First Seq Last Seq Err Al Name Name Type Data Occur Cnt Occur...

Page 373: ...orrect vectoring problems due to the above mentioned causes See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications System Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection EAS Guide for information about how to interpret this report Input Form The following entry form is displayed to allow limiting the report to events of a certain type or from a certain time period Enter the desired parameters and press ENTER The follow...

Page 374: ...tor events that occurred within a specific time period If these are left blank every recorded vector event is displayed Interval This field enables a display of every event within the last specified time period Enter the first letter of one of the following selections all month day hour or minute Start Stop Time The starting and ending times in 24 hour notation of the interval to be reported Vecto...

Page 375: ...on Data 1 Data 2 Occur Occur Cnt 1012 Destination Unavailable 71 5A 01 09 09 44 01 09 09 54 8 1012 Destination Unavailable 65 22 01 09 09 45 01 09 09 45 1 1012 Destination Unavailable 6E 2D 01 09 09 46 01 09 09 47 3 1012 Destination Unavailable 1EA 4A 01 09 09 47 01 09 09 51 2 1934 IP RRJ Ext already reg 6c 8709D26D 01 09 09 47 01 09 09 51 1 1012 Destination Unavailable 8E 32 01 09 09 48 01 09 09 ...

Page 376: ...ported Remote Office product but Remote Office not enabled on the Signaling Group screen 3 Remote Office is enabled on the Signaling Group screen but the Terminal Type in the RRQ is not valid 0 IP address 1910 IP RRJ H323 UserObj undef Registration rejected because there is no H323 User Object 0 IP address 1911 IP RRJ Exceed max endpts Registration rejected because the capacity for either register...

Page 377: ...nStdData Registration rejected non standard data are missing in the RRQ from authenticating application 0 IP address 1917 IP RRJ Invld H323 ObjID Registration rejected Object ID in the RRQ is invalid Object ID IP address 1918 IP RRJ Invld H225 NSData Registration rejected cannot decode H225 non standard data NSD message 0 IP address 1919 IP RRJ Bad H225 NSDchoice Registration rejected unexpected N...

Page 378: ...e a Gatekeeper Request message UID IP address 1925 IP RRJ RQ new LM fail Registration rejected failure creating a new Login Manager Possible cause No available heap memory to create LoginMgr Cannot start LoginMgr timer Clock not set UID IP address 1926 IP RRJ Authentication fail Registration rejected authentication failure The password that the user entered and the administered password on the sta...

Page 379: ... Complex extension on the station screen or register as a telecommuter UID IP address 1931 IP RRJ H323 ext is MMCmpx Registration rejected this H 323 extension is administered as a Media Complex extension on a non H 323 for example a DCP set UID IP address 1932 IP RRJ Ext has data modl Registration rejected the extension is administered as a data module UID IP address 1933 IP RRJ IP addr mismatch ...

Page 380: ...equest rejected invalid endpoint identifier Endpoint UID IP address 1942 IP KA from unreg user Keep Alive registration request rejected unregistered extension Endpoint UID IP address 1943 IP KA from unreg SigGrp Keep Alive registration request rejected unregistered signaling group Endpoint UID IP address 1944 IP RRJ PSA merge failure Registration rejected PSA merge failure internal software error ...

Page 381: ...s not for this gatekeeper First value is gatekeeper ID Second value is IP address Gatekeeper ID IP address 1953 IP GRJ Invld auth capblty Gatekeeper request rejected the gatekeeper supports a capability that the registering endpoint does not 0 IP address 1954 IP GRJ Invld auth algrthm Gatekeeper request rejected no compatible authentication algorithm exists between the endpoint and the gatekeeper ...

Page 382: ...est rejected because of failure to create new LoginMgr Possible causes No available heap memory to create LoginMgr Cannot start LoginMgr timer Clock not set UID IP address 1961 IP GRJ Build GCF msg Gatekeeper request rejected failure to build a GateKeeper Confirm GCF message internal software error UID IP address 1962 IP LRJ No H323 sig group Location Request rejected no H 323 signaling group admi...

Page 383: ... 1970 IP BRJ Endpt not reg Bandwidth Request rejected the endpoint is not registered UID IP address 1971 IP BRJ Build BCF msg Bandwidth Request rejected failure to build a Bandwidth Request Confirm BCF message for a non Gateway or MCU user internal software error UID IP address 1972 IP BRJ No H323 user Bandwidth Request rejected H 323 user object does not exist internal software error UID IP addre...

Page 384: ...3 user object does not exist internal software error UID IP address 1983 IP ARJ CRV already in use Admission Request rejected call reference value CRV is already in use by another call UID IP address 1984 IP ARJ CRV does not exist Admission Request rejected this call reference value CRV does not exist UID IP address 1985 IP ARJ CRV already in use Admission Request rejected call reference value CRV...

Page 385: ...J Can t decode NSD Unregistration Request rejected failure to decode non standard data NSD in the URQ UID IP address 1996 IP URJ Unexpected NSD msg Unregistration Request rejected unexpected non standard data NSD in the URQ from the registered application endpoint UID IP address 1997 IP URJ User is on a call Unregistration Request rejected the user is on a call UID IP address 1998 IP URJ PSA unmer...

Page 386: ...d H 323 extension cannot make calls Re register the endpoint UID IP address 2007 IP FURQ User no sig conn Force Unregistration Request Unregister user because there is no signaling connection RAS is alive but the signaling connection has gone down user cannot make calls Re register the endpoint UID IP address 2008 IP FURQ H323 no sig conn Force Unregistration Request Unregister associated H 323 us...

Page 387: ...Unregister the Gateway Signaling group IP address 2015 IP FURQ Ext removed Force Unregistration Request Unregister user because the extension has been removed IP User UID 0 2016 IP FURQ IPusr is sftphone Force Unregistration Request A user has PSA ed an extension that was registered as an IP endpoint IP User UID 0 2017 IP FURQ Records exhausted Force Unregistration Request Unregister the LAN port ...

Page 388: ...worst first 100 network regions with broken connectivity rank ordered by the worst to least worst The network regions are ordered from worst to best for example 5 9 Region 5 has 9 broken paths 4 5 Region 4 has 5 broken paths 1 2 Region 1 has 2 broken paths 2 4 Region 2 has 4 broken paths display failed ip network region WORST NETWORK REGIONS Network Region Number of Broken Paths 2 4 Command ...

Page 389: ...s not valid for S8700 IP Connect configurations The display fiber link command displays the translation data associated with an existing fiber link The output for this command is the same as that for change fiber link Parameters fiber The administered number 1 to 44 associated with a fiber link or fiber link pair in a duplicated PNC ...

Page 390: ...nformation about the recovery is stored If the reset is escalated only the reset that successfully completes is recorded Information about the reset may also be found in the error log When a reset 4 reload occurs the error log is saved on the disk Records of the last 16 restarts are retained in the initcauses log in chronological order A power failure results in loss of every record in the initcau...

Page 391: ... log is saved on the disk Records of the last 16 restarts are retained in the initcauses log in chronological order A power failure results in loss of every record in the initcauses log Output for S8700 Multi Connect display initcauses INITIALIZATION CAUSES Cause Action Escalated Time Internal Request 1 no 03 15 06 24 Initialized 4 no 03 15 11 41 Internal Request 1 no 03 15 11 42 Internal Request ...

Page 392: ... restarts have occurred since the last power up Interchange A spontaneous interchange was executed by the system Scheduled Interchange A scheduled interchange was executed by the system Action The level of recovery performed by the system 1 Reset system 1 Warm 2 Reset system 2 Cold 2 4 Reset system 4 Reload Escalated Whether the restart was escalated to a higher level than originally attempted The...

Page 393: ...empted The system s software escalation strategy can perform a higher level restart than the one initiated if problems prevent or conditions interfere with normal execution Time The month day and time of the restart display initcauses INITIALIZATION CAUSES Cause Action Escalated Time Internal Request 1 no 03 09 11 58 Software Request 4 yes 03 09 18 33 Internal Request 1 no 03 09 18 34 Internal Req...

Page 394: ... port network n to be IPSI controlled Parameters port network 1 64 print or schedule Examples display ipserver interface 2 Output display ipserver interface 2 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 2 Socket Encryption y Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 2A02 Call Control 802 1p 6 Host 135 122 30 4 Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi A02a ...

Page 395: ... 1 7 characters for audix or msa 1 20 characters for others Default is blank IP Address IP address for the adjunct or switch Enter 0 255 or leave blank default MSA Names MSA node name up to 7 characters IP Address IP address for the adjunct or switch Enter 0 255 or leave blank default page 1 of 6 NODE NAMES Audix Name IP address MSA Names IP Address 1 _______ ___ ___ ___ ___ 1 _______ ___ ___ ___ ...

Page 396: ...__ ___ ___ 5 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 21 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 6 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 22 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 7 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 23 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 8 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 24 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 9 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 25 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 10 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 26 ______...

Page 397: ...inistration then follows duplication administration Every unduplicated SNI switch node interface to an SNI fiber link is automatically duplicated NOTE The PNC Duplication field must be enabled on the customer options form before you can do any duplication administration If not you must obtain a license file to enable this option PNC duplication cannot be enabled until every pnc a and b board is re...

Page 398: ...tus of PNC duplication y is enabled n default id disabled This field appears only if PNC Duplication has been enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form Enable Operation of IPSI Duplication Status of IPSI duplication y is enabled n default is disabled display system parameters duplication DUPLICATION RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Enable Operation of PNC Duplication y Enable Operation of IP...

Page 399: ... the user to administer the switch identifier and turn on off IPSI control of port networks Parameters print schedule Output display system parameters ipserver interface IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION IPSI Host Name Prefix Primary Control Subnet Address 135 122 50 0 Secondary Control Subnet Address OPTIONS Switch Identifier A IPSI Control of Port Networks enabled ...

Page 400: ...meters maintenance command displays the translation data for maintenance related system parameters Parameters For more information see the section Common Input Parameters Output An input form is displayed with the following fields Defaults for data entry fields are listed in parentheses The following display shows a typical result when display system parameters maintenance is entered on an S8700 M...

Page 401: ... Control Channel Interchange no System Clocks IPSI Interchange no display system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 VCs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI ...

Page 402: ...ing scheduled maintenance The save operation is first made to disk followed by a disk backup Valid entries are daily days of the week or no No specifies that no automatic saves are to be executed daily Control Channel Interchange Each port network has a pair of TDM busses called A and B each of which has a set of time slots dedicated to use by the control channel At any one time the control channe...

Page 403: ...s CLSFY PTs in service falls below this number a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR LEV Valid entries are 1 to 200 There are 8 ports on each TN744 or TN2182 circuit pack To alarm the first occurrence of a CLSFY PT being taken out of service set this field to the total number of CLSFY PTs If there are no TN744 or TN2182 circuit packs in the system leave this field blank Test Type 100 Test Type 102...

Page 404: ...the second page of the System Parameters Maintenance form No special hardware is required When the test call extension is received by the PBX a non inverting 64 kbps connection is set up on the PBX s Time Division Multiplexed bus More than one loop around call can be active at the same time For calls routed over the public network using the ACCUNET Switched Digital Service SDS or Software Defined ...

Page 405: ...greater than the current date Schedule Test Days A y next to the days of the week indicates which days of the week this test runs Page 1 of 1 ATMS TRUNK TEST SCHEDULE Schedule No __ Schedule Time __ __ Schedule Test Days Interval __ Schedule Date __ __ __ SU _ TU _ TH _ SA _ Duration __ OTL Throttle _ MO _ WE _ FR _ Test Type ______ Trk Bgn End Trk Bgn End Trk Bgn End Trk Bgn End Trk Bgn End Grp M...

Page 406: ...o rl runs the full test but skips any return loss sequences This saves about 20 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests no st rl runs the full test but skips every self test and return loss sequence This saves about 40 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests Duration The maximum number of hours 1 to 24 a schedule...

Page 407: ...lay time print schedule This command displays the system date and time that is used by software processes for scheduling and so on Output display time DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Sunday Month January Day of the Month 1 Year 2002 TIME Hour 6 Second 20 Minute 8 ...

Page 408: ...ied AC administered connection or every AC It is used after previously disabling maintenance via the disable administered connection command These commands can be useful in isolating results of certain maintenance processes by preventing interference from others Parameters adm conn The number 1 128 of the administered connection as assigned during administration all This qualifier causes every AC ...

Page 409: ... not given the maximum available is used If more than 32K is not available an error message is given The command fails if the source board cannot create a file system of the specified size or if the file system is already enabled Parameters actual size The size of memory allocated is 1KB to 1024 KB An error message not enough memory available on source board is displayed on the SAT if the source b...

Page 410: ...switch enable synchronization switch This command returns control of the selection of synchronization source to the maintenance subsystem and Tone Clock after being previously turned off by the disable synch command See SYNC Port Network Synchronization on page 8 1509 for details ...

Page 411: ...disable test command The disable test command is not available to the craft login While disabled a test cannot be run by background or demand maintenance Before enabling a test ascertain why it was disabled and inform INADS that it has been turned back on Parameters test The number of the test to be re enabled Descriptions of each test appear under the relevant MO in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object R...

Page 412: ...UCSS Example get boot image 1C07 init inads craft customer Board Type For VAL this field is TN2501 FW Vintage The firmware vintage number HW Signature The hardware signature number Suffix The circuit pack suffix code letter Date The date the firmware file was created or transferred to the circuit pack Timestamp The time that the firmware file was created or transferred to the circuit pack get boot...

Page 413: ...eld indicates the active firmware image file No in this field indicates the inactive firmware image file To change the active image file use the set boot image command Reboot Image Yes in this field indicates that this image becomes active after a system reset No in this field indicates that this image becomes inactive after a system reset ...

Page 414: ...get ethernet options location The physical location of the circuit pack UUCSS init inads craft customer Auto Negotiation Yes means that the system automatically negotiates the highest possible network speed No means that the Speed and Duplex fields are manually assigned Speed 10 Mbps 100 Mbps N A not available Duplex Half Full N A not available Link Integrity Active Inactive display ethernet optio...

Page 415: ...pplication interface 2 Type go shell at the command prompt 3 Enter your terminal type and press ENTER 4 At the prompt you can run platform commands through Linux Output Here is a sample screen Tue Mar 12 13 24 30 MST 2002 Enter your terminal type i e xterm vt100 etc vt100 vt100 3328 old priority 0 new priority 0 init sv gertrude1 ...

Page 416: ...Table 7 21 list atm pnc command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list atm pnc print schedule init inads craft none none list atm pnc Page 1 ATM PNC PNC A PNC B PNC Connection LOC LOC 1 01C01 2 01D01 3 02A01 4 02E01 5 03A01 6 03E01 7 04A01 8 04E01 9 05A01 10 05E01 11 06A01 12 06E01 13 07A01 14 07E01 press CANCEL to quit press NEXT PA...

Page 417: ...ed number of the cabinet Type The type of cabinet PPN or EPN Layout The layout of the cabinet The option rmc is the only option displayed for the Layout field for S8700 IP Connect Room Room where cabinet resides if administered on the cabinet form Floor Floor where cabinet resides if administered on the cabinet form Building Building where cabinet resides if administered on the cabinet form A B C ...

Page 418: ...rcuit pack and assigned port on a specified carrier control Specifies the display of every circuit pack located in the control complex ds1 Specifies the display of every DS1 circuit pack TN722 TN767 and TN464 administered and or physically inserted every port carrier of the system port network pn Specifies the display of every circuit pack located in a specified port network List cabinet gives the...

Page 419: ...naling This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 option is selected The contents of the field are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack via add change ds1 command or none if the circuit pack is not administered Name This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 option is selected The contents of the field are the same as the name administere...

Page 420: ...The port corresponding to this position is currently assigned as an external device mn alarm port Each port on a TN556 ISDN BRI circuit pack can have two BRI endpoints BRI ports are displayed once when assigned only one endpoint and twice when fully configured with two endpoints The following display shows a typical result when list configuration all is entered list configuration all Page 1 SYSTEM...

Page 421: ...t pack is not administered Name This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 is entered The contents of the field are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack or none if the circuit pack is not administered CSU MOD This field is displayed only when list configuration ds1 option is selected The field contains the identification number of the Integrated CSU mo...

Page 422: ...cement data were last saved to the MSS Information about any software update files that have been applied to the system Parameters Output The following display shows a typical result when list configuration software version is run memory resident Specifies display of RAM resident files only list configuration software versions SOFTWARE VERSIONS SOFTWARE VERSION Memory Resident R011x 01 0 059 0 Dis...

Page 423: ...date is read from disk and appears blank if the disk is not installed Memory Resident Date and time marked on the removable media or disk when translation data was last read from the MSS into memory This is stored in memory and is not modified by changes to translation data A save translation will update this date If Date invalid is displayed the timestamp does not contain the expected information...

Page 424: ... ppcss This command lists every file in the path directory of the ppcss board memory filesystem NOTE In this release the forward slash is the default path for listing files in the root directory To list the files in a directory other than the root directory the complete path must be specified ...

Page 425: ...isabled Output The following display shows a typical result when list disabled MOs is entered and no MOs are currently disabled Field Descriptions Maintenance Name Type of maintenance object s disabled ALL is displayed if every MO is either enabled or disabled Location The physical location cabinet carrier slot circuit of the maintenance objects Blank when ALL is displayed under Maintenance Name S...

Page 426: ... or sni A PNC LOC The physical locations cabinet carrier slot number of the circuit packs that constitute the endpoints B PNC LOC In a system with duplicated PNC the physical location cabinet carrier slot number of the circuit packs that constitute the endpoints of the link in the B PNC DS1 CONV Whether or not an endpoint of the link is remotely located by means of a DS1C Converter complex list fi...

Page 427: ...tape In this way the translation data and the data in the transaction log remain compatible Feature Interactions The translation log is written to the memory card as translation data when the save translation command is executed The translation data is time stamped when saved This time stamp is noted when translation is loaded from the memory card and included in every recent change history report...

Page 428: ... 1A0301 tti m cha station 4000 2 18 12 23 1B0401 psa a cha station 4003 2 16 09 44 2B0608 tti s cha station 4003 2 16 09 22 1D0708 psa d cha station 4055 2 15 15 26 01B1203 actr d cha station 2005 EMERGENCY EXT 2 15 15 25 01B1203 actr u cha station 2004 2 15 15 20 SYSAM LCL init cha system param features 2 15 15 17 NET inads dup station 20001 start 30001 call count 8 2 15 15 16 EPN cust add statio...

Page 429: ...ther one recording the moved to port IP phone registrations are also recorded Login User login Actn The action part of the command specifying the operation to be performed This field is truncated after 4 characters to allow enough space for objects and qualifiers and to uniquely identify each action Object The qualifier 12 characters specifying the object of the command Where the object is multipl...

Page 430: ...om the list ip route command Table 7 23 list ip route command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list ip route board UUCss Board Location Example list ip route board 01A03 init inads craft none none list ip route IP ROUTING Route Destination C LAN Route Accepted Number Node Gateway Port Metric Type by C LAN xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx...

Page 431: ... that specifies whether this is a network or host route A network route is a route to every node in the sub network specified in the Destination Node field A host route is a route to the single node specified in the Destination Node field Accepted by CLAN Indicates whether a C LAN circuit pack has accepted the administered IP route Routes for a link are downloaded to the C LAN circuit pack when th...

Page 432: ... Output for S8700 IP Connect list ipserver interface IP SERVER INTERFACE INFORMATION Port Pri Primary Primary Primary State Ntwk Sec Secondary Secondary Secondary Serv Control Of Num Bd Loc IP Address Host Name DHCP ID State State Health 1 1A02 135 122 50 13 135 122 50 13 ipsi A01a IN active 0 0 0 2 2A02 135 122 30 4 135 122 30 4 ipsi A02a OUT active 0 1 1 3 3A02 135 122 50 140 135 122 50 140 ipsi...

Page 433: ...ame DHCP ID State State Health 1 1AXX 198 152 254 1 ipsi A01a ipsi A01a BSY active 0 1 1 1B01 198 152 255 1 ipsi A01b ipsi A01b BSY standby 0 1 1 2 2AXX 198 152 254 2 ipsi A02a ipsi A02a IN actv aa 0 0 0 2B01 198 152 255 2 ipsi A02b ipsi A02b IN standby 0 0 0 3 3AXX 198 152 254 3 ipsi A03a ipsi A03a IN actv aa 0 0 0 3B01 198 152 255 3 ipsi A03b ipsi A03b IN standby 0 0 0 5 5AXX 198 152 254 5 ipsi ...

Page 434: ...call is entered Field Descriptions B Channel The trunk group number and member number of the trunk in use Start Time Day of the month hour and minute when the test call began Duration Expected duration in minutes of the test call M T Port Cabinet carrier slot and circuit number of the port on the Maintenance Test circuit pack in use for the outgoing test call list isdn testcall ISDN PRI TESTCALLS ...

Page 435: ...very port that has been marked unusable with the mark port command Output Field Descriptions Port The physical location cabinet carrier slot port circuit of the marked port Board Type The type of circuit pack with the marked port list marked ports MARKED PORT INFORMATION Port Board Type 1C0101 DIG BD 1C0102 DIG BD Command successfully completed ...

Page 436: ...e is frayed or broken The 24 hour history gives the ability to look back at these measures if the trouble cleared The data is collected at 15 minute intervals over 24 hours for the CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check and collisions for ethernet connections If the data cannot be retrieved for the 15 minute interval N A displays in the field The delta the change from the last inquiry and the total are provi...

Page 437: ...s of the C LAN circuit pack Report sent to printer Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen 1 Examples list measurements clan ethernet 1A05 list measurements clan ether...

Page 438: ...of an N A the delta equals the total Busying out or releasing a board or a port using the reset board command and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters Delta The difference between the current and the previous sample Collision Count The error count for collisions on the ethernet list measurements clan ethernet 1C1017 Page 1 of x Switch Name sierra Date 4 07pm MON AUG 01 1999 C LAN ET...

Page 439: ...ta cannot be retrieved for the 15 minute interval N A displays in the field The delta the change from the last inquiry and the total are provided for each error count After the occurrence of an N A the delta equals the total Table 7 25 list measurements command parameter Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list measurements clan ppp UUCCSSpp prin...

Page 440: ...board or a port using the reset board command and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters Delta The difference between the current and the previous sample Invalid Frame The number of invalid frames detected Invalid frames are the frames that are misaligned CHAP Failures The number of failed attempts for ppp authentication list measurements clan ppp 1C1001 Page 1 of x Switch Name sierra...

Page 441: ...mand parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list measurements clan sockets hourly CCccss Lists the measurements for the last 24 hours from current hour backwards for the indicated board Examples command x none summary yesterday peak summary today peak summary last hour Lists the measurements for the previous daysí peak in socket usage Erl...

Page 442: ...enial peg Total number of times a C LAN socket on the board was needed for a call or link but was not available Range 0 65535 Denials Socket Denial peg Socket Denial peg Socket peg Range 0 99 Time ASB The percentage of time during the measured interval that every C LAN socket on the board was unavailable for use Range 0 99 list measurements clan sockets hourly 01B12 Page 1 Switch Name Date 5 27 pm...

Page 443: ...s summary yesterday peak Page 1 Switch Name Date 5 27 pm WED MAR 26 2002 CLAN SOCKETS PEAK REPORT Peak Hour 0400 Socket Socket Meas Avail Usage Socket Denial Time Hour Board Region Sockets Erl peg peg Denials ASB 0400 01B12 2 xxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx 0400 01B13 3 xxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx 0100 01B14 4 xxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx 0100 01B15 1 xxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xx xx x...

Page 444: ...rter facility The DS1 Converter complex consists of two DS1Cs connected by one to four DS1 facilities This complex allows the distance between two port networks to extend up to 100 miles thereby extending the range of the optical fiber link within limited bandwidth 96 channels A DS1C complex can be used in a direct connectivity configuration or a Center Stage Switch configuration The DS1 converter...

Page 445: ...Secs 4 16 13 20 0 0 4 Severely Err Secs 4 16 13 20 0 0 0 Failed Seconds 4 16 13 20 0 0 0 Command successfully completed list measurements ds1 facility summary 2e01a Switch Name Date 1 26 pm THU APR 16 2002 DS1C Link Performance Measurements Summary Report Counted Since 10 50 am THU APR 16 2002 Number of Seconds Elapsed Into Current 15 min Interval 375 Total of Valid 15 min Intervals in Past 24 hr ...

Page 446: ... 0 0 0 y Command successfully completed list measurements ds1 facility log 2e01a Switch Name Date 1 26 pm THU APR 16 2002 DS1C Link Performance Measurements Detailed Log Report Counted Since 10 50 am THU APR 16 2002 ERRORED BURSTY SEVERELY FAILED VALID DATE TIME SECOND ERR SECS ERR SECS SECONDS INTERVAL 4 16 11 05 0 0 0 0 y 4 16 11 20 0 0 0 0 y 4 16 11 35 0 0 0 0 y 4 16 11 50 0 0 0 0 y 4 16 12 05 ...

Page 447: ...er for the specified 15 minute interval This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N A if the data for the 15 minute interval is invalid Severely Err Secs The value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified 15 minute interval This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N A if the data for the 15 minute interval is invalid Failed Seconds The value of the failed seconds counter for the spec...

Page 448: ...e bursty errored seconds counter for the specified 15 minute interval This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N A if the data for the 15 minute interval is invalid Valid interval This field indicates whether the data for the specified 15 minute interval is valid Data is considered valid when a count for that 15 minute interval If the field has a value of y the data for the four error categories is...

Page 449: ... the indicated region If the switch clock is changed the report shows asterisks Examples Sample IP Codec Hourly Output For Region 4 none summary yesterday peak summary today peak summary last hour Lists the measurements for the previous day s peak for every region with MEDPRO resources administered on the ip interfaces form The peak hour in a given region is the hour at which G 711 Usage Erl G 711...

Page 450: ... are in The increase to 44 regions is required by 75101 2 Range 1 44 DSP Rscs Total IP codec resources voice channels in the region 22 or 31 Medpro 64 IP Media Processors The 22 or 31 multiplier for Medpro depends on admin of codec preferences For R10 a G711 call takes 1 resource while a G723 729 call or a Fax relay call takes 2 resources Range 0 9999 list measurements ip codec hourly 4 Switch Nam...

Page 451: ... G 711 Out of Reg peg The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a G 711 call but was successfully allocated to a resource in another region Out of Region does not include denials If Network regions are interconnected is n o then Out of Region will always be 0 Range 0 65535 G 723 9 Usage ERL Usage in Erlangs of G 723 or G 729 codecs during the measurement int...

Page 452: ... 5 27 pm WED MAR 26 2002 IP CODEC RESOURCE SUMMARY REPORT G711 G723 9 Meas DSP Usage In Reg Out of Usage In Reg Out of Hour Region Rscs Erl peg Reg peg Erl peg Reg peg 0400 1 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx 0300 2 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx 0600 44 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx Command successfully completed list measurements ip codec detail 4 yesterday peak...

Page 453: ...ur backwards for the indicated region If the switch clock is changed the report shows stars as do other reports on R8 none summary yesterday peak summary today peak summary last hour Lists the measurements for the previous dayís peak DSP Usage Erl for every regions with MEDPRO resources administered on the ip interfaces form The peak hour in a given region is the hour at which DSP Usage Erl is a m...

Page 454: ... required by 75101 2 Range 1 44 DSP Rscs Total IP codec resources voice channels in the region 22 or 31 Medpro 64 IP Media Processors The 22 or 31 multiplier for Medpro depends on admin of codec preferences For R10 a G711 call takes 1 resource while a G723 729 call or a Fax relay call takes 2 resources Range 0 9999 list measurements ip dsp resource hourly 4 Switch Name Date 5 32 pm WED MAR 26 2002...

Page 455: ... media processor port was needed in the region for a call but was successfully allocated to a resource in another region Out of Region does not include denials If Network regions are interconnected is n o then Out of Region will always be 0 Range 0 65535 Denied Peg The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a call but could not be allocated in this region nor...

Page 456: ... peak Page 1 Switch Name Date 5 27 pm WED MAR 26 2002 IP DSP RESOURCE SUMMARY REPORT Meas DSP DSP Usage In Reg Out of Denied Out Hour Region Rscs Erl Peg Reg Peg Peg Blk of Srv 0400 1 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx 0300 2 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx 0600 44 xxxx xxxx x xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xx xx xx xx Command successfully completed list measurements ip dsp resource detail 4 y...

Page 457: ...hour will be rank ordered from worst to least worst based on the Hour Average Latency Table 7 29 list measurements ip signaling group command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list measurement s ip signaling group current hour Shows the 10 worst signaling groups for the current hour last hour Shows the 10 worst signaling groups for t...

Page 458: ...6 10000 xx 100 18 18 10000 xx 100 007 07 10000 xx 100 18 21 10000 xx 100 008 08 10000 xx 100 18 24 10000 xx 100 009 09 10000 xx 100 18 27 10000 xx 100 010 10 10000 xx 100 18 30 10000 xx 100 Command successfully completed list measurements ip signaling group last hour Page 1 of 24 Switch Name Date 6 28 pm THU FEB 4 1997 IP SIGNALING GROUPS LATENCY AND LOSS REPORT LAST FULL HOUR 10 WORST PERFORMING ...

Page 459: ... interval Interval Packets Sent The number of packets sent during the interval Interval Packets Lost The percent lost packets for the interval if 100 the corresponding latency is shown as list measurements ip signaling group today Page 1 of 24 Switch Name Date 6 28 pm THU FEB 4 1997 IP SIGNALING GROUPS LATENCY AND LOSS REPORT TODAY S 10 WORST PERFORMING IP SIGNALING GROUPS PER HOUR RANK ORDERED WO...

Page 460: ...time in 24 hour notation from which events are to be listed stop time The time in 24 hour notation up to which events are to be listed Extension The extension associated with the reported event Event The PMS event that was reported to the switch but which could not be sent to the PMS Reason The reason that the event could not be reported by the switch to the PMS Time The time at which the event wa...

Page 461: ...g example shows the output from the list registered ip stations command Table 7 30 list registered ip stations command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions list registered ip stations none Example list registered ip stations init inads craft none none list registered ip stations Page 1 of 1 REGISTERED IP STATIONS Station Ext 2004 2005 2...

Page 462: ...s a hunt group number yy is the number of hunt groups to be displayed Example list skill status 11 count 6 init inads craft none none Table 7 32 Skilled Hunt Group Status Data Group Number Group Name Group Extension Group Type Service Level Supervisor Call Selection Override Activate on Oldest Call Waiting Dynamic Threshold Adjustment Dynamic Percent Adjustment Dynamic Queue Position Service Objec...

Page 463: ...l Extension number of the hunt group skill group and the assigned service level targets represents percentage of calls answered in a specific number of seconds Level 1 Threshold First wait time threshold when value is exceeded calls queued to group of reserve agents list skill status Page 1 of 5 SKILL STATUS S C O D D D Extension Grp Grp Grp L S C T P Q Service Level 1 Level 2 No Name Type S O W A...

Page 464: ...wait time for calls queuing to hunt group skill group OCW Oldest call waiting time in queue for the hunt group skill group list skill status SKILL STATUS S C O D D D Extension Grp Grp Grp L S C T P Q Service Level 1 Level 2 No Name Type S O W A A P SO Level Threshold Threshold S EWT OCW 3 dvit hunt group 3 38000 ucd mia n 20 0 0 6 Skilled agent hunt group 6 60000 ead loa n 20 0 0 7 Skilled agent h...

Page 465: ...ist station movable always shows extensions available for moves anytime list station movable error shows mis administered non serialized extensions list station movable no shows extensions not available to be moved Output Below is an example of list station movable once Feature Interactions None list station movable once STATIONS Port Name Room Cv1 COR Cable Ext Type Hunt to Move Data Ext Cv2 COS ...

Page 466: ...STEM LINKS INFORMATION Location Link Type State Current Faulted Last Fault Channel Path Path Recorded 01A0001 EAL up present none 01B0101 EAL up present present 03 12 2002 17 11 02A0001 EAL up present none 02B0101 EAL up present present 03 12 2002 17 11 03A0001 EAL up present none 03B0101 EAL up present present 03 12 2002 17 11 04A0101 EAL up present none 04B0201 EAL up present none 05A0001 EAL up...

Page 467: ...tatus of the current path This field displays none if the link is down or present if the current path is functional Faulted Path This field shows whether the link has experienced a fault and been switched to another path Present indicates that the link has been faulted at least once None is displayed if the link has not gone down Default is displayed if the default faulted path is being used Last ...

Page 468: ...xx a where xxxxx is the station number and a means that you are requesting ATM specific data Screen 7 12 shows VPI VCI data for a successful 2 party call setup for an S8700 Multi Connect configuration Use the field descriptions to interpret this report The S8700 IP Connect does not support ATM specific trace data Table 7 33 list trace command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Descriptio...

Page 469: ...twork released an SVC after setup rele ase server has sent an SVC release message This is unlikely because the call being traced has already ended by the time the SVC release message is sent add indicates that a party has been added to an SVC drop indicates that the server sent an SVC drop party message save indicates that an SVC has been saved in the DEFINITY ATM cache reuse indicates that an SVC...

Page 470: ...ble by normal call processing The port will be able to be tested etc but calls will not be attempted through the port The marking of a port is saved as part of translation The port can be restored to service by using the clear port command For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters and Common Output Fields ...

Page 471: ...em is entered split This specifies display of status information for one particular split ACD hunt group The qualifier is followed by an ACD hunt group number split number that identifies the split to the switch system This specifies display of split queue status as well as cumulative split information for every split measured by BCMS The qualifier is followed by ACD hunt group numbers split numbe...

Page 472: ... Distribution ACD call from this split This field is real time status data ABAND The number of calls that have abandoned during the current period This field is measurement data AVG ABAND TIME The average time abandoned calls waited in queue before abandoning during the current period The calculation is Total Abandon Time Total Calls Abandoned This field is measurement data and includes only those...

Page 473: ...urrently available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution ACD call in this split Agents are in either the Auto in or Manual in work modes and are not currently on a call If the agent is on another split s call or in After Call Work ACW for another split this agent is not considered available and will not be recorded here This field is real time status data ACD The number of agents in this split...

Page 474: ...the extension If no name exists this field will be left blank This field is translation data EXT The agent s extension This field is translation data STATE The current state of the agent for this split This possible states are Avail ACD ACW AUX Extn In Extn Out OtherSplit and Unstaff If an agent is staffed the agent must also be in one of the above states This field is real time status data TIME T...

Page 475: ...t terminal login is dropped See status health for a description of the fields displayed Output for S8700 IP Connect See status health for field descriptions Monitor health Page 1 of 1 OCC St 11 Sm 0 Cp 28 Idl 61 PNC Simplex ALARMS Maj 0 Min 4 Wrn 13 Pwr comm Sync primary Logins 6 BUSYOUT Trk 0 Stn 0 Oth 0 Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC 1 NoEqp 0 4 13 up 2 NoEqp 0 0 0 up 13 NoEqp...

Page 476: ...ns 4 BUSYOUT Trk 2 Stn 1 Oth 39 comm primary 4 0 0 0 Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC 1 n a 2 1 25 up 1 n a 2 1 25 up 2 n a 0 0 4 up up 3 n a 0 0 3 up up 4 n a 0 0 3 up up 5 n a 0 0 4 up 6 n a 0 0 0 up 9 52 THU MAR 14 2002 Use Status Media Gateways for G700 statusto quit 9 53 THU MAR 14 2002 Press CANCEL to quit ...

Page 477: ...emote Access Violations Date The date of the security violation given as MM DD Time The time of the logged security violation given as HH MM Login The login ID that was entered as part of the violation attempt Port Type The type of port through which the login violation was attempted SYS PORT A dial in connection to a system port MAINT A physical connection to the G3 MT terminal connector on a PN ...

Page 478: ... this command system technician inads cust init nms browse Description The monitor system view1 and view2 commands display a page of output summarizing the condition of the system This on line status report is automatically updated until the command is canceled by pressing the CANCEL key Two display options are available view1 and view2 The current overall system status is available with either of...

Page 479: ...ssages If the pnn number entered is non numeric not administered or invalid in any other way one of following messages will be displayed Object command word omitted please press HELP xx is an invalid identifier press RETURN to execute modified command If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message will be disp...

Page 480: ...nitor system view2 was entered monitor system view1 ATTENDANT STATUS MAINTENANCE STATUS Console no of alarms for trunks 4 Activated 1 2 3 4 5 6 of alarms for stations 2 of alarms for other res 1 Deactivated 7 8 First OSS number has been informed n TRAFFIC STATUS Measurement Hour 1800 Trunk Group Measurement Hunt groups Measurement 4 grps with highest time ATB 4 grps with highest of qued calls Grp ...

Page 481: ...every maintainable object in the system except trunks and stations First OSS number has been informed Has every alarm been reported and acknowledged by the first OSS telephone number If Alarm Origination is not enabled or there are no active alarms the field will be n Measurement Hour The starting time of the period for which the measurement was taken For example if the measurement hour is shown a...

Page 482: ...runk groups Calls aban Total calls that were abandoned by the caller Out blkg The ratio of outgoing calls that are not carried due to overload conditions on a trunk group to the outgoing calls offered Time ATB The percentage of time within the polling interval that every trunk in the trunk group was unavailable for use Time of day The current time of day acquired from the system ...

Page 483: ...status data Interval This field is related to the above field in that it represents the interval being applied with which the call rate is applicable It is normally set to a 36 second time period This field represents a constant status data Max_callrate This field represents the maximum call rate which has been hit during the time since the last hour has passed If for example this command is execu...

Page 484: ...requested pnns This field represents real time status data ts_count This field indicates how many time slots are in use during the last 100 second poling period An internal timer causing polling to occur every 100 seconds The value in this field represents the requests for time slots during that 100 second interim There are three numbers displayed for this field on the form one for each of the pnn...

Page 485: ...eiver is freed and incremented when they are requested Note that this field applies strictly to the TN744 board This field represents real time status data Requests TN744 TTRs The total number of touch tone receivers requested is reflected in this field It is a running count of currently active requests It is decremented when a tone receiver is freed and incremented when they are requested Note th...

Page 486: ...calls are displayed for comparative analysis Only administered trunk groups up to a maximum of 60 are displayed You can specify the starting trunk group For example if you enter 5 trunk groups from group 5 up are displayed hunt groups The hunt group report is similar to the trunk group report In addition to the information contained in the trunk group report this report displays how long the oldes...

Page 487: ...ot include members which have been busied out Q The length of the queue administered for a group W The number of calls waiting in the group queue to be serviced LCIQ The longest call in queue LCIQ indicates the time in seconds the oldest call in the hunt group queue has been waiting to be serviced monitor traffic trunk groups TRUNK GROUP STATUS 22 49 G3 MT DEC 31 2002 S A Q W S A Q W S A Q W S A Q...

Page 488: ... displays the same information as the status trunk command and updates the data automatically every minute or on demand To manually update the display press UPDATE f6 on most terminals Press CANCEL to cancel the command Unlike some monitor commands the terminal login is not dropped when you cancel the command ...

Page 489: ...ng qualifiers unsorted Screen 7 13 ip sorted Screen 7 14 mac sort Screen 7 15 ck dup Screen 7 16 2 Press ENTER Table 7 34 netstat arp command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions netstat arp unsorted ip sorted mac sort ck dup Displays the data in the order it was received Displays the data sorted by IP address Displays the data sorted b...

Page 490: ...4 02 e0 3b db c8 0a 02 11B14 192 011 131 254 00 30 6d 19 5c 0f 03 11B13 135 009 191 254 00 60 2f a9 45 05 04 11B12 135 009 004 092 08 00 20 81 cc b8 05 11B11 135 009 160 247 00 00 81 5a 27 05 06 11B10 135 009 160 223 08 00 20 1d a7 0a 07 12B15 135 009 160 220 08 00 20 7d ff 6a 08 12B14 135 009 191 201 00 00 81 7f 5d e8 09 12B13 135 009 191 203 08 00 20 81 cc b8 10 12B12 224 000 000 000 01 00 5e 00...

Page 491: ...0 08 00 20 75 e3 86 09 03C09 135 009 004 079 08 00 20 7a ff b2 10 10E10 135 009 004 079 08 00 20 7a ff b2 11 05A15 135 009 004 093 08 00 20 81 cc b8 12 07B05 135 009 004 106 08 00 20 83 21 d0 13 11B12 135 009 004 139 00 01 02 60 a5 43 14 10C09 135 009 004 140 00 a0 c9 b2 89 d7 15 03D15 135 009 004 147 00 50 da bf ae 2a netstat arp mac sort Page 1 of 3 Net to Media Table Seq C LAN IP Address Phys A...

Page 492: ...uplicate IP addresses found in the ARP data If the systems finds no duplicate IP address it displays NO DUPLICATE IP ADDRESSES FOUND Field Descriptions netstat arp Values for the netstat arp Type field Net Seq A switch generated sequential reference number C LAN Location of the TN799 C LAN circuit pack IP Address IP address Phys Addr The MAC address Type 1 other The IP address and the MAC address ...

Page 493: ...route The destination is a name administered on the Node Name form which can include the keyword Default indicating the default route Gateway The node name of the Gateway by which the Destination can be reached The Gateway must be a name administered on the Node Name form C LAN Board Pt The circuit pack location for the circuit pack that provides the interface for the route Interface pppn represen...

Page 494: ...t a Type change permissions loginid an administered login such as inads and press Enter b Set the Additional Restrictions field to y in the Administration Commands section of the form c Go to the second or third page of the form d Enter ip address in the list of Restricted Objects and press Enter Default Feature Interaction ping ip address addr node name board UUCSS packet length len repeat repeat...

Page 495: ...can also specify which C LAN circuit pack in the case of multiple C LAN circuit packs If only one C LAN or IP Medpro board circuit pack is present the board qualifier is optional However if the board option is not given it will default to the first C LAN in the same region as the IP address that is being pinged ping packet length The packet length qualifier specifies the packet length of the ping ...

Page 496: ... should reflect the behavior of the type of packets sent IP Media Processor sourced pings should reflect audio transport performance and C LAN sourced pings should reflect control information transport performance Output The following example shows the output from the ping ip address packet length command Screen 7 17 ping ip address report Field Descriptions End pt IP The TCP IP destination addres...

Page 497: ...s specify board The IP address is not in the route table and more than 1 C LAN circuit pack has a default route Invalid internet address Invalid Internet address parameter CCcss is an invalid identifier please press HELP Invalid board location when using the board option Error encountered could not complete request The internal error of not being able to find the port through which the IP address ...

Page 498: ...an active EI circuit pack CAUTION When a port carrier is recycled every port and adjunct supported by circuit packs on that carrier undergoes a service outage CAUTION Never recycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX TN566 TN2169 circuit packs without first shutting down the AUDIX system Doing so can damage AUDIX software Follow instructions on the TN566 TN2169 faceplate these also appear...

Page 499: ...ut from the refresh ip route command refresh ip route form using the all qualifier I Table 7 38 refresh ip route command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions refresh ip route all location Refreshes every C LAN circuit pack in a switch Refreshes the ip route tables in a specific C LAN circuit pack CCcss init inads craft station and trunk...

Page 500: ...ns C LAN Board Location The physical location of the circuit pack in CCcss format cabinet carrier slot Routes Deleted The number of routes that were deleted from the TN799 C LAN route tables Routes Added The number of routes that were added from the TN799 C LAN route tables ...

Page 501: ...ing meaning that the switch does not drop any calls already in service Instructions 1 At the switch terminal type refresh route table and one of the following qualifiers all Screen 7 18 location CCcss See examples in the Board Location field in Screen 7 19 2 Press ENTER Table 7 39 refresh route table command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Inte...

Page 502: ...css format cabinet carrier slot Number of Routes Removed The number of routes that were deleted from the TN799 C LAN route tables Number of Routes Added The number of routes that were added from the TN799 C LAN route tables refresh route table all Page 1 of 1 C LAN Board Location Number of Routes Removed Number of Routes Added 01B11 7 0 01B12 0 0 01B13 0 1 01C05 2 0 01C06 3 0 01C07 0 0 01C08 15 2 ...

Page 503: ...ntered instead of busyout See the description of the related busyout command for details of command syntax If a release command is entered for an object that is not busied out the command will abort Some release commands trigger recovery actions by the system such as the refresh of a standby PNC See the description of the related busyout command for details of command execution and interactions Pa...

Page 504: ...aborts or fails an error code indicating the reason is displayed See Common Abort and Fail Codes at the beginning of this chapter The following display shows a typical result when release board 01c07 is entered release board 01C07 COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Result Error Code 01C07 ANL BD PASS 01C0701 ANL LINE 5409 PASS 01C0702 ANL LINE 5416 PASS 01C0703 ANL LINE 5421 PASS Comma...

Page 505: ...to service after it has been busied out See busyout ipserver interface Parameters Output U cabinet 1 44 Specify the cabinet number with the IPSI board you want to test c carrier Supply the carrier you want to test release ipserver interface 3a COMMAND RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Result Error Code 03A IP SVR PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 506: ...ile path board ppcss This command requests the board ppcss to remove the file given by path If the file does not exist on the source board s filesystem an error message file not found is displayed on the SAT To remove a file in a subdirectory specify the entire path starting at ...

Page 507: ...server interface n This command removes a port network from IPSI control NOTE You may need to busy out the IPSI before you can remove it This command is valid for both S8700 Media Server Multi Connect and IP Connect Configurations Parameters n port network 1 64 Examples remove ipserver interface 5 ...

Page 508: ...oard Host Name of the host machine DHCP ID DHCP client identifier QoS Parameters Call Control 802 1p Call priority setting values are 1 7 Call Control DiffServ DiffServ code point DSCP remove ipserver interface 5 Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 5 Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 5AXX Call Control 802 1p 6 Host ipsi A05a Call Control DiffServ 46 DHCP ID ipsi A05...

Page 509: ...SI board Host Name of the host machine DHCP ID DHCP client identifier QoS Parameters Call Control 802 1p Call priority setting values are 1 7 Call Control DiffServ DiffServ code point DSCP remove ipserver interface 3 Page 1 of 1 IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 3 Socket Encryption y Primary IPSI QoS Parameters Location 3A02 Call Control 802 1p 6 Host 135 122 50 140 Call Control...

Page 510: ...ort circuit pack is specified the reset board command performs a software reset of every administered port on the circuit pack Every port must be busied out before the port circuit pack is reset On critical reliability systems duplicated PNC reset of an Expansion Interface Switch Node Interface Switch Node Clock or DS1 Converter circuit pack on the active PNC is not permitted Standby components mu...

Page 511: ...systems the fiber must be on the standby PNC and the standby PNC must first be busied out See busyout fiber link for associated interactions The list fiber link command displays a list of fiber links and their locations Parameters Examples High reliability system unduplicated PNC reset fiber link 1 Critical reliability system duplicated PNC reset fiber link 1 fiber The administered number of the f...

Page 512: ...prevented by the following conditions The standby PNC is busied out The PNCs are locked by means of the set pnc lock or reset PNC override and lock commands For 5 minutes after a spontaneous PNC interchange or for 30 seconds after a demand interchange an anti thrashing mechanism prevents subsequent interchanges unless the override and lock option is used If the standby PNC s state of health is low...

Page 513: ...erchange is executed Before entering this command look at the states of health of the two PNCs with status pnc This command executes a PNC interchange on a critical reliability system duplicated PNC The standby PNC becomes active and assumes control of active call processing and the active goes to standby If the standby PNC s health is equal to or better than the active PNC s no service disruption...

Page 514: ...or released the reset will abort unless the override and lock option is used Note the following caution regarding the use of the override and lock option See status pnc for details of how to obtain and interpret the states of health and other current information about the PNCs For a more complete explanation of PNC duplication and interchanges see PNC DUP in Chapter 8 Parameters interchange interc...

Page 515: ... PNC s state of health operation of anti thrashing the following message will be displayed Interchange of pnc failed try again using the override and lock identifier See the preceding caution regarding use of the override and lock option If the reset pnc interchange command is unsuccessful due to a busyout of the standby PNC the following message will be displayed Must release port network connect...

Page 516: ... to send the reset ipserver interface command without busying out the IPSI an error message reminds you Use the busy ipserver interface command to take the IPSI out of service Parameters Examples reset ipserver interface 2a Output U cabinet 1 64 Specify the cabinet number with the board you want to test c carrier Supply the carrier you want to test reset ipserver interface 2a TEST RESULTS Port Mai...

Page 517: ...hat is used to display all active SAT sessions If the reset command fails an appropriate error code is printed out Output The following example shows the output from the reset login ID 9 command Table 7 40 reset login session command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions reset login ID n Number of the SAT session 0 999 Example reset logi...

Page 518: ...ance circuit pack Specifying cabinets 1 through 44 resets the EPN s Maintenance circuit pack in the a carrier of the specified cabinet dropping any local login to that circuit pack Output The following screen shows results from reset maintenance on an S8700 Multi Connect system reset maintenance TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01A MAINT 306 PASS Command succes...

Page 519: ...nd for the PKTINT When the PKTINT goes out of service due to errors the IPSI will have a bad PKTINT state of health that will cause the IPSI to go out of service Taking an IPSI out of service also takes the PKTINT out of service Attempts to reset the PKTINT on a busied out IPSI are ignored since the release ipserver interface command will reset the PKTINT Parameters Output for S8700 Multi Connect ...

Page 520: ...N Port network number Use list cabinet to find the PN number s associated with a given cabinet level 1 2 Reset level 1 WARM restart is used to restart a PN that is still fully or partially in service All stable calls are preserved and full service is restored within 35 seconds Reset level 2 COLD restart results in reset removal and reinsertion of all PN circuit packs It is used to recover a PN tha...

Page 521: ...lds and Common Abort and Fail Codes at the beginning of this chapter The following display shows a typical result when reset port network 4 lev 1 is entered reset port network 4 level 1 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 04 EXP PN 956 PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 522: ...demand system reset to a higher level There are certain conditions that result in a higher level reset than that requested These include the following A PNC interchange is already in progress A change in translation administration is in progress Parameters Examples reset system 1 Output Once this command is entered it may not be canceled The screen will display the results of various initializatio...

Page 523: ...and but overrides querying the board to determine whether an announcement autosave is in process This allows resetting the circuit pack if it is in the insane state The following screen shows a reset VAL report reset val 1C07 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01C07 VAL BD 53 PASS ...

Page 524: ... capability is not available if another hardware group test has been started The status of a hardware group test can be obtained with status hardware group When test hardware group all ports is canceled the internally generated port translations for previously untranslated ports are removed If resume hardware group is then entered only customer administered ports will then be tested resume does no...

Page 525: ...in memory is lost The save translation command allows the user to store on disk the translation data currently in memory This operation can be executed as part of scheduled background maintenance or on demand The save translation cannot be executed if translation data is being changed by an administration command Output The following display shows a typical result of entering save translation Fiel...

Page 526: ... file specified in this command becomes the active boot image Table 7 42 set boot image command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Default s Feature Interactions set boot image board location 1 2 The physical location of the circuit pack UUCSS Directs the system to use the Image 1 firmware file Directs the system to use the Image 2 firmware file Example set boot i...

Page 527: ... and busied out before you can issue this command Screen 7 20 Set Ethernet Options screen Table 7 43 set ethernet options command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions set ethernet options location The physical location of the circuit pack UUCSS init inads craft customer set ethernet options 1C07 SET ETHERNET OPTIONS Auto Negotiation y S...

Page 528: ...iation y means that the system automatically negotiates the highest possible network speed n means that you must manually assign the Speed and Duplex fields NOTE If you set the Auto Negotiation field to n the Speed and Duplex fields do not display Speed 10 Mbps 100 Mbps Duplex Half Full ...

Page 529: ...s an IPSI to be active for a given cabinet carrier Parameters Examples set ipserver interface 3a Output U cabinet 1 44 Specify the cabinet number with the IPSI board you want to test c carrier a b d e Supply the carrier you want to test set ipserver interface 3a TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code PN 03 IPSV CTL 3A 1501 PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 530: ...matically and which types require the customer to call in Judicious use of this command can reduce the number of ineffective alarms to the TSC For the set options command to be effective the default settings specified in this section should always be used These settings are not intended to be changed on a per system basis Special circumstances for example special studies may require temporary chan...

Page 531: ...lowing message is displayed All maintenance resources busy try again later Form Input After entering the command set options the user is presented with the following form set options Page 1 of 22 ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS Major Minor On board Station Alarms w w Off board Station Alarms w w On board Trunk Alarms Alarm Group 1 y y Off board Trunk Alarms Alarm Group 1 w w On board Trunk Alarms Alarm Gr...

Page 532: ... maintenance testing discovers them but the severity of the alarm is downgraded to a warning The advantage to the technician here is that the Alarm Log can still be used to pinpoint trunk or station problems reported by the customer Alarmed resources that would normally have been taken out of service are still taken out of service Alarm LEDs light on the port circuit pack and Maintenance circuit p...

Page 533: ... administer the alarm options for the categories listed below in each alarm severity group However in G1 the alarm options can be administered only on a system wide basis for the following categories Major on board trunk alarms Minor on board trunk alarms Major off board trunk alarms Minor off board trunk alarms For Adjuncts an alarm severity option is assigned to each of the following categories ...

Page 534: ...ected by this Command NOTE Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings the alarms should be investigated with user reported problems Analog Lines ANL LINE ANL NE L ANL 16 L Digital Lines DIG LINE Hybrid Lines HYB LINE MET Lines MET LINE ISDN BRI Lines BRI PORT BRI SET Trunk maintenance is characterized by an escalation of a minor alarm to a major alarm if more than 75 percent of the member...

Page 535: ...DS1 BD Adjunct Related MOs affected by this Command NOTE Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings the alarms should be investigated with user reported problems ASAI adjunct ASAI ADJ Avaya adjunct port ATT PORT Ethernet ASAI port LGATE PT Ethernet ASAI adjunct LGATE AJ Ethernet Avaya port ATTE PT Ethernet Avaya adjunct ATTE AJ ISDN BRI ports connected to adjuncts ABRI PORT Although adjun...

Page 536: ...ge presents the following help message m inor n o r eport w arning y es The following is a description of the values Every field on page 2 may have the same values Pressing HELP in any field of page 2 gives the following field help message Enter alarm group number 1 to 4 The alarm group number is a way of distinguishing four different groups of alarms These alarm groups allow the user to specify t...

Page 537: ...ey Every field on page 2 allows the same values If the value in one of these fields is not numeric the following message is displayed Entry must be all digits Every field on page 2 allows the same values If the value in one of these fields is a digit other than 1 2 3 or 4 the following message is displayed Entry out of range Output After the user has entered the changes to the options and pressed ...

Page 538: ...oftware Locked field on the status pnc screen The Interchange Disabled field refers to the antithrashing mechanism Set pnc unlock releases the lock and enables subsequent interchanges to take place If the health of the active pnc has degraded to worse than that of the standby pnc unlocking the active port network connectivity can cause an immediate PNC interchange This condition can be foreseen by...

Page 539: ...el in the specified signaling group to be the primary D channel The primary D channel becomes the secondary D channel A signaling group is a collection of B channels signaled for by a designated single D channel or set of D channels over an ISDN PRI link Parameters group The signaling group identifier is an administered number assigned to each signaling group ...

Page 540: ...or IP Connect This command sets which switch node clock SNC circuit pack in a given switch node carrier is active This command is valid only for a simplex PNC with a Center State Switch CSS Parameters override This qualifier will force execution of the set command regardless of the health of the standby SNC circuit pack ...

Page 541: ... the set command specifies another circuit pack or enable synchronization is entered After an enable synchronization the administered primary or secondary synchronization source will become the synchronization reference If no primary or secondary source is administered the active Tone Clock is used as the synchronization reference This command is not supported when ATM PNC is enabled Output Table ...

Page 542: ...ecution of this command puts both the control channel and the tone time slots on the specified bus Under extremely heavy traffic load tone time slots on the bus that is not currently carrying the tones may be used for call processing Use of the override command under these conditions will cause calls to be dropped See TDM BUS TDM Bus on page 8 1588 for details Parameters Examples set tdm port netw...

Page 543: ...anged Input Form NOTE When the system clock is upgraded from an earlier release the daylight savings time rule on the set time screen defaults to 0 no rule While you can change the daylight savings time rule the system clock is not adjusted automatically until the next transition of the rule set time Page 1 of 1 DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Sunday Month October Day of the Month 24 Year 1999 ...

Page 544: ...anuary through December Year The year must be saved as translation data and passed to the kernel whenever kernel memory is corrupted system reboot or cold I restart or the data is changed Hour 0 23 are valid entries Minute 0 59 are valid entries Second This field is reset automatically and cannot be altered Type Daylight savings daylight savings time Standard standard time Daylight Savings Rule Th...

Page 545: ... or use of this set command has caused an interchange to the B carrier Tone Clock If you have used this command during a maintenance session set the PN Tone Clock back to the A carrier when you are finished assuming it is healthy Tone clock interchanges executed by scheduled daily maintenance cause the standby to become active for 20 seconds and then interchange back to whichever Tone Clock was or...

Page 546: ...mber of the specified port Port The physical location cabinet carrier slot circuit of the port Communication Type The type of communication supported by the channel 56k data 64k data or voice band data Service State The operational status of the access endpoint channel in service idle out of service maintenance busy or disconnected Connected Ports The location of any facility endpoint to which thi...

Page 547: ...h and the destination number consists of a trunk access code 512 and extension 26001 Field Descriptions adm conn The number 1 128 of the administered connection as assigned during administration Connection Number The number assigned to the administered connection Enabled Whether the administered connection is enabled Originator The extension of the access or data endpoint that originates the conne...

Page 548: ...d on the administered connections form Check the contents of the Failure Cause field for information about why the administered connection failed attempting to connect attempting to restore These are transitional states during which an attempt is made to connect or restore the administered connection If an administered connection remains in this state for longer than 1 minute disable and then re e...

Page 549: ...tus attendant status attendant console print The status attendant command displays the operational state of the specified attendant console This information can help in trouble diagnosis and in locating facilities to which the attendant console is connected ...

Page 550: ...ut The following display shows a typical result when status bri port is entered Field Descriptions See Table 7 45 for information on interpreting results of this command Port The location of the ISDN BRI port Service State Whether the ISDN BRI port is in service or out of service Maintenance Busy Whether maintenance testing is currently being performed on the port status bri port 1c1701 Page 1 of ...

Page 551: ...state at layer 2 The switch has successfully started the link and is now capable of exchanging layer 3 frames with the endpoint If the endpoint does not support SPID initialization procedures the voice extension of the endpoint associated with the link is also displayed This is the normal state for a link in a point to point wiring configuration L3 established The link is in the MF_EST_NORM state ...

Page 552: ...ng BRI Port Status Reports Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value ASAI BRI 0 126 Assigned blank blank This is a transitory state for BRI endpoints and ASAI adjuncts The switch is attempting to establish the link 1 Check the endpoint and wiring by following the SPID Facility test s procedure described in the BRI SET section of Chapter 8 2 Repeat status bri ...

Page 553: ...I BRI endpoints BRI ASAI 64 126 Established blank blank This is a transitory state for automatic TEI BRI endpoints that support MIM initialization 1 Verify that SPID administration on the switch and the endpoint are consistent Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established 2 Try replacing the endpoint Repeat status bri port to determine whethe...

Page 554: ...ated with an endpoint on the port See SPID Facility test s procedures described in the BRI SET section of Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures BRI 0 126 L3 Established blank blank An invalid SPID is assigned to link 1 Change the SPID value in the BRI endpoint to match the SPID administered to the BRI endpoint on the port Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of th...

Page 555: ...and endpoint are consistent Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established If it is not go to Step 3 3 Try replacing the endpoint Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established If it is not follow normal escalation procedures Table 7 45 Interpreting BRI Port Status Reports Continued Error ...

Page 556: ...SPID administration on the switch and endpoints are consistent Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established If it is not go to Step 3 3 Try replacing the endpoint Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established If it is not follow normal escalation procedures Table 7 45 Interpreting BRI P...

Page 557: ...ep 2 2 Try replacing the endpoint Repeat status bri port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established If it is not follow normal escalation procedures ASAI 0 126 L3 Restarting ext The switch has sent a Restart message to the adjunct but has not yet received a Restart Acknowledgment message from the adjunct ASAI 0 126 L3 Restarted ext After receiving a Restart Ackn...

Page 558: ...binet SCC single carrier cabinet S75XE System 75 XE pre R1V4 single carrier cabinet blank undetermined cabinet type PN SN Each Port Network and Switch Node located in the cabinet is identified by its PN number or its SN number and PNC designation A or B status cabinet 1 CABINET CONFIGURATION STATUS CABINET CONNECTIVITY STATUS Carrier PN SN Carrier Cabinet PN SN Connectivity Status Location Number ...

Page 559: ...olumn this indicates that the Switch Node carrier is currently the standby in a critical reliability system In the standby column this indicates that the Switch Node carrier is currently active whether or not PNC is duplicated Emergency Transfer The location of the circuit pack containing the emergency transfer select switch PN maintenance Select Switch The current setting of the emergency transfe...

Page 560: ...Switch field would equal NoEqp Table 7 46 status cabinet command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status cabinet init inads craft none none status cabinet 1 CABINET CONFIGURATION STATUS CABINET CONNECTIVITY STATUS Carrier PN SN Carrier Cabinet PN SN Connectivity Status Location Number Type Type Active Standby 01A PN 1 rmc port RMC P...

Page 561: ...8 Output The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form Field Descriptions The following information is displayed for both the Primary and Secondary CDR links whether or not both are used Link State The operational status of the link as follows up The link is established and is capable of supporting the application This is the normal operational state down The link is physi...

Page 562: ...ort or netstat link n for C LAN links See status link n for more information Defaults The test defaults to return the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of the first OSS telephone number Parameter 1 This option returns the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of the first OSS telephone number 2 This option returns the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of the second OSS telephone number ...

Page 563: ...s Conference Endpoint on page 7 320 Description Use the status conference command to solve the following multimedia problems 1 A user unable to join or remain joined to a conference 2 A conference having poor video quality due to it being downgraded because of the automatic algorithms audio AUTO mode and the Px64 video picture specifications 3 A user not receiving full service such as being an aud...

Page 564: ...modes and levels of the conference It also shows certain endpoint information such as which endpoints are in use and which endpoint caused the conference operating mode to change This screen is similar to the administration screens The remainder of the screens display endpoint level data up to 8 endpoints per screen displaying the ports and drop reasons The screen below shows page 1 of a typical a...

Page 565: ...blank audio mode The current operating audio mode G 711 A G 711 mu G 728 G 722 class The type of conference dedicated data mode Data mode capability for this conference none any mlp ww pcs MLP rate MLP Data Rate for this conference blank no of channels The number of channels transfer rate required for each Px64 endpoint 2 Chair Identifies the current chair token holder This field is always blank c...

Page 566: ...7 5 FPS indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of receiving frames Note that there is no indication of the maximum transmit frame rate nor the current frame rate that the MCU can detect The frame rate changes as a function of the amount of motion in the input image QFPS The ACIF frame rate frames per second 30 15 10 7 5 QFPS indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of generating rece...

Page 567: ...apabilities see the T120 field This condition requires analysis of this endpoint s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability f means that the endpoint is in use but is not connected to all media This indicates that the endpoint has declared every required capability channel video audio data but is not fully connected to all conference media at this time This endpoint may be in...

Page 568: ...ability and is receiving video y c e n blank y the endpoint has the required video capability and should be receiving video if the Chl Aud and Dat fields are y c means it downgraded the conference s video quality either from CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate The conference video mode is set by default to CIF and if a QCIF only endpoint joins the conference then the entire conference is m...

Page 569: ...io only capability but is neither a valid video source nor destination y This endpoint has joined a conference at the administered rate of 64 kbps but because rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by another endpoint this endpoint has successfully rate adapted to 56 kbps c The administered bandwidth of a conference is 64 kbps and this endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps The first 56 k...

Page 570: ...on to the MCU In this situation the MCU does not display a mute indication M At the time the command was invoked the endpoint s audio was muted via UDD CRCS Agent interface M displays when both the endpoint and the UCC CRCS Agent have muted the endpoint audio S At the time the command was invoked the endpoint s audio was muted because of solo audio state set by UCC CRCS Agent While in solo audio s...

Page 571: ... is fixed in a particular quadrant an asterisk is affixed before i r For full screen conferences at the time the command was invoked the endpoint s video was the return video to the broadcaster For continuous presence conference in presentation mode r represents a VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image R At the time the command was invoked the endpoint s video was the return video to the bro...

Page 572: ...tes The conference was in VAS mode but the endpoint has asked to be a broadcaster via See Me request and was granted a MCV Multipoint Command Visualize token The See Me feature is only performed in full screen mode blank At the time of the request the endpoint s video was not broadcast return video or part of the mixed image but it is a valid video source status conference page 2 of 2 STATUS OF CO...

Page 573: ...inistration error causes a mismatch in primary secondary designation for a cascade link This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as primaries see Cascading for a description of primary secondary compatibility 2 sec This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a mismatch in primary secondary designation for a cascade link This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered...

Page 574: ...iated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation for example TAC specified in the dial out number or routing pattern points to a trunk group without members or it can indicate a lack of trunk resources for example every trunk member is maintenance busy or every in service member is busy on a call Network Clearing received from DS1 the disconnect came from the network The endpoint that ha...

Page 575: ...IN Inv The user entered an invalid User Identification Number Unknown The system could not determine the cause of the disconnect Wrong num This dial out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects the wrong destination number was dialed This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value See Dial out for details UCC controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint AC Num Administered ...

Page 576: ... 2 L2 summer ports for this group These fields have an entry only for conferences with over 6 participants Dial Out 1 Dial Out 2 Blank Blank status conference endpoint page 1 of 6 STATUS OF CONFERENCE ___ ENDPOINT __ Status ________ Ext _____ Type ____ Manufacturer Country ____ ____ Product _____ Terminal Name _______________ Data Mode _________ MLP Rate ____ Admin Bandwidth ____ Rate Adaptation _...

Page 577: ...the endpoint has declared every required capability channel video audio data but is not fully connected to all conference media at this time This endpoint may be in the process of connecting has failed to connect or is not a valid video source This condition requires analysis of this endpoint s capabilities and mode fields to identify the problem n The endpoint was connected in a conference but ha...

Page 578: ...at fields are y c It downgraded the conference s video quality either from CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate The conference video mode is set by default to CIF and if a QCIF only endpoint joins the conference then the entire conference is made to operate in QCIF with the video clarity downgraded Also the conference frame rate is initially set to the highest frame rate that can then be re...

Page 579: ...e rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by another endpoint this endpoint has successfully rate adapted to 56 kbps c The administered bandwidth of the conference is 64 kbps and this endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps The first 56 kbps endpoint that joins 64 kbps rate adaptable conference triggers rate adaptation see Join Time below n A 64 kbps conference was triggered to rate adapt t...

Page 580: ...quadrant cannot be used as a video source because the endpoint is currently not joined to the conference has suppressed its video or has invalid video to be the video source Notice that at most four endpoints have an or affixed before the Vs field value For quad screen conference in VAS mode the mixed image is broadcast to every endpoint For quad screen conference in presentation mode the mixed im...

Page 581: ...rant participants if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant is affixed before S S displays when both the endpoint and the UCC CRCS Agent have suppressed the endpoint video u For full screen conferences at the time the command was invoked this endpoint s video was being broadcast to other sites The conference was in VAS mode and the broadcaster was designated by the UCC CRSCS Agent interfa...

Page 582: ..._ ___ ______ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 3 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 4 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 5 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 6 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 7 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 8 _____ _____ _________ __ _...

Page 583: ...ription of primary secondary compatibility Agent The reservation agent has caused the call to disconnect for example the agent has changed a connected dial out destination number Bandwidth mismatch between a call and the conference it attempted to join For example a 56 kbps call attempted to join a 64 kbps conference that does not allow rate adaptation BondHshake BONDing handshake drop reason can ...

Page 584: ... the dial out call for the specified dial numbers This problem can be associated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation for example TAC specified in the dial out number or routing pattern points to a trunk group without members or it can indicate a lack of trunk resources for example every trunk member is maintenance busy or every in service member is busy on a call Network Clearing ...

Page 585: ...he system could not determine the cause of the disconnect Wrong num This dial out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects the wrong destination number was dialed This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value See Dial out for details UCC controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint Drop Code A detail code complementing the Drop Reason see above Additional bonding related ...

Page 586: ... STAT CONF EPT IN EPT OUT I O CH1 CH2 AIM y n XRATE y 384 384 384 VIS y n A OUT y n AUDIO n G728 neutral G728 MIS n A IN y n 56 64 y derestrict derestrict derestrict MCV n M FRM y n VIDEO n H 261 H 261 H 261 MFA y n MLP y MLP off MLP off MLP off TALK y 05 MFN y n H MLP y H MLP off H MLP off H MLP off VFCV y 01 FAS y n LSD y LSD off LSD off LSD off BCTK n 02 MCUFAL 00 00 HSD y HSD off HSD off HSD o...

Page 587: ...dcaster was designated by the UCC 7 VAS indicates a Voice Activated Switching broadcaster Next Broadcaster Indicates the endpoint number that is selected to be the next broadcaster Return Vid Indicates the endpoint number that is the current return video The return video can be qualified with the following keywords 1 blank indicates that the return video is the previous broadcaster forced to be re...

Page 588: ...rating mode This may be different from the endpoint in EPT IN or endpoint out EPT OUT modes CMD labels for the various types of mode commands STAT indicates if the conference and the incoming modes are compatible A value of y indicates mode compatibility a value of n indicates that the modes are not compatible EPT IN defines the communication modes coming in from an endpoint EPT OUT defines the co...

Page 589: ...point supports the highest common audio mode HC audio when the administered mode is auto The highest common conference mode is dependent on the administered bandwidth A in the table indicates does not apply Table 7 48 Audio Mode Configurations Admin Mode HC Audio All Support HC Audio Xfer Rate Facility BW Conf Mode Expected Endpoint Mode auto G 728 yes 128k G 728 G 728 auto G 728 no 128k 64k G 711...

Page 590: ...tary H CTX proprietary or SG4 proprietary indicate that video is on in the direction indicated video off when the video is off MLP Multi Layer Protocol data mode When Data Mode is administered as any mlp or ww pcs the MLP mode should be var MLP Other values will affect video status The MLP mode should be MLP off when Data Mode is administered as none Again other values in this mode will affect vid...

Page 591: ...lid source although not necessarily at this moment A value of n is the correct state to be in for video A value of y indicates that MIS was sent to an endpoint and that this endpoint is viewed as a secondary endpoint The endpoint is included in the audio portion of the conference but not the video portion Video will not be sent MCV Multipoint Command Visualize This command is only sent as input I ...

Page 592: ... counter indicates the number of times this endpoint s decoder was muted by the VC board VFMT The video format applicable only to quad screen conferences This field always has a value of n indicating QCIF format H 261 A value of y indicates video framing loss The H 261 counter indicates the number of times the framing was lost A OUT MCU has endpoint framing A IN Endpoint has MCU framing M FRM Mult...

Page 593: ...ay run at higher frame rates and less clear The differences are less observable on very small displays cfps and qfps are the maximum frame rate frames second at which the endpoint can receive video for CIF and QCIF operating modes CIF frame rate values are 30 fps 15 fps 10 fps and 7 4 fps If the endpoint does not support CIF that is the vfmt field is QCIF the cfps value should be blank da_sfg indi...

Page 594: ...384 On a 336 kbps call the endpoint must signal 384 kbps support If an endpoint does not indicate support for 384 kbps on a 384 336 kbps conference the MCU provides Audio Only Communications Mode ACOM For a 2B conference the MCU sets the rate to 2x64 expecting the endpoints to do likewise 64x2 is displayed if this is not displayed there is no 64x2 capability Endpoints may occasionally take 2x64 or...

Page 595: ...during this conference session This counter starts with an initial value of 0 can increment to 64 and wraps around back to 1 status conference endpoint page 5 of 6 ENDPOINT CALL STATUS INFORMATION Join Join Drop Drop Previous Chan Count Time Time Reason Code BondCode DropCode Software 1 __ _____ _____ __________ __ __ __ ________ 2 __ _____ _____ __________ __ __ __ ________ 3 __ _____ _____ _____...

Page 596: ..._________ __ __ 2 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 3 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 4 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 5 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 6 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 7 ___ _____________________ _____________________ __ __ 8 ___ _____________________ ____________________...

Page 597: ... attempting to connect state waiting to retry means that the AC is inactive sleeping and waiting for the retry timer to expire Once the timer expires the AC sends a dial out call and enters the attempting to connect state ACs in this state indicate that the dial out call has failed at least once attempting to connect means that the AC is active on a call but the call has not yet connected connecte...

Page 598: ...cess denied 0x1F 0t31 Reason unknown 0x22 0t34 Trunks unavailable 0x26 0t38 Temporary or facility failure 0x29 0t41 Temporary or facility failure 0x2A 0t42 Resources unavailable 0x2C 0t44 Resources unavailable 0x32 0t50 Access denied 0x34 0t52 Access denied 0x36 0t54 Access denied 0x3A 0t58 Resources unavailable 0x41 0t65 Required capability not implemented 0x42 0t66 Required capability not implem...

Page 599: ...t102 ISDN timer expired 0x7f 0t127 Reason unknown 0xC2 0t194 Ring no answer 0xC8 0t200 Hi and dry no feedback detected 0xC9 0t201 Cascade link administered wrong 0xCA 0t202 CPTR not available to detect failure Table 7 49 Status AC Failure Cause Values Continued Failure Cause hexadecimal Description Continued on next page ...

Page 600: ...port connected to the data module For data channels the channel number is shown instead Service State The operational state of the data module in service idle The data module is connected but idle in service active The data module is connected and in use out of service The data module has been removed from service CF Destination Ext The call forwarding destination if any of the port Maintenance Bu...

Page 601: ...of 1 STATUS FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Location 01C02 Firmware Image File Name usd1v22r1 Target Board Code TN464 Suffix FP Firmware Vintage 22 Schedule Download Y Start Date Time 01 12 2001 13 30 Stop Date Time 01 14 2001 16 30 Target Target Target Target Target Location St Location St Location St Location St Location St 1 01C04 C 11 _____ _ 21 _____ _ 31 _____ _ 41 _____ _ 2 01C06 C 12 _____ ...

Page 602: ...tiated and the state active canceled complete of the hardware group test Output The following display shows a typical result when status hardware group is entered status hardware group page 1 of 1 HARDWARE GROUP STATUS Hardware Group Command State active Number of MOs Tested 11070 Total Number of MOs to be Tested 12300 Percent Complete 90 Elapsed Test Time hr min sec 4 15 30 Repetition Number 1 Pe...

Page 603: ... canceled and then restarted this time excludes the cancel period If the hardware group command has finished it will indicate the length of time it took to complete the command The time is displayed in the HH MM SS format where HH is hours MM is minutes and SS is seconds Repetition Number The number of iterations that have been completed corresponding to the repeat or the continuously option Perce...

Page 604: ...Table 7 50 status health command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status health print init inads craft none none status health PNC Simplex ALARMS Maj 2 Min 1 Wrn 38 Pwr comm Sync primary Logins 4 BUSYOUT Trk 0 Stn 0 Oth 0 Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC Cab EmTr Maj Min Wrn PNC 1 n a 2 1 25 up 2 n a 0 0 4 up up 3 n a 0 0 3 up up 4 n a 0 0 ...

Page 605: ...tly dedicated to system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance rounded to the nearest whole number If a large amount of periodic or scheduled maintenance testing is being performed this number can be high without affecting service CP Percentage of CPU time currently dedicated to call processing rounded to the nearest whole number Call processing has priority over system management and wi...

Page 606: ...ber of current users Cab Cabinet number Cabinet numbers can be related to port network numbers with the list cabinet command Emerg Trans The current setting of the switches on the PN s Maintenance circuit packs that control Emergency Transfer See EMG XFER in Chapter 8 The following states are available Auto Emergency Transfer is under system control and is not currently activated normal operating ...

Page 607: ...NL is not available fe Far End The INL is available but the EAL is not available The following are available for S8700 Multi Connect cabinets only up up When two port networks share a cabinet the first up is associated with the PN contained in A B and C carriers and the 2nd up in D and E up up up When three port networks share a cabinet the first is in carrier A the second in B and C and the third...

Page 608: ...pe MIB data Description Incoming datagram header errors Counter Long ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options and so on Outgoing datagrams with no route available Counter Long ipOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagra...

Page 609: ... does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams Outgoing datagrams discarded Counter Long ipOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discre...

Page 610: ... network region x or status ip network region y will indicate the result as f failed between those two regions Output The following example shows the output for the status network region 1 command Field Descriptions _ Not administered f Failed based on background maintenance ping test result 1 to 7 Passed represents the preferred codec to be used between the two regions and implied meaning that in...

Page 611: ...ctive data because the ISDN trunk may be used for data or voice If the trunk is used for data and the rates are high the trunk should be taken out of service If the trunk is used for voice the trunk may not have to be taken out of service High rates may also be due to some type of power hit on the line Output Port This field specifies the physical address of the ISDN PRI B channel Bit Error Rate T...

Page 612: ...mission internal fail data corrupt and in progress A termination reason of finished means the test finished in the specified time A termination reason of canceled means the test call has been canceled with the clear isdn testcall command A reason of overflow denotes that the bits transmitted have overflowed buffer allocation A reason of no bits means that no bits have been received because the ISD...

Page 613: ...ther is used for automatic wake up events and emergency access events Parameters Examples status journal link wakeup log status journal link pms log print Output The following display shows a typical result when status isdn t 80 1 is entered wakeup log The printer that handles automatic wakeup events emergency access events and scheduled reports pms log The printer that handles housekeeping events...

Page 614: ...hed and is capable of supporting the application This is the normal operational state down The link is physically down extension not administered An extension number for the printer administered has not been assigned on the hospitality system parameters Maintenance Busy Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed upon the link status journal link wakeup log JOURNAL LINK STATUS Link St...

Page 615: ...and end time for the error counter statistics the type and number of active applications The same information that is displayed by the status link command can also be invoked with status clan port or netstat link n for C LAN links Output The following example shows page 1 of the output from the status link n command si w TN794 Net Packet Packet Interface circuit pack Table 7 52 status link n comma...

Page 616: ...ange data module command Service State Displays in service idle in service active disconnected out of service maintenance busy in service inactive active idle Node Name Administered node name for TCP IP endpoint assigned by add change data module command Source IP Address IP address administered for node name assigned with change node name or add change data module commands Enabled y yes or n no M...

Page 617: ...g deliverable to a higher layer protocol Incoming packets discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space status link 1 Page 2 of 4 ERROR COUNTERS Reset Time 03 08 17 38 Last Hour Start Time...

Page 618: ...ded or not sent Outgoing multicast packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a non unicast subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Outgoing transmitted octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Outgoing errored packets The number of ou...

Page 619: ... link n command The form displays every TCP IP socket link that is currently up and active and that is using the Ethernet link n via the C LAN board or the Processor Ethernet interface status link 1 Page 4 of 4 TCP IP Applications Currently Active Service Type Sessions ALARM1 0 ALARM2 0 CDR1 0 CDR2 0 DOLAN 66 PMS 0 PMS_JRNL 0 PMS_LOG 0 SAT 0 SAT_LSTN 0 SYS_PRNT 0 ...

Page 620: ... on or the command may have finished executing while the information is being displayed These updates will not be reflected until the next execution of the command The command will take a snapshot of the commands that the users on the system are currently executing Because of timing the command could be terminated by the time this command finishes displaying the list that is the active command may...

Page 621: ...here are no standby Packet Interface circuit packs or if the standby is inaccessible due to handshake failure or incomplete memory refresh the standby packet interface circuit packs will be in the uninstalled state When a packet interface circuit pack is out of service or uninstalled it is not used to establish and maintain links When the circuit pack returns to in service status new links are aga...

Page 622: ...d circuit pack position number Service State One of the following states is displayed in service out of service or uninstalled The standby state is used in place of in service for standby packet interface circuit packs Total Links The total number of links Active Links The number of links that are in use Failed Links The number of links that failed to be established These links are in a recovery s...

Page 623: ...stem such as the processor These are always tested first Shared Resource Shared resources are those that are used by many users such as trunks These are tested after system critical resources Single User Single User resources are those whose health affects only one user such as voice stations Pre SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The system can be administered to perform interchanges of duplicated components ...

Page 624: ...owing screen applies to processor channels carried over link type of Ethernet or PPP using the TCP IP protocol PROCESSOR CHANNEL STATUS Channel Number 1 Channel Status Administered but not connected Link Number 3 Link Type ethernet Message Buffer Number 0 Reset Count 0 Retransmission Count 0 ...

Page 625: ... which can be integrated with the switch to enhance the service capability for a hotel motel Output The following display shows a typical result when status pms link is entered Field Descriptions Physical Link State Up down or extension not administered will be displayed The PMS link is considered administered only if an extension is given in the system hospitality form Protocol State Up down or b...

Page 626: ...ered on a system with a single switch node CSS and duplicated PNC The output shows a new Inter PN Index field For switches with CSS PNC the index contains 6 fields and for switches with ATM PNC the index contains 4 fields The new fields represent the BFDL fault classes status pnc PORT NETWORK CONNECTIVITY Duplicated no Software Locked Standby Busied Direct Connect no Standby Refreshed Interchange ...

Page 627: ...ndby Refreshed On a duplicated system this field indicates whether the standby PNC has completed a global refresh of duplicated call setup after being released from a busyout or after a system reset NOTE This field does not indicate if a partial unrefresh has taken place in response to a problem on the standby Only a functional state of health on the standby all zeros in the state of health vector...

Page 628: ...e the states of health of both PNCs The fields making up the indexes are 2 digit numbers separated by periods with each field representing a different class of faults The fault class fields are arranged in order of decreasing importance from left to right In other words each field in the index supersedes the following fields in determining which PNC is healthiest The Inter PN Index contains five f...

Page 629: ... BD FC_PER 4 Number of PNs affected by SNI peer link faults for SNIs connected to EIs SNI PEER FC_DS1 5 Number of PNs affected by DS1C facility faults DS1FAC FC_SNIL 6 Number of inter switch node fibers affected by peer or neighbor link faults SNI PEER FC_SNIHW 7 Number of inter switch node fibers affected by hardware faults SN CONF SNI BD FIBER LK Major Alarms Minor Alarms Warning Alarms The numb...

Page 630: ...tatus port network command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status port network print init inads craft none none status port network PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PN Control FIBER PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby LINK Endpoints Mode 1 1 0 282 01A up up 1 A PNC 01A01 01E04 active 01B 1 B PNC 01B02 03E04 s...

Page 631: ...e circuit pack endpoint residing in the specified Port Network The fiber connectivity side will also be displayed i e A PNC or B PNC Endpoints The physical position of each Expansion Interface board that is an endpoint for a fiber link in the specified Port Network is displayed as UUcSS UU represents the cabinet number c represents the carrier and SS represents the slot position A high reliability...

Page 632: ...eans that the Tone Clock is out of service and has failed certain maintenance tests When Control Links are down this field is blank System Clock This field shows which IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack supplies the system clock for that port network by displaying the mode of the Tone Clock An active mode means that the Tone Clock supplies the system clock Only one Tone Clock in each Port Network can...

Page 633: ...displayed y or n When Control Links are down this field is blank Minor Alarms Whether minor alarms are logged against the packet bus that is being displayed y or n When Control Links are down this field is blank Bus Faults This field indicates the number of faulty bus leads where a fault is defined as either shorted to another lead or stuck at some value This field may take on any integer value be...

Page 634: ...nnel The processor channel number 1 128 Channel Number The processor channel number 1 128 Channel Status The state that the channel is in 1 16 The following describes the various channel states Reset Count The number of times that the reset has been issued for this channel Message Buffer Number The number of message buffers currently allocated for communications on this channel Link Number The phy...

Page 635: ...status psa Issue 1 May 2002 7 379 555 233 143 status psa See status tti on page 7 406 ...

Page 636: ...hannels signaled for by a designated single D channel or combination of D channels Parameters Output The following information is given for both primary and secondary D channels if any group An administered number associated with each signaling group status signaling group 1 Page 1 of 1 STATUS SIGNALING GROUP Group ID 1 Type facility associated signaling Group State in service Primary D Channel Li...

Page 637: ...channel configurations non facility Members can include trunks on several different associated DS1 facilities An explicit identifier specifies members of the DS1 trunk group across its ISDN PRI link A single D channel on one facility provides signaling for every member With D channel backup a second D channel is assigned to assume control of signaling if the primary D channel fails Group State The...

Page 638: ...ly set up to the printer extension not administered An extension has not been administered for the system printer on the features related system parameters form Number of Retries The number of times the switch has tried to establish the link since a request to set it up has been received This field is displayed only when the link is down The maximum value displayed is 999 Maintenance Busy Whether ...

Page 639: ...extension per dial plan Report sent to printer Examples status station 30001 status station 83277 status station 83277 print init inads craft cust browse none none status station 30001 page 1 of 2 GENERAL STATUS Administered Type 6408D Service State No hardware assigned Connected Type N A Download Status pending Extension 30001 SAC Activated no Port X User Cntrl Restr none Call Parked no Group Cnt...

Page 640: ... Download Status Shows status of downloading the soft keys specified on the status form SAC Activated Whether send all calls is activated yes or no User Cntrl Restr One or two of the following none total stat stat outward or terminate Group Cntrl Restr One or two of the following none total stat stat outward or terminate CF Destination Ext Call forwarding destination extension if any Message Waiti...

Page 641: ... Number Serial Number This is the serial number of the telephone This field may show Unavailable if the software is unable to determine the Serial Number This field can also show Errored if the serial number received is not in the correct format Station Lock Active Indicates whether the station has been locked using Station Lock status station 30001 page 2 of 2 GENERAL STATUS CONNECTED STATION INF...

Page 642: ...d descriptions are the same as Field Descriptions Page 1 status station for Multi Connect on page 7 384 status station 70103 Page 1 of 5 GENERAL STATUS Administered Type 4606 Service State in service off hook Connected Type 4606 Download Status complete Extension 70103 SAC Activated no Port S00003 User Cntrl Restr none Call Parked no Group Cntrl Restr none Ring Cut Off Act no CF Destination Ext Ac...

Page 643: ...erial Number unavailable Station Lock Active no status station 70103 Page 3 of 5 CALL CONTROL SIGNALING Switch IP IP Port Switch end IP Addr Port Set end IP Addr Port IP Signaling 01A0317 172 22 22 177 1720 172 22 22 8 3244 H 245 Node Name gert_clan1 Network Region 1 1 AUDIO CHANNEL Switch IP IP Port Other end IP Addr Port Set end IP Addr Port G 711MU Audio 01B0905 172 22 22 233 2960 172 22 22 8 2...

Page 644: ...ion H 245 Set end IP Addr and Port Set end H 245 IP signaling address and IP Port IP Address is of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where xxx have decimal values 0 255 IP Port is 0 65535 This field is blank for IP SoftPhone endpoints and those endpoints using Q 931 tunneling of H 245 This field will be blank for an unregistered or inactive H 323 station Node Name for Call Control Label administered for an...

Page 645: ...ed within Q 931 and all H 245 fields will not be displayed This field does not apply to IP SoftPhone endpoints Registration Status Identifies the registration and authentication status of the IP endpoint note that an unregistered IP SoftPhone cannot be identified as an IP endpoint Possible values are unregistered H 323 station only the endpoint is unregistered registered not authenticated H 323 st...

Page 646: ...tion 70103 Page 4 of 5 NETWORK STATUS Average Jitter ms Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds Last Ten Seconds more than 255ms 100 loss 0 0 Per Call Info 0 0 0 0 Out of Order Counter 0 0 0 SSRC Change for Call 0 0 0 Last Rx Sequence 5450 0 0 Last Tx Sequence 22932 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SUMMARY Worst Case this Call ms 1 Worst Case this Call 0 Average this Call ms 0 Average this Call 0 Current Buffer Si...

Page 647: ... connection Last Rx Sequence No Last received data packet sequence number Last Tx Sequence No Last transmitted data packet sequence number Worst Case this Call Jitter the worst case 1 second jitter buffer size ms experienced during the current connection Packet Loss the worst case 1 second packet loss experienced during the current connection Average this Call Jitter the average jitter buffer size...

Page 648: ...e of audio codec active for the connection Possible values are G 711 MU G711 A G 729A G 723 1 6 3 G 723 1 5 3 PCM 711 MU 711 A 729 729A 729B 729 AB or 723 1 5 3 6 3 ss Indicates whether silence suppression is active on this audio stream Possible values are on or off pkt Size of packet carrying the audio dst port The port address of one of the other parties to which the statused station has a conne...

Page 649: ...de are displayed along with any alarms logged against the specified switch node Parameters Output The following display shows a typical result when status switch node is entered SN Normally switch node 1 resides in the PPN cabinet and switch node 2 if present resides in the nearest PN cabinet The switch node number defaults to 1 status switch node 1 page 1 of 1 switch node STATUS Major Minor Warni...

Page 650: ...it means that PNC is not duplicated Major Alarms The number of major alarms logged against the switch node carrier that is being displayed Minor Alarms The number of minor alarms logged against the switch node carrier that is being displayed Warning Alarms The number of warning alarms logged against the switch node carrier that is being displayed Active SNC Location The physical position of the ac...

Page 651: ...This command lists the synchronization source for the system The following examples show the output for the status synchronization command Output for S8700 Multi Connect status synchronization SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS Stratum Level 4 Maintenance Name TONE BD Location 01B Switching Capability Enabled Excessive Reference Switching No Command ...

Page 652: ... on page 2 of the report For port networks with IPSI this command also provides status for a BFD link The information shown is similar to other link types Parameters Examples status sys link 1e0201 Output for S8700 IP Connect The following display shows a typical result when status sys link 8a02 is entered UUCSSpp The link is specified by giving the location of the port associated with the link st...

Page 653: ...e and time that the link came up Faulted Path The status of the faulted path if any present The path of the link has been faulted at least once none There is no record of the link having gone down default The default faulted path is being used Last Fault The date and time at which the most recent fault occurred Current Hardware Path The location maintenance name and alarm information for each hard...

Page 654: ...hich only exist in port networks with IPSIs status sys link 2a0101 Page 1 of 2 Location 02A0101 Type Chan BFDL Alarms none Current Path present State up Time Up 03 12 2002 17 12 Faulted Path none Last Fault Current Hardware Path Maintenance Maintenance Location Name Alarms Location Name Alarms 03A PKT INT none PN 03 PKT BUS none 03A01 EXP INTF none 3 A PNC FIBER LK none 01E02 SNI BD none 01E03 SNI...

Page 655: ...intenance state However if you execute the status command on the far end it will never indicate that the trunk is in a maintenance state This is because the near end is unable to inform the far end of its maintenance state status The monitor trunk command displays the same information and updates the screen automatically every minute or on demand Parameters Examples status trunk 78 status trunk 80...

Page 656: ...maint FE idle pending in service pending maint or disconnected NE Near End and FE Far End refer to which end of the trunk has placed the facility in its current state Explanations of these service states for each type of trunk appear in the maintenance object descriptions in Chapter 8 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures Maintenance Busy Whether maintenance testing is currently being performed upo...

Page 657: ... Q 931 08A0617 192 168 18 41 10071 172 17 17 107 7020 H 245 Audio H 245 Tunneled in Q 931 no Audio Connection Type ip tdm status trunk 1 19 TRUNK STATUS Trunk Group Member 01 19 Service State in service active Port T00123 Maintenance Busy no Signaling Group ID 1 CA TSC state not allowed MM Conference ID 8 MM Endpoint ID 2 Connected Ports S00004 Switch IP IP Port Near end IP Addr Port Far end IP Ad...

Page 658: ... ID 1 CA TSC state not allowed MM Conference ID 8 MM Endpoint ID 2 Connected Ports S00004 Switch IP IP Port Near end IP Addr Port Far end IP Addr Port Q 931 12B1217 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn H 245 12B1217 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn G 711 MU Audio T00123 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn H 245 Tunneled in Q 931 no Audio Connection Type ip direct status t...

Page 659: ...and for a non IP station or the connection is hairpinned or shuffled then the packet loss and jitter size information page 4 does not appear Refer to Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more information status trunk 11 3 Page 2 of 2 TRUNK STATUS NETWORK STATUS Average Jitter ms Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds Last Ten Seconds 0 0 Per Call Info 0 0 0 ...

Page 660: ...p Examples status tsc administered 1 status tsc administered 1 2 print Parameters Output The following display shows a typical result when status tsc administered 1 1 is entered signaling group An administered number associated with each signaling group tsc index A number associated with each TSC in a signaling group status tsc administered 1 1 ADMINISTERED NON CALL ASSOCIATED TSC STATUS TSC TSC I...

Page 661: ...bout to come up Establish This field pertains to the switch responsible for the origination of the administered TSC A state of as needed shows that the TSC is established on an as needed basis A state of permanent shows that the TSC is permanently established Enabled Y indicates that the administered TSCs have been enabled Congested A congested state indicates that the network cannot handle the re...

Page 662: ... the background maintenance task started To activate the TTI background maintenance task enter y in the TTI field on the Feature Related System Parameters screen Use status psa to see the same screen It shows that the status of PSA is dependent on the state of TTI Table 7 56 status tti command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions status...

Page 663: ...ns that TTI is not enabled voice data shows the type of TTI ports that are being generated or removed of Boards Completed Number of TTI supported circuit packs that were processed by the background maintenance task The ports on a completed circuit pack if unadministered were translated as TTI ports if administered the administration was removed status tti status psa TTI PSA STATUS TTI Background T...

Page 664: ...k Percent Complete A ratio of the of number of circuit packs completed to the total number of circuit packs Elapsed Time Since Task Started Elapsed time in hours minutes seconds since the TTI background task was started This field is blank if the task is not active If the task is completed or suspended this field shows the elapsed time up to when the job finished or was suspended ...

Page 665: ... field descriptions status val ip 1C02 IP STATUS Reset Time mm dd hh mm Last Hour Start Time mm dd hh mm End Time mm dd hh mm Incoming Received Octets Datagrams Discards Hdr Errors Since reset 1 0 0 Last Hour 0 327680 0 4294901760 Outgoing Transmitted Octets Datagrams Discards No Routes Since reset 65535 0 0 0 Last Hour 0 0 0 0 Datagrams w o Routes ICMP Dest Unreachables ICMP Redirects Since Reset...

Page 666: ...iated with the active alarms in the alarm log This command provides a query form to help the user narrow the selection of alarmed objects Once the form is filled out the user presses ENTER and the hardware associated with the selected alarm log entries is tested The results will be displayed in standard test output and status information will be displayed on the message line as the command progres...

Page 667: ...e current alarm tested When this option is specified the user is presented with the alarm information and prompted for a keypress The user may enter CANCEL to abort the command ENTER to test the currently displayed alarm NEXT ALARM function key to move to the next alarm PREV ALARM function key to move to the previous alarm without testing the currently displayed alarm If this option is given then ...

Page 668: ...execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the diagnostic tests This may involve both destructive and nondestructive tests repeat number The number specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to be repeated Number may be any integer between 1 and 100 clear This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm is cleared or a single test in the sequence fail...

Page 669: ...following fields Cabinet This allows the technician to test all alarms associated with a particular cabinet Alarms for a cabinet are referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3 which is assigned during cabinet administration Port Network This allows the technician to test all alarms associated with a particular port network Alarms for a port network are referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3 Bo...

Page 670: ...tween 0 31 To hour Enter hour between 0 23 To minute Enter minute between 0 59 Cabinet Enter cabinet number 1 3 Port Network Enter port network number 1 3 Board Number Enter 4 character board number cabinet 1 3 carrier A E slot 0 21 Port Enter port number cabinet 1 3 carrier A E slot 0 21 circuit 1 24 test alarms repeat 1 HARDWARE TEST ALARM QUERY The following options control which alarms will be...

Page 671: ...e trkbd trkcrk trunks vc vsp wideband wireless For a table describing the category entries in greater detail see display errors Extension Enter assigned extension or blank Trunk group Enter group number 1 99 Trunk member Enter group member 1 99 or blank Major x is an invalid entry please press HELP Minor x is an invalid entry please press HELP Warning x is an invalid entry please press HELP Interv...

Page 672: ...try Port Port invalid Category xxxxxxxx is an invalid entry please press HELP Extension Entry must be all digits Extension not assigned Trunk group Entry must be all digits Group not assigned or group assigned but with no member Trunk member Entry must be all digits Number invalid Group member not assigned Trunk or trunk group invalid ...

Page 673: ... group numbers Alarm Type Major minor or warning This is an indicator to the seriousness of the alarm raised Service State RDY ready for service OUT out of service or IN in service This is the current service state of the station and trunk ports shown Port The port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the maintenance object that is being tested Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object th...

Page 674: ...mmand and another through the test board command If this command should attempt to test a board that is currently being tested by another user a error message is displayed test alarms Page 1 ALARM ENTRY Port Maintenance On Alt Alarm Svc Ack Date Alarm Name Brd Name Type State 1 2 Alarmed Count 01C03 UDS1 BD n WARNING 03 06 16 48 1 4 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error ...

Page 675: ...cify testing of an entire trunk group or an individual trunk using either group member addresses or port and circuit pack location The type of test call the number of the testing line on the far end switch and various other parameters must be administered on the Trunk Group form before the command can execute ATMS the operation of this command and the measurement reports are described in Automatic...

Page 676: ...r more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters on page 7 6 and Common Output Fields on page 7 9 The following display shows a typical result when test board 1D07 is entered and slot 1D07 hods a Digital Line circuit pack with 7 ports administered test board 1d07 short TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01D07 DIG BD 52 PASS 01D0701 DIG LINE 5...

Page 677: ...Parameters For more information see the following sections Common Input Parameters and Common Output Fields test cdr link primary secondary short long repeat number clear schedule primary secondary A system may have up to two CDR links a primary that is normally used and a secondary that serves as a backup in case the primary fails This qualifier specifies which link to test Primary is the default...

Page 678: ...ions The test customer alarm command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the leads of the EPN s Maintenance circuit pack in a specified cabinet These leads are connected to customer equipment and provide a means of alerting the system administrator and INADS when that equipment fails The alarm is activated when a relay on the connected equipment is closed for 1 minute The cabinet default is 1 ...

Page 679: ...143 test data module test data module extension short long repeat clear schedule The test data module command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a data module or a data channel Test results are determined by the interface to the digital line port ...

Page 680: ...is not allowed unless the facility has been busied out Parameters Examples test ds1 facility 04a01d test ds1 facility 03a01a sh c UUCSSf A DS1 facility is specified by the location of the DS1 Converter circuit pack and a letter from a to d corresponding to the four facilities connected to the circuit pack external loopback This specifies a destructive test that sends a test pattern to an external ...

Page 681: ...oop 01c08 test ds1 loop 1 3c03 cpe loopback jack test ds1 loop 1 3c03 cpe test ds1 loop 10c03 end test ds1 loop 02d12 fa test ds1 loop 02d12 inj Description The test ds1 loop command will validate that the board exists at the specified location that the board is a TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface board Based on the command parameter a long duration loopback span test or series of sho...

Page 682: ...pback jack if it differs from the default of 0x47F Specify the number of bits in the loop up code as well as the actual bit pattern in hexadecimal far csu loopback test begin1 For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards this causes a long duration loopback test to be setup through the far end CSU channel service unit one way span test begin1 For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards this...

Page 683: ...every available maintenance resource is currently in use then the following message will be displayed All maintenance resources busy try again later If the test ds1 loop command is executed and the G3 Version field on the System Parameters Customer Options form is not V3 or later then the following message will be displayed G3 Version must be V3 or later If the test ds1 loop command is executed on...

Page 684: ...ven time on a DS1 span Port The port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the maintenance object that is being tested Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested Alt Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object Test No The actual test that is being executed Result The result of the individual test PASS ABORT FAIL NO BOARD DISABLED EXTRA BD Error Code A...

Page 685: ...s a hardware diagnostic test on every administered external device s alarm port If an administered external device s alarm port is entered this command performs a hardware diagnostic test on that port The test PASSES if the external device is not reporting an external device alarm and FAILS if the external device is reporting an external device alarm If the technician specifies a port it must be a...

Page 686: ...nor designate the name of the major or minor Maintenance circuit pack alarm connection for cabinet UU depends upon the auxiliary connector of the Port Network Thus both a major and minor port can be administered with major minor or warning alarms The all location is used to test every administered external device s alarm port on analog line boards and maintenance boards repeat number The number sp...

Page 687: ...istered more descriptive name of the external device alarm Test No The actual test that is being executed Result The result of the individual test PASS ABORT FAIL NO BOARD DISABLED EXTRA BD Error Code A system generated number that tells why the release failed or aborted A detailed list of the codes according to Test No is provided for each MO test eda external device alrm all TEST RESULTS Port Ma...

Page 688: ...ycle power on active or standby EPN control or switch node carriers When a port carrier is recycled all service and links to ports on the carrier are dropped If a carrier containing an active EI or Tone Clock is recycled all service to that cabinet will be disrupted There are 10 Maintenance Objects involved in this test Note that although the CUST ALARM maintenance object is part of the environmen...

Page 689: ...lay shows a typical result when test environment 1 is entered on an S8700 IP Connect system test environment 1 Page 1 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01 RMC ENV 77 PASS 01 RING GEN 117 PASS 01 RING GEN 118 PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 690: ... test failed ip network region xxx where xxx is in the range of 1 250 for r and 1 80 for si csi d Output The following display shows a typical result when test failed ip network region is entered field description NR CONN represents the Maintains Object Name for this test XXX YYY represents the pair of failed network regions under test ZZZ represents the test number to be assigned by the maintenan...

Page 691: ...ised of a bi directional optical fiber connection optionally extended via a DS1 Converter complex with each end terminated on either an Expansion Interface EI or a Switch Node Interface SNI Fiber links provide the medium for circuit and packet connections between PNs and for communication between the EPNs The long sequence includes destructive tests and requires that the fiber link be busied out f...

Page 692: ...tems duplicated PNC there are two fibers associated with every fiber link number A PNC and B PNC distinguish one from the other test fiber link 1 b pnc TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 1 B PNC FIBER LK 777 PASS 1 B PNC FIBER LK 759 PASS 1 B PNC FIBER LK 989 PASS 1 B PNC FIBER LK 237 PASS 1 B PNC FIBER LK 238 PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 693: ...rt network PNC A or B circuit pack or the entire system When this command is executed the tests that are run vary depending on the options chosen and types of hardware in the group Some tests are run concurrently to speed execution so test results for several maintenance objects may be intermixed Output The following shows sample results on an S8700 IP Connect system test firmware download No acti...

Page 694: ... UUCSS print schedule Test hardware group Only one test hardware group command can be active at any given time TTI If the test hardware group command is issued with the all ports option while the TTI background task is active some unadministered ports may not be tested In addition active alarms on line ports may be cleared by this task The status tti command may be used to determine the state of t...

Page 695: ...eduled and Periodic Maintenance When a test hardware group command is entered all activity related to scheduled background maintenance periodic background maintenance and data audits is suspended for the duration of the execution of the test hardware group command When a test hardware group command is canceled or when the test hardware group command completes all suspended periodic scheduled and d...

Page 696: ... V2 TN760C Tie Trunk TN437 Tie Trunk G3r V2 TN762 Hybrid Line TN438 Central Office Trunk G3r V2 TN762B Data Line TN439 Tie Trunk G3r V2 TN763C Auxiliary Trunk TN447 Central Office Trunk G3r V2 TN769 Analog Line with Message Waiting TN458 Tie Trunk G3r V2 TN784 Digital Line TN459 DID Trunk G3r V2 TN785 16 Port Analog Line TN465 Central Office Trunk G3r V2 TN2135 Italian 16 Port Analog Line G3r V2 T...

Page 697: ... when test hardware group system is entered on an S8700 IP Connect system test hardware group system Page 1 of 1 TEST HARDWARE GROUP SELECTIONS Select the desired options for the specified test Test sequence short Test repetition repeat_____ count 1 Output OPTIONS HARDWARE OPTIONS Auto page n All ports n Background n Failures n est hardware group system Page 1 of 1 TEST HARDWARE GROUP SELECTIONS S...

Page 698: ... cabinet number with the IPSI board you want to test c carrier Supply the carrier you want to test test ipserver interface 3a TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 03A TONE BD 46 PASS 03A TONE BD 52 PASS 03A0201 ETR PT 42 PASS 03A0201 ETR PT 43 PASS 03A0202 ETR PT 42 PASS 03A0202 ETR PT 43 PASS 03A0203 ETR PT 42 PASS 03A0203 ETR PT 43 PASS 03A0204 ETR PT 42 PASS 03A...

Page 699: ...aintenance Test circuit packs in the system For more information see Test 258 under ISDN TRK DS1 ISDN Trunk on page 8 989 Parameters For more information see Common Input Parameters Examples test isdn testcall 78 2 minutes 10 Output group member Specify the trunk over which to originate the test call minutes Specify the duration of the test call in minutes from 1 to 120 The duration defaults to 8 ...

Page 700: ...ink For example as part of a test maintenance software may busyout a component of the link causing the link to drop The system may then perform frequent attempts to re establish the link This can delay recovery of the component since it must be idle for certain tests to take place Busying out the link will prevent the system from these attempts to set up the link Remember that a busyout will tear ...

Page 701: ...ul for identifying a port network cabinet or PNC A or B When test led is entered the red green and yellow circuit pack LEDs are turned on until all administered carriers in the specified group have been lit for 2 seconds They are then turned off in the same order in which they came on The cycle can be repeated a number of times with the repeat option Once every repeat cycle is completed every affe...

Page 702: ...nect system Field Descriptions Port Each link is identified by a number 1 16 assigned on the Communication Interface Links form Display communication interface links shows the location and identification of each link Port The location of the port on an Ethernet circuit pack associated with the link being tested test link 1 long TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code ...

Page 703: ...orm This command is available for both S8700 Multi Connect and S8700 IP Connect configurations The long parameter is not available for the S8700 media server configurations Output Field Descriptions Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object Alt Name Alternative way to identify maintenance objects Test No The test being executed Result Test r...

Page 704: ...rface EI link reset and sanity functions are tested The long test resets the PN s Maintenance circuit pack causing a local login via the Maintenance board to drop The optional parameter C specifies a cabinet The cabinet number defaults to 1 Output The following display shows a typical result when test maintenance 2 is entered test maintenance 2 TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No R...

Page 705: ...e Loop Around test 886 is included in the test sequences of active packet interface circuit packs only The Active Standby Peer Link test 888 is included in the test sequences of the standby packet interface circuit packs only If the packet interface circuit pack is in the out of service or uninstalled states no demand tests as well as scheduled periodic and error tests will run See also reset pack...

Page 706: ...st No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer to the detailed list of the codes by test number for each MO test packet interface 2a TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 02A PKT INT 886 PASS 02A PKT INT 887 PASS Command successfully completed Comm...

Page 707: ... 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen 2 Examples test pkt port network 1 l test pkt port network 2 sh r 2 test pkt port network 2 sh schedule test pkt port networ...

Page 708: ... test by test basis with one line of data for each test result Field Descriptions Port A port network number 1 44 Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer to the detailed list of the code...

Page 709: ...The test signaling group validates the administration of a signaling group and runs a series of diagnostic tests on it An ISDN PRI signaling group is a set of B channels whose signaling messages are carried together on a designated D channel or set of D channels Parameters group An administered number associated with each signaling group ...

Page 710: ...nt on line synchronization reference The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication between the switch and other PBXs COs or customer premises equipment The subsystem is made up of the TDM bus clock DS1 trunk circuit packs and maintenance and administration software resident Parameters The following screens show test results for the test synchronization command for S8700 I...

Page 711: ...ab where cab a cabinet number 1 64 test synchronization all TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01 SYNC 417 PASS 02 SYNC 417 PASS 03 SYNC 417 PASS 04 SYNC 417 PASS 05 SYNC 417 PASS 06 SYNC 417 PASS 07 SYNC 417 PASS 08 SYNC 417 PASS 09 SYNC 417 PASS 10 SYNC 417 PASS 11 SYNC 417 PASS 12 SYNC 417 PASS 13 SYNC 417 PASS 14 SYNC 417 PASS 15 SYNC 417 PASS Command success...

Page 712: ...e Commands 555 233 143 7 456 Issue 1 May 2002 Output for S8700 Multi Connect test synchronization TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code SYNC 417 PASS Command successfully completed ...

Page 713: ...onents that affect the behavior of the link The number of components of a given system link hardware path depends on the system configuration and type of system link The following links are examples of system links EAL Expansion Archangel Link INL Indirect Neighbor Link and PRI PRI signaling link Parameters Examples test sys link 2e0201 current l schedule test sys link 2e0201 faulted r 10 test sys...

Page 714: ... No Result Error Code 01E0201 SYS LINK LNL 985 PASS 01A1 PKT INT 886 PASS 01A1 PKT INT 887 PASS PN 01 PKT BUS 572 PASS PN 01 PKT BUS 573 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 237 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 238 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 240 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 241 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 589 PASS 01E01 EXP INTF 316 PASS 1 A PNC FIBER LK 777 PASS 1 A PNC FIBER LK 759 PASS 1 A PNC FIBER LK 237 PASS 1 A PNC FIBER LK 238 PASS press CANC...

Page 715: ... 459 555 233 143 test tdm test tdm port network PN short long repeat clear schedule The test tdm command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the time slots of the specified TDM bus Both halves a and b of the TDM bus are tested ...

Page 716: ...clock UUC short long repeat clear schedule The test tone clock command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the three maintenance objects on a specified IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack TONE BD TONE GEN TDM CLK See the information on each of these MOs in Chapter 8 Maintenance Objects ...

Page 717: ...1 555 233 143 test trunk test trunk group member short long repeat clear schedule The test trunk command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an entire trunk group or an individual trunk group member depending on the options entered ...

Page 718: ...est tsc administered signaling group tsc index repeat schedule The test tsc administered command runs diagnostic tests on any type of administered TSCs Temporary Signaling Connections on a signaling group A switched services request to run the TSC heartbeat test is also performed ...

Page 719: ...destination TN IP circuit packs include TN799B or later suffix C LAN board TN802B Medpro board TN2302 IP Medpro board The output form lists Hops traversed from source to destination IP addresses of the hop points and the final destination Observed round trip delay from the source to each hop point If no reply is received from a potential hop point the IP Address field contains stars which indicate...

Page 720: ...nt IP Media Processor sourced pings should reflect audio transport performance and C LAN sourced pings should reflect control information transport performance Table 7 58 traceroute command parameters Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Permissions Defaults Feature Interactions traceroute ip address node name board clan port where IP address is www xxx yyy zzz from node name form cabinet...

Page 721: ...the entry is repeated with an error code immediately following the time Error codes and their meanings are Unable to reach port N Unable to reach network H Unable to reach host P Failure between endpoints F Need fragmentation of data packet S Source return failure X Packet blocked by filter IP Address The 32 bit network address traceroute ip address 135 9 1 22 board 1C14 clan port 1 17 TRACE ROUTE...

Page 722: ...Maintenance Commands 555 233 143 7 466 Issue 1 May 2002 ...

Page 723: ... 143 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures NOTE This chapter does not contain maintenance objects MOs for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System DWBS Refer to the appropriate maintenance documentation that accompanies DWBS products ...

Page 724: ... not intended to solve all levels of trouble When the limits of these procedures have been reached and the problem has not been resolved it is the technician s responsibility to escalate to a higher level of technical support Escalation should conform to the procedures in the Technical and Administration Plan ...

Page 725: ...m level for ABRI ports may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set independently for on and off board alarms to WARNING MINOR or MAJOR for every ABRI port in the system MAJOR MINOR WARNING test port UUCSSpp l 2 2 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circ...

Page 726: ...pply WP 91153 In an AC powered cabinet a single plug in multi output AC power supply is in the power supply slot A power cord with a 3 prong plug on one end and an appliance connector on the other end connects the supply to a dedicated AC power source The inputs to the power supply can be depending on list version 120 VAC 60 Hz 15 to 20 Amp three wires in the power cord one hot one neutral and one...

Page 727: ...over circuit in the power supply allows a system to operate normally during AC power interruptions When AC input power fails reserve batteries supply power to the memory and processor circuit packs and fans for two minutes Every port circuit pack is inactive during this time The power supply contains a battery charger to charge the holdover batteries Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Tabl...

Page 728: ... tests apply to J58890CE J58890CF and J58890CH Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Battery Battery Charger Query test 5 X X ND AC Power Query test 78 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier E 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier D 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier A 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier B 127 X X ND Power...

Page 729: ...f the test still ABORTs with error code 2000 check for and resolve every MAINT Maintenance circuit pack error in an EPN Then repeat the test 2029 2319 2320 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 FAIL NOTE For a J58890CE skip to step 2 1 Procedures for a Global MCC J58890CH a For a nominal holdover system if there is no AC power at the wall outlet have a qualified electrician restore power to the outle...

Page 730: ... test still fails then the server s watchdog or an EPN s Maintenance circuit pack may be incorrectly reporting the problem Resolve every alarm against these MOs and rerun the test Some watchdog and Maintenance circuit pack errors may not be detected by their respective maintenance routines but can cause many environment tests to fail If more than two environment tests are failing replace the suspe...

Page 731: ...may be powered by either an AC or DC power source Environmental maintenance differs according to a cabinet s type and its power supply Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO AC POWER WARNING test environment UU1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC AC Power Table 8 3 AC Power Error Log E...

Page 732: ...of each test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Battery Battery Charger Query test 5 X X ND AC Power Query test 78 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier E 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier D 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier A 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier B 127 X X ND Power Unit Query test carrier C 127 X X...

Page 733: ...s not received within the allowable time period 2029 2319 2320 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL An EPN s Maintenance circuit pack is incorrectly reporting an AC power problem If this test fails there is a problem with a Maintenance circuit pack Replace the suspect circuit pack and run the test again b PASS Since this test is invalid ...

Page 734: ...r after a connection failure Both the alarm level none to major and a failure threshold can be administered for each administered connection An alarm is raised when either of the following occurs The number of consecutive failed attempts to establish a connection reaches the administered threshold Software determines that failure to establish a connection is due to a mistake in administration See ...

Page 735: ...iction Access Denied Verify that the destination address is correct and that the destination endpoint is administered The destination endpoint is not administered on the switch where this error is logged c A request has been made to use a transit network or common carrier that cannot be accessed Check the routing pattern used by this administered connection and verify that the inter exchange carri...

Page 736: ...oint or status data module to see whether the endpoint is busy out of service or otherwise unavailable f This switch sent an ISDN message to another switch that either did not respond 18 or did not respond within the allotted time 102 This could be due to link failure or congestion or an outage at the other switch g The address of the destination endpoint has changed Change the administered connec...

Page 737: ...lots on a port carrier The tests described in this manual apply only to switch side maintenance which tests a circuit pack s components related to the TDM bus interface The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM ...

Page 738: ... switch as AUDIX reserved slots or ADXDP RS ADX8D RS In DP mode the TN566 pack supports up to 8 voice ports each with a primary and a secondary information channel Ports are administered in increments of two When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is not answered AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports Unlike other AUDIX systems EMBEDDED AUDIX is not an adjunct CAUTION N...

Page 739: ... Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40987 None WARNING OFF 1 b 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 15 c Any None 18 d 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WAR...

Page 740: ...due to some problem with the link to the voice port This can be ignored if there are no user complaints If the problem persists replace the circuit pack see Caution at the beginning of this section Once the problem is resolved the alarm is retired after a certain period of time j The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset No craft action is necessary k No voice port...

Page 741: ...able 8 7 Test 9 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 ABORT During testing of the primary information channel system resources may not have been available Also the port may have been busy during the test 1 Check the port status 2 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the se...

Page 742: ...mmand to determine the voice port extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 1020 ABORT Test disabled by background testing Use the status station command to determine when the voice port is available for testing 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowab...

Page 743: ...Channel Local Loop Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Then try b 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be active 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the...

Page 744: ...ary channel Some users may notice a disruption in service In extreme cases the conferencing feature may not work at all 14 FAIL The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and the EMBEDDED AUDIX circuit pack is not transmitting properly User impact may range from...

Page 745: ...ansmitting properly 1 To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem repeat this test up to 10 times and see whether it continues to pass 2 If complaints still exist examine the connections Table 8 8 Test 13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 746: ...The tests described in this manual apply only to switch side maintenance that tests a circuit pack s components related to the TDM bus interface The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy of its own that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for ...

Page 747: ...ort carrier The tests described in this manual apply only to switch side maintenance that tests a circuit pack s components related to the TDM bus interface The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for...

Page 748: ... EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs the TN566 Multifunction board MFB and the TN2169 Alarm board ALB Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots but the system sees only 1 slot as functional The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as AUDIX reserved slots or ADX16 RES ADX16D RS In 16 port DP mode the TN566 pack supports up to 1...

Page 749: ...command Table 8 9 EMBEDDED AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40987 None WARNING OFF 1 b 1 to 20 None WA...

Page 750: ...ice port This can be ignored if there are no user complaints If the problem persists replace the circuit pack see caution at the beginning of this section Once the problem is resolved the alarm is retired after a certain period of time j The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset No craft action is necessary k No voice ports are connected to the EMBEDDED AUDIX circu...

Page 751: ...n both the primary for voice and the secondary for data information channel associated with each EMBEDDED AUDIX port If this test fails on either channel the voice port is taken out of service Table 8 10 Test 9 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 ABORT During testing of the primary information channel system resources may not have been available Also the port may...

Page 752: ...rsized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the po...

Page 753: ...erated as a result of the four tests run If any test fails or aborts the sequence is stopped PASS The port is using its allocated time slots correctly 1 To verify that this is not an intermittent problem repeat this test up to 10 times and make sure it continues passing 2 If complaints still exist examine the connections Table 8 11 Test 13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Error Code Test ...

Page 754: ... determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before retesting 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 7 FAIL Conference tes...

Page 755: ...it or Tone Detector circuit 3 If both circuit packs are functioning properly and the test still fails replace the AUDIX see caution at the beginning of this section PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed Every channel are transmitting properly 1 To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem repeat this test up to 10 times and see whether it continues to pass 2 If complaints st...

Page 756: ...M bus interface The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs the TN566 Multifunction board MFB and the TN2169 Alarm board ALB Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots but only 1 slot is functional as far as the switch is concerned The other 4 slots are seen by...

Page 757: ...rier If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error check the ringing generator e AUDIX is not available to the switch Check the AUDIX system referring to EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 f The TDM bus is out of service See TDM BUS TDM Bus on page 8 1588 Table 8 12 EMBEDDED AUDIX Analog Line Control Link Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test On Off Board Test...

Page 758: ...sent test 48 Tests 36 and 48 ABORT when AUDIX is not running NPE Crosstalk Test 6 This test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not working correctly one way and noisy connections may be observed This test is part of the long test sequence and executes in about 25 seconds Order of In...

Page 759: ...ice 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active it is unavailable for c...

Page 760: ...unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station Table 8 13 Test 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 761: ...borted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1018 ABORT Test disabled by administration This only applies to analog stations 1 To enable the test for the analog station being ...

Page 762: ...BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute...

Page 763: ...ort may hear an echo 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station Table 8 15 Test 161 Loop Around Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 764: ...O s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO ALARM PT MINOR test port UUCSSpp l Alarm Port ALARM PT WARNING test port UUCSSpp sh Alarm Port Table 8 16 8 Por...

Page 765: ...d test 35 X X ND Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates test 36 X X ND Table 8 17 Test 35 Battery Feed Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be reporting an e...

Page 766: ...e alarm This may occur when the test is performed at the same time that the external device contact closure occurred 1 Before retesting enter test external device alarm port UUCSSpp to determine whether the port is reporting an EXT DEV failure Wait until the port has no EXT DEV failures before retesting 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS The port s battery feed chip is ab...

Page 767: ...d out by command 1 Check Error Log for Error Type 18 port busied out If present release the port with the release port UUCSSpp command and run the test again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 FAIL This failur...

Page 768: ... XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 Ringing Caused by Maintenance Testing Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment it should be disabled in the Tests field of the change station extension form Be aware that this action will also disable Tests 6 7 161 and 35 MO s Name in Alarm ...

Page 769: ...m Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40960 40975 40977 none 15 b Any Audits and Updates test 36 18 0 busyout station extension WARNING ON release station extension 130 c None WARNING ...

Page 770: ...t pack If only analog circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error then the ringing generator may not be connected to this carrier If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error then it is probably a problem with the ringing generator e Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this disturbs the customer or the terminal equipment disab...

Page 771: ...ry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If th...

Page 772: ... test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL This test can fail due to either on or off board problems Off board problems include EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated with the Tone Detectors Tone Generators Clear every off board problem before replacing the board A TDM BUS proble...

Page 773: ...establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Table 8 21 Test 7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The...

Page 774: ...ay be due to the ringing application Test 48 which can be customer or terminal disturbing 1 To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested enter change station extension and set the Test field on the station to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Reso...

Page 775: ...ated by using other port tests and by examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems 2 If the board...

Page 776: ...orted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example the modem pool member or Music On Hold 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration The default for the Test field on the station form is y Determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing app...

Page 777: ...ecause this port is inoperative User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s ...

Page 778: ...busied out by command or taken out of service by the failure of the NPE Crosstalk test 1 Look in the error log for error type 18 port busied out for this port If this error is present release the port with the release station extension command and run the test again 2 Check the error log for error type 1025 NPE crosstalk test failed for this port If this error is present investigate the errors ass...

Page 779: ...n 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve problems 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Iss...

Page 780: ...and to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is active wait until it is idle 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example the modem pool member or Music On Hold ...

Page 781: ... that this action also disables Tests 6 7 161 and 35 on this port PASS The station is connected properly to the switch This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch Investigate user reported troubles on this port by using other port tests or by examining the station and its wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal...

Page 782: ...uld not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone ...

Page 783: ... at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The reflective loop around test failed This could cause noisy or unreliable connections or users calling this port may hear an echo The problem can also be off board 1 Since the test may be affected by a line seizure repeat the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Run circuit pack tests to check the IPSI Tone Generator circuit or Tone Generator circu...

Page 784: ...board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re es...

Page 785: ...module you must assign the port location on the data form and connect a modem to the port The analog data module may be used for connection to a CDR output or other adjuncts as needed These ports are tested like any other analog port on the circuit pack Ringing Caused by Maintenance Testing Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing is distur...

Page 786: ...test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40960 40975 40977 none 15 b Any Audits and Updates test 36 18 0 busyout station extension WARNING ON release station extension 130 c None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp sh 257 d 40973 none 513 e Station Present test 48 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 2 769 Ba...

Page 787: ...ging voltage is absent If only 1 analog circuit pack in the system has this problem then replace the circuit pack If only analog circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error then the ringing generator may not be connected to this carrier If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error then it is probably a problem with the ringing generator e Test 48 may cause some terminal equip...

Page 788: ...active wait until it is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or have time slots out of servi...

Page 789: ... are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL This test can fail due to either on or off board problems Off board problems include EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated with the Tone Detectors Tone Generators Clear every off board problem before replacing the board A TDM BUS problem is ...

Page 790: ... establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Table 8 28 Test 7 Conference Circuit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available Th...

Page 791: ... for a particular station being tested enter change station extension and set the Test field on the station from n to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Resolve TONE PT errors 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port d...

Page 792: ...serted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the...

Page 793: ...le the test for a particular station being tested enter change station extension and set the Test field on the station from n to y 1392 ABORT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If ...

Page 794: ...relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4...

Page 795: ...r example the modem pool member or Music On Hold 1006 ABORT This port has been busied out by command or taken out of service by the failure of the NPE Crosstalk test 1 Look in the Error Log for error type 18 port busied out for this port If this error is present release the port with the release station extension command and run the test again 2 Check the Error Log for error type 1025 NPE crosstal...

Page 796: ...tigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve problems 2 If the board...

Page 797: ...d to determine the service state of the port 3 If the port is active wait until it is idle and retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example the modem pool member or Music On Hold 1008 ABORT Could not allocate a...

Page 798: ...tation extension command enter n into the Test field Note that this action also disables Tests 6 7 161 and 35 on this port PASS The station is connected properly to the switch This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch Investigate user reported troubles on this port by using other port tests or by examining the station and its...

Page 799: ...ot allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detec...

Page 800: ...t may hear an echo The problem can also be off board 1 Since the test may be affected by a line seizure repeat the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Run circuit pack tests to check the IPSI Tone Generator circuit or the Tone Generator circuit pack and the IPSI Tone Detector circuit or the Tone Detector circuit pack by using the test board UUCSS short command 3 Resolve any problems on the ...

Page 801: ... are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Table 8 32 Test ...

Page 802: ...16 L 16 Port Analog Line on page 8 46 for related line information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name Of MO ANL BD MINOR WARNING test board UUCSS sh 16 Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack ...

Page 803: ...ests 6 35 47 and 48 No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 8 Port Analog Line circuit pack or 8 Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed except to determine whether or not the terminal is connected Failures of the common ringing application circuitry and the neon message waiting lamp power ANL NE L only are reported as errors 1281and 1793 against XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack in ...

Page 804: ...ries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40960 40977 40975 None 15 b Any Audits and Updates test 36 18 0 busyout station extension WARNING OFF...

Page 805: ...rminal equipment it should be disabled via the change station extension command However on some releases of the software this will disable Tests 6 47 and 35 as well as Test 48 e Test 47 may cause a false alarm when the port is connected to off premises equipment some non voice terminal equipment and some loop equipment If this causes a false alarm then disable the test by changing the Tests field ...

Page 806: ...ally is 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port If the port is active it will be unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 When the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to ru...

Page 807: ...on form is y thus you may want to determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application test 48 which can be customer or terminal disturbing 1 To enable the test for a particular station enter change station extension and set the Test field to y 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general ...

Page 808: ...y if the test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring by examining the station and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off premises or on premises NOTE This test always passes for circuit packs TN712 prior to Vintage 14 and TN742 prior to Vin...

Page 809: ...tension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is active then the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to Chapter 7 Maintenance Commands for a full description of every possible state Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the test continues to a...

Page 810: ...attery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the terminal equipment This may occur when the test is performed at the same time that the terminal equipment goes off hook 1 Use status station to determine when the port is available for testing When the port becomes available for testing retry the command at 1 minute intervals a minimum of five times 2 If the test continues to fail determ...

Page 811: ...Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not dispatch to verify that a valid board is inserted Ta...

Page 812: ...es that the port is active then the port is unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the test continues to abort and the port is idle escalate the problem 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This code results under either of the following conditions 1 This test may not be appli...

Page 813: ...re error The message waiting lamp update failed The translation and ringer updates were not performed because of this failure 7 FAIL The translation update failed The ringer update was not performed because of this failure This does not indicate a hardware problem but may be an internal software error 8 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem but may be an internal software error The ringer...

Page 814: ... tests the operation of the port conference circuits in the NPE for three and four parties In addition a test is run to measure noise The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port If the level of the tone is within a certain range the test passes 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the int...

Page 815: ...of the loop the equipment in the loop or the equipment terminating the loop such as off premises stations If this test is causing a false alarm then disable the test by changing the Tests field to no using the change station command for this station Figure 8 1 Analog Looparound and Conference Test TDM BUS BFC Battery Feed Chip NPE Network Processing Element Analog Line Port BFC CODEC NPE Tone Gene...

Page 816: ...he service state of the port If the port is active it will be unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the s...

Page 817: ...t 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If either list config or display port indicate that the port is not a TTI port escalate the problem If both commands indicate that the port is a TTI port the abort is correct for the test and no action is necessar...

Page 818: ...tion is operating properly Failure of test 47 does not cause an alarm If there are failures of other tests then investigate those errors User reported troubles with this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring and by examining the station to ensure that it is correctly translated as off premises or on premises NOTE If the Looparound and Conference circuit ...

Page 819: ...l ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Is...

Page 820: ... times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port If the port is active it will be unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port is idle retry the...

Page 821: ... currently using all four ringing phases 1018 ABORT The test was disabled via administration The default for the Test field is y thus you may want to determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application Test 48 which can be customer or terminal disturbing 1 To enable the test for a particular station enter change station extension and set the Test f...

Page 822: ...erly to the switch This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch Investigate user reported troubles on this port by using other port tests or by examining the station and its wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorre...

Page 823: ... on the data form and connect a modem to the port The analog data module can be used for connection to a CDR output or other adjuncts as needed These ports are tested like any other analog port on the circuit pack Ringing caused by maintenance testing Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing disturbs the customer or the terminal equipment d...

Page 824: ...ow the procedure for Test 48 Table 8 39 Analog line error log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40960 40975 40977 none 15 b Any Audi...

Page 825: ... ringing generator may not be connected to this carrier 3 If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error it is probably a problem with the ringing generator e Error Type 513 Test 48 can cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance 1 If this disturbs the customer or the terminal equipment disable it by setting the Tests field on the change station extension form ...

Page 826: ...the port is active wait until it is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1001 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1002 ABORT The system cou...

Page 827: ... the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem Any FAIL This test can fail due to either on or off board problems Off board problems include TDM BUS faul...

Page 828: ...rd translations are correct Use the list configuration command and resolve any problems 2 If the board is correctly inserted issue the busy board UUCSS command 3 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 4 Issue the release board UUCSS command 5 Issue the test board UUCSS long command This should re establish the link between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Tabl...

Page 829: ...1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1004 ABORT A valid call seized the port during the test and aborted the test 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension 2 Use the status station extension command to determine the service state of the port 3 If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing Retry the comma...

Page 830: ...and then retest 4 If the test still fails replace the board PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station trunk or external wiring or by inspecting the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This result could be due to incorrect translations no b...

Page 831: ... service state of the port 3 If the port is active wait until it is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1004 ABORT A valid call seized the port during the test and aborted the test 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension 2 Use the status station extension command to determine the service ...

Page 832: ...inues to abort escalate the problem FAIL The port s battery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the terminal equipment This test result might be marginal and the terminal equipment may be operating satisfactorily 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail determine whether the customer is experiencing problems on this line Replace the circ...

Page 833: ...nslations are correct Use the list configuration command and resolve any problems 2 If the board is correctly inserted issue the busy board UUCSS command 3 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 4 Issue the release board UUCSS command 5 Issue the test board UUCSS long command This should re establish the link between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Table 8 42...

Page 834: ...ute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1005 ABORT This test was aborted due to a configuration problem The test is not applicable for this type of analog port This error can be ignored 1006 ABORT The port is out of service The busy station extension command has been given to this port or it has been taken out of service by the failure of the NPE Crosstalk...

Page 835: ...ommand at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail escalate the problem PASS The software and the port processor have the same status Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This result could be due to incorre...

Page 836: ...blem 1000 ABORT System resources are unavailable The port may be busy with a valid call This result is also reported for the system s Music On Hold port when it is off hook which it usually is 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension 2 Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port 3 If the port is active wait until it is idle Retry the command a...

Page 837: ... 2 Change the Test field on the station form to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem FAIL The terminal equipment is not connected to the circuit pack Some terminal...

Page 838: ...d be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to make sure that the board translations are correct Use the list configuration command and resolve any problems 2 If the board is correctly inserted issue the busy board UUCSS command 3 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 4 Issue the release board UUCSS command 5 Issue the...

Page 839: ...sion to determine the service state of the port 3 If the port is active wait until it is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 Refer to TDM BUS to diagno...

Page 840: ...n the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem FAIL The reflective loop around test failed This could cause noisy or unreliable connections or users calling this port may hear an echo The problem can also be off board 1 Since a line seiz...

Page 841: ...nslations are correct Use the list configuration command and resolve any problems 2 If the board is correctly inserted issue the busy board UUCSS command 3 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 4 Issue the release board UUCSS command 5 Issue the test board UUCSS long command This should re establish the link between the internal ID and the port If not verify that a valid board is inserted Table 8 45...

Page 842: ... announcements are recorded onto a TN750C they are not backward compatible with the TN750A B Essential Service Information You should have an understanding of the following principles before attempting work on the TN750 B Announcement circuit pack NOTE The TN750C Announcement circuit pack has on board non volatile storage and does not need to be saved to disk The announcement circuit pack retains ...

Page 843: ...lable to call processing service If the circuit pack s speech memory is corrupted announcements should not be saved for example when the Announcement Checksum test 209 fails or announcements sound corrupted when played back This can ruin a good announcement file on disk or removable media and potentially cause errors and alarms on any circuit pack to which the saved file is downloaded If however t...

Page 844: ...oads take 30 to 45 minutes depending on system traffic The system automatically attempts to download to the announcement circuit pack 5 minutes after it is inserted This automatic download procedure may be aborted or preempted by any of the following An announcement is recorded within 10 minutes of circuit pack insertion An announcement download is invoked sooner with the restore announcements com...

Page 845: ...UUCSS 23 c 0 None WARNING OFF 125 d None MINOR ON 217 m 0 None WARNING OFF 257 65535 Control Channel test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 257 e Any None 267 m 0 None WARNING OFF 513 f Any None 1025 g 4363 NPE Audit test 50 test board UUCSS l 1281 h 17699 None 1538 i Any None MINOR ON 1793 Angel SP Handshake test 208 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 3 17680 In line Error 2049 j k Clock Match Inqui...

Page 846: ... display announcement command This error always appears in conjunction with Error Type 2817 Follow the procedures for Error Type 2817 to troubleshoot Error Type 14 c Error Type 23 The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically installed The alarm clears when the circuit pack is installed d Error Type 125 A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is l...

Page 847: ...hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms 1 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a NO BOARD 2 A busyout release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results 3 A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are properly installed The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 min...

Page 848: ...e system Remove the alarmed circuit pack n Error Type 2 Check the Class of Restriction COR administered for the Data Line extension assigned to the TN750 for uploading and downloading announcements The extension can be found by using list data module o Error Type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time If erro...

Page 849: ...lso clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Control Channel Looparound test 52 2 2 For results of these tests see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack X ND Angel Speech Processor SP Handshake test 208 X ND Clock Match inquiry 212 X X ND Super Frame Match inquiry 211 X X ND 140AY...

Page 850: ...y the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The circuit pack cannot be used Announcement speech memory is cleared when this test fails When the problem has been resolved announcements must be re recorded or downloaded to the circuit pack Refer to Essential Service Information earlier 1 Reset the circuit pack by the reset board UUCSS command and then run this test again If the test conti...

Page 851: ...was in progress A recording session was initiated in while this test was running If an announcement upload or download is in progress status data module extension should show that the announcement data port 17 is connected to a data line port that is part of a system port and the removable media or disk should be active To determine the extension of the announcement data module use the list data m...

Page 852: ...pted If the FAIL code for this test was greater than 1 there is more than one corrupted announcement To get the numbers of the others you must re record or delete the first one and then rerun this test 2 If after deleting and re recording every defective announcement the checksum test still fails then reset the circuit pack using the reset board UUCSS command and run this test again 3 If the test ...

Page 853: ...e announcement circuit pack lock up can be cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack with the following sequence of commands 1 busyout board UUCSS this command will drop every call to the Announcement circuit pack 2 reset board UUCSS 3 release board UUCSS 140AY Loop Around Test 210 This test checks the integrity of the record channel on the Announcement circuit pack announcem...

Page 854: ...ot handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 ...

Page 855: ...ed 3 being the last 1 Reset the circuit pack using the reset board UUCSS command and then run this test again If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack 2 If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing replace the circuit pack even if step 1 works CAUTION Replacing the circuit pack causes a loss of integrated announcements See Essential Service Informati...

Page 856: ...esponse to the test request was not received within the allowable time period If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Test failed Announcement playbacks should so...

Page 857: ...ndby Tone Clock or IPSI circuit pack active c Rerun the test If the test passes replace the now standby Tone Clock or IPSI circuit pack If not replace the ANN BD circuit pack CAUTION Replacing the announcement circuit pack results in loss of integrated announcements See Essential Service Information See TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit for Tone Clock replacement instructions 3 If the EPN has a single To...

Page 858: ...uld be understood before undertaking work on the announcement circuit pack These are described under Essential Service Information on page 8 120 of the ANN BD MO Although announcement port 5 and data line circuit port 17 on the announcement circuit pack are logically two separate ports they are physically the same port Therefore if one of the ports is active the other one will be busy Also if anno...

Page 859: ...o resolve these alarms When the corresponding circuit pack alarm is cleared this alarm will clear Table 8 52 Announcement Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 An...

Page 860: ...e Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Channel Administration Memory Array CAMA test 205 X ND Playback Speech Memory Array PSMA test 206 X X ND 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry test 222 X X ND Table 8 53 Test 205 CAMA Channel Administration Memory Array Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run test are not available The po...

Page 861: ...step 1 works CAUTION Replacing the circuit pack causes a loss of integrated announcements Refer to Essential Service Information on page 8 120 of the AN LN PT MO PASS This test verifies that the Angel processor can properly set up this port for playbacks User reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other port and circuit pack tests Refer to AN LN PT Analog Line Port for...

Page 862: ...S errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition ...

Page 863: ... the Tone Detector never synchronized Check for active GPTD PT errors and see GPTD PT General Purpose Tone Detector Port to diagnose them first 1 If there are no active GPTD PT errors reset the circuit pack using the reset board UUCSS command and then run this test again If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack 2 If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing ...

Page 864: ...RT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Test failed Announcements cannot be played back over this port 1 Reset the circuit pack via the reset board UUCSS command and then run this test again If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack see Warning 2 If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by this test failing replace the circuit pac...

Page 865: ...bserved 1 When attempting to record an announcement users will hear the proper record tone but the announcement will not record they will not know it until the announcement is played back 2 Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state will yield the following abort codes Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test 206 with code 1024 Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test 205 with code 2000 Board level Tests...

Page 866: ... of the following circuit packs are inserted For any of the previous initial board uplinks the switch queries the board for administration data as well as reporting the switch software release and the system type MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the...

Page 867: ...ge 038x requests the Angel to drive the red amber and green LEDs on the face plate of a typical port board on or off Only the MAPD s red LED is controlled by this message Yellow and green change requests the MAPD receives from the switch drive LCD behavior rather than LED behavior The S8700 Multi Connect system continues to send the same LED control messages to the MAPD that the system currently s...

Page 868: ...tiVantage software Native mode supports emulation of three types of port MOs on this board The type of ports to be emulated is defined by the applications running on the TN800 NOTE If the TN800 is emulating BRI the software firmware supports up to 12 ports but only 8 of the 12 ports can be administered at any one time MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO ASAI E...

Page 869: ...AI EPT On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test ASAI ADJ 2 a 2 102 None 257 b Any BRI Layer 3 query MAJOR WARNING2 2 Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options...

Page 870: ...field indicates the state of the ASAI link and whether an invalid response or no response was received to the query from the switch as shown in the following table See status bri port on page 7 294 for an explanation of the ASAI link states Aux Data Timer Type 2 First T303 SETUP timer 3 Second T303 SETUP timer 4 T305 DISConnect timer 5 First T308 RELease timer 6 Second T308 RELease timer 10 T316 R...

Page 871: ...eplace the endpoint e This error occurs when an ASAI endpoint s associated signaling link has too much traffic related to link establishment This occurs if the signaling link is alternating between assigned and established states If this problem persists replace the endpoint f This error occurs when the ASAI EPT message is not transmitted because the PKT CTRL Packet Control circuit pack transmit b...

Page 872: ...or type minus 3584 The adjunct sent this value to the switch Table 8 57 contains a description of the various ASAI cause values and recommended system technician actions associated with the cause value The ISDN BRI Specification contains further information l The switch software logs certain ASAI cause values The cause value is determined from the following formula If the error type is greater tha...

Page 873: ...d but not administered Potential administration problem with endpoint or adjunct For BRI endpoints 1 Verify the switch administration of endpoint using either the display station or display data module commands 2 If step 1 does not resolve the problem refer to the endpoint s service manual and verify administration on the endpoint For ASAI adjuncts 1 Display the Customer Optional Features Form adm...

Page 874: ... endpoint 69 Requested facility not implemented Requested service not supported in switch or endpoint 1 Consult switch and endpoint documentation to determine service support 79 Service or option not implemented Requested service or option or combination of selected options is not supported implemented in switch or the adjunct 1 Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine ASAI service an...

Page 875: ...t is not used by the ASAI ADJ MO For information about this test see BRI SET ASAI ADJ BRI DAT Signaling Link Status Test 626 This test determines the current status of the signaling link This test passes if the link is bound to an endpoint and fails if the link is not bound The definition of the term bound for a link depends upon the type of endpoint and may depend on the successful completion of ...

Page 876: ...tation command and run the test again 3 If this Error Type is present for ASAI PT and ASAI EPT then use the release port command and run the test again 4 If this Error Type is present for ASAI BD ASAI PT and ASAI EPT then use the release board command and run the test again 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the co...

Page 877: ...the application running on the TN800 In non native mode only one type of port MO runs at any time and the port type depends on the application running on the TN800 If the TN800 fails diagnostics in non native mode the system s alarm and error logs would show a failure for the board type the TN800 is emulating MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where UU is the universal ca...

Page 878: ...res for both on board hardware problems and potential off board packet bus problems Table 8 59 ASAI PT Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level ASAI PORT On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any...

Page 879: ...he circuit pack Check the wiring to the endpoints or the adjunct If the problem persists replace the endpoints or adjuncts d This error occurs when a Layer 1 Transmission error is detected for the port Run the long test sequence and note the results of the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter test 624 e This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers Run the long t...

Page 880: ...rts if calls associated with the port are in progress Failures of this test indicate either on board faults associated with the ASAI PT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus which is used to form connectivity between the switch and the ASAI PT The dotted lines in Figure 8 2 on page 8 159 show how a loop around test is performed across the packet bus for the D channel Table 8 60...

Page 881: ...it is idle and use the busyout port UUCSSpp command to place it in the out of service state and repeat this test WARNING Since the busyout command is destructive using this command prior to the port being idle causes every transaction associated with the ASAI on the port to be torn down Note that 3rd party calls established by an ASAI adjunct remain connected even though the port is taken out of s...

Page 882: ...IL The loop around test has failed 1 If the test fails repeatedly attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports on the board are idle Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board UUCSS and the reset board UUCSS commands 2 If the test fails again execute test pkt P on the management terminal If this fails follow the failure procedures the in PKT BUS section 3 If the tests executed in ...

Page 883: ...e Test Result Description Recommendation 1187 ABORT The board port or station may have been busied out by a technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port and ASAI BD board busied out If this error type is present for ASAI PT only then release the port using the release port pp command and run the test again If the error is present for both ASAI BD and ASAI PT t...

Page 884: ... the test port long UUCSSpp command and review the results of Level 1 Status Inquiry test If this test is still failing proceed to step 3 3 After executing the test port long UUCSSpp command review the results of every test Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port UUCSSpp command and by determining that the Level 1 Status test pas...

Page 885: ...ption Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to 5 times reset the circuit pack using the busyout board UUCSS and reset board UUCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack CAUTION Do not leave the circuit pack busied out 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at ...

Page 886: ...smission Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to 5 times reset the circuit pack using the busyout board UUCSS and reset board UUCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Coul...

Page 887: ...se was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to 5 times reset the circuit pack via the busyout board UUCSS and reset board UUCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals u...

Page 888: ...This test is used only to send messages to the ASAI PT and therefore should neither abort nor fail ASAI uses a fixed TEI value of 1 Table 8 66 Test 270 Clear Error Counters Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort Any FAIL This test should never fail 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS The message to clear the error counters ...

Page 889: ... connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane The number of slots occupied by the MAPD pack is supplied by the board when inserted The TN800 in R5EM is three slots wide The TN800 requires 2 reserve slots to its left The reserve blank slots are to left of the functional slot and are place holders on the switch and do not have any interaction with the switch Each instance of these M...

Page 890: ...smit digitized voice or data while a separate D channel ATM DCH handles call control signaling One D channel handles signaling for a group of B channels that combine to form a signaling group ATM SGRP B Channel Service States The ISDN specification defines two service state categories for B channels as listed in Table 8 67 on page 8 169 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 ...

Page 891: ...PE Crosstalk test has failed or the trunk is busied out Calls cannot be placed or received Maintenance Far End MTC FE A request has timed out with no response from the far end after signaling is in place and B channels are in service Calls can be received but not placed and stable calls are unaffected Maintenance Near End MTC NE The signaling channel ISDN LNK has been busied out possibly after a t...

Page 892: ...ered far end Administer the corresponding trunk on the far end switch Warning Far end busied out Check the status of the far end switch Pending In Service Pending Maint None Maintenance message timed out waiting for reply Wait 2 minutes after the pending state clears and check the service state Maint NE None ISDN test call in progress test trunk long Wait for the test to finish and recheck None Sy...

Page 893: ...ts of the Call State Audit test 257 Table 8 69 ATM BCH Error Log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSppp 1 a Any None test port UUCSSppp 18 0 busyou...

Page 894: ...e f Error Type 769 inconsistent SERVice or SERVice ACKnowledge message Possible causes SERVice or SERVice ACKnowledge message received containing a change status that is more available than the previously transmitted SERVice message Unsolicited SERVice ACKnowledge message received containing a change status that does not match the current B channel state ISDN PRI service state negotiation rules ha...

Page 895: ...far end 3 If problems persist then busyout the ATM trunk to take it out of the hunt group The WARNING alarm retires automatically whenever a called endpoint answers an outgoing or incoming call that uses the alarmed trunk Aux Data Description 0 An idle trunk received a restart 10 An ISDN RESTART from the far end has unexpectedly cleared a call in the ACTIVE state call stable parties talking 4 7 8 ...

Page 896: ...th a given test you clear errors generated by other tests in the testing sequence If you clear errors out of order you can lose important information Table 8 70 System Technician Demanded Tests ATM BCH Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Destructive or Nondestructive Signaling Link State Check test 255 X X ND Service State Audit test 256 X X ND Call State Audit test 257 X...

Page 897: ... Result Description Recommendation None ABORT Internal system error 0 ABORT 1114 ABORT Signaling link in transitional state 1 Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals 1018 ABORT Maintenance disabled 1 Enable maintenance Enter y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 4 FAIL Signaling channel problem 1 Look for errors or alarms against the ATM SGRP ATM S...

Page 898: ...FAR END state It asks the far end switch to bring the trunk back into the IN SERVICE state and waits 2 minutes for a reply If the first request times out the service state audit asks again If the request times out again it leaves the trunk in the OUT OF SERVICE FAR END state and tries again in 1 hour NOTE PASS for this test only means that a message to the far end was successfully sent To check th...

Page 899: ... failed 1 See the ATM SGRP ATM Signaling Group and ISDN LNK ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port MOs FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals PASS 1 Wait 4 minutes then check the Error Log for any new Error Type 3073 If there are none both sides of the ISDN connection agree on the service state The negotiation succeeded If there is a new 3073 error then the negoti...

Page 900: ...Call State Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1018 ABORT Maintenance disabled 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1019 ABORT Audit already in progress 1 Wait 2 minutes and try again 1113 ABORT Signaling link failed 1 Check the results of Test 255 Signaling Link State check 1114 ABORT Signaling link in ...

Page 901: ... a synchronous outgoing test call including a test call for ISDN PRI trunks with these commands test trunk grp mbr long repeat test board UUCSS long repeat test port UUCSSpp long repeat Table 8 74 Test 258 ISDN Test Call Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 4 ABORT Signaling channel problem 1 Look for errors or alarms against the ATM SGRP ATM Signaling Group and ATM DCH ATM D Channel ...

Page 902: ...ervice Circuit Pack 1117 ABORT ISDN service message outstanding 1 Wait 2 minutes Then try again 1118 ABORT Far end not administered 1 Check the administration of the far end of the ATM trunk Run status trunk grp mbr 2 Try the test again 1119 ABORT Test call aborted normal call attempted 1 Wait for the call to finish normally or drop it by running busyout trunk grp mbr 2 When the trunk is idle retr...

Page 903: ...es at 1 minute intervals 2067 ABORT Call timed out 1 Wait 1 minute and try again 2074 ABORT Bit and Block Error query failed 1 Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the test continues to abort there may be a serious internal problem in the Maintenance Test Digital port See M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port 2075 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command up to 5 times ...

Page 904: ...erminated by unexpected disconnect 1 Wait 1 minute and then try again 2215 2219 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2220 ABORT Call terminated prematurely 1 Wait 1 minute and try again 2221 2226 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2227 ABORT Could not allocate needed resources 1 Retry the command at 1 m...

Page 905: ...ssages between two endpoints User information or bearer channels B channels carry digitized voice and digital data and are assigned to DS1 ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints Call control signaling for the B channels is combined and carried over the separate ISDN PRI Signaling Link port D channel Problems with ATM DCH affects every associated B channel since call control signaling cannot reach the far en...

Page 906: ...s test port UUCSSpp where pp is for ports 9 32 Table 8 75 ATM D channel Error Log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp2 2 pp is for ports 9 32 18 ...

Page 907: ...ndled independently of the ATM CES signaling link maintenance raising the possibility of inconsistent states Table 8 77 Test 643 Signaling Link Board Check Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 8 FAIL The TN230X circuit pack is not in service Check the Error Log for ATM TRK errors and resolve any using AT...

Page 908: ...this section When S8700 Multi Connect system maintenance software suspects the ATM switch connections it raises appropriate MultiVantage alarms To clear any ATM switch faults refer to the particular ATM switch s documentation MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS...

Page 909: ... Red LED solid on Green LED 200 msec on 200 msec off Board is in the processes of booting Green Steady on1 1 The green LED flashes between tests Maintenance is running tests on the board 100 msec on 100 msec off No links to the board Amber 100 msec on 100 msec off Fiber Loss of Signal LOS LOF MS_RDI MS_AIS LCD HP_RDI HP_AIS LOP PSC See Table 8 83 on page 8 197 Amber 500 msec on 500 msec off Signal...

Page 910: ...he SAT NOTE If the ATM EI is in an EPN this is service affecting 2 Replace the circuit pack 3 Enter release atm pnc 4 Wait 2 minutes for board insertion 5 Enter list sys link to verify that the links are up 6 Enter test board UUCSS and verify that every test passes Critical Reliability There are 2 ATM EI circuit packs in each EPN 1 Enter status pnc at the SAT If the board is on the active side ent...

Page 911: ...ons 2 Enter add atm pnc n connection number and administer the circuit pack s location and its ATM address Critical Reliability 1 Enter change system parameters duplication and change the Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field to n 2 If the ATM EI circuit pack is absent or is present but in an EPN that does not yet have PNC connectivity to it use the change circuit pack command to add circuit p...

Page 912: ...ard Duplex or High Reliability NOTE These systems are not equipped with PNC duplication 1 Remove the ATM PNC connection see Removing ATM PNC Connections above 2 Add an ATM PNC connection see Adding ATM PNC Connections above A side ATM EI Critical Reliability 1 Remove the ATM PNC connection see Removing ATM PNC Connections above 2 Add an ATM PNC connection see Adding ATM PNC Connections above B sid...

Page 913: ...MIN ON 18 b 0 busyout board UUCSS WRN OFF release board UUCSS 23 c 0 None WRN OFF 125 d None MIN ON 131 e None MIN ON 257 259 f Any Expansion Interface Control Channel test 316 MAJ ON test board UUCSS r 2 513 g Any ATM Crosstalk test 1298 MIN ON test board long UUCSS 769 h 34 35 ATM Board Error Query test 1259 WRN OFF test board UUCSS 770 h 31 ATM Board Error Query test 1259 WRN OFF test board UUC...

Page 914: ...842 v 3843 w None 3999 x Any None Any 327672 None 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 2 Aux Data 32767 for any error log entry indicates that an alarmed ATM EI was busied out and then released When this occurs existing service affecting alarms must be preserved Typical...

Page 915: ...circuit pack or remove the ATM EI administration see Basic ATM PNC Administration 2 Remove the ATM INTF administration and re administer the slot change circuit pack to match the circuit pack that is physically present in this slot e Error Type 131 An ATM EI circuit pack has been removed from the slot for 5 minutes 1 Insert the ATM EI circuit pack into its administered slot 2 Another way to resolv...

Page 916: ...s corrupting the cells See PKT BUS Packet Bus Aux Data 35 only The fiber between the ATM switch and the ATM EI is too long greater than 2 km for multimode fiber Use loopback to see if the fiber is corrupting the cells Some other ATM EI board is not receiving the cells properly The intervening ATM switch is dropping the ATM cells due to a shortage of bandwidth or the S8700 Multi Connect system is u...

Page 917: ...e connection to the ATM switch failed perhaps because the ATM switch rebooted fiber between the ATM switch and the ATM EI circuit pack disconnected 1092 or 1108 ATM EI circuit pack received a request for which the referenced VC was in the wrong call state 1093 or 1109 ATM EI circuit pack received a request for which the VPI VCI pair was invalid or out of range 1094 or 1110 ATM EI circuit pack rece...

Page 918: ...t up Set up Add Party WSP Set up Set up Add Party WSP Set up 1 28 528 828 66 566 866 98 598 898 34 534 834 02 502 802 2 29 529 829 67 567 867 99 599 899 35 535 835 03 503 803 3 30 530 830 68 568 868 100 600 900 36 536 836 04 504 804 4 31 531 831 69 569 869 101 601 901 37 537 837 05 505 805 5 56 556 856 70 570 870 102 602 902 38 538 838 06 506 606 6 57 557 857 71 571 871 103 603 903 39 539 839 07 5...

Page 919: ...1 21 NA NA NA 86 586 886 118 618 918 54 554 854 22 522 822 22 NA NA NA 87 587 887 119 619 919 55 555 855 23 523 823 Table 8 83 Error type 1281 Aux Data and repair procedures Aux Data Alarm Description Repair procedure 15 SYSCLOCK failed The board is not locked to the TDM backplane clock signal This is probably due to a Tone Clock problem Check for TDM BUS or TONE BD errors in the Error Log If no o...

Page 920: ...de to a different port This could require administration on the ATM switch If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 18 Multiplexer Section Alarm Indication Signal MS_AIS There is a major problem on the far end between multiplexer section MUX and the switch that prohibits the circuit pack from sending a valid signal See if the ports at the MUX and or the ATM switch are conne...

Page 921: ...he signal Reset the board reset board UUCSS If the error persists replace the board 21 Path Signal Error PSL STM1 SONET The incoming signal payload is not set up for transmission of ATM data Make sure the ATM switch port or a MUX port if present between ATM switch and the ATM EI board is the same as the ATM EI circuit pack s cable interface 22 High level Path Alarm Indication Signal HP_AIS The pay...

Page 922: ...receive transceiver of the board and see if the amber LED flash goes away If it does the problem is off board If the amber LED continues to flash replace the circuit pack 24 Loss of cell delineation LCD On board ATM framer chip is not able to frame cells based on the cell header Reset the board reset board UUCSS If the error persists replace the board 27 SIGCON_DOWN ATM switch high level signal Th...

Page 923: ...ck test board UUCSS 2 If Test 304 fails follow the repair procedures suggested for this test p Error Type 2305 Too many parity errors on data received from the LAN packet bus could be due to packet bus problems 1 Test the ATM EI circuit pack test board UUCSS 2 If Test 598 fails follow the repair procedures suggested for this test 3 If the test passes look for and resolve any PKT BUS packet bus ala...

Page 924: ...UUCSS 2 If the problem persists replace the ATM EI circuit pack If the system has a duplicated PNC and the in line error received is from an active ATM EI the system switches to the standby PNC CAUTION If the system does not have duplicated PNC services to the EPN could be disrupted t Error Types 3585 and 3586 Major board alarm A failure of critical components involved in the operation of the circ...

Page 925: ...ecognize and the board responded with an inconsistent down link error message This error does not affect service and no action is required v Error type 3842 The circuit pack received data from the packet bus faster than it could distribute the data to its endpoint This circuit pack should be able to recover by itself and no action is necessary w Error type 3843 The firmware on the circuit pack is ...

Page 926: ...en Error Type 1538 is also present Circuit pack is taken out of service Error Type 1538 is absent Circuit pack is not taken out of service but has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This can be normal during heavy traffic If the error is logged during light traffic it can indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it Table 8 84 System Tec...

Page 927: ...rection For this test the second ATM EI can reside in any EPN outside the tested ATM EI s EPN Therefore if the test should fail in either direction the test is repeated with a different EPN if available This aids the fault isolation procedure The test results indicate if the test failed in one or both directions The test aborts if the ATM EIs do not exist on both ends for example the EIs are not a...

Page 928: ...t 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Verify that at least one Tone Detector resides in this EPN Even without a TTR LEV error the tested circuit pack s EPN could be missing a Tone Detector...

Page 929: ...board 1394 ABORT 1 See Table 8 83 on page 8 197 Error Type 1281 with Aux Data 27 board cannot talk to the ATM switch and if present check both the ATM switch and the MultiVantage translations for consistent ATM addresses 2 Reset the board and see if the problem resolves 3 Repeat the test 1395 ABORT This test cannot run on an ATM EI circuit pack if it is part of the B side PNC and Duplicated PNC is...

Page 930: ...ar end EPN and NN to the near end ATM EI under test The test tone was detected correctly in forward direction data sent from the EPN where the circuit pack under test resides and detected correctly in port network MM but not the opposite direction 1 Test the active Tone Clocks on the MM EPN and the EPN where the ATM EI under test resides test tone clock UUCSS This determines if a dial tone is supp...

Page 931: ...0NN or 30NN replace ATM EI circuit pack with the initial problem 30MM FAIL The failure codes only apply to a system equipped with an ATM Switch The letters MM refer to the distant or far end EPN and NN to the near end ATM EI under test The test failed for the first connection from the ATM EI board under test to another EPN and the test tone was detected correctly in the forward direction data sent...

Page 932: ...under test resides This determines if dial tone is supplied 2 Ensure that the ATM address of the active ATM EI circuit pack in port network MM matches the ATM address on the ATM switch for the port to which this circuit pack is connected Refer to ATM Installation Upgrades and Administration for Avaya MultiVantage Solutions book for the procedure to check the ATM port address on the ATM switch 3 Ru...

Page 933: ... circuit packs 1 If the active ATM EI circuit pack in the EPN is failing and duplicated PNC is enabled attempt to switch to the standby PNC using the reset PNC interchange command 2 Repeat the short test sequence 3 If test continues to fail reset the ATM EI circuit pack with the reset board UUCSS command 4 If the ATM EI circuit pack in the EPN is failing enter display errors and display alarms and...

Page 934: ...o switch to the standby PNC using the reset PNC interchange command 2 Repeat the short test sequence 3 If test continues to fail reset the ATM EI circuit pack with the reset board UUCSS command 4 If the ATM EI circuit pack in the EPN is failing enter display errors and display alarms and resolve any TDM CLK TONE BD or SYNC alarms errors 5 Repeat the short test sequence 6 If test continues to fail ...

Page 935: ...ls The test aborts if the specified EPN s packet bus has an active minor alarm or is out of service This test runs as a part of initialization periodic or scheduled error analysis and demand test sequences Figure 8 4 shows a schematic of the test Figure 8 4 Packet Interface Test 598 Table 8 88 Packet Interface Test 598 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the te...

Page 936: ...it packs or the intervening Center Stage components 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to five times 2 If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack PASS The Packet Interface test passed Table 8 89 ATM Board Error Query Test 1259 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System r...

Page 937: ...st Table 8 90 XXYY Error Codes for Test 1259 ATM Board Error Query Test XX Aux Data Description 1 ATM framer chip failed 2 NCE chip failed 3 LANHO critical error 4 TDM Prog logic device failed 5 Every on board DSP failed 6 Receive network processor failed 7 Transmit network processor failed 8 Memory read failed 9 Dual UART chip failed 10 LANHO receive parity error 11 LANHO FIFO overflow error 12 L...

Page 938: ... Circuit Indicator VCI combination 27 The signaling link between the board and the ATM switch is down 28 Board to the ATM switch connection is down 34 Excessive AAL 5 ATM signaling protocol retransmission requests 35 Excessive LAP D retransmission requests 37 ATM CLP cell loss priority bit see MO ATM NTWK ATM Network Error 38 ATM congestion indicator see MO ATM NTWK ATM Network Error 39 ATM cell u...

Page 939: ...ack to the ATM EI board which converts the cell back into the bit pattern and puts it on a pre determined time slot A Tone Detector tests for the bit pattern and reports the test result This test verifies that a large portion of the ATM EIs circuit paths are functioning correctly Figure 8 5 shows a diagram of the test Figure 8 5 ATM Board Framer Loop Around Test 1260 Packet path the Packet Interfa...

Page 940: ...r If the test fails the fault can be on the board After the test results are reported the ATM framer is taken out of loopback NOTE This test can be run on active or standby ATM EIs but it is not allowed if an ATM EI is the Expansion Archangel Figure 8 6 ATM Board Framer Loop Around Test 1260 non EAA Packet Path Tone clock Tone detector PNC mode PNC mode PNC mode ATM framer looped iodfpak AWF 04069...

Page 941: ...stem NOTE A TN2182 Tone Clock circuit pack must be of vintage B or newer If an earlier vintage circuit pack resides in an EPN this test always aborts with this abort code 3 Resolve any TONE PT errors 4 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1015 ABORT The ATM EI circuit pack has not been busied out 1 Busyout the ATM Expansion Interface circuit pack then r...

Page 942: ...t be run on an ATM EI board that is on the active PNC because it cannot be busied out This error code indicates that PNC duplication is enabled 1 Attempt to perform a PNC interchange with the reset pnc interchange command 2 If the PNC interchange is successful busyout the original ATM Expansion Interface circuit pack with the busyout board UUCSS address of the original ATM EI board command 3 Retry...

Page 943: ...terface circuit pack is OK resolve any DS1 CONV BD alarms or errors if so equipped 3 Test the ATM EI circuit pack test board UUCSS long 4 If this test continues to fail replace the ATM EI board 5 Test the new ATM EI circuit pack test board UUCSS long 3 FAIL The test tone was transmitted correctly but the returned tone was distorted 1 If the Tone Clock is healthy test the ATM EI circuit pack test b...

Page 944: ...r this test does not verify that the optical portion of the lightwave transceiver is functioning 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Resolve either wrong board Error 125 or no board Error 131 issues if applicable 2 Check that the board is properly translated and inserted If so check for hyperactivity Error 1538 If hyperactive use the reset board UUCSS command 3 Run the test again If it ...

Page 945: ...de Test Result Description Recommendation 2031 FAIL The attempt to send the message to the ATM EI circuit pack was not successful 2500 FAIL Did not send the time of day information to the board 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times PASS The ATM EI circuit pack is successfully updated with system time 1 If the status port network command still indicates that this link is down it i...

Page 946: ... in the given time 1 Wait for 5 minutes and see if board is visible to the system by using list config all command 2 If the board is visible run the test again If same abort code results escalate the problem 3 If the board is not visible to the system with the list configuration all command reseat the board 4 If the board is still not recognized by the system replace the board 2100 ABORT Could not...

Page 947: ...sy connections Refer to Figure 8 7 for a schematic of this test NOTE Note This test takes approximately 12 minutes and applies only to TN2305 and TN2306 circuit packs Figure 8 7 ATM Cross Talk Test 1298 schematic Table 8 94 ATM Crosstalk Test 1298 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minu...

Page 948: ... exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1962 ABORT Every TALKER DSP is busy an unlikely event 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2302 ABORT Inco...

Page 949: ...ystem could not allocate time slots for the test The system could be under heavy traffic conditions or it could have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the num...

Page 950: ...ber of Echo Canceler DSPs that have failed the test 1 Run the tests for the active Tone Clock on the EPN that contains the indicted ATM EI circuit pack to verify that dial tone is supplied 2 If the Tone Clock is healthy repeat the short test on the ATM EI board 3 If this test continues to fail replace the ATM EI circuit pack XYZ PASS The test passed for some or all DSPs depending on XYZ values XYZ...

Page 951: ...owing circuit packs are ATM EI boards if they are administered to provide ATM port network connectivity ATM PNC NOTE Always replace an ATM EI circuit pack with the same type Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO ATM INTF WARNING test board UUCSSpp ATM interface board Table 8 96 ATM EI circuit packs for ATM PNC Circuit P...

Page 952: ...administered To resolve this problem either remove the wrong circuit pack or insert the logically administered circuit pack c Error Type 217 The ATM circuit pack is physically present but has not been given a personality Remove the circuit pack or administer it using the add atm pnc command or the add atm trunk command System Technical Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Test failure is no...

Page 953: ...y the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The circuit pack failed to return the circuit pack code or vintage 1 Retry the command up to 5 times 2 If the problem continues reset the circuit pack 3 Retry the command up to 5 times PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful Any NO BOARD This is normal if the test is being executed when 1 The board is not physically in the syst...

Page 954: ...M CES board itself Since these errors are not related to the ATM EI or ATM CES board they are not reported against the ATM EI or ATM TRK MO However some of these errors invoke alarms that require action by the system s maintenance software while other log only errors require no action Error Codes and Aux Data values The Cause Code Error Type information is shown inTable 8 99 on page 8 233 These ar...

Page 955: ...e call is being cleared because one of the users involved in the call has requested that the call be cleared Under normal situations the source of this cause is not the network 17 a User busy This cause indicates that the called party is unable to accept another call because the user busy condition has been encountered This cause value can be generated by the called user or by the network 18 a No ...

Page 956: ...SOURCE UNAVAILABLE 35 a Requested VPCI VCI not available This cause indicates that the requested VPCI VCI is not available This can be caused by mismatched VCI ranges on different ATM switches 36 a VPCI VCI assignment failure 37 a User Cell Rate not available 38 a Network out of order This cause indicates that the network is not functioning correctly and that the condition is likely to last a rela...

Page 957: ...scriptor information element IE is not supported 78 a AAL parameters cannot be supported INVALID MESSAGES 81 a Invalid call reference value This cause indicates that its sending equipment received a message with a call reference that is currently inactive on the user network interface 82 a Identified channel does not exist This cause indicates that its sending equipment received a request to use a...

Page 958: ...her because the IE s identifier s are undefined or defined but not implemented by the cause sending equipment This cause indicates that its sending equipment discarded the IE However the equipment could still process the message since this IE was not required 100 a Invalid contents in information element IE This cause indicates that its sending equipment received and implemented an IE However one ...

Page 959: ...ove command note the time stamps shown in the list measurements atm setup events screen Execute the above command periodically and note the time stamps If the time stamps have changed for a particular From Conn To Conn pair this indicates there are still setup failures delays for that connection 3 After verifying that every associated ATM endpoint is operating correctly and if errors are still occ...

Page 960: ...wing example ERROR TYPE field 263 Subtract 256 PNC destination connection 7 The AUX DATA field contains the originating and destination EPN number XXYY Where XX the originating EPN and YY the destination EPN for example 1 AUX DATA 302 3 orig 2 dest 2 Example AUX DATA 1510 15 orig 10 dest Table 8 100 Location codes from Aux Data values Setup Location Code Add Party Location Code WSP Setup location ...

Page 961: ...olicing out discarding cells which do not conform to the traffic contract This error can occur together with other errors such as Excessive AAL 5 CRC errors or Excessive LAP D retransmissions These errors affect SVCs with Variable Bit Rate VBRnt traffic contracts VBR SVCs transport system links such as EAL PACL and PRI links Again this indicates problems with cell transmissions in the ATM network ...

Page 962: ...carded by the ATM network This indicates problems with cell transmission in the ATM network Consult the ATM network vendor Ask about cell delay variation cell discard and traffic policing Cell underruns often happen in conjunction with cell overruns If both occur it further indicts the ATM network g Error Type 1537 ATM Cell Overruns MultiVantage ATM monitors for cell overrun conditions on SVCs wit...

Page 963: ...s or poor voice quality The lost cells error can help you diagnose cell underrun problems When cell underruns are accompanied by lost cells errors the lost cells could have caused the underruns But if you have cell under runs without lost cells it could indicate that the underruns were due to network jitter instead It is also possible that network jitter can cause both cell underruns and lost cell...

Page 964: ...above circuit packs to the ATM Switch Interface Modules ATM Switch Although not part of the PNC Tone Clock circuit packs are also duplicated in each EPN ATM PNC systems can have up to 64 EPNs PNC duplication architecture utilizes an active standby duplication scheme in which one complete set of PNC components supports call processing while the duplicate PNC is held in reserve All calls on the acti...

Page 965: ...t be released unless all standby PNC components are released Enabling and Removing PNC Duplication To Enable PNC Duplication To enable PNC duplication perform the following sequence of steps 1 Enable administration of PNC DUP on the change system parameters customer options form 2 Fully administer duplicate ATM PNC connectivity Verify by list atm pnc Or for IP duplication go to step three status p...

Page 966: ...vel 2 or higher To Disable PNC Duplication To disable PNC duplication perform the following sequence of steps 1 Verify that the A PNC is active A forced interchange may be required See reset pnc 2 Busyout the standby PNC B PNC 3 Turn off the system parameter for PNC DUP through change system parameters duplication 4 Remove the B PNC connectivity by removing the Board Locations on the change fiber ...

Page 967: ...n interchange when the health of the active falls below that of the standby unless prevented from doing so by a PNC lock busyout or antithrashing mechanism Potentially service disrupting faults that occur in a PNC s components are reported to PNC DUP and incorporated in the affected PNC s state of health The SOHs of both PNCs are displayed on the status pnc form as shown in Figure 8 9 Figure 8 9 S...

Page 968: ...meaning of each fault class field is given in Table 8 101 A zero entry indicates that there are no faults reported Higher numbers indicate increasing number of faults All zeros indicate a perfect state of health Unless the PNCs are locked the active PNC s state of health should always be equal to or better than the standby s Otherwise the system performs a spontaneous interchange After a PNC relat...

Page 969: ...ose in the active PNC If however the standby PNC s state of health degrades a selective unrefresh of those connections that utilize the faulted component s is performed If the standby PNC s health improves a selective refresh of connections on the affected route is performed so that call setup is consistent between the active PNC and the healthy parts of the standby PNC The Standby Refreshed field...

Page 970: ...are deactivated as indicated by the amber LEDs going from flashing to on solid 2 The ATM EIs in IPSI port networks are interchanged indicated by the new standby ATM EI amber LED off and the new active ATM EI amber LED on steady 3 One by one the EPN ATM EIs in non IPSI port networks are interchanged as indicated by new standby ATM EI amber LED turning off and the new active ATM EI amber LED flashin...

Page 971: ...and switches to receive timing from the standby ATM EI In this case TDM CLK 2305 error is logged and the clock problem should be addressed first if possible To repair PNC components in a duplicated PNC proceed as follows 1 Most repairs involve fixing a single fault on the standby PNC Use set pnc lock or busy out pnc to prevent an interchange into the PNC being repaired 2 If a faulty component exis...

Page 972: ...es demonstrating this technique follow 1 There is a fault that can occur in either an IPSI port network s ATM EI or the PKT INT which cannot be readily attributed to one board or the other If the packet bus transceivers on either the PKT INT or ATM EI fail the two boards cannot communicate but it will not be clear which board is at fault In this case a planned interchange of the PNC can be used to...

Page 973: ...ntify which areas of the Alarm Log to investigate to find the source of the problem Table 8 102 Error Code descriptions and Aux Data correlations Error Code Description Aux Data1 1 The Aux Data indicates which PNC became active after the PNC interchange 0 denotes PNC A 1 denotes PNC B 00000 Error in generating error code None 1cxpp Spontaneous Interchange in response to a constraint for A PNC Acti...

Page 974: ...description for contributing MOs 0 EAL Expansion Archangel Link EXP PN carries CCMS messages 1 PACL ATM EI carries ATM signaling commands from Call Processing to the remote ATM EI circuit packs 2 PNC hardware providing connectivity of EPN to EPN or ATM EI 5 BFDL bearer fault detection link solely for the purpose of detecting bearer faults pp Port network number 0 63 0 2 for constraint class this i...

Page 975: ...nks For more information see ATM TRK Circuit Emulation Service Circuit Pack The operation of the entire ATM signaling group depends on several other entities ATM DCH signaling channel port TN230X Interface circuit pack where a D channel resides System link to the processor via the packet bus MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 grp is the signaling group number 1 166 the te...

Page 976: ...n or outage at the far end The Aux Data field contains layer 3 protocol information used by internal counters Table 8 105 ATM SGRP Signaling Group Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 0 Any Any test sig group grp 1 a Any None 18 b MO busied out 257 c Any None test sig group grp 769 d Any Primary Signaling Link Hardware check 636 test ...

Page 977: ...the B channels are negotiated back to the In Service state and their alarms are retired 2 When this error occurs the state of the Signaling Group is changed to out of service verify using the status sig group command d Error Type 769 signaling link hardware error Service affecting failures of the hardware used to transport the D channel are reported to the ATM CES Signaling Group MO Maintenance lo...

Page 978: ... SERV ACK ISDN D channel message has been received by a non US type interface country option other than 1 on the DS1 administration form However these messages are used only for duplex NFAS signaling which is supported by country protocol 1 Thus there may be a mismatch in administration between the local and far end switches 1 Consult with the customer s network provider to determine whether the D...

Page 979: ... Data field determine the trunk group against which the error was reported 2 Issue the status trunk command for the indicated trunk 3 Refer to Table 8 67 on page 8 169 in ATM BCH ATM B Channel Trunk for recovery suggestions 3858 Similar to Error Type 1 The switch sent an ISDN message to the far end switch or terminal adapter that did not respond in the allotted time 1 Check for alarms and errors a...

Page 980: ...tail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone 1 If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found escalate the problem and provide the next tier with this Error Log information 3894 Protocol detail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unex...

Page 981: ... a network service has been made but the network has rejected the request because the requested service is not implemented 1 Follow the recommendations listed above for Error Type 3890 3928 A call was denied because of a basic incompatibility between the type of call and either the facilities selected by the routing pattern or the called user itself This error might be helpful as a clue if the cus...

Page 982: ...ve ND Nondestructive Primary Signaling Link Hardware check 636 X X ND Layer 2 Status test 647 X X ND Remote Layer 3 Query test 1291 X X ND Continued on next page Table 8 108 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check 636 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 8 FAIL There is a problem with the ATM TN230X circui...

Page 983: ...ry the command at 1 minute intervals up to five times 1134 ABORT Internal system error The associated ATM circuit pack is not administered This condition should not be possible since an administered ATM circuit pack must be specified when administering a Signaling Group 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to three times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inte...

Page 984: ...nnels and ATM Interface circuit packs This test goes one step further by checking the communication path from the processor through the TDM packet bus and ATM Interface circuit pack and on to the far end switch or terminal adapter A special ISDN message is sent to the far end switch or terminal adapter that must respond within a specified amount of time This test is designed to ensure that the com...

Page 985: ...ute intervals up to 5 times 2500 none ABORT Internal system error or administration problem 1 Determine whether any B channels are administered 2 If there are none then this is a normal ABORT since this test cannot run unless at least one B channel is administered 3 If at least one B channel is administered there is an internal system error Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAI...

Page 986: ...between the S8700 Media Server Multi Connect IPSI and the Expansion Port Networks EPNs through the ATM port network connectivity ATM PNC between the networks Depending on the network s synchronization plan and the status of synchronization sources the system timing reference may be The clock circuit pack on the ATM switch A DS1 or UDS1 interface circuit pack tapped T1 input signal connected to the...

Page 987: ...ynchronization source If the primary synchronization reference does not provide a valid timing signal ATM synchronization maintenance infers a switch to the secondary reference If the primary synchronization reference is not providing a valid timing signal the system automatically switches to the secondary synchronization reference If the primary synchronization reference is invalid and if the sec...

Page 988: ...nect with ATM PNC Synchronization Troubleshooting A significant part of the Synchronization Recovery Strategy for a S8700 Multi Connect with ATM PNC resides in the ATM switch s clock hardware firmware and software S8700 Multi Connect monitors synchronization performance and alarms any faulty components See SYNC Port Network Synchronization on page 8 1509 Clock External T1 E1 External T1 E1 seconda...

Page 989: ...es list timing source Displays all DS1 and UDS1 locations that are allowed to be administered as primary or secondary references with the change synchronization command disable enable synchronization switch Prevents or allows switching to another synchronization source test synchronization Tests the administered synchronization source Table 8 111 Synchronization Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Da...

Page 990: ...the problem b Error Type 257 problem with the secondary DS1 reference It is cleared when the secondary reference is restored Refer to note a to resolve this error substituting secondary for primary in the preceding resolution steps c Error Type 513 the ATM switch clock is inferred to be providing the timing source for the system The primary and secondary if administered are not providing a valid t...

Page 991: ...n Therefore when a synchronization problem occurs on Error Types 1 257 or 513 a WARNING alarm is first raised for 15 to 20 minutes before the alarm is upgraded to a MINOR or MAJOR alarm System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented below when inspecting errors in the system Test Synchronization Test 417 This test updates all the Synch...

Page 992: ... command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1115 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2500 ABORT Internal system error PASS The synchronization maintenance component circuit pack parameters have been successfully updated The system should be synchronized after successful execution of this test 1 If synchronization problems still exist refer to the Error Log to ...

Page 993: ...ween the EPNs Either circuit pack personality requires SONET OC 3 or SDH STM 1 fiber cable connections between the circuit pack and the ATM switch As a trunk board it supports direct connection between ATM CES circuit packs without an intervening ATM switch MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the car...

Page 994: ...ircuits The TN230x can support a varied number of virtual circuits depending on the switch and the administration of the circuit pack Table 8 114 lists the possibilities for various DEFINITY ECS models Virtual trunk groups You cannot bundle physical DS1 ISDN PRI circuits and virtual ATM CES circuits into the same trunk groups Virtual circuits can only be assigned to all virtual all ATM trunk group...

Page 995: ...orts Reserved ports Total ports T1 24 8 192 ports 1 8 256 E1 31 8 248 ports 1 8 256 Continued on next page Table 8 117 ATM TRK LED interpretation LEDs Condition LED status Red Error alarm logged On Red and Green Booting LEDs being tested Blinking on 200 ms off 200 ms Green Test maintenance in progress On Amber Fiber Loss of Signal LOS LOF MS_RDI MS_AIS LCD HP_RDI HP_AIS LOP PSC Blinking fast 100 m...

Page 996: ...M boards identifying equipment location board code type and vintage list configuration trunks Lists boards identifying assigned ports While the ATM board is listed the 256 ports are not busyout release atm signaling group Busyout or release of an ATM signaling group within a trunk group status atm signaling group Show current status of an ATM signaling group status trunk group Shows status of the ...

Page 997: ...37 j 12 None WRN MIN ON 1538 k 0 None WRN MIN ON reset board UUCSS 1794 l 13 None MIN ON 2049 m 15 None WRN OFF test board UUCSS 2306 n None 2561 o Packet interface test 598 MIN ON test board UUCSS r 2 2817 p 1 24 ATM Board DSP test 1293 WRN MIN ON test board UUCSS 2818 p 1 24 WRN MIN ON test board UUCSS 3330 q 3 MIN OFF 3585 r ATM Board Error Query test 1259 WRN MIN ON test board UUCSS l 3841 s A...

Page 998: ...that is physically present locate the slot where the ATM TRK circuit pack is actually installed and re administer the ATM trunk e Error Type 257 Control Channel Loop test 52 failed The circuit pack is not properly connected with the control channel on the TDM bus 1 Take the corrective action specified by Test 52 f Error Type 513 ATM Crosstalk test 1298 failed The board is writing to or reading fro...

Page 999: ... software counter are listed in Table 8 120 If Then There is multimode fiber Check the length of the fiber If the cable is longer than 2 km it is probably causing the errors There is single mode fiber or the length of the multimode fiber is less than 2 km The source of the errors can lie in the ATM facility the ATM TRK circuit pack or the far end circuit pack If Then The ATM TRK circuit pack fails...

Page 1000: ... and see if the amber LED flash goes away If it does the problem is off board 3 If the amber LED continues to flash replace the circuit pack 17 Loss of Frame LOF The fiber signal cannot obtain or maintain STM 1 OC 3 framing 1 Try to more the fiber on the ATM switch side to a different port 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 18 Multiplexer Section Alarm Indication Si...

Page 1001: ...e signal 1 Reset the board reset board UUCSS 2 If the error persists replace the board 21 Path Signal Error PSL STM1 SONET The incoming signal payload is not set up for transmission of ATM data 1 Make sure the ATM switch port or a MUX port if present between ATM switch and the ATM TRK board is the same as the ATM TRK circuit pack s cable interface 22 High level Path Alarm Indication Signal HP_AIS ...

Page 1002: ...sceiver to the receive transceiver of the board and see if the amber LED flash goes away 3 If it does the problem is off board 4 If the amber LED continues to flash replace the circuit pack 24 Loss of cell delineation LCD On board ATM framer chip is not able to frame cells based on the cell header 1 Reset the board reset board UUCSS 2 If the error persists replace the board 27 SIGCON_DOWN ATM swit...

Page 1003: ...rcuit pack 1 busyout board UUCSS 2 reset board UUCSS 3 test board UUCSS long 4 release board UUCSS 5 If this error persists replace the circuit pack l Error Type 1794 LANHO transmit FIFO overflow The circuit pack s transmit buffers have overflowed 1 Run test board UUCSS r 5 m Error Type 2049 ACL Link Failure link is down The ATM Control Link ACL has failed communication has been interrupted betwee...

Page 1004: ...8 passes See PKT BUS Packet Bus and perform the specified repair There are no errors against the packet bus MO This can be a transient condition Do nothing now but escalate if the error occurs repeatedly If Then Test 598 fails Follow the repair procedures suggested for that test Test 598 passes See PKT BUS Packet Bus and perform the specified repair There are no errors against the packet bus MO Th...

Page 1005: ...itch can no longer recognize it If Then There is a packet bus alarm There is probably a packet bus problem particularly if other circuit packs on the packet bus report the same error See PKT BUS Packet Bus and Isolating and Repairing Packet Bus Faults for repair procedures There are no packet bus alarms Run the following command sequence 1 busyout board UUCSS 2 reset board UUCSS 3 test board UUCSS...

Page 1006: ...source that is to low This error does not affect the service and no action is required v Error Type 3999 circuit pack sent a large number of control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time If Then Test 1259 fails with Error Code XXYY and XX is an AUX value in the preceding table Replace the ATM TRK circuit pack The system does not recognize the circuit pack Replace the ATM TRK...

Page 1007: ... of order you can lose important information Table 8 121 System Technician Demanded Tests ATM TRK Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive ATM Board Time Of Day Update 1261 X ND Connection Audit test 50 X ND Control Channel Loop test 52 X ND Packet Interface Loop Around test 598 X X ND ATM DSP test 1293 X X ND ATM Bo...

Page 1008: ...at 1 minute intervals 1019 ABORT The test aborted because a test was already running on the port Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals PASS The circuit pack has been updated with its translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect t...

Page 1009: ...BORT Test request timed out 2100 ABORT Could not allocate needed system resources 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals FAIL The ATM circuit pack responded incorrectly 1 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the test continues to fail reset the ATM TRK circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If test continues to fail replace the circ...

Page 1010: ...st passes if SAKI can successfully reset and retest the board Before running the SAKI test you must Move synchronization off the ATM TRK circuit pack Busyout the ATM TRK circuit pack The test aborts if the ATM TRK circuit pack is supplying synchronization Table 8 124 Packet Interface Loop Around Test 598 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Test request timed out 1 Retry th...

Page 1011: ...times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Sanity test timed out 1 Wait 5 minutes Then see if ATM TRK circuit pack is visible to the system by running list configuration all 2 If the ATM TRK circuit pack is visible list configuration all run the test again and escalate if the problem recurs 3 If the ATM TRK circuit pack is not visible to the system...

Page 1012: ...oard or Error 131 no board and perform the appropriate repair if needed 2 Ensure that the board is properly translated and inserted 3 Check for Error 1538 hyperactivity If hyperactive run reset board UUCSS 4 Run the test again If it fails replace the ATM TRK circuit pack and retest Table 8 125 ATM Board Reset 1256 Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 1013: ...equest timed out 2031 ABORT SCD failure Unable to sent down link message 2100 ABORT Could not allocate needed system resources 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals XXYY FAIL On board error XX Table 8 127 and or off board error YY Table 8 128 on page 8 292 1 Examine the error logs and repair any errors found PASS The ATM circuit pack has passed th...

Page 1014: ...led 7 Transmit Network Processor failed 8 Memory read failed 9 Dual UART chip failed 10 LANHO receive parity error 11 LANHO FIFO overflow error 12 LAN bus time out 13 LANHO Xmit FIFO overflow error 14 One or more on board DSPs failed Continued on next page Table 8 128 Aux Data YY for ATM Board Error Query Test 1259 If YY Then 15 Back plane clock failed 16 Loss of signal 17 Loss of frame 18 MS alar...

Page 1015: ...e receiver for verification If the circuit pack passes the circuit check the software checks the packet path by sending a packet from the packet interface circuit pack to the ATM TRK circuit pack via the ATM protocol stack 22 High level path alarm indication signal 23 High level path remote defect indicator 24 Loss of cell delineation 25 Uncorrectable headers sent by the ATM switch 26 Too many cel...

Page 1016: ...ack 2 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals 1015 ABORT ATM TRK circuit pack not busied out 1 Busyout the ATM circuit pack 2 Rerun the command 1033 ABORT ATM TRK circuit pack not found 1 See if the switch can see the circuit pack Run status trunk group 2 Retry the command 1139 ABORT Major alarm on the EPN s packet bus 1 Run display alarms and perform the repairs associated with PKT ...

Page 1017: ...d with DS1 CONV BD errors if applicable 3 Run display alarms and perform the repairs associated with DS1 CONV BD alarms if applicable 4 Run test board UUCSS long 5 If this test continues to fail replace the ATM TRK circuit pack 6 Run test board UUCSS long 3 FAIL Distorted tone returned 1 Test the active Tone Clock in the EPN and verify that a tone is reaching the ATM TRK circuit pack If not correc...

Page 1018: ... TRK circuit pack are functioning properly 0 NO BOARD ATM TRK circuit pack not found 1 Check the error log for Error 125 wrong board or Error 131 no board and correct as necessary 2 Check that the board is properly translated and inserted 3 Check for Error 1538 hyperactivity and run reset board UUCSS if necessary 4 Rerun test board UUCSS long 5 If the test fails replace the board and rerun test bo...

Page 1019: ...ormation to the board 1 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the test aborts with the same error code escalate the problem PASS The ATM TRK circuit pack is successfully updated with system time 1 If the status port network command still indicates that this link is down it is possible that one or both of the ATM TRK circuit packs have been busied out 2 If the link still does n...

Page 1020: ...alization error analysis testing periodic scheduled and craft short and long testing Table 8 131 ATM Board DSP Test 1293 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1002 ABORT Could not allocate time slots Traffic could be heavy or time slots could be out of service 1 Run display errors and follow associated repair procedures for TDM BUS 2 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute interval...

Page 1021: ...TRK circuit pack 3 If the test continues to fail check for service affecting MINOR alarms If a MINOR alarm is raised for Error Type 2817 or 1818 replace the circuit pack 4 If a WARNING alarm is raised this is a non service affecting error and the circuit pack can still process calls XY8 PASS The test passed for some or all DSPs XY8 indicates the number of talker listener and echo canceler DSPs for...

Page 1022: ...time slots Traffic could be heavy or time slots could be out of service 1 Identify and correct TDM bus errors if any using the procedures in the TDM BUS TDM Bus MO 2 Repeat the test up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals 1003 ABORT Could not allocate a tone receiver Too few Tone Detectors installed or Tone Detectors out of service 1 Identify and correct any TTR LEV TTR Level errors listed in the Erro...

Page 1023: ...ain until this test of the ATM DSP test 1293 tells the circuit pack to use them again 1 Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the failure persists replace the circuit pack 1 8 PASS ATM TRK circuit pack not talking to un authorized time slots on the TDM bus The error code indicates the number of TALKER DSPs tested Table 8 132 ATM Crosstalk Test 1298 Continued Error Code Test Re...

Page 1024: ...server These links are re established once a minute If a link cannot be re established its status is flagged as down A WSP or main server is considered down if 1 For standard reliability links cannot be established on the A PNC 1 For a duplex or high reliability system and for standard reliability on the other WSPs links cannot be established to both A PNCs of the main server on the A PNC between ...

Page 1025: ... can perform maintenance on itself and monitor WAN connectivity A WSP is not recognized by the system s hardware or software as an EPN when not active and functions in place of the main server when active Up to seven WSPs can reside in an ATM PNC configuration The number of EPNs in an S8700 Multi Connect configuration is not limited by the number of WSPs used i e the number of WSPs used is not sub...

Page 1026: ...ures to return the system to normal operation 1 Run status atm wsp on the active WSP to verify that the main server or a higher priority WSP that you want to be in control is up 2 If the main server or the higher priority WSP is up then run reset system 2 The active WSP should relinquish control 3 Wait a few minutes and run list sys link on the main server or higher priority WSP to verify that the...

Page 1027: ...ures listed below to correct any inconsistency in WSP priorities 1 Obtain a list of WSP priorities from the system administrator 2 Use the display error command to find the WSP number with the incorrect priority the Aux Data of the error 3 Use the status atm wsp command to determine whether any administered priorities are incorrect Pay close attention to WSP X and the local WSP 4 If any are incorr...

Page 1028: ... command to change the address of WSP X if they do not match 3 If the addresses do match then the ATM switch has a different address administered for WSP X even though each WSP is consistent System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes There are no system technician demanded tests associated with this MO Table 8 134 Error type 1025 Aux Data error codes for YY YY Meaning 1 The prob...

Page 1029: ...apply only to switch side maintenance that tests a circuit pack s components related to the TDM bus interface The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D o...

Page 1030: ...1872 The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN566 operating in control link mode is described in ADX16A PT MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO ...

Page 1031: ...RK Auxiliary Trunk for related trunk information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO AUX BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack AUX BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh ...

Page 1032: ...ministered by the change system parameters hospitality command and uses all four ports on a TN763B Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack Music On Hold provides audible feedback to a held parked or otherwise split away party indicating that the call is still connected The feedback can be customer provided music a recorded message or other audible indication Since the Music On Hold port is always busy some o...

Page 1033: ...on and or make busy information The SZ SZ SZ1 pair that provides the external equipment with a seizure indication The interface used for recorded announcement dictation and other loudspeaker paging consists of the following two pairs The Tip Ring T R pair used for voice transmission The S S S1 pair that carries answer supervision and or make busy information The interface used for Music On Hold co...

Page 1034: ...e circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reseat or replace the circuit pack Table 8 135 Auxiliary Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow ...

Page 1035: ...estigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Looparound and Conference test 33 X ND NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Diagnostic test 114 X X ND Audit Update test 36 X X ND Table 8 136 Test 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minu...

Page 1036: ...se to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error 2100 ABORT Cou...

Page 1037: ...t UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk grou...

Page 1038: ...oard Check the wiring and connections to the auxiliary equipment and retry the test after reconnecting the port to the auxiliary equipment If the test fails check the auxiliary equipment See the preceding procedure for a failure with Error Code 7 NOTE If the Looparound and Conference test fails for every port on a circuit pack a 5 Volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circ...

Page 1039: ...e duration Trunk state idle active unavailable Companding mode A law or mu law Table 8 138 Test 36 Audit Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1006 ABORT Port is in out of service state as a result of being busied out This audit cannot be run 1 Re...

Page 1040: ...oup member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status ...

Page 1041: ...vintage greater than 50 For circuit pack level problems see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN568 operating in 8 port digital mode is described in ADXDP PT ADX12 BD The ADX12 BD MO represents a TN568 EMBEDDED AUDIX circuit pack operating in 12 port digital DP mode TN568 EMBEDDED AUDIX circuit packs operating in 12 port digital mode appear to...

Page 1042: ...lots physically occupied by the circuit pack is supplied by the board when inserted The TN568 is 2 slots wide the functional slot and a reserve slot The reserve blank slot to the left of the functional slot is a place holder on the switch and has no interaction with the switch These MOs are place holders for the extra slot needed for the EMBEDDED AUDIX board Each instance of these MOs represents a...

Page 1043: ... of which operates with two B channels and 1 D channel as specified in the Avaya ISDN BRI Specification In this context the term ISDN BRI port is used to refer to ports on the TN2208 MFB circuit pack that are connected to ASAI or Avaya adjuncts The TN2208 LGATE MFB is handled by the switch software as if it is an ISDN BRI compatible board and every maintenance action referring to ASAI and Avaya ad...

Page 1044: ...ring the initialization testing See Chapter 6 LED Interpretation for more details on circuit pack status LEDs Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 140 BRI BD Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS sh r 1 1 a Any None MINOR ON 18 b 0 busyout board UUCSS WARNING OFF release board UUCS...

Page 1045: ...UCSS command c Port s has have been administered on this circuit pack but the circuit pack is not physically present d This error indicates transient communication problems between the switch and this circuit pack Execute the test board UUCSS command and see Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 on page 8 1734 for the repair procedures e An on board hardware failure has been detected by the circuit ...

Page 1046: ...s of other types being reported against this circuit pack g This error is reported by the circuit pack when it cannot update NPE memory and read it back This error type can be ignored but may lead to errors of other types being reported against this circuit pack h A critical hardware failure has been detected on the circuit pack Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board UUCSS and reset board UU...

Page 1047: ...e the circuit pack 1793 Parity errors are detected when transmitting data to the packet bus 1794 Overflow of packet bus transmit buffers has occurred 1795 Circuit pack cannot find end of frame when transmitting to packet bus Clear the alarm via the following commands busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS test board UUCSS long clear release board UUCSS If the error recurs within 10 minutes then rep...

Page 1048: ...above instructions then follow normal escalation procedures l These errors are not service affecting No action is required These errors are reported by the circuit pack when it receives a bad control channel message from the switch The auxiliary data identifies the following error events m This error is not service affecting No action is required n This error indicates that the circuit pack sent a...

Page 1049: ...ck as Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 on page 8 1734 SAKI Sanity Test 53 Refer to the repair procedure described in XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack as SAKI Sanity Test 53 on page 8 1735 LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test 595 This test is destructive The test reads and clears the LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter on the circuit pack This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when i...

Page 1050: ... command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail verify the validity of the packet bus Run the Packet Bus Maintenance test with the test pkt P long command If any packet bus tests fail see PKT BUS Packet Bus on page 8 1230 for recommended repair procedures 3 If the Packet Bus test passes check the validity of the circuit pack Execute a test that involves data transmissi...

Page 1051: ...me in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO BRI DAT WARNING1 1 The alarm level for ASAI or Avaya adjuncts may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set independently for on and off board alarms to WARNING MINOR or MAJOR for every ASAI adjunct in the system test data module ISDN BRI Stand alone Data Module ...

Page 1052: ...resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO BRI PORT MINOR test port PCSSpp l ISDN BRI port BRI PORT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh ISDN BRI port ABRI PORT MAJOR2 3 2 The alarm level for ASAI and Avaya adjunct ports may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set independently for on and off board alarms to WARNING MINOR or MAJOR for every ASAI and A...

Page 1053: ...cts For BRI endpoints each B channel may support voice or circuit switched data and may be circuit switched simultaneously The B channels are not used on ports connected to ASAI or Avaya adjuncts The D channel is used for conveying signaling between the switch and a BRI endpoint s ASAI or Avaya adjunct Each ISDN BRI D channel is connected to the switch processor and the ISDN BRI port through the p...

Page 1054: ... mind when investigating the cause of ISDN BRI port problems For more information about the circuit pack see BRI BD LGATE BD ISDN BRI Line Circuit Pack on page 8 321 BRI SET ASAI ADJ BRI DAT on page 8 354 and its endpoints see ASAI ADJ Adjunct Switch Application Interface ATT ADJ Avaya Adjunct Maintenance documentation LGATE AJ on page 8 1013 ATTE AJ Ethernet Avaya Adjunct Maintenance documentatio...

Page 1055: ... WARNING MAJOR MINOR WARNING2 OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 2 18 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 130 b WARNING ON test port PCSS sh 257 c c EPF Inquiry 622 WARNING MAJOR MINOR WARNING2 OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 1 513 d d 46222 none d d ON 769 e 0 none WARNING MAJ OFF 1281 f NPE Crosstalk 617 MINOR WARNING2 ON test port PCSSpp l r 2 1537 g 46210 CRC Error Counter 623 WARNING MAJOR M...

Page 1056: ...dition or when the BRI LINE circuit pack detects that the EPF is in an over current condition The aux data field contains one of the following values blank This indicates that the EPF Status Inquiry failed due to an overcurrent condition 40988 This indicates that the BRI LINE circuit pack has detected an overcurrent condition and has turned the EPF off Execute the short test sequence and see the r...

Page 1057: ...t 617 f Error Type 1281 This error occurs when a port s associated broadcast signaling links have too much traffic related to link establishment This could occur if an endpoint on this port is sending link establishment traffic on a port level broadcast link or if there are Level 1 problems on the port Check the error logs for Level 1 errors If Level 1 problems exist follow the repair procedures l...

Page 1058: ...PID initialization request is made from an endpoint and the switch determines that the SPID value is invalid or is a duplicate of another SPID that is already initialized at Layer 3 on the port Check the administration of the endpoints l Error Type 3844 This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers Run the long test sequence and pay particular attention to the ...

Page 1059: ... Crosstalk test and the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around test are not executed for ABRI PORT ATT PORT LGATE PT ATTE PT Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 617 X D BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around test 618 X D BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around test 619 X D Electronic Power Feed Restoral test 620 X X ND Level 1 Status Inqu...

Page 1060: ...sources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or trunk group member number of the port Use the status bri port PCSSpp command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is active then the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to th...

Page 1061: ...acket bus for the D channel 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 2 FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This causes noisy and unreliable connections Error code 1 indicates that the NPE Crosstalk test failed on Channel B1 Error code 2 indicate...

Page 1062: ... station command to determine whether the station or adjunct is active 3 If so wait until it is idle and then busyout the port using the busyout port PCSSpp command to place it in the out of service state and repeat this test WARNING Since the busyout command is destructive execution of this command prior to the port being idle causes every call associated with BRI endpoints and every transaction ...

Page 1063: ...ng PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around test to verify the repair 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem FAIL The Loop Around test has failed 1 If the test fails repeatedly attemp...

Page 1064: ...the remaining tests in the sequence are not executed An error code is returned at that point This test is not executed for ABRI PORT ATT PORT LGATE PT ATTE PT because the B channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or Avaya adjuncts The dotted lines in Figure 8 13 on page 8 342 show how a Loop Around test is performed for the B channels The figure shows a terminal connected to a BRI l...

Page 1065: ...conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone ...

Page 1066: ...bort escalate the problem 1 2 FAIL As stated previously this test runs a TDM Loop Around test on each B channel This indicates that the loop around failed on one of the channels Error Code 1 indicates that the TDM Loop Around test failed on B1 Error Code 2 indicates that the TDM Loop Around test failed on B2 7 8 FAIL As stated previously this test runs a Conference Circuit test on each B channel A...

Page 1067: ...hich follows in the testing sequence EPF Restoral is attempted again by this test five seconds later This test always passes for the TN2198 because it has no EPF This test will always abort when run on the TN2208 Table 8 146 Test 620 Electronic Power Feed Restoral Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this port type The TN2208 does not have an elec...

Page 1068: ...e The Deactivated state indicates a problem with the BRI LINE circuit pack When in this state the Level 1 interface is idle and is not trying to communicate with the BRI endpoints or adjunct When an ISDN BRI port is placed in the out of service state Level 1 is also put into the Deactivated state This could be due either to the system detecting a fault with the port or to a busyout port PCSSpp req...

Page 1069: ... also has status lamps to determine the health of the unit 1 For the TN556 verify that an endpoint is connected to the port If an endpoint is connected to the port then proceed to step 2 For the TN2198 verify that the connections are good between the switch and the NT1 Verify that the NT1 has power 2 As necessary check and repair the wiring between the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct If a...

Page 1070: ...command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify repair If this test is still failing proceed to step 3 3 Escalate the problem to the next tier 3 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated the port is out of service 1 Issue the status bri port PCSSpp command to verify that the service state of the port is out of service If the service state of the port is not out of s...

Page 1071: ... recommended repair procedures 2 Execute the test port PCSSpp command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify the repair If the test is still failing proceed to step 3 3 Escalate the problem to the next tier PASS This test indicates that Level 1 is activated or that software has taken the port out of service Table 8 147 Test 621 Level 1 Status Inquiry Continued Error Co...

Page 1072: ...st aborts repeatedly up to five times reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1 FAIL Th...

Page 1073: ...received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to five times reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 tim...

Page 1074: ...er Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to five times reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not all...

Page 1075: ...ier TEI values and layer 3 reinitialization This test is used only to send messages to the BRI PORT ABRI PORT ATT PORT LGATE PT ATTE PT and therefore should neither abort nor fail Table 8 151 Test 270 Clear Error Counters Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Any ABORT This test should never abort Any FAIL This test should never fail 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 ti...

Page 1076: ...Name of MO BRI SET BRI DAT WARNING2 2 The alarm level for ASAI and Avaya adjuncts may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set independently for on and off board alarms to WARNING MINOR or MAJOR for every ASAI and Avaya adjunct in the system test station extension l test data module extension ISDN BRI Set ASAI ADJ MAJOR2 test station extension ASAI Adjunct ASAI ADJ ...

Page 1077: ...r second kbps with two B channels and one D channel as specified in the Avaya ISDN BRI specification PUB 801 802 100 For BRI endpoints each B channel may support voice or circuit switched data and may be circuit switched simultaneously The B channels are not used by ASAI or Avaya adjuncts The D channel is used for conveying signaling between the switch and a BRI endpoint s or ASAI or Avaya adjunct...

Page 1078: ... of the results of maintenance testing of the ISDN BRI Set or the ASAI and Avaya Adjunct may be affected by the health of the ISDN BRI circuit pack and port These interactions should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of ISDN BRI Set problems BRI Line Circuit Pack P O R T D Channel B Channel B Channel PHYSICAL CONNECTION VOICE or DATA SET Logical Connection VOICE or DATA SET PBX Physical...

Page 1079: ...8 0 busyout station ext WARNING MAJOR WARNING2 OFF release station ext 130 b WARNING ON test port PCSS sh 257 c Any BRI Layer 3 Query 629 WARNING MAJOR WARNING2 OFF test station ext r 2 test data module ext r 2 351 d 0 None WARNING OFF busyout and release station 513 e 0 None 769 f 0 None WARNING MAJOR OFF 2561 g 0 None 2562 2566 h 0 None 2567 o 0 None 2568 p 0 None 2817 i 0 XID test 628 WARNING M...

Page 1080: ...passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 2 Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command Aux Data Timer Type 2 First T303 SETUP timer 3 Second T303 SETUP timer 4 T305 DISConnect timer 5 First T308 RELease timer 6 Second T308 RELease timer 10 T316 RESTart time...

Page 1081: ... command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Layer 3 Query test 629 If this test fails follow the repair procedure for Test 629 When this error occurs for an ASAI or Avaya adjunct the Aux Data field indicates the state of the ASAI link or Avaya link and whether an invalid response or no response was received to the query from the switch as shown in the following table See Status...

Page 1082: ...d of time There is no repair procedure for this error If the condition persists replace the endpoint f This error occurs when a BRI endpoint s signaling associated link has too much traffic related to link establishment This could occur if the signaling link is bouncing between assigned and established states Software will suspend activity to this endpoint for 75 minutes when the endpoint is alarm...

Page 1083: ... Loop Back test 627 If this test fails follow the repair procedure for Test 627 k This error occurs whenever the point to point signaling link to the endpoint goes down except when it goes down because either the PKT CTRL or the PKT BUS has failed or has been busied out by system technician When this error occurs an alarm is raised against the endpoint or adjunct Execute the test station extension...

Page 1084: ...System transaction capacity for adjunct or switch is exceeded 1 Re engineering of adjunct services my be required If problem persists escalate problem to the next tier 63 SERVICE OR OPTION NOT AVAILABLE Requested ASAI capability or resource is not available on the switch or adjunct More than one adjunct may be contending for the same switch resources Potential administration mismatch between the r...

Page 1085: ...t support level 3 initialization Consult the Set Service documentation o For the Error 2567 indicates that the version of ASAI is not supported check version of the software running on the ASAI or Avaya adjunct 79 SERVICE OR OPTION NOT IMPLEMENTED Requested service or option or combination of selected options is not supported implemented in switch or the adjunct 1 Consult switch and adjunct docume...

Page 1086: ... This cause value is not logged For ASAI or Avaya Adjuncts This condition means that there are no available trunks for an outgoing call request 1 Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the trunk capabilities of the switch 2 Investigate trunk group status by issuing status trunk commands from the SAT or by requesting a trunk group query or queries from the adjunct 3 Perform trunk diagno...

Page 1087: ...he switch If there is a mismatch in the administered capabilities then re administer the switch and or the adjunct to establish a consistent set of desired capabilities on both the switch and the adjunct 3 If step 2 does not resolve the problem escalate to the next tier For Avaya adjuncts 1 Display the Customer Optional Features Form administration screen on the switch to determine whether the Ava...

Page 1088: ...t switch and endpoint documentation to determine service support 2 If step 1 does not resolve the problem escalate to the next tier 81 Invalid CRV An invalid CRV was sent by the adjunct 1 This may indicate a CRV inconsistency between the switch and the adjunct Refer to the CallVisor protocol reference manual 2 If step 1 does not resolve the problem escalate to the next tier Table 8 154 ISDN BRI CA...

Page 1089: ...und test 618 to verify the repair Signaling Link Status Test 626 This test determines the current status of the signaling link This test passes if the link is bound to an endpoint and fails if the link is not bound The definition of the term bound for a link depends upon the type of endpoint and may depend on the successful completion of procedures at both Layers 2 and 3 of the protocol The defini...

Page 1090: ... endpoints supporting MIM initialization a signaling link may also become unbound if a subsequent attempt to perform SPID initialization on a bound link fails that is wrong SPID is entered into the endpoint by the user Table 8 155 Test 626 Signaling Link Status Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1139 ABORT The EPN s packet bus is out of service 1 Follow the repair procedures fo...

Page 1091: ...ck via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again If the error is present for both BRI BD and BRI PORT then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit pack you release every port associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the busyout port PCSSpp command to busy them out 2 Make sure the te...

Page 1092: ...ASAI adjuncts because adjuncts do not support MIMs upon which this test is based 1113 FAIL The signaling link is not bound to the adjunct or endpoint For BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization this error indicates that the endpoint has not been bound to a signaling link that is SPID initialization has not been completed Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint is not identified u...

Page 1093: ...endpoint is down 1 Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors that prevent establishment of the signaling link 2 Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status test 626 that is run as part of this command If this test aborts or fails follow the repair procedure for Test 626 3 If the XID test 628 continues to abort escalate the problem 1139 ABORT The EPN s packet bus is out of serv...

Page 1094: ...n you release the circuit pack you release every port associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the busyout port PCSSpp command to busy them out 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the ...

Page 1095: ...PORT ABRI PORT tests the words BRI SET ASAI ADJ ATT ADJ can be changed to BRI PORT ABRI PORT ATT ADJ 1005 ABORT The endpoint is not administered to support XID testing 1 If the endpoint documentation reflects support XID testing use the change station extension command to change the XID Testing field on the form to y 1113 ABORT The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint is down 1 Use t...

Page 1096: ...CSSpp command and run the test again If the error is present for BRI SET only then release the circuit pack via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again If the error is present for both BRI BD and BRI PORT then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit pack you release every port associated with it If certain...

Page 1097: ...pport for these messages change XID Testing field to no using the change station extension command 2 If the endpoint supports these layer 2 messages and the test continues to fail assume the endpoint is defective and replace it 3 If the test continues to fail escalate the problem PASS The switch can successfully pass messages over the D channel to the BRI endpoint Table 8 157 Test 628 BRI XID Cont...

Page 1098: ...station extension command to change the parameter only if the endpoint documentation reflects support for ISDN BRI Management and Maintenance Procedures 1113 ABORT The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint or adjunct is down 1 Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors that prevent establishment of the signaling link 2 Examine the results of Test 626 that are executed w...

Page 1099: ... you release every port associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the busyout port PCSSpp command to busy them out 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test ...

Page 1100: ... change the MIMs Supported field to no Use the busyout station extension and release station extension commands to busyout and release the endpoint to resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of this test 2 If the endpoint supports these procedures and the test continues to fail assume the endpoint is defective and replace it PASS The endpoint has successfully responded to the switch s a...

Page 1101: ... 159 Test 630 BRI Set Audits Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1113 ABORT The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint is down 1 Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear any errors that prevent establishment of the signaling link 2 Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status test 626 that is run as part of this command If this test aborts or fails follow the re...

Page 1102: ...for both BRI BD and BRI PORT then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit pack you release every port associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the busyout port PCSSpp command to busy them out 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the ...

Page 1103: ...junct under test the test passes see Service SPID Display on page 8 382 If after one minute nothing is displayed on the test set the test fails SPID Facility Test Test Result Description Recommendation FAIL No response is received from the endpoint 1 Check the physical wiring between the switch and the endpoint or adjunct 2 If test continues to fail escalate to the next tier FAIL Display does not ...

Page 1104: ...Slot 01 02 pp port 01 12 ext extension one and two 1 99999 SPID service order profile identifier Table 8 160 Service SPID Display Restricted Service starting display column 8 14 25 31 UUCSSpp ext1 SPID111111 ext2 SPID222222 starting display column 8 14 25 31 UUCSSpp ext1 SPID111111 ext2 SPID222222 Bound to Second Endpoint Translation starting display column 8 14 25 31 UUCSSpp ext1 SPID111111 ext2 ...

Page 1105: ...ees Fahrenheit the power distribution unit turns off all cabinet power and invokes emergency transfer Other sensors monitor fan performance The repair procedures that follow rely on your ability to distinguish between high and low fan speeds by the sound of the fans Experience will allow you to distinguish between the high and low pitches generated by high and low speeds A thermometer is also requ...

Page 1106: ...he front fans may run at a different speed than the rear fans since they are controlled by different sensors Replacing Variable Speed Fans This procedure applies to replacement of a variable speed fan KS 23912 L3 in a new type fan assembly ED 67707 30 G4 or greater Do not use a constant speed fan in this assembly 1 If replacing a fan in the front of the cabinet remove the white plastic fan assembl...

Page 1107: ...rough the rear cabinet doors 2 Connect the grounding wrist strap to yourself and the cabinet The fan alarm circuit can be damaged by ESD CAUTION Failure to disconnect the J2F connector on the filter before the J2 connector on the fan assembly can damage the fan alarm circuits 3 Disconnect cabinet local cable connector J2F from the P2F connector on top of the power filter 4 Disconnect cable connect...

Page 1108: ...ith a new one using the screws removed above 3 Route the cable along the path of the existing sensor cable 4 Unplug the cable on the defective sensor and replace with the plug on the new sensor 5 Remove the old sensor from the cabinet Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 161 Cabinet Sensors Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear V...

Page 1109: ... 1 1 See POWER X X ND AC Power Query test 78 2 2 See AC POWER X X ND OLS Query test carrier E 127 3 3 See CARR POW Carrier Power Supply X X ND OLS Query test carrier D 127 3 X X ND OLS Query test carrier A 127 3 X X ND OLS Query test carrier B 127 3 X X ND OLS Query test carrier C 127 3 X X ND Emergency Transfer Query test 124 4 4 See EMG XFER Emergency Transfer X X ND Cabinet Temperature Query te...

Page 1110: ...5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort with error code 2000 check for power problems with the EPN s A carrier Look for and resolve every AC POWER and CARR POW alarm in a multicarrier cabinet or DC POWER alarm in a single carrier cabinet Repeat the test...

Page 1111: ...on the J2 connector 2 3 8 9 10 11 d If 48 VDC is present the fans should have power Make sure every power connector is sound and making good contact Be sure to disconnect the J2F P2F connector again before reconnecting the J2 P2 e If not replace the fan power filter using the previous procedure described Be sure to disconnect the J2F P2F connector again before reconnecting the J2 P2 1 cont d FAIL ...

Page 1112: ...f 48 VDC is absent replace the CFY1B current limiter card If the fans still do not run escalate the problem If some fans are running and some not replace the defective fans 5 If every fan can then be started wait 5 minutes and rerun the test If the test fails again proceed to the next step 6 If every fan is running but not at high speed measure the cabinet temperature at the air intake and the air...

Page 1113: ...est 6 If the test fails check temperatures for the 150 500 C criteria If the 150 500 C criteria is present then the fans should be running at high speed 7 Wait 5 minutes and rerun the test 8 If the test still fails then the ambient room temperature is probably too high Cool the room 9 If the 150 500 C criteria does not exist one of the following components if defective AHD1 circuit pack fans S3 se...

Page 1114: ...is too high and the fans cannot cool the system Unless the room temperature is reduced the system will shut down soon 3 If the temperature at the top of the cabinet is less than 650 C 1490 F either the S1 sensor or an EPN s Maintenance circuit pack is incorrectly reporting the problem a Resolve any errors against MAINT then rerun the test b If there are errors replace the S1 sensor and retest If t...

Page 1115: ...h carrier in a multicarrier cabinet In AC powered cabinets these are called Off Line Switches OLS in DC powered cabinets they are DC DC converters Cycling Power Supplies When a port carrier power supply problem is reported by hardware the system can cycle the power supplies in that carrier When a carrier is cycled the power supplies are turned off for 2 seconds and then turned back on The system c...

Page 1116: ...me multicarrier cabinets Carrier Port Power Supplies Multicarrier Cabinets Code System Power Output VDC Location 631DA AC 5 Left side 631DB AC 48 5 Right side 644A DC 5 Left side 645B DC 48 5 Right Side TN755B 165 Slots 17 and 18 631WA AR AC 5 Left side 631WB BR AC 48 Right side TN736 AC 5 Used with 631 TN752 AC 165 5 WA WB or AR AB 649A AC 48 at 10 Amps 5 VDC and 5 VDC at 6 Amps Right side on con...

Page 1117: ...t J58890CE 2 Front The AC power distribution unit contains the following components Circuit breaker Electromagnetic Interference EMI filter Ring generator AC input fuse 20 Amp fuses Signal connector 48 VDC fan power j58890ce RBP 031996 Circuit Breakers Ring Generator 631DB Power Unit Ring Generator Fuse ...

Page 1118: ...8 16 Figure 8 16 Battery Charger Optional Part of J58890CE 2 Front The charger is used only without an uninterruptible power supply UPS The charger contains Three 48 VDC batteries for backup power to the cabinet A DC power relay to automatically switch the batteries into the power circuit if a main power failure is detected Batteries Battery Charger battchar RBP 031996 ...

Page 1119: ...is at the right side of the power distribution unit Figure 8 17 AC Power Distribution in Multicarrier Cabinets Power Backup If AC power fails three 48 V DC batteries power the system for 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet 10 minutes in the expansion control carrier in the A position of an EPN cabinet 3 2 C Position Carrier B Position Carrier A Position Carrier D Position Carrier Battery Charger Optional...

Page 1120: ...abinet s AC power cord If AC power fails the unit supplies its own AC power to the cabinet J58890CH 1 In AC powered cabinets the power distribution unit J58890CH 1 distributes 170 to 264 VAC from a wall outlet to a set of BU3200A Battery Interface Units BIU See Figure 8 18 and Figure 8 19 on page 8 399 Figure 8 18 AC Power Distribution Unit J58890CH 1 Front Circuit Breakers Rectifier Modules Ring ...

Page 1121: ...CARR POW Carrier Power Supply Issue 1 May 2002 8 399 555 233 143 Figure 8 19 Power Distribution Unit J58890CH 1 ...

Page 1122: ...The batteries also contain a thermal sensor that changes the charging voltage depending on battery temperature The small batteries provide short term battery holdover If AC power fails 48 V DC batteries power the system for 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet 10 minutes in the expansion control carrier in the A position of an EPN cabinet Figure 8 20 shows the small battery assembly Figure 8 20 Small Batt...

Page 1123: ...rs terminal blocks and system fan power Figure 8 21 DC Power Distribution Unit J58890CF 2 Front Some carriers may contain two power supplies the 644A and the 645B that together supply the required voltages to the carrier Other carriers may contain one 649A power supply located on the right side of the carrier In these systems an additional 649A is located on the right of the optional switch node c...

Page 1124: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 143 8 402 Issue 1 May 2002 Figure 8 22 shows a typical AC powered multicarrier cabinet Figure 8 22 Typical Multicarrier Cabinet with 649A Power Units ...

Page 1125: ... system can also support neon message waiting lamps on analog telephones Any carrier containing a TN769 Neon Analog Line circuit packs must also be supplied with 150 Volts from a TN755B power supply circuit pack See the table above for other supported neon power circuit packs Circuit Breaker Associated Carriers CB1 Carrier A both sides CB2 Carrier B both sides CB3 Carrier C both sides CB4 Carrier ...

Page 1126: ...mand Then if a carrier must be recycled to clear the CARR POW alarm use the recycle carrier UUC command to run the OLS Recycle test 126 The OLS Recycle test 126 is not included in either the long or short test sequences 0 or 1 OLS Query test 127 MAJOR ON test environment UU r 2 recycle carrier UUC Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive...

Page 1127: ...e circuit pack for the status of the pair of OLSs in the specified carrier If both OLSs are on and functioning then the test passes If both OLSs are not on and functioning the test fails and BOTH OLSs are turned off Table 8 164 Test 126 OLS Recycle Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 mi...

Page 1128: ...LS Recycle test the OLS Query test 127 should also fail Run the OLS Query test by using the test environment UU command where UU is the appropriate cabinet number 2 If Test 127 fails follow the repair procedures described for Test 127 PASS Both OLSs in the recycled carrier were found to be healthy by an EPN s Maintenance circuit pack after the OLSs were powered down and back up If the status LEDs ...

Page 1129: ...ry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL AC POWERED SYSTEMS There is a problem with one or both OLSs on the tested carrier 1 For each OLS that has every status LED OFF check the AC input to the OLS at the OLS outlet If there is no AC then check the appropriate fuses for the affected OLS Replace open fuses If the fuses open again or AC does not show up at the OLS outlet then there is...

Page 1130: ...ation should be replaced and the test rerun FAIL DC POWERED SYSTEMS There is a problem with one or both port carrier power supplies on the tested carrier 1 For each port carrier power supply that has every status LED OFF check the DC input to the port carrier power supply at the port carrier power supply outlet If there is no DC then check the appropriate circuit breakers for the affected port car...

Page 1131: ... recycle carrier command If the status LED shows green then the problem is with one of the telephones or the wiring to one of the telephones on this slot b If either port carrier power supply still shows a red status LED then check for bent pins and cable placement in the affected carrier There are failures that can occur on the EPN s Maintenance circuit pack that will not be detected by their res...

Page 1132: ...ding Link Refer to the PRI CDR SEC CDR Primary and Secondary CDR Links section for Call Detail Recording Link problems MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO CDR LINK MINOR test cdr primary secondary l CDR Link CDR LINK WARNING test cdr primary secondary CDR Link ...

Page 1133: ...mbines the functions of the PGATE and PI circuit packs into one circuit pack The PGATE or PI can be used with the C LAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connectivity Control LAN Congestion Controls The switch activates congestion controls on a C LAN when it detects a buffer exceeding the threshold The switch releases the congestion controls when the C LAN reports that its buf...

Page 1134: ...Control Channel Loop test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 257 d 513 e 4352 4357 MINOR ON 769 f 4358 1293 to 1295 g Any MINOR ON reset board UUCSS 1537 h Any MINOR ON 1794 i MINOR ON 1798 j 2049 k Packet Interface test 598 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 3 2305 2306 l 2561 to 2668 m Any 2817 2819 n Congestion Query test 600 MINOR ON test board UUCSS s r 3 3073 o Link Status test 601 MINOR ON test...

Page 1135: ...ove the circuit pack s against which the error is logged d Error Type 257 Transient communication problem between switch and circuit pack does not affect service and can be ignored 1 Ignore this error unless the Control Channel Loop Test 52 fails 2 If Test 52 fails replace the circuit pack Repetitive failures of the Control Channel Loop test indicate circuit pack hardware failure 3842 t 3844 u Any...

Page 1136: ...Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack i Error Type 1794 Packet bus transmit buffers have overflowed 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack j Error Type 1798 Unable to write translation RAM 1 Attempt to clear alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If alarm recurs withi...

Page 1137: ...rity Error Counter test 597 and determine whether the condition clears 3 If condition persists execute Packet Interface test 598 to verify circuit pack integrity 4 If Packet Interface test 598 fails consult repair procedure for the packet bus m Error Type 2561 2668 System software received an indication that the socket was closed due to an error Errors are reported as log only Errors logged here a...

Page 1138: ...bus The Packet Interface circuit pack p Error Type 3330 Critical failure in packet bus interface Below Error Types correspond to descriptions 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If alarm persists replace circuit pack 2817 All buffers exhausted 2819 Utilized buffers exceed threshold If Then Active buffers exceed threshold C LAN enters congested state If Then RSCL disconnects at link le...

Page 1139: ...he circuit pack 5 If the same error occurs on a different circuit pack follow normal escalation procedures r Error Type 3840 Circuit pack received bad control channel message from switch Aux Data If Error Type 3999 And traffic volume is Then Does not accompany Error Type 3586 Heavy Circuit pack is in service but sent at least half hyperactive threshold With heavy traffic this is normal Does not ac...

Page 1140: ...protocol error By themselves these errors do not affect service v Error Type 3845 Angel interprocessor error By themselves these errors do not affect service w Error Type 3846 High CPU occupancy By themselves these errors do not affect service x Error Type 3848 Interprocessor LAP D protocol error By themselves these errors do not affect service y Error Type 3849 Interprocessor LAP D frame error By...

Page 1141: ...e Parity Error Counter test 595 X ND Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter test 596 X ND Packet Interface test 598 X X ND Congestion Query test 600 X X ND Link Status test 601 X X ND Table 8 167 Test 52 Control Channel Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute interv...

Page 1142: ...rces to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busyout the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the problem persists escalate the problem 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command...

Page 1143: ...test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem pers...

Page 1144: ...onse within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists esca...

Page 1145: ... ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inte...

Page 1146: ...ls up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2100 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem FAIL Circuit pack has detected a failure of Packet Inter...

Page 1147: ...vailable C LAN and denies new incoming calls Table 8 173 Test 600 Congestion Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ...

Page 1148: ...tion recurs replace the circuit pack High processor occupancy indicates the C LAN is congested due to traffic load 1 To relieve congestion in the short term selectively busyout ports busyout port UUcSSpp on the Control LAN circuit pack 2 To achieve a more permanent resolution it may be necessary to move ports on this circuit pack to other Control LAN circuit packs 3 Consider replacing affected C L...

Page 1149: ...T Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2100 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 2 FAIL The RSCL control link disconnected 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail execute Packet Interface test 598 test board UUCSS to determine whether t...

Page 1150: ...er Port for related port information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 4UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 to 21 Full Name of MO CLSFY BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Call Classifier circuit pack CLSFY BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh Call...

Page 1151: ...l Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO CLSFY PT1 MAJOR test port UUCSSpp sh Call Classifier Port CLSFY PT MINOR test port UUCSSpp sh Call Classifier Port CLSFY PT WARNING test port UUCSSp...

Page 1152: ...tor resources in the switch there is no other effect when the board is reset 2 Test the board test board UUCSS long 3 If the test still fails replace the board b The CLSFY PT lost its translation Testing the CLSFY PT is sufficient to reload its translation If testing the call classifier port does not clear the error then the call classifier circuit pack containing the defective call classifier por...

Page 1153: ...p to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a Tone Clock for the test connection This may be caused by a heavy load on the system or by a faulted Tone Clock 1 Check to see if there are any alarms against the Tone Clock in the EPN where the test aborted If so see TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 and TONE PT Tone Generator on page 8 1682 for recommended procedures 2 If a new Tone ...

Page 1154: ... the problem persists the system can still operate properly but capacity will be reduced In order to restore performance to normal replace the call classifier circuit pack containing the defective port 130 FAIL Forward or backward R2 MFC signals were not correctly generated or detected This will impact R2 MFC calls 1 Run the short test sequence via the test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 command 2 If the pro...

Page 1155: ...sources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Hardware audit failed 1 Issue these commands in order busyout board reset board release board The board reset is required to reload on board RAM associated with the TN744 s DSPs This takes all 8 Tone Detector ports out of service for a few seconds Only 4 of the 8 would be out of service due to the alarm There are...

Page 1156: ...runk for related trunk information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO CO BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Central Office Trunk circuit pack CO BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh Central Off...

Page 1157: ...m DS1 circuit pack applies to both See DS1 BD DS1 Interface Circuit Pack and UDS1 BD UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 1707 for more information about these circuit packs The DS1 circuit pack supports low level CO trunk signaling interfaces for both ground start and loop start trunks This maintenance strategy covers the in line errors log initialization tests periodic tests scheduled tests dem...

Page 1158: ...est trunk grp mbr 1 a 57408 1 a 57487 15 b Any Port Audit and Update test 36 18 c 0 busyout trunk grp mbr WARNING OFF release trunk grp mbr 130 d None WARNING ON test trunk grp mbr 257 e 57392 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure test 314 MINOR WARNING2 2 This alarm will only be raised when the System Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 Italy This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unle...

Page 1159: ...investigate associated errors if any c Error Type 18 System Technician has busied out the trunk to the out of service state No calls can be made on this trunk except Facility Access Test Calls For details on this feature see Facility Test Calls section in Chapter 5 Additional Maintenance Procedures d Error Type 130 This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane...

Page 1160: ...arms This error comes from call processing and is generated when a second attempt retry to seize an outgoing trunk fails j Error Type 2817 Glare error This error is logged only It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a 2 way trunk from both the near and far ends Attempt to place the call again If...

Page 1161: ...g errors in the system For example by clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk test 6 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND DS1 CO Trunk Seizure test 314 X X ND Port Audit and Update test ...

Page 1162: ...is idle no calls check the error log for error type 1025 see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up 3 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not ...

Page 1163: ...ble time period 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack Loss of signal 1281 Blue alarm 1793 Red alarm 2049 Yellow alarm 2305 or Hyperactivity 1537 1 Look for the previous error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedure...

Page 1164: ...release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not dispatch to verify that a valid board is inserted NOTE Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the Vintage field reports that there is no board when ...

Page 1165: ... If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls check the error log for error type 1025 see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up 3 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots f...

Page 1166: ...r on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5...

Page 1167: ...uch errors take the appropriate action When the TONE errors have cleared rerun the test 5 If the retry passes and troubles have been reported coordinate isolation with the CO Make sure that the switch the CO and any NTCE equipment the CSI s have the correct administration 6 Replace the circuit pack NOTE If the conference circuit test fails for every port on a circuit pack a 5 Volt power problem is...

Page 1168: ... release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not dispatch to verify that a valid board is inserted NOTE Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the Vintage field reports that there is no board when...

Page 1169: ...he error log for error type 1025 The port may be locked up 3 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1006 ABORT The DS1 CO trunk is out of service 1 Use status trunk to verify that the trunk is out of service 2 If the trunk is out of service determine why 3 If it is OK to put the trunk back in service issue the release trunk command to put the trunk back in...

Page 1170: ...al ID to the port This result could be due to incorrect translations no board inserted an incorrect board inserted an insane board inserted or the board is hyperactive 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 Issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue ...

Page 1171: ...he status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible configuration administered in trunk group form 1 Look at the trunk group administration form and see whether the trunk is incoming only port 24 on a...

Page 1172: ...n far end switch 3 Look for DS1 BD or UDS1 BD errors in the hardware error log If present see the DS1 BD DS1 trunk circuit pack maintenance documentation or to the UDS1 BD UDS1 trunk circuit pack maintenance documentation 4 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2053 FAIL At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack Loss of signal 1281 Blue alarm 1793 Red a...

Page 1173: ...st board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If not dispatch to verify that a valid board is inserted Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the sequence suggested above If the ports are translated after issuing the list config command but the Vintage field reports that there is no board when there really is a board then the busyout board...

Page 1174: ...des an interface between the 2 wire CO line and the 4 wire TDM bus The system supports the following CO trunk circuit packs The following sequences show the interactions between the switch and the CO during call setup for both loop start and ground start trunks MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the...

Page 1175: ...On Hook Drop message Open Tip Ring loop no loop current CO response CO goes to idle state see Note NOTE CO does not normally provide an On Hook Disconnect signal Exceptions to this rule include Netherlands loop start and UK loop calling guarded clearing Ground Start Operation Idle state Tip open Ring CO Battery Outgoing Call 1 PBX Off Hook Seize message Places ground on Ring CO response Places gro...

Page 1176: ...irst Disconnect Open circuit on Tip no loop current Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 183 CO Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 57347 None 15 b any Port Audit Update test 36 18 0 busyout trunk WARNING OFF release trunk grp mbr 130 c None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp ...

Page 1177: ...ss Talk test 6 MAJOR MINOR WARNING2 ON test port UUCSSpp l r 3 2561 d 57345 None 2817 a 57360 None 2817 a 57393 None 2817 d 57484 Dial Tone test 0 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp l r 1 3073 d 57376 None 3329 d 57408 None 3329 d 57484 Dial Tone test 0 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp l r 1 3585 d 57424 None 3840 f 8000 Transmission tests ATMS 844 848 OFF test analog testcall 3841...

Page 1178: ...ages have been received every Call Seizure test has passed Problems at the CO may cause this condition rather than problems with the PBX e These errors will be logged for every version of the CO TRK CO BD However no MINOR alarms will be generated for Central Office Trunks TN747B with vintages V8 or greater Any failures received by this test will still be logged as Error type 1025 1281 Check for th...

Page 1179: ...nd Ring and repeat short test If test still aborts replace circuit pack If test passes refer problem to CO If any other error code is received pursue that problem 769 57392 CO not releasing after call is dropped from PBX end TN747B or the loop is not open after a disconnect TN765 After several occurrences an off board TN747B or on board TN465 warning alarm is generated Refer problem to CO 2561 573...

Page 1180: ...yout the affected port and run a long test Observe the test results If any tests fail refer to the description of the tests and the associated error codes Release the port 2 If users continue to report troubles check for other errors and make test calls to determine whether the problem should be referred to the CO Busyout the affected port and run a long test If Dial Tone Test 0 passes ignore this...

Page 1181: ...uce no alarms If errors logged by Test 3 are the only complaints against this trunk then the system technician should check if MFT Range Extenders are being used If extenders are present then there is a good chance that there is excessive loop current which will cause Test 3 to log errors However all else being normal these errors should not affect the customer b The ATMS tests are not part of eit...

Page 1182: ...2 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to ...

Page 1183: ...er unit see CARR POW Carrier Power Supply 2002 FAIL Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk 1 If the CO Demand Diagnostic test 3 also failed display the Hardware Error Log If the CO Demand Diagnostic test failed because it could not detect ground indicated by Error Type 1281 in the Hardware Error Log AND Error Type 3329 or 3585 appears...

Page 1184: ...e test could not relate the internal ID to the port 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Translate the board if necessary 2 Issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port Table 8 185 Test 0 Dial Tone Test Continued Error Code...

Page 1185: ...number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is active then it is unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCS...

Page 1186: ...st with CO line removed 3 If test fails replace the circuit pack 4 If test passes refer problem to CO Failure to detect ground Error Type 1281 1 Run the long test sequence If the CO Demand Diagnostic test fails the Dial Tone test 0 fails with Error Code 2002 AND Error Type 3329 or 3585 appears in the Hardware Error Log with the same last occurred time as Error Type 1281 and 1537 replace the circui...

Page 1187: ...orrect Translate the board if necessary 2 Issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port Table 8 186 Test 3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 1188: ...g for error type 1025 see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up Check the CO wiring check for excessive loop current and check the trunk translations If the trunk is translated incorrectly this test will abort 3 If the port status is idle busyout and release the trunk and retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 4 If the tes...

Page 1189: ...NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This will cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board 1 Ve...

Page 1190: ...o run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls check the error log for error type 769 se...

Page 1191: ...mes 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 7 FAIL The conference capabilities of the port failed Error Code 7 129 The reflective 404 Hz Tone test failed No transmission was detected to or from the port Error Code 129 131 The reflective 1004 Hz Tone test failed No transmission was detected to or from the ...

Page 1192: ... red LED is lit on the TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack replace the pack If the test fails on more than 1 port check for errors on the TONE BD or the TONE PT If errors take appropriate actions When the tone errors are cleared rerun the test If the test fails again see Fault Isolation Using Duplicated PNC on page 8 1294 PASS CO Trunk Looparound and Conference test is successful User reported ...

Page 1193: ...AIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS This test passed Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring If the trunk is busied out the test will not run but will return PASS To verify that the trunk is in...

Page 1194: ...Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use display port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is active wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status ...

Page 1195: ...er the number is wrong or the far end is administered incorrectly 1906 ABORT Reorder tone detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1907 ABORT Other unexpected tone detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1913 ABORT Audible Ring detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1914 ABORT Unidentified interrupted tone detected from far end 1 See actions for erro...

Page 1196: ...N771 circuit packs 1939 ABORT Loss self check at 0dBm at 1004 Hz failed 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 1940 ABORT Far end noise self check failed 1 The problem is with the far end system a technician at the far end should test the test line TN771 or ADFTC 1941 ABORT High frequency singing return loss self check failed 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 1942 ABORT Echo return loss self check failed 1 T...

Page 1197: ...ministered on the trunk group form Retrieve a measurement report via the list testcalls command Make sure that ATMS thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form Besides the facility test failures can be caused by faulty test lines or switch paths If the measurements point to a facility problem report the results to the trunk vendor 8000 FAIL Measured transmission performance was i...

Page 1198: ...t pack type inquiry Follow the procedures outlined in b to determine whether there is an error b This error indicates that less than 25 of trunk group is available c This error indicates that a port circuit pack in the system did not respond to a vintage inquiry As a result of either of these errors a port circuit pack may be physically inserted in a port slot but the system may not recognize its ...

Page 1199: ...multaneously logged with an Aux Data of 1 investigate any EXP INTF Expansion Interface errors Once the port s circuit pack location has been determined from Table 8 192 use the list configuration all command to determine whether the circuit pack is inserted If the circuit pack has already been inserted but the error persists replace the circuit pack If not insert the pack Converting Aux Data to Po...

Page 1200: ...verting Error Types To Carrier Locations Error Type Carrier Location 1 a 2 E01 3 E02 4 E03 5 E04 6 E05 7 E06 8 E07 9 E08 10 E09 11 E10 12 E11 13 E12 14 E13 15 E14 16 E15 17 E16 18 E17 19 E18 20 E19 21 E20 22 E00 d 23 a 24 a 25 a 26 a 27 A00 e 28 A01 b 29 A02 30 A03 Continued on next page ...

Page 1201: ...2 36 D03 37 D04 38 D05 39 D06 40 D07 41 D08 42 D09 43 D10 44 D11 45 D12 46 D13 47 D14 48 D15 49 D16 50 D17 51 D18 52 D19 53 D20 54 D00 d 55 a 56 A05 57 A06 58 A07 59 A08 60 A09 Table 8 192 Converting Error Types To Carrier Locations Continued Error Type Carrier Location Continued on next page ...

Page 1202: ... a 65 a 66 B01 67 B02 68 B03 69 B04 70 B05 71 B06 72 B07 73 B08 74 B09 75 B10 76 B11 77 B12 78 B13 79 B14 80 B15 81 B16 82 B17 83 B18 84 B19 85 B20 86 B00 d 87 a 88 A13 89 A14 90 A15 Table 8 192 Converting Error Types To Carrier Locations Continued Error Type Carrier Location Continued on next page ...

Page 1203: ...96 a 97 a 98 C01 99 C02 100 C03 101 C04 102 C05 103 C06 104 C07 105 C08 106 C09 107 C10 108 C11 109 C12 110 C13 111 C14 112 C15 113 C16 114 C17 115 C18 116 C19 117 C20 118 C00 d 119 a Table 8 192 Converting Error Types To Carrier Locations Continued Error Type Carrier Location Continued on next page ...

Page 1204: ... slots and are not logged against CONFIG b If this error type occurs in an EPN it refers to the circuit pack in slot A01 c If this error type occurs in an EPN it refers to the circuit pack in slot A10 d Slots B00 C00 D00 and E00 refer to the Service Slots in the B C D and E carriers e In an EPN s A carrier slot A00 is the Tone Generator slot ...

Page 1205: ...pack The CUST ALM MO is not maintained by the system and will not generate any alarms If a problem is suspected with the CPAD it may be tested using the test customer alarm command that will activate the device by closing the relay on either the the EPN s Maintenance circuit pack whichever is specified for 1 minute The repeat parameter may be used to close the relay for a longer length of time whe...

Page 1206: ...to 5 times PASS The switch software successfully sent the request to the EPN s Maintenance circuit pack to turn on the CPAD The CPAD must be physically inspected to verify that it is working 1 If the CPAD is working but a customer complains that the CPAD did not indicate an actual system alarm a Enter display system parameter maintenance to check the administered alarm activation level b Compare t...

Page 1207: ...st this is also the default option l Performs short tests and localloop test t arg Specific test to perform Possible values for arg are read_err_reg localloop Usage this Full Name of MO DAJ1 MAJOR testdupboard Server Dup Mem Board DAJ1 MINOR testdupboard Server Dup Mem Board DAJ1 WARNING testdupboard Server Dup Mem Board Table 8 194 DAJ1 Alarm Log Entries EVENT ID Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Le...

Page 1208: ...around test failed The failure could have been a bad address match or the bit patterns did not match If this failure is detected by the test 3 times the following Minor alarm will be logged 1 ACT DAJ1 A 4 MIN Local Looparound test failure d Event ID 5 Optical Line Receiver experiencing CRC errors If this failure is detected by the test 3 times the following Minor alarm will be logged 1 ACT DAJ1 A ...

Page 1209: ...8 195 TEST Read Error Register Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Open failed to MDD ABORT The Memory Duplication Driver MDD is the system driver that communicates with the DAJ1 board If the driver cannot be opened then the DAJ1 board s registers cannot be read This is a system type error try again System Error MDD failed to return data ABORT The test ran but for some reason th...

Page 1210: ...g errors can be detected Table 8 196 TEST DAJ1 Local Loop Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Open failed to MDD ABORT The MDD is the system driver that communicates with the DAJ1 board If the driver cannot be opened then the DAJ1 board s registers cannot be read This is a system type error try again System Error MDD failed to return data ABORT The test ran but for some reason t...

Page 1211: ...a line type port on it This data line port is used for saving and restoring announcements For a description of this feature and repair instructions for the TN750 see ANN BD Announcement Circuit Pack NOTE If the tests for the data line port in question pass and user reported complaints persist there is probably an external problem Test the ADU asynchronous data unit following the procedures outline...

Page 1212: ...or Log to determine whether Error Type 769 is logged again for DAT LINE Make sure that the Active Alarms Only field is set to n If Error Type 769 reappears replace the data line circuit pack If not proceed to step 3 3 Enter release board UUCSS Table 8 197 Data Line Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequen...

Page 1213: ...ually part of a port s long test sequence and executes in about 20 to 30 seconds Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Digital Looparound test 171 X X ND NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND Audit Update test 36 X X ND Table 8 198 Test 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Cou...

Page 1214: ...termine whether the port is available for testing status data module 2 When available retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT An existing Error Type 769 on this port prevented the test from running 1 Follow the procedures for Error Type 769 2000 ABORT Response to the test command was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary ...

Page 1215: ...hen the port is available for testing 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call Use status data module to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT An existing Error Type 769 on this port prevented the test from running 1 Follow the procedure following the Error Log Table for Error Type 769 2000 ABORT Re...

Page 1216: ...If there are any M T DIG errors in the Error Log see M T BD Maintenance Test Circuit Pack clear them first This test will pass regardless of any customer equipment that may be connected to the port as long as the equipment is not using the port Table 8 200 Test 36 Audit Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not avail...

Page 1217: ...tal ports are present Enter list config command ports 02 and 03 should show 2 If the digital ports 02 and 03 on the Maintenance Test circuit pack are not present see M T BD Maintenance Test Circuit Pack 3 If the digital ports are present retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1181 ABORT No time slots available to connect digital ports for the test 1182 ABORT Internal system error Fa...

Page 1218: ... 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test still aborts replace the circuit pack 2005 ABORT The handshake between the Maintenance Test circuit pack digital port and the data line port failed 1 Resolve any M T DIG errors 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the test still aborts replace the data line circuit pack 2312 ABORT Test did not finish did not receive loop back ...

Page 1219: ...data corruption over this port This test may fail if the Maintenance Test digital port used by the test is not functioning properly 1 Resolve any M T DIG errors 2 Repeat Test 171 3 If the test fails again replace the data line circuit pack PASS The port can correctly transmit receive data Investigate user reported troubles on this port using other port tests and examining the ADU external wiring a...

Page 1220: ...n An unlit LED signifies a loss of external power to the cabinet or a fault in the power unit When hardware detects a problem with any of these components it reports the information to the system software through a single lead System software does not differentiate between different environmental failures Since several environmental elements of single carrier cabinets are logged against the DC POW...

Page 1221: ...ngle carrier cabinet Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 202 Single Carrier Cabinet Power Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number indicated in the PORT field of the Alarm Log 02 2 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each app...

Page 1222: ... page 8 736 for a description of this test b See EXT DEV ADMIN Y External Device Alarm on page 8 827 for a description of this test c See RING GEN for a description of this test Single Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test 79 This test queries an PN s Maintenance circuit pack about the power s status in a single carrier cabinet PN This test can only detect power problems in the carriers of the PN where...

Page 1223: ...ay have been lost a Verify and if necessary restore AC power at the wall outlet for each carrier b Rerun the test If the test still fails proceed to step 2 2 One of the WP 91153 or 676 B power units for one of the carriers could be defective a If a WP 91153 or 676 B power unit does not have its yellow status LED on then replace the power unit procedure in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshootin...

Page 1224: ...untry options form For any DETR BD Tone Detector circuit errors see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO DETR BD MINOR test board UU...

Page 1225: ...d trunk information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO DID BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Direct Inward Dial Trunk circuit pack DID BD WARNI...

Page 1226: ... covers the in line errors log initialization tests periodic tests scheduled tests system technician demand tests and alarms escalation and elimination Two trunk service states are specified in the DID DS1 trunk maintenance If a DS1 Interface circuit pack is out of service then every trunk on the circuit pack is put into the out of service state and a Warning alarm is raised MO s Name in Alarm Log...

Page 1227: ...ase trunk grp mbr 130 d None WARNING ON test trunk grp mbr 257 e 57474 57473 513 f 57392 MAJOR MINOR2 2 This alarm will only be raised when the System Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 Italy This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75 or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm 769 g 57393 MAJOR MINOR2 1281 C...

Page 1228: ...t pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 DID trunk Aux Data 57392 indicates no external release on PBX disconnect g Error Type 769 DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 DID trunk Aux Data 57393 indicates belated external release on PBX disconnect h Error Type 1793 DS1 Interface circuit pack is out of service Look for DS1 BD UDS1 BD errors in Hardware Error Log Refer to t...

Page 1229: ...ive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND Port Audit and Update test 36 X X ND Table 8 205 Test 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available The por...

Page 1230: ... user for a valid call 1 Use display port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use status trunk to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a ...

Page 1231: ...d Replace the board if the test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots Investigate user reported troubles on this port using other port tests and by examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is ...

Page 1232: ...est The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors...

Page 1233: ...s found on the DS1 circuit pack DS1 BD or UDS1 BD 1281 Loss of signal 1793 Blue Alarm 2049 Red Alarm 2305 Yellow Alarm 1537 Hyperactivity 1 Resolve any of the above error types Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly This can cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 Enter list configuration board UUCSS The circuit pack must be a TN767C V3 or later The error log m...

Page 1234: ...serted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the lIst config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the link between th...

Page 1235: ... Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls check the error log for Error Type 1025 The port may be locked up 3 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the trunk is out o...

Page 1236: ... test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 ...

Page 1237: ... between the 2 wire analog CO line and the 4 wire TDM bus on the switch DID Trunk Operation The DID port receives three to five digits from the CO that are used to directly connect an outside caller to the called station without assistance from an attendant For each call the CO switch signals the system by opening and closing individual DID loops one of the eight ports causing the starting or stop...

Page 1238: ... Standards RS4648 Ports Out of Service without Errors or Alarms A common trouble on DID trunks that produces no errors or alarms occurs when the CO busies out disconnects the port This situation occurs when the CO thinks there are problems with the DID port In this case no incoming calls will be possible through this port This may result in complaints from outside callers trying unsuccessfully to ...

Page 1239: ...7 h 57473 None WARNING OFF 257 i 57474 None WARNING OFF 257 j 57475 None WARNING OFF 513 k 57392 None MINOR WARNING2 OFF 510 l 57393 None 769 Any Port Diagnostic 35 MINOR WARNING2 ON test port UUCSSpp r 3 1025 Looparound and Conference 33 MINOR WARNING2 ON test port UUCSSpp l r 3 1281 NPE Crosstalk 6 MINOR WARNING2 ON test port UUCSSpp l r 3 1537 Any Port Diagnostic 35 MAJOR MINOR WARNING2 OFF tes...

Page 1240: ... if any f This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack g Rotary dial pulse on hook longer than 105 msec Break between rotary pulses is too long 1 Test trunk by performing an incoming test call 2 Refer problem to CO h Rotary dial rate below 8 pulses sec More than 135 msec between ...

Page 1241: ...f Error Type 513 The CO released the trunk 4 minutes after the PBX dropped the call This event decrements the severity error count of Error Type 513 or may mean the problem related to Error Type 513 has been fixed Verify that Error Type 513 does not occur again Refer to Error 513 m Incomplete Dial timer expired This error only applies to the TN459 and indicates a problem with incoming dialing stre...

Page 1242: ...unk to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 2 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls check the Error Log for Error Type 513 The port may be locked up 3 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals u...

Page 1243: ...e to off board problems including EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and Tone Detectors Tone Generators Clear every off board problem before replacing the board A TDM BUS problem is usually a faulty board or bent pins on the backplane 1 Resolve any EXP PN EXP INTF TDM BUS TONE BD and TONE PT errors in the error log 2 Retest the board Replace the board if the test fails PASS The port is corr...

Page 1244: ...o seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The seized tone detector did not respond This abort code is usually associated with tone clock TONE BD TONE PT and TDM CLK resources 1 Clear any tone errors in the error log 2 Retry the command a 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the test continues to ab...

Page 1245: ...n Verify that the Maintenance Tests field on the Trunk Group Form is set to n To enable the test issue the change trunk group x command x is the trunk group number Then change the entry in the Maintenance Tests field to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT System resources required to ...

Page 1246: ... tone test failed Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port The problem may be off board 133 The reflective 2804 Hz tone test failed Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port The problem may be off board CAUTION The port may still be operational or the fault may be off board connections or CO Off board problems include incoming seizures or off hook port seizures d...

Page 1247: ... pack a 5V power problem is indicated A power unit may be defective CARR POW If the test fails on more than 1 port check for errors on the TONE BD or the TONE PT MOs 4 Rerun the test PASS DID Trunk Looparound and Conference test is successful This port is functioning properly 1 If users are reporting troubles examine loop connections to the port and refer problem to the CO 0 NO BOARD The test coul...

Page 1248: ... to 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort check for wiring errors toward the CO which may cause the trunk to lock up 5 If the wiring is good and the test continues to abort replace the TN753 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station extension attendant number or trunk group member number of the port Use the status statio...

Page 1249: ... Check the incoming CO line for proper operation If warranted refer the problem to the CO 2 If the CO line is not at fault the failure must be on the DID port Replace the circuit pack PASS Current flow was detected for this port 1 User reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining connections 2 Refer problem to the CO 0 NO BOARD The test could not re...

Page 1250: ...t Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1006 ABORT The port is out of service perhaps busied out 1 Use display port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use status trunk to determine the service state of the port If the p...

Page 1251: ... NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Translate the board if necessary 2 Issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port Table 8 212 Test 36 Port Audit Update Test...

Page 1252: ... this chapter for related line information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO DIG BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Digital Line circuit pack DIG BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh Digit...

Page 1253: ...h terminates the H 323 signaling portion of each endpoint The MO follows standard maintenance methodology and supports test busyout release and status commands Maintenance for Softphone includes Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values See Table 8 213 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run Full Name of MO DIG IP STN WARNING test station extension Digital IP Station Table 8...

Page 1254: ...mes out the test fails d This refreshes the lamp state of every lamp on a virtual DCP station If successful the update always passes It can abort but it never fails This update test number 16 is the same one used for existing DCP stations e This refreshes the ringer state on a virtual DCP station and queries the virtual station s switch hook state If successful the update always passes It can abor...

Page 1255: ... clearing error codes associated with the Signaling Path PING test for example you can also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Registration Status Inquiry 1372 The Registration status inquiry reports the H 323 registration status of the endpoint An endpoint must be registered and authenticated in order to receive service from the system Registration is initiated when t...

Page 1256: ...path of a peer to peer IP layer connection NOTE This nondestructive test runs due to in line errors during periodic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 8 214 Test 1372 Registration Status Inquiry Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 2 3 FAIL The endpoint is not successfully registered 1 Verify that the user is entering the correct extension and security code the C LAN IP ad...

Page 1257: ...BORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 1003 FAIL Ping to the destination failed 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Investigate any errors of the C LAN s Ethernet port 1007 FAIL The system could not PING the registered endpoint via the C LAN 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through ...

Page 1258: ...ror Log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port If this error type is present then release the port via the release station extension command and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT Station could be in ready for service or out of service state 1 Use status station command to verify state of station 2 ...

Page 1259: ...tanding circuit pack maintenance problems 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 5 ABORT Ringer update aborted due to station being in ready for service or out of service state 6 ABORT This port could have been busied out by system technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port If this error is present then release the port via release station e...

Page 1260: ... Multi Carrier Cabinets Only 2 wire Italtel Digital Telephone Models 1 and 2 IDT1 2 or DAs can directly connect to a TN2136 circuit pack Lucent DCP 4 wire digital voice terminals and data modules can connect to these circuit packs via Italtel s 2 4 wire adapter DAs can operate in either of two modes and they are covered by different MOs Digital line maintenance interacts with digital line circuit ...

Page 1261: ...inals V11 b TN413 4 wire A law c TN754B 4 wire A law mu law selectable d TN2177 2 wire 16 port A law mu law selectable e TN2181 2 wire 16 port A law mu law selectable f TN2224 2 wire 24 port A law mu law selectable 2 603A1 D1 Terminals a TN754 4 wire mu law b TN413 4 wire A law c TN754B 4 wire A law mu law selectable Out of Service state The port and thus the station have been removed from service...

Page 1262: ... are several different scenarios that cause a terminal to be downloaded These can occur as part of background maintenance activity or on demand from the system access terminal or from a station For the background actions described below the terminal downloads automatically if a download retry flag for the terminal is set in software This flag is set At boot time when translation is loaded When tra...

Page 1263: ...s shown in Table 8 218 on page 8 540 these changes can be for a specified terminal or may be system wide If the change is for system level parameter a background global update request is made to download all programmable terminals This global update may take more than an hour for a system with several thousand programmable terminals 4 Port Insertion Whenever maintenance software initiates a reques...

Page 1264: ...ause the terminal to be downloaded regardless of its previous download status 2 Feature Access Code A Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code can be used to request a terminal download action When this code is followed by a pound sign the programmable parameters for the current terminal are downloaded when the terminal goes on hook When this code is followed by an extension the programmabl...

Page 1265: ...is disconnected or out of service use status station command Possible reasons for terminal being not downloaded include Terminal is off hook Terminal detected a bad checksum Terminal detected a bad or missing EEPROM refer to hardware error log Terminal is busy programming data from a previous PROGRAM message Terminal is in the Programming Disabled state Terminal is in the Local Program Options Mod...

Page 1266: ...RNING OFF rel port UUCSSpp 130 c None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp sh 257 d 40971 None 513 0 Station Digital Audits test 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 6 767 e 40964 None WARNING OFF 769 f 40963 40988 None WARNING OFF 1026 g NONE WARNING OFF 1281 Any Station Digital Audits test 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 4 1537 h 40968 None WARNING OFF 1793 Voice and Ctrl Local Loop test 13 MINOR...

Page 1267: ...n question is busied out by maintenance personnel Make sure port is released from busyout via the release port UUCSSpp PCSSpp command c Error Type 130 This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack d Error Type 257 Problems transmitting to the voice terminal This problem can be cau...

Page 1268: ...the problem has been resolved the alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time i Error Type 2304 Internal system error No action is necessary j Error Type 2305 with Aux Data of 40967 This indicates that the station went off hook while it was in the ready for service state Use the status station command to determine the state of the station The off hook should have moved the station t...

Page 1269: ...d the ability of the terminal and the associated port to send and receive data This test is based on procedure 622 to isolate digital terminal problems A request is presented to the terminal to go into loop back mode Data is sent to the terminal and when received back checked for consistency This test is run as a part of the test long procedure It is not included in any error recovery strategy and...

Page 1270: ...oop around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status atte...

Page 1271: ...on 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Make sure terminal is connected and repeat test 2 If test fails replace terminal and repeat test 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 14 FAIL The primary channel is n...

Page 1272: ...l Channel Local Loop test 13 2 If that test fails suspect the Digital Line circuit pack If that test passes then replace the terminal 3 If both test fail and component replacement does not change the results then a Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit and the Tone Detector circuit pack using test board UUCSS b Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circu...

Page 1273: ...Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute interval...

Page 1274: ...lf restoral capability the voice terminal must be 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing Attendants are always in...

Page 1275: ...ter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute inter...

Page 1276: ...nnel s loop around test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered 4 Next a Conference test is run for the primary information channel This is the same test as Conference test 6 This 4 test sequence only generates one value Pass Fail or Abort If any test fails or aborts the sequence stops Table 8 223 Test 13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommen...

Page 1277: ...ant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period ...

Page 1278: ...or circuit using test board UUCSS 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit or Tone Detector circuit 3 If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit are functioning properly and the test still fails replace the Digital Line circuit pack PASS Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed All channels are transmitting properly 1 To be sure that this is not an interm...

Page 1279: ...ent then release the port via the release station extension command and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT Station may be in ready for service or out of service state 1 Use status station command to verify state of station 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to ...

Page 1280: ... Request test A request is made to the station for its status The station sends its configuration information and health information back This information is checked and a pass fail result is provided 1392 ABORT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI po...

Page 1281: ...ondition 1 For a TN754 vintage 13 or earlier Digital Line circuit pack use test UUCSSpp long If Test 11 passes then the EPF PTC condition was cleared Rerun the Short Test Sequence If Test 11 does not pass follow the repair procedures described for Test 11 2 Look for Error Type 769 logged against DIG LINE and follow the procedures in the associated footnote If any additional problems are found reru...

Page 1282: ...ort escalate the problem If both commands indicate that the port is a TTI port the abort is correct and no action is necessary 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received in the allowable time period FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Station Audits passed This Digital Port circuit pack is functioning properly 1 If complaints persist invest...

Page 1283: ...f this chapter MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO DIOD BD MINOR test port UUCSSpp s DIOD circuit pack ...

Page 1284: ...ion about this circuit pack The DS1 circuit pack supports low level CO trunk signaling interfaces for both ground start and loop start trunks This maintenance strategy covers the in line errors log initialization tests periodic tests scheduled tests demand tests and alarm resolution and escalation Three trunk service states are specified by DS1 DIOD trunk maintenance MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm L...

Page 1285: ...ne Seizure test 314 MAJOR MINOR2 2 This alarm is only raised when the System Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 Italy This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75 or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm OFF 513 f 57393 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure test 314 MAJOR MINOR2 OFF 769 g 57484 1025 h 51200 1025 DS1 CO D...

Page 1286: ...ure see Facility Test Calls on page 5 15 d Error Type 130 This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack e Error Type 257 The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault Aux Data 57392 indicates no external release on PBX disconnect f Error Type 513 The DS1 Interface circui...

Page 1287: ...any alarms This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a 2 way trunk from both the near and far ends Attempt to place the call again If the error persists execute the Dial Tone Seizure test 314 and follow those procedures n Error Type 3840 Port Audit and Update test 36 failed due to an internal system error Enter the status trunk command to verify the status of the trunk If the trunk is ...

Page 1288: ...locate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors The status health command can be used to determine whether the system is experiencing heavy traffic 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not alloc...

Page 1289: ...ivity Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1 BD or UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This will cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User report...

Page 1290: ...1 Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call 1 Use the status station or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration This only applies to analog station...

Page 1291: ...DS1 BD or UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly This will cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station trunk or ext...

Page 1292: ... command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test FAIL Test failed due to internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Trunk translation has been updated successfully The current trunk states kept in...

Page 1293: ...resources required to run this test are not available The port may be in use on a valid call Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT Test failed due...

Page 1294: ...or types in the Hardware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1 BD or UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types FAIL The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call 1 Verify that the Trunk Type field on the trunk administration screen form matches the trunk type administered on far end switch 2 Look for UDS1 BD errors in Hardware Error Log If present se...

Page 1295: ... outgoing DIOD TN429 DIOD trunk circuit packs provide eight ports for loop start CO trunks and serve as an interface between the 2 wire analog CO line and the 4 wire TDM bus on the switch MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where t...

Page 1296: ...ff Hook Answer Message Close loop CO Response Trip ringing provide loop current 3 PBX On Hook Drop Message Open Tip Ring loop no loop current CO Response CO goes to idle state see Note Direct Inward Dialing DID 1 CO Applies Ringing Voltage PBX Response Detect ringing current and close loop CO Response Send DTMF digits PBX Response Acknowledge of Number dialed and open loop 2 PBX Off Hook Answer Me...

Page 1297: ...iate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port sh 15 b any Port Audit Update test 36 18 0 busyout trunk grp mbr WARNING release trunk 769 a 57392 None MAJOR MINOR WARNING2 2 Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options command If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values the Minor ala...

Page 1298: ...pen after a disconnect TN765 After several occurrences an off board TN747B or on board TN465 warning alarm is generated Refer problem to CO 2561 57345 Single polarity ringing current This error results from abnormal ringing current but does not prevent the incoming call from being accepted One cause could be that the reverse current detector associated with the port is failing Will not be detected...

Page 1299: ... command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the command display port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavai...

Page 1300: ...ial tone could not be detected 1 Check for errors on TONE BD or TONE PT Clear any errors and repeat test 2 If error has still not cleared refer problem to CO 2002 FAIL Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk 1 Check trunk wiring to ensure good connection repeat test if wiring correction made 2 Locate another identical CO trunk and swap...

Page 1301: ...umber of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could n...

Page 1302: ...ived within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This causes noisy and unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles o...

Page 1303: ... for a valid call Use the status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 7 FAIL 1 Check for errors on TONE BD or TONE PT 2 If the Reflective Looparound test fails for every port on a c...

Page 1304: ...ot allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run the test FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS This test passed Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack User reported troubles on this po...

Page 1305: ...duplicate remove and set commands Customer administrators frequently use these commands while performing routine administration of the system MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO DLY MTCE MINOR NONE DLY MTCE DLY MTCE MAJOR NONE DLY MTCE If Save Fails Then System Raises Three times in a row MINOR Alarm Seven times in a row MAJOR Alarm Table 8 238 S8700 Multi Con...

Page 1306: ...enance This feature improves the operation of daily maintenance by allowing maintenance routines to run that might otherwise not run It also helps to prevent the loss of translations that were not saved by the save translation command and were also not saved because daily maintenance was prevented from running prior to the system reset Highlights of the feature include Options for blank 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 1307: ...ORY Form change system parameters maintenance Page 1 of 4 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification 1000000000 First OSS Telephone Number 5551212 Abbrev Alarm Report y Second OSS Telephone Number 5551213 Abbrev Alarm Report n Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers both Cleared Alarm Notification y Suspension Threshold 5 Restart Notification y Test Remote ...

Page 1308: ...ircuit Pack on page 8 1707 Each trunk and line have their own maintenance strategies However they all depend on the health of the DS1 Interface circuit pack See the following sections for details TIE DS1 DS1 Tie Trunk on page 8 1621 CO DS1 DS1 CO Trunk on page 8 435 DID DS1 Direct Inward Dial Trunk OPS LINE DS1 Off Premises Station Line ISDN TRK DS1 ISDN Trunk on page 8 989 and ISDN PLK ISDN PRI S...

Page 1309: ...le see DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 Generic 2 and Generic 3 V1 and V2 Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation 555 230 193 A TN767E and a 120A1 integrated CSU support on demand loop back tests assisting fault detection between the TN767E circuit pack and the integrated CSU Integrated CSU and an optional customer premises loop back jack Integrated CSU and a remote CSU These loop...

Page 1310: ...T SMRT JACK CSU MOD NET SMRT JACK CPE LPBK JACK DS1 BRD CSU MOD DS1 BRD NET WORK CSU module to CSU module Remote end NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Local end NETWORK SMRT JACK BLB R LLB CPE LPBK JACK DS1 BOARD Remote end loop backs CSU or External CSU NETWORK SMRT JACK CSU MOD CSU MOD CLJ LB LLB RLB ELB PLB CPE LPBK JACK DS1 BOARD Local end loop backs ...

Page 1311: ...INOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1300 h Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1301 i Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1302 j Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1303 k Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 MINOR WARNING ON test board UUCSS 1310 l Any Board Loopback test 1209 MINOR O...

Page 1312: ...CSS 1795 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 2049 Any Red Alarm Inquiry test 140 MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 2305 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS 2306 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS 2561 Any Major Alarm Inquiry test 142 MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 2817 Minor Alarm Inquiry test 143 MINOR WA...

Page 1313: ...ation are met and that a functioning DS1 circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot 2 Completely remove the DS1 BD from the system using the following steps a Remove any administered DS1 trunks or access endpoints associated with the circuit pack from their trunk groups b Execute the remove ds1 UUCSS and change circuit pack UUCSS commands If all the administration conditions are met for this cir...

Page 1314: ...ta in the range of 4352 to 4358 it indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure This problem should be escalated g The DS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware logic error for example program logic inconsistency This error will disappear when no faults are detected for 100 minutes The value in Aux Data field indicates the type of hardware problem h CSU module or T...

Page 1315: ...I CSU T1 sync splitter power up reset i e the TN767E board is physically inserted and the CSU module T1 sync splitter is already installed or when the CSU module T1 sync splitter is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board The ELB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands busyout board UUCSS t...

Page 1316: ...ng symptoms 1 The common circuit pack level tests such as Test 51 and or Test 220 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning NO BOARD 3 A busyout release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results 4 A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are properly installed The circuit pack is isolated from the system and ...

Page 1317: ...of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods However if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used it may indicate a problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in Tab...

Page 1318: ...test 140 X X ND Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 X X ND Major Alarm Inquiry test 142 X X ND Minor Alarm Inquiry test 143 X X ND Slip Alarm Inquiry test 144 X X ND Misframe Alarm Inquiry test 145 X X ND Translation Update test 146 X X ND ICSU Status LEDs test 1227 X X ND SAKI Sanity test 53 X D Internal Looparound test 135 X D DS1 CSU Loopback tests X D DS1 Board Loo back test 1209 X D CSU Equipment L...

Page 1319: ...pdated with their translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If board was already...

Page 1320: ...d has no affect on the test result 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pa...

Page 1321: ... busyout board command 4 Issue the reset board command 5 Issue the release busy board command 6 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port Table 8 243 Test 53 SAKI Sanity Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute interval...

Page 1322: ...circuit pack initializes correctly 1 Run the short test sequence 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already ...

Page 1323: ... Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could ...

Page 1324: ... circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 m...

Page 1325: ...lly over the path that covers a DS1 port cable and the external NCTE device 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is n...

Page 1326: ...ed by the TN767E circuit pack provides functionality equivalent to an external standalone ESF T1 CSU The 401A T1 sync splitter when combined with the functionality provided by the TN767E circuit pack allows an ATM switch to derive its timing off a T1 facility connected to the S8700 Multi Connect s DS1circuit pack If a TN767E circuit pack detects certain I CSU T1 sync splitter hardware errors it wi...

Page 1327: ...terface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes escalate this problem FAIL DS1 Interface...

Page 1328: ...h a TN767E circuit pack that is configured for 32 channel 2 048 Mbps operation This CSU only works with a DS1 board configured for 24 channel 1 544 Mbps operation in the United States of America 1 If the 120A1 CSU is to be used physically remove the TN767E circuit pack and reconfigure it for 24 channel 1 544 Mbps operation 2 Reinsert the circuit pack and run the test again 1303 FAIL The DS1 circui...

Page 1329: ... continues to fail the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the CSU module T1 sync splitter 1312 FAIL The Integrated CSU I CSU Module Repeater Loopback RLB test 1211 failed This test is executed during ICSU T1 sync splitter power up reset the TN767E board is physically inserted and the CSU module T1 sync splitter is already installed or when the 120A1 CSU module T1 sync spli...

Page 1330: ...fail with this error code the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the 120A1 CSU module or the 401A T1 sync splitter 1322 FAIL No 5 Volt power detected from the TN767E circuit pack to the 120A1 CSU module T1 sync splitter Problem is probably due to an open fuse on the DS1 board or a faulty ICSU T1 sync splitter NOTE Do not swap DS1 boards as this may open the fuse on the new...

Page 1331: ...anslations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the boa...

Page 1332: ...before the Blue alarm occurs Line Loopback Alarm The Line Loopback LLB is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the ICSU or DS1 into a loop back mode When the ICSU or DS1 Board is in the LLB mode the arriving bit pattern is regenerated and sent back Line Loopback LLB Alarm is activated when the in band activate LLB bit pattern has been arriving continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line LLB is de...

Page 1333: ...ack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to th...

Page 1334: ...e remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint PASS Remote DS1 endpoint is in service Neither a Blue alarm nor a Line Loopback alarm nor a Payload Loopback alarm is detected in the DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is in...

Page 1335: ... trunks of the circuit pack into the out of service state The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared When the Red alarm is cleared the DS1 Interface circuit pack will stop transmitting the Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint The maintenance software restores all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack to the service state before the Red alarm occurs Loss of M...

Page 1336: ...n no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk ...

Page 1337: ...and of the cable 4 If this continues to fail escalate this problem PASS No Red alarm is detected on DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS...

Page 1338: ...n every 10 minutes until the Yellow alarm is cleared When the Yellow alarm is cleared the maintenance software restores all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack back to their previous service state before the Yellow alarm is raised This Yellow Alarm corresponds to the yellow F2 state documented in CCITT recommendation I 431 Remote Multiframe Alarm Remote Multiframe Alarm RMA indicates that the...

Page 1339: ...red in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes escalate this problem FAIL The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a yellow alarm sent by the remote DS1 endpoint An out of frame condition occurred at the DS1 endpoint 1 FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Remote Mu...

Page 1340: ... will be run every 10 minutes until the Major alarm is cleared The maintenance software places all trunks on the circuit pack in the out of service state if the Major alarm persists for more than 20 minutes PASS No Yellow alarm nor Remote Multiframe Alarm nor F5 State Alarm is received from the remote DS1 endpoint 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could...

Page 1341: ...st 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out...

Page 1342: ...ble 5 Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test PASS No Major alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1...

Page 1343: ... takes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition is cleared When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition it will send a MINOR ALARM message to the maintenance software After the maintenance software receives a MINOR ALARM message the Minor Alarm Inquiry test is initiated to confirm the Minor alarm All...

Page 1344: ...y the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes escalate this problem FAIL The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm The DS1 bit error rate is greater than 1 1 000...

Page 1345: ...in service state If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply the system synchronization source the MINOR alarm will initiate a synchronization source switch See TDM BUS and SYNC Synchronization for details PASS No Minor alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no boa...

Page 1346: ...circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 mi...

Page 1347: ... SYNC Follow the suggested repair procedure for these errors 6 Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable 7 If this continues to fail escalate this problem PASS No Slip alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board...

Page 1348: ...COUNT message the Misframe Alarm Inquiry test is initiated to collect the misframe counts from the DS1 Interface circuit pack When the threshold of misframes is reached if the DS1 Interface circuit pack is supplying the system synchronization source then a switching synchronization source message is sent to the TDM Bus Clock See TDM BUS TDM Bus Maintenance documentation for details A Minor alarm a...

Page 1349: ...rly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperact...

Page 1350: ...iagnose the DS1 endpoint 5 Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors against the synchronization SYNC Follow the suggested repair procedure for these errors 6 Check the physical connection of the DS1 pack and of the cable 7 If this continues to fail escalate this problem PASS No Misframe alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not rela...

Page 1351: ...so forth Table 8 253 Test 146 Translation Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Internal system software error 1 Enter the display ds1 UUCSS command to verify the DS1 Interface circuit pack translation PASS Translation data has been downloaded to the DS1 Interface circuit pack successfu...

Page 1352: ...ack If the transmitted and received pattern is different the test fails When the test is complete all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 8 254 Test 1209 DS1 Board Loop Back Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu ...

Page 1353: ...ard or the board is in a network requested loop back mode Line loop back or Payload loop back The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer loop back jack test Far CSU Loopback test or the One Way Span test is executing or if the board is in line loop back or payload loop back mode Only one long duration loop back span test can be active at a given time Thus if a loop back span test is a...

Page 1354: ... and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misf...

Page 1355: ...ASS The BLB test executed successfully The test pattern was transmitted and received successfully up to the TN767E DS1 board edge 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UU...

Page 1356: ...e current configuration To run this test the Near End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to integrated and the Bit Rate field must be set to 1 544 for 24 channel operation 1 Use the change ds1 UUCSS command to set the Near End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form to integrated and or change the Bit Rate field to 1 544 if the board is to be ...

Page 1357: ...d This may be due to hyperactivity Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited 1 The DS1 BD tests such as test 138 and test 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has ...

Page 1358: ...st pattern was transmitted and received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the near edge of the 120A1 CSU module T1 sync splitter 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are...

Page 1359: ...sts command All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the RLB test When the RLB test is initiated maintenance software sends an appropriate message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test The board will set up the RLB loop back transmit a test pattern and verify that the pattern is rece...

Page 1360: ...T The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system Executing this test could cause major system disruption If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone Clock circuit via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization...

Page 1361: ...rs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated fa...

Page 1362: ...ully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the far edge of the 120A1 CSU module T1 sync splitter 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to adminis...

Page 1363: ...being passed through the loop back cleanly the number of bit errors should be very low The command will also display the type of loop back span test executing Test field the type of pattern generated for the loop back span test Pattern field and whether the pattern 3 in 24 Pattern is synchronized Synchronized field To end the test enter the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command Table ...

Page 1364: ... board or the board is in a network requested loop back mode Line loop back or Payload loop back The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer loop back jack test Far CSU Loopback test or the One Way Span test is executing or if the board is in line loop back or payload loop back mode Only one long duration loop back span test can be active at a given time Thus if a loop back span test i...

Page 1365: ...tored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes es...

Page 1366: ...chnician enters the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administe...

Page 1367: ...o verify the loop back has been established transmits a framed 3 in 24 test pattern begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern and returns a PASS result If the loop back is not established within the 15 seconds the test fails The status of the Far CSU Loopback test will be available in the hardware error log via Error Type 3901 Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user...

Page 1368: ...ption If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone Clock circuit via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 Lastly issue the enable synchronization switch command 1950 ABORT Another loop back span test is alre...

Page 1369: ...properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyp...

Page 1370: ...the maintenance strategy associated with that loop back PASS The Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began executing The test will continue to run until the system technician enters test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test or the release board UUCSS 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an inc...

Page 1371: ... received pattern The status of the One Way Span test will be available in the hardware error log via Error Type 3902 Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user information of the status of the test The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test has been running Test Duration field and number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Cou...

Page 1372: ...tion If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone Clock circuit via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 Lastly issue the enable synchronization switch command 1950 ABORT Another loop back span test is alrea...

Page 1373: ...e properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state H...

Page 1374: ...1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the...

Page 1375: ...mary command displays the number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Count field Injecting this single bit error should increment the bit error count of the loop back span test by one To restore the trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pact to the inservice state execute the release board command Table 8 260 Test 1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test Error Code Test Resu...

Page 1376: ...y In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes escalate this problem PASS A single bit error has been successfully injected into an active framed 3 in 24 test pattern 0 NO BOARD The test could not ...

Page 1377: ...echnician busyout board command before running this End Loopback Span test The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test ran Test Duration field and number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Count field To restore the trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in service state execute the release board command Table 8 261 T...

Page 1378: ...ore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every DS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors wou...

Page 1379: ... test aborts PASS The active long duration loop back or span test on the TN767E circuit pack was successfully deactivated 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS comm...

Page 1380: ...S result however does not necessarily mean that the status LEDs behaved properly It only means that the software successfully attempted to light the status LEDs This is a visual test The service technician must visually exam the behavior of the LEDs while the test is running The LEDs are functioning properly if the four status LEDs are lit red for 5 seconds then lit green for 5 seconds then lit ye...

Page 1381: ...n about both DS1 CONV circuit packs The DS1 CONV complex is a part of the port network connectivity PNC The DS1 CONV complex is used to extend the range of the 32 Mbps fiber links that connect PNs to the Center Stage Switch allowing PNs to be located at remote sites The DS1 CONV circuit pack contains on board firmware that detects DS1 facility alarms and errors communicates status to maintenance s...

Page 1382: ...een an PN s EI and an SNI Fiber links between two SNIs and fiber links between the IP Server Interface IPSI and the Center Stage Switch CSS cannot be replaced by a DS1 CONV complex On the TN574 DS1 CONV circuit pack one of the four DS1 facilities is used as the primary facility or packet facility and it is the only facility that can carry packet traffic besides providing circuit connections The pr...

Page 1383: ... circuit connections on the old faulty facility are re mapped to the new packet facility After firmware initialization facility A the first facility is chosen as the default primary facility for both DS1 CONV boards The TN574 DS1 CONV has seven LEDs that provide an indication of the state of the DS1 CONV circuit pack and the DS1 facilities There is a yellow a green and a red LED under software and...

Page 1384: ... complex If the board at which the facility is being busied out is not accessible then the abort code 2100 will be returned if the board at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex is not accessible then the abort code 105 will be returned DS1 Facility Administration DS1 facility administration is a part of the fiber link administration DS1 options are set on the second page of the Fiber Link Adminis...

Page 1385: ...command Administer the DS1 facility via the change fiber link command Change the Facility Installed field from no to yes for the facility that is being installed 3 Busyout the DS1 CONV circuit pack via the busyout board command 4 Run the DS1 Facilities Connectivity test 790 via the test board UUCSS long command to make sure that the facilities are connected correctly 5 Release the DS1 CONV circuit...

Page 1386: ... determines if the DS1 facility can be used as a clock reference for the receive fiber signal The field is set to yes unless the DS1 facility cannot be used as clock reference signal This field appears on the fiber link form only for TN574 DS1 CONV circuit packs On the TN1654 DS1 CONV board none of the facilities can be used as a clock reference for the receive fiber signal thus administration of ...

Page 1387: ... and an alarm will be raised if there is a T1 E1 inconsistency between the administered bit rate and the board option switch setting Idle Code This field is used to set the idle code for all facilities on the TN1654 DS1 CONV board This field can accept any combination of ones 1 and zeros 0 with the exception that the second left most digit must be set to one 1 at all times This field appears on th...

Page 1388: ...mi zcs or b8zs If the TN1654 board is set for E1 operation the line coding may be set to either ami basic or hdb3 The line coding must be the same at each end of the DS1 CONV complex Framing Mode Either esf or d4 framing mode can be selected for the DS1 facility The same framing mode must be used at each end of the DS1 CONV complex For TN574 DS1 CONV boards the Framing Mode field is administrable ...

Page 1389: ... facility events that indicate a degradation in the performance of the DS1 facility are monitored and recorded These events will generate appropriate alarms when performance of the DS1 facility has degraded below acceptable levels These measurements include errored seconds bursty seconds severely errored seconds and failed seconds There are two DS1 Converter Performance Measurements Sub reports Th...

Page 1390: ...s1 facility UUCSS 257 c Failure Audit 949 MINOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 d 1 Failure Audit 949 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 d 2 Failure Audit 949 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS sh r 1 856 e DS1 Facility Query for Slips Misframes 972 MINOR OFF none 1025 f Failure Audit 949 MAJOR2 2 These failures are logged as a WARNING alarm when the error is first reported The alarm severity is raised ...

Page 1391: ...itional switches are used to select the framing mode for each facility The Framing Mode field on the fiber link form is display only for the TN1654 boards It displays what the switch is set to for the DS1 facility It cannot be administered Aux Data 2 indicates that the line coding formats do not match Line Coding is an administrable value on the fiber link form The line coding options are ami zcs ...

Page 1392: ...sts replace this DS1 CONV circuit pack 6 If the problem still persists replace the DS1 CONV circuit pack at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex f Loss of Frame Alignment LFA Alarm the RED alarm This alarm indicates that the DS1 interface associated with the DS1 facility cannot frame up on the received data For the following repair procedure see to Figure 8 25 on page 8 675 and the diagrams in th...

Page 1393: ...sts check for excessive slips and synchronization problems Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC TDM CLK or SNC BD errors For TN574 boards and TN1654 boards in T1 mode check line equalization settings as described in the above section DS1 CONV 1 and DS1 CONV 2 Line Compensation 7 Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP IN...

Page 1394: ...nstead of the AIS If a LOS condition exists on the facility the green LED on the TN574 DS1 CONV circuit pack that is associated with the facility will be off if an AIS condition exists on the facility the green LED that is associated with the facility that has the AIS will be on For TN1654 DS1 CONV boards the LED associated with the facility will be lit red if either the LOS or AIS conditions exis...

Page 1395: ...799 can only be executed at the end that is closer to the media server relative to the DS1 CONV circuit pack at the end of the DS1 CONV complex If the test cannot be executed for that reason then still make the external loop back as if the test was going to be executed but instead of executing the test check the green LED at the face plate of the DS1 CONV B that is associated with this DS1 facilit...

Page 1396: ...r link 5 If the problem still persists replace this DS1 CONV circuit pack 6 If the problem still persists replace the DS1 CONV circuit pack at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex k Facility Packet Channel Loopback Error This error indicates that the DS1 CONV primary facility that carries the packet time slots and DS1 control channel is looped to itself This error applies only to facilities A and...

Page 1397: ...PE CPE CSU A CSU B A DS1CONV Network DS1 Facility Network Interface at CSU Network Interface at Cross Connect Field T R T1 R1 T R T1 R1 CPE Network DS1 Facility Cross Connect Field DS1CONV R1 T1 R T CSU CPE Loopback Switch Self Test Switch Signal In Signal In DS1 Facility Side CSU CPE Side LOS LED DS1 Facility Side LOS LED Signal Out Signal Out CPE Side ...

Page 1398: ... are sent through every DS1 channel For TN1654 DS1 Converter facilities test patterns are sent through one DS1 channel If there is only one DS1 facility available the system will not allow that last facility to be busied out In that case the DS1 CONV circuit pack must be busied out before executing this test For a standard duplex or high reliability system no PNC duplication if there is only one D...

Page 1399: ...wnlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2316 ABORT Fiber link is not administered Administer the DS1 CONV fiber link via the add fiber link command 2321 ABORT DS1 facility is not busied out Busyout the DS1 facility via the ...

Page 1400: ... network See the above sections Line Coding and Framing Mode for details on how these options apply to the TN574 and TN1654 DS1 CONV boards 4 Isolate the problem by running the Near End External Loopback test 799 via the test ds1 facility UUCSSf external loopback command first at this end and then at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex Setup loop backs at different points as shown in the descrip...

Page 1401: ...cility and loops back at the manually hard wired external loop back device Depending on the type of physical connectivity of the DS1 facility special tools cables or connectors may be required to make the hard wired loop backs Table 8 265 Test 798 DS1 Interface Options Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 105 ABORT The neighbor DS1 CONV circuit pack at the other end of the DS1 C...

Page 1402: ...ty available system will not allow the last facility to be busied out In that case the DS1 CONV circuit pack must be busied out before executing this test For a standard duplex or high reliability system no PNC duplication if there is only one DS1 facility available then this test can only be executed at the endpoint that is closer to the media server relative to the neighbor DS1 CONV circuit pack...

Page 1403: ...e DS1 facility available Check the green LED at the face plate of the DS1 CONV circuit pack The green LED should be on if the loop is complete 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times FAIL Near end external loop back failed A problem exists in the path of the loop back 1 If the test is executed as a part of an error analysis then return back to the r...

Page 1404: ...esolved Table 8 267 Test 949 Failure Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2000 ABORT Timed out while waiting for a response from the circuit pack 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necess...

Page 1405: ...ground tests that the firmware runs autonomously Demand tests that are executed by the maintenance software do not cause any new error generation by the firmware However Failure Audit test 949 affects auditing of the software error log by forcing the firmware to report the pending errors again Maintenance of the DS1 facilities themselves is covered under the DS1 FAC MO The DS1 CONV complex can ext...

Page 1406: ...er However the DS1 CONV circuit pack can only be placed in slots 1 and 21 in a Switch Node SN carrier The DS1 CONV circuit pack is not connected to the TDM bus or the SN backplane Communication to the circuit pack is done through the connected EI or the SNI circuit packs Therefore there is considerable interaction between the DS1 CONVs and the connected EIs and the SNIs A special Y cable connects ...

Page 1407: ... SNIs Figure 8 30 DS1 CONV Complex in Direct Connect PNC Metallic or Fiber Connection DS1CONV DS1 Facilities Network EI or SNI EI DS1CONV Metallic or Fiber Connection DS1 Facilities I E D S 1 C O N V D S 1 C O N V I E Metallic or Fiber Connection Remote EPN PPN Metallic or Fiber Connection ...

Page 1408: ... the SNI must also be inserted and be operational for the DS1 CONV circuit pack to function Fiber link administration must be completed before the DS1 CONV maintenance can be operational Fiber links are administered via the add fiber link command Fiber Endpoints DS1 CONV circuit pack locations and DS1 facility options are entered as a part of the fiber link administration Metallic or Fiber Connect...

Page 1409: ...configurable for T1 or E1 operation so that a single board serves worldwide application All four DS1 facilities are configured to either T1 or E1 as a group via an option switch located on the component side of the circuit pack If T1 operation is selected four additional switches are used to select the framing mode for each facility Each facility can be set to either D4 or ESF framing If E1 operat...

Page 1410: ...ing manner and descending order of priority The amber LED stays lit longer as the DS1 CONV complex approaches full operation 1 If the fiber is out of frame or is in a loss of signal condition the amber LED will flicker at a 5 Hz rate on for 0 1 second off for 0 1 second 2 If the fiber channel is down DS1 Converter circuit pack fiber endpoint communications the amber LED will flash at a 1 Hz rate o...

Page 1411: ...d failure databases Once the firmware failure database is cleared the failure audit test 949 will pass If problems still exist the firmware will increment its error counters and the failure audit test will begin failing again This command should not be used as a replacement for the repair procedures associated with the hardware error log entries This command may be useful if a problem has been fix...

Page 1412: ... of two TN574 boards or two TN1654 boards A TN574 cannot be combined with a TN1654 in the same DS1 CONV complex Steps Comments Enter busyout board UUCSS UUCSS represents the cabinet carrier slot address of the circuit pack to be replaced A G3 MT logged in at the PN s Maintenance circuit pack remains active despite the busyout Replace the circuit pack with the same DS1 CONV board type Wait for the ...

Page 1413: ...of a single PN to outage of the entire system WARNING A DS1 Converter complex must consist of two TN574 boards or two TN1654 boards A TN574 cannot be combined with a TN1654 in the same DS1 CONV complex Steps Comments Enter status pnc Verify that the component to be replaced is on the standby PNC Enter busyout pnc Enter busyout board UUCSS UUCSS represents the cabinet carrier slot address of the ci...

Page 1414: ...alling the TN1654 boards review the prior section TN1654 Board Configuration Switch Settings If a TN1654 DS1 CONV board is connected to an SNI board upgrade the SNI to a TN573B or greater Wait for the circuit packs to reset Red and green LEDs will light and then go out Enter change circuit packs cabinet Update the form to show that TN1654 boards are now being used instead of TN574 boards Also upda...

Page 1415: ...just cannot be in the same fiber link WARNING The two DS1 CONV boards TN1654 and TN574 use unique Y cables that are incompatible with each other WARNING A TN573B or higher suffixed board must be used when connecting a SNI board to a TN1654 DS1 Converter board Table 8 268 Upgrading TN574 DS1 CONV Circuit Packs in a fiber link to TN1654s Duplicated PNC Steps Comments Enter status pnc Verify that the...

Page 1416: ...f TN574 boards Also update the connected SNI if applicable to suffix B cabinet represents the cabinet associated with a DS1 CONV board The appropriate change circuit packs form needs to be updated for all four DS1 CONV boards Also if needed re add translations for connected EI boards Enter change system parameters duplication Change the Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field to y Enable PNC dup...

Page 1417: ... A side is active 1 If the B PNC is active enter reset pnc interchange and press Enter 2 Then verify that the A side is active status pnc 2 busyout pnc standby Busyout the duplicated switch side 3 change system parameters duplication Disable PNC duplication by changing the Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field to n 4 list fiber link Lists administered fiber connections by number Select the lin...

Page 1418: ...iberoptic cable connections Ensure that the fiberoptic cables are securely connected to the lightwave transceivers that are attached to the designated circuit packs through the connections behind the cabinet 11 add fiber link n Administer the new EI SNI fiber connection 12 change system parameters duplication Enable PNC duplication by changing the Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field to y 13 ...

Page 1419: ...as the standby Each DS1Converter complex consists of two TN574 or TN1654 circuit packs Table 8 270 Removing Fiber Connectivity to an PN Command Step Description 1 status pnc Verify that the A side is active a If the B PNC is active enter reset pnc interchange and press Enter b Then verify that the A side is active status pnc 2 busyout pnc standby Busyout the duplicated switch side 3 change system ...

Page 1420: ...b pnc 9 change circuit pack Un administer the PNC circuit packs 10 clear firmware Clear any alarms or errors against those circuit packs 11 status pnc Use the status pnc command to ensure that the PNC is in good health Table 8 271 Downgrading from Critical to High Reliability Command Step Description 1 status pnc Check to see if A side is active If not a Resolve any alarms against a pnc b reset pn...

Page 1421: ...Physically remove the b pnc endpoint circuit packs Start with the switch carrier most distant from the media server Physically remove EI SNI and SNC circuit packs associated with the b pnc Remove fiber cable not used for b pnc carriers See the following CAUTION 7 change circuit pack Update the translations for the removed circuit packs using the change circuit pack command for the Cabinet with b p...

Page 1422: ...R ON 218 d any None MAJOR ON 257 e Failure Audit test 949 MINOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 f 1 Failure Audit test 949 MAJOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 g 2 Failure Audit test 949 MAJOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 h 3 Failure Audit test 949 MAJOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 i 4 Failure Audit test 949 MAJOR ON test board UUCSS sh r 1 513 j 5 Failure Audit test 949 MAJOR ON test board UU...

Page 1423: ...nge fiber link command to correct it d The DS1 CONV board is physically installed in a slot different than its administered slot Remove the DS1 CONV board and install it in its administered slot or execute the remove fiber link command followed by the add fiber link command to re add the fiber link setting the DS1 CONV board s administered location to the physically installed slot e A minor hardwa...

Page 1424: ... is off board then either a minor hardware problem has occurred that affects only circuit data being transmitted from the DS1 CONV circuit pack or a good clock signal cannot be recovered from the fiber channel 1 Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC TDM CLK and SNC BD errors 2 Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF ...

Page 1425: ...his error indicates that the facility masks or the clock reference masks do not match between the two DS1 CONV circuit packs in the DS1 CONV complex For TN1654 DS1 CONV boards this error indicates that the facility masks do not match between the two DS1 CONV circuit packs in the DS1 CONV complex Alarm should clear in 15 minutes 1 If the problem persists reset both DS1 CONV circuit packs in the DS1...

Page 1426: ...bor DS1 CONV circuit pack at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex If the neighbor board is connected to the Fiber Endpoint via metallic cable then this test will abort 5 If the problem still persists replace connectors and the cable between the neighbor DS1 CONV circuit pack and the Fiber Endpoint at the other end of the DS1 CONV complex The cable may be a fiber or a metallic cable t Fiber Loss o...

Page 1427: ...er link between the DS1 CONV board and the Fiber Endpoint See MO SYNC for diagnosing slip problems System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions And Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below By clearing error codes associated with the Failure Audit for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Tests 788 and 789 are exe...

Page 1428: ...essage necessary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2316 ABORT Fiber link is not administered Administer the DS1 CONV fiber link via the add fiber link command 2321 ABORT DS1 CONV circuit pack is not busied out Busyout the DS1 CONV circuit pac...

Page 1429: ...test is executed by sending digital data through every administered DS1 facility channel Two different test patterns are used these are hexadecimal values 55 and AA For a duplex or high reliability system no PNC duplication this test can only be executed at the endpoint that is closer to the media server relative to the neighbor DS1 CONV circuit pack because of its impacts on the system control li...

Page 1430: ...e other end of the DS1C complex 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times FAIL Far end DS1 CONV loop back failed A problem exists between the DS1 CONV A and the DS1 CONV B see diagram above 1 If there are facilities that are not digital data compatible then busyout those facilities via the busyout ds1 facility command 2 If the test is executed as a pa...

Page 1431: ...y DS1 facility channel Two different test patterns are used these are hexadecimal values 55 and AA For a duplex or high reliability system no PNC duplication this test can only be executed at the endpoint that is closer to the media server relative to the neighbor DS1 CONV circuit pack because of its impacts on the system control links also the completion of the test will be delayed in this config...

Page 1432: ...sary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2316 ABORT Fiber link is not administered Administer the DS1 CONV fiber link via the add fiber link command 2321 ABORT DS1 CONV circuit pack is not busied out Busyout the DS1 CONV circuit pack via the bu...

Page 1433: ...ures for any DS1 FAC errors on the DS1 facilities 4 Check the DS1 Converter Measurements Report to see if there are facilities with excessive errors execute command list measurements ds1 facility summary If there are facilities with excessive errors execute the Far End Internal Loopback test 797 on those facilities and follow repair procedures described for the test 5 If the test still fails repla...

Page 1434: ...e DS1 converter complex In addition a fault code will indicate the condition of not being able to loop up the far end as required to run the test due to the packet DS1 facility being down The TN1654 connectivity test sends digital data through only one time slot Instead of looping back the facility to itself the TN1654 version of the test loops up the other three facilities If the test pattern com...

Page 1435: ... test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2316 ABORT Fiber link is not administered Administer the DS1 CONV fiber link via the add fiber link command 2321 ABORT DS1 CONV circuit pack is not busied out Busyout the DS1 CONV circuit pack via the busyout board command 2332 ABORT With this system configuration unduplicated PNC the test was aborted because it cannot be run at the far...

Page 1436: ...can t send loop up message to the far end 1 Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any DS1 FAC errors on the DS1 facilities at both ends of the DS1 CONV complex If an alarm exists on a DS1 facility then this test will fail 2 Check the DS1 connections both circuit packs should have their DS1 facilities connected identically 3 Check the DS1 Converter Measurements Report...

Page 1437: ...ity mask whether each facility is installed clock reference mask whether each facility can be used as a clock reference source the board is being used as a network timing source packet compatible mask whether each facility is packet compatible facility information for line coding framing mode and line compensation The following data is sent to the TN1654 DS1 CONV circuit pack system reliability co...

Page 1438: ...2000 ABORT Timed out while waiting for a response from the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2316 ABORT Fiber...

Page 1439: ...ption Recommendation 2000 ABORT Timed out while waiting for a response from the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 2301 ABORT The timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 t...

Page 1440: ...ne Port for related line information MO s Name In Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO DT LN BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Data Line circuit pack DT LN BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh Data Line ...

Page 1441: ...e digits 0 through 9 digit and digit The ability of the DTMR port to detect touch tone digits is essential for maintenance of other circuit packs for example IPSI circuit pack and in placing a station to station call Calls originating from a hybrid station do not require a DTMR port The DTMR PT MO implements a set of tests to ensure that detection of touch tone digits by the DTMR port is functioni...

Page 1442: ...cates the DTMR port is having problems detecting touch tone digits If this error is being constantly logged then the IPSI or Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port should be replaced d This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for at least 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 8 279 Dual Tone Multif...

Page 1443: ...locate enough resources to test the DTMR port 1001 ABORT The system was unable to put the DTMR port in the appropriate mode to test it 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test connection This could happen when the system is heavily loaded If the system is not heavily loaded then test the TDM Bus via the test tdm a b command 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 ...

Page 1444: ...PASS The DTMR port is able to detect every touch tone digit Table 8 281 Test 43 Tone Detector Audit Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None ABORT The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test 1 Wait 1 minute and try again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate th...

Page 1445: ...rd up links the switch sends queries requesting additional data from the board for administration purposes while also telling the board the switch software release and the system type For the native mode the response to the board query downlink messages consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code vintage suffix emulation type and the number of reserved slots it needs...

Page 1446: ...ehavior The switch continues to send the same LED control messages to the MAPD that it currently sends to every other port board The MAPD handles proper interpretation of these messages You should note that the PC on the MAPD as well as the switch itself can control the LEDs and the LCD on the MAPD Port Administration In administration without hardware the switch allows administration of up to 32 ...

Page 1447: ...E DIG RES TN800 reserve slot Issue 1 May 2002 8 725 555 233 143 E DIG RES TN800 reserve slot See ASAI RES ...

Page 1448: ...lated digital voice terminal and stations with an emulated digital voice terminal and a linked data module Stand alone data modules and data adaptors in stand alone mode are not supported by the TN800 circuit pack Circuit pack maintenance is covered by E DIG BD MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 a b 1 Where UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CS...

Page 1449: ...than others Table 8 282 Digital Line Error Log Entries E DIG STA Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 18 a 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WARNING OFF rel p...

Page 1450: ...on board MINOR alarm is raised and the board is taken out of service g The station went off hook while it was in the ready for service state Use the status station command to determine the state of the station The off hook should have moved the station to ready for service No technician action is necessary h No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board No maintenance action is required i The...

Page 1451: ...he test 1 Check the port status 2 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before retesting 3 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 ABORT During testing of DTDM system resources may not hav...

Page 1452: ...rvice state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 1020 ABORT Test disabled by background testing Use the status station command to determine when the station is available for testing 2000 ABORT Response to the test...

Page 1453: ...ime slot and receives the same digital count with a General Purpose Tone Detector While the primary information channel is still looped around the Control Channel Loop around test sends four different transparent patterns to the on board microprocessor receives them back and compares them The Loop Around test for the secondary information data channel is the same as the primary information channel...

Page 1454: ...traffic conditions or it has time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR L...

Page 1455: ...not transmitting properly User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board UUCSSpp command 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack 3 If the test still fails replace the Digital Line ...

Page 1456: ... type is present then release the port release station extension and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT Station may be in ready for service or out of service state 1 Use the status station command to verify state of station 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to...

Page 1457: ...e port is a TTI port the abort is correct and no action is necessary FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS The message to light every station lamp was successfully sent to the port 1 Observe the station lamps being lit when running the test If every lamps does not light the other Digital Line test results may indicate related problems that are caus...

Page 1458: ...net or stack of single carrier cabinets ET is controlled either automatically by the system or manually depending on the setting of the ET switches as described below Emergency Transfer Status The status cabinet UU command shows the location of the ET switches and the current status of ET in the designated cabinet as follows MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is th...

Page 1459: ...st 5 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 286 EMG XFER Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test environme...

Page 1460: ... the EPN being tested Table 8 287 System Technician Demanded Tests EMG XFER Multicarrier Cabinets Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND nondestructive Battery Battery Charger Query test 5 a X X ND AC Power Query test 78 b X X ND OLS Query test Carrier E 127 c X X ND OLS Query test Carrier D 127 c X X ND OLS Query test Carrier A 127 c X X ND OLS Quer...

Page 1461: ...e Emergency Transfer Query test queries the hardware for the state of the Emergency Transfer switch or switches in a duplicated SPE system and reports the result If the position of the switch in a single or switches in a duplicated SPE cabinet or an PN cabinet is such that the system software can control Emergency Transfer auto then the test passes If the position of the switch or switches is such...

Page 1462: ...e command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 17 18 20 33 65 289 FAIL Emergency Transfer is manually turned OFF Emergency Transfer switch off 1 Place the switch in the AUTO position 34 290 FAIL Emergency Transfer is manually turned ON Emergency Transfer switch on 1 Place the switch in the AUTO position PASS System software has control of Emergency Transfer within this cabinet If Emergency Transfer...

Page 1463: ...n the PN 3 PNC interchange 4 PN WARM reset 5 PN COLD reset The EPN Sanity Audit feature activates only when every existing maintenance operation has failed to detect the PN problem The EPN Sanity Audit serves as a safety net for the PN NOTE It is not clear why certain types of PN problems activate this feature Thus error log entries related to these problems do not specify which hardware to replac...

Page 1464: ...k control messages but recovers after the PN s active Tone Clock is swapped e Error 9903 occurs whenever the PN is unable to send up link control messages but recovers after a PNC interchange has taken place f Error 9904 occurs whenever the PN is unable to send up link control messages but recovers after an PN WARM reset g Error 9905 occurs whenever the PN is unable to send up link control message...

Page 1465: ...he Software Error Log The system attempts to recover the logs but depending on the extent of the corruption some or all entries in the logs may be lost Any alarms that were active at the time of this error have been cleared There is no associated test for this error The Aux Data value indicates when the inconsistency was found MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of ...

Page 1466: ...nd G3si G3vs systems respectively The PGATE or PI can be used with the C LAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connections Control LAN Congestion Controls The switch activates congestion controls on C LAN when it detects buffers exceeding the threshold The switch releases the congestion controls when the C LAN reports that its buffers have returned to normal levels MO s Name i...

Page 1467: ... Inquiry test 1282 fails refer to its repair procedure Table 8 290 ETH PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp s 1 a 0 Ethernet Local Lo...

Page 1468: ... Refer to Session Status test 1286 repair procedure to verify repair f Error Type 1793 1920 System software received an indication that a socket was closed due to an error Error Type indicates the application associated with this socket Aux Data indicates the internal application number g Error Type 2305 2816 System software detected a session is down Aux Data indicates the session number These ar...

Page 1469: ...rs in the order they appear in the table below Table 8 291 System Technician Demanded Tests ETH PT Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND nondestructive Ethernet Local Loop Around test 1278 X D TCP IP Ping test 1281 X X ND Session Status test 1286 X X ND Link Integrity Inquiry test 1282 X X ND ...

Page 1470: ...causing every call and link associated with the port to be torn down 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3...

Page 1471: ...d retry 3 Escalate if the problem persists 1005 ABORT Incorrect test configuration 1 Verify Ethernet link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 Verify that Ethernet link is enabled status port UUCSSpp or status link n or display data module 3 Verify routing table has reachable destinations 4 Repeat the test 5 If problem persists while the Ethernet link is in service and enabled esca...

Page 1472: ...minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists re administer the ethernet connection through a different ethernet port if available 4 If the problem still persists or if there are no other available ethernet ports replace the circuit pack 1007 FAIL Ping to the destination failed...

Page 1473: ...nge data module 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1125 ABORT Ethernet link not in service 1 Verify whether Ethernet link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 If the Ethernet link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1959 ABORT Downlink message error 1 Retry the command at 1 ...

Page 1474: ...est fails verify that the cable properly is secured to Ethernet port and to the bus 3 Verify the C LAN circuit pack s link integrity LED is glowing 4 Retry the test 5 If problem persists see Ethernet Local Loop around test 1278 repair procedures PASS The Ethernet Link Integrity test 1282 detects good connections If the system software indicates that Then the switch Every port session is up ALL UP ...

Page 1475: ...rt UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSSpp reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry t...

Page 1476: ...Looparound test 1278 result 2 If test passes wait for system software to indicate ALL UP If not check the destination and other components in the path 3 If the destination and other components in the path are in service take action based on session information PASS Every session is up Table 8 295 Test 1286 Session Status Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on...

Page 1477: ... PNs both house two independent components Tone Generator that provides all the tones needed by the system Clock that generates clocks for both the system s Time Division Multiplex TDM bus and the LAN bus It also aids in monitoring and selecting internal synchronization references When resolving errors alarms on an IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack the following sections should also be consulted For...

Page 1478: ...Test to Clear Values Notes a There are two possible alarm levels for this error type major alarm and minor alarm These alarm levels are dependent on the administered thresholds for TTR CPTR and CCTR Each ETR port is capable of operating an any of these A major alarm is raised if the total number of ports capable of TTR CPTR or CCTR detection currently in service is less than or equal to one half o...

Page 1479: ...to see if the board is duplicated list cabinet and status port network on the affected PN 6 If the board is not duplicated use test tone UUCSS long to resolve the error The long test resets the board and is required to reload on board RAM associated with the DSPs The effect is that tone detectors are taken out of service momentarily and tones are removed from the TDM bus for about 10 seconds This ...

Page 1480: ...m the board from the system Follow the procedures described in the TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 section for replacing a Tone Clock circuit pack System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table By clearing error codes associated with the Tone Detection Verification test for example you may also clear er...

Page 1481: ...gainst the TONE BD or TONE PT in the PN where the test aborted 2 If a new Tone Clock has been inserted allow about 1 minute for maintenance to run on the newly inserted circuit pack 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Circuit pack s response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2...

Page 1482: ...CSSpp sh r 1 2 If the problem persists the system can still operate properly but capacity will be reduced In order to restore performance to normal replace the TN2182 TN2312AP circuit pack containing the defective ETR PT Follow the procedures described in TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 for replacing a Tone Clock circuit pack PASS Tone detection verification is successful The ETR port is...

Page 1483: ...ard and is required to reload on board RAM associated with the TN2182 s TN2312AP s DSPs The effect is that tone detectors are taken out of service momentarily and tones are removed from the TDM bus for about 10 seconds This means no dial pulses or touch tones during this interval which probably will not affect calls in progress but could cause a call origination to abort or cause a user to not get...

Page 1484: ...555 230 102 Following this introductory description of the Expansion Interface EI circuit pack are sections on the following topics EI In Service Mechanism Survivable Remote EPN LEDs EI and Tone Clock Interactions Replacing an EI Circuit Pack Unduplicated PNC Replacing an EI Circuit Pack Duplicated PNC Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Procedure MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Co...

Page 1485: ...hrough a DS1 CONV complex See Figure 8 38 on page 8 768 When discussing problems that may be related to fiber links the DS1 CONV is considered part of the fiber link If diagnosis of the problem points to fiber connectivity and a DS1 CONV circuit pack is part of the connectivity problems with the DS1 CONV circuit pack should be investigated see DS1 CONV BD on page 8 683 The DS1 CONV circuit pack en...

Page 1486: ...s EI must be connected with fiber to an EI located in the PN with an IPSI If an EI is functioning as an Archangel bus master its amber LED will be flashing at a rate of 2 seconds on and 200 ms off Figure 8 35 on page 8 765 shows the location of EI circuit packs in a typical duplicated PNC direct connect configuration Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 2 2 1 2 1 CABINET 2 CABINET 3 CARRIER A CARRIER A CABINET 1...

Page 1487: ...hangel TDM bus master An PN s EI that is On the active PNC Logically connected to the media server is the only one that can function in this mode In normal operation its amber LED should be blinking at a rate of 2 seconds on and 200 ms off Figure 8 36 on page 8 766 shows the location of EIs in a typical center stage switch configuration with unduplicated PNC PPN CAB 1 CARRIER D CARRIER C EPN CAB 2...

Page 1488: ...h the center stage switch Each SNI in the switch node carriers can be connected to an PN through an EI circuit pack Figure 8 37 on page 8 767 shows the location of EIs in a typical two Switch Node Center Stage Switch configuration with duplicated PNC METALLIC FIBER Slot Slot Slot C 20 19 13 12 10 3 2 C C C N N N N N N N N N N N N N N S S S S S S S S S S S S S S CAB 3 I 1 1 I E E CARRIER A CARRIER ...

Page 1489: ...riers An PN and thus the EIs contained within it can be remoted via a DS1 Converter complex This requires that a fiber link providing connectivity to the remoted PN be administered with an associated DS1 Converter complex This complex consists of two TN574 DS1 Converter DS1 CONV circuit packs connected by from 1 to 4 DS1 facilities Figure 8 38 on page 8 768 shows where the DS1 converter complex fi...

Page 1490: ...as established a LAP D link to its neighbor the circuit pack still may not be in service The requirement is that it must have the CORRECT neighbor on the other end of the fiber Care must be taken when connecting the fibers to the back of the carriers so that fibers are connected to the correct circuit packs In a Center Stage Switch configuration run the configuration audit test against the SNI cir...

Page 1491: ...t of a failure A logic switch circuit pack TN2301 located in the SRPPN detects when the link to the S8700 Multi Connect is down and switches to a link from the local SRPPN TN790 based processor When the links to the S8700 Multi Connect are restored and verified to be stable the logic switch is manually reset and the EPN is reconnected to the links from the S8700 Multi Connect NOTE The SREPN featur...

Page 1492: ...re is active the EI circuit pack that is assigned to the SREPN and located in the S8700 Multi Connect PN is put in loop back mode Restoring Normal Service to the SREPN WARNING Every call within the SREPN is terminated when the SREPN feature is returned to normal service To restore normal connections to the SREPN EI circuit pack in the S8700 Multi Connect PN you must 1 Clear every error logged agai...

Page 1493: ...off Another way to determine which PNC and therefore which EIs in an EPN is active and which is standby use the status port network and status PNC commands See Table 8 299 for the possible EI amber LED states Notes a This flashing state corresponds to error codes 769 and 770 from the Hardware Error Log and indicates a failure of Test 238 These error codes are usually accompanied by error code 1281...

Page 1494: ... Maintenance circuit pack may be reinstalled after the EI circuit pack has been physically inserted and the EI circuit pack s red LED has gone off The link between two active EI circuit packs or between an active EI circuit pack and an active SNI circuit pack is involved in synchronization The EI circuit pack reports slip errors if synchronization is not operating properly When diagnosing synchron...

Page 1495: ...irect Connect configuration where the EI circuit pack in an PN is connected via a fiber link to an EI circuit pack in the other PN e This is the normal state for a standby EI circuit pack in a PN NOTE In an PN its TN775C Maintenance MAINT circuit pack monitors the sanity of the EI circuit pack If the EI circuit pack should cycle between sane and insane several times the Maintenance circuit pack wi...

Page 1496: ...An EI circuit pack should not be replaced if the fiber link on which it resides goes down because of a defective active Tone Clock circuit pack The defective Tone Clock circuit pack should be replaced instead The EI circuit packs are more sensitive to a defective system clock than the rest of the components of the system Therefore testing of the Tone Clock circuit pack might not reveal a problem T...

Page 1497: ...lem was probably that the on line synchronization source became invalid See SYNC Maintenance documentation for more information However if the EAL s have not come back into service after a minute the synchronization source is not the cause of the problem Proceed to step 2 2 Check for errors via the display errors command with the Category field set to tone and the Active Alarms field set to n Some...

Page 1498: ...uit pack that was exhibiting these symptoms are now occurring on the connected EI or SNI circuit pack and vice versa the fiber is defective and should be replaced 4 Determine whether the problem is due to a defective active Tone Clock circuit pack Refer to the preceding list of symptoms to decide which network contains the suspect active Tone Clock CAUTION If you remove the PN EI circuit pack that...

Page 1499: ...n the suspect Tone Clock resides in an out of service PN Replace the active Tone Clock circuit pack in this port network PN In a PN with duplicated Tone Clock circuit packs the active Tone Clock s amber LED is flashing If both amber LEDs are flashing the active Tone Clock s LED is blinking slower CAUTION If a defective Tone Clock circuit pack is left as the standby Tone Clock then a scheduled Tone...

Page 1500: ...Enter release board UUCSS CAUTION Do not busyout any EI circuit pack after this point 5 Enter test alarms long clear for category exp intf 6 Wait 5 minutes for SNI BD FIBER LK and DS1 CONV BD alarms to clear or enter clear firmware counters a pnc Step Action Explanation Caution 1 Enter status pnc Verify that the component to be replaced is on the standby PNC 2 Enter busyout pnc 3 Enter busyout boa...

Page 1501: ...onnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave transceiver behind the circuit pack EI or SNI slot NOTE The fiber connected to the transmit side of the lightwave transceiver on one EI circuit pack should be connected to the receive side of the lightwave transceiver on the circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber 3 Using a fiber jumper cable interconnect the transmit and receive ...

Page 1502: ...e fiber and the port network is connected to a Center Stage Switch run the Configuration Audit via the test board command on the SNI circuit pack to which the intervening fiber is connected See the SNI BD section for instructions on interpreting results 6 Release EI circuit pack or SNI circuit pack with the release board UUCSS command Figure 8 39 Interconnection of Lightwave Transceiver Transmit R...

Page 1503: ...ny None MINOR OFF 513 f 5 7 None MAJOR ON 769 g 113 EI FOOF Query test 238 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 770 EI FOOF Query test 238 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1025 Any EI Control Channel test 316 MAJOR ON test board UUCSS r 1 1281 h EI Neighbor Query test 237 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1537 EI 2 way Transmission test 241 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 4 1538 i None MINOR ON 1793 EI Ligh...

Page 1504: ... pack is physically inserted into this slot and becomes recognized by software 3075 n 1 EI Packet Interface test 589 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 3 3076 EI Packet Interface test 589 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 3 3330 o Any None WARNING ON 3585 p 0 None WARNING OFF 3841 q Any None MINOR OFF s 3842 r Any None MINOR OFF s 10001 t 0 None 1 Aux Data 32767 for any error log entry indicates that an alar...

Page 1505: ...rence on the network or switch node that contains the DS1 CONV circuit pack the EI circuit pack or SNI circuit pack on the opposite end of the fiber Refer to the error log that was saved in step 1 and follow the associated repair procedure for EXP INTF error 2305 to resolve this error If there are any TONE BD TDM CLK or SYNC errors resolve these errors as well f Error Type 513 with Aux Data 5 7 In...

Page 1506: ...1 Indicates an on board failure of EI circuitry related to handling packet data from the fiber interface and from the packet bus interface 1 If this error has generated a minor alarm the EI circuit pack should be replaced l Error Type 2817 Indicates an on board failure of EI circuitry related to transmission of data to the fiber interface 1 If this error has generated a minor alarm the EI circuit ...

Page 1507: ...icates a failure of a diagnostic component on the EI circuit pack The failed component will not impair service but it may leave the EI circuit pack in a state where the EI circuit pack cannot detect errors 1 Replace the EI circuit pack at a time when it is most convenient for the customer this may cause service outages p Error Type 3585 Indicates that the EI circuit pack experienced a series of ve...

Page 1508: ...action is required System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in Table 8 302 below For example by clearing error codes associated with the Expansion Interface Reset test 336 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 302 System Technician Demanded Tests EXP INTF Order of Investigation Short...

Page 1509: ...e 8 303 Test 237 Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1033 ABORT The EI circuit pack does not have a fiber link administered to it There is not sufficient data to run test 1 Issue the list fiber link command to verify that there is no fiber link administered to this circuit pack 2 If there is no fiber administered to this circuit pack but there ...

Page 1510: ...ify that every fiber link cable is installed as it is administered 2 Repeat the command PASS The EI circuit pack has successfully established a link with the neighbor EI or SNI circuit pack If the status port network command still indicates that this link is down it is possible that one or both of the EI and or SNI circuit packs have been busied out 1 If the link still does not come up reset one o...

Page 1511: ...imes FAIL EI circuit pack could not detect framing sequence 1 If the EI circuit pack that is failing Test 238 is in the PN and the red LEDs are ON on a large number of circuit packs then reseat any Tone Clock circuit packs in the PN 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links in Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting 3 Enter display errors and resolve any SNC BD TDM BUS TDM CLK or SYNC errors PASS Th...

Page 1512: ...ORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test on either TDM Bus The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may b...

Page 1513: ...he EI or SNI circuit pack on the other end of the fiber 1 Run Test 237 and check the Error Log for EXP INTF error type 1281 If error type 1281 is present or if Test 237 does not pass see repair procedures for Test 237 in Table 8 303 on page 8 787 1395 ABORT This test cannot be run on an EI circuit pack if it is part of the B side PNC and duplicated PNC is not enabled 1 If this test needs to run on...

Page 1514: ...lock on the PN that contains the indicted EI circuit pack to verify that dial tone is supplied 3 If the tone clock is healthy repeat the short test on the EI board 4 If this test continues to fail replace the EI circuit pack PASS Test tone was correctly detected after internal EI loop back on both TDM buses 1 Refer to other EI circuit pack tests if the links between this EI circuit pack and the EI...

Page 1515: ... passed in the opposite direction If the system is equipped with a Center Stage Switch and this test either fails or aborts with the above connection a second PN is chosen if one is available and the EI circuit pack is In Service and the same test is run on this new connection This helps in the isolation of the fault Since two EI circuit packs are involved in the connection either one of them coul...

Page 1516: ...r of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out of service 1 Enter display errors and follow associated repair procedures for TTR LEV errors in the error log Even if there are not TTR LEV errors there may not be a tone detector available on the network that contains the circuit pack being tested Verify that there is at least one tone detector on this network If not this test will alw...

Page 1517: ...ability to communicate with the EI or SNI circuit pack on the other end of the fiber 1 Run Test 237 and check the Error Log for EXP INTF Error Type 1281 If Error Type 1281 is present or if Test 237 fails see repair procedures for Test 237 in Table 8 303 on page 8 787 1395 ABORT This test cannot be run on an EI circuit pack if it is part of the B side PNC and duplicated PNC is not enabled 1 If this...

Page 1518: ... the opposite direction 1 Test for the active Tone Clocks on the PNs for which the defective EI board provides a link This determines if the dial tone is supplied 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting Center Stage These failure codes are possible on a Center Stage Switch configuration only when there is just one other PN available for looping ...

Page 1519: ...gital count is transmitted from the cabinet of the EI circuit pack under test through the EI circuit pack under test out to its lightwave transceiver The connection then loops back into the lightwave transceiver through the same EI circuit pack again and into the originating cabinet If the test tone is detected by a tone detector the first part of the test passes The path used for this part of the...

Page 1520: ...n Figure 8 42 on page 8 799 The path used for this test if the EI resides in an PNPN is represented in Figure 8 43 on page 8 799 When the EI circuit pack under test is in an PN the data packet must also pass through the active EI circuit packs and the active DS1 CONV circuit packs and the active SNI circuit pack s in a Center Stage Switch system of the active PNC link connecting the PN This test r...

Page 1521: ...et Bus Lightwave Transceiver Looparound PN only Figure 8 43 Packet Bus Lightwave Transceiver Looparound PN only lightwave To CSS or Neighbor EI Packet Interface TDMBUS PN X EXP_INTF transceiver Interface Packet EXP_INTF Neighbor EI To CSS or lightwave transceiver Optional CSS EXP_INTF EXP_INTF ...

Page 1522: ...is EI board This will not harm the system 2 Enter display errors and follow associated repair procedures for TONE PT 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1015 ABORT The system will not allow this test to be run because the EI circuit pack has not been busied out 1 Busyout the EI circuit pack Then repeat the test board UUCSS long command 1031 ABORT If ...

Page 1523: ... if Test 237 fails see repair procedures for Test 237 in Table 8 303 on page 8 787 1395 ABORT This test cannot be run on an EI circuit pack if it is part of the B side PNC and duplicated PNC is not enabled 1 If this test needs to run on this EI circuit pack enable PNC with the change system parameters duplication command 2 Prevent the system from doing a PNC interchange by executing the set PNC lo...

Page 1524: ...sceiver Then reissue the test board UUCSS long on the new EI circuit pack 2 FAIL The test tone was transmitted and detected correctly but the correct data packet was not detected by the TN1655 Packet Interface circuit pack 1 Test the TN1655 Packet Interface circuit pack to verify that it is functioning properly If any tests fail investigate those tests and repair the Packet Interface circuit pack ...

Page 1525: ...air and the active pair is working properly 2 If this EI board is failing other tests execute the EI Manual Loop Back Test 3 If problems still exist after the EI Manual Loop Back Procedure indicates both EI boards and both lightwave transceivers are healthy manually check out the building fiber Verify that each optical fiber connects to a transmitter at one end and a receiver at the other 0 NO BOA...

Page 1526: ...y or if it is the PN active EI circuit pack it could not talk to PN circuit packs 1 If the active EI circuit pack in the PN is failing and duplicated Port Network Connectivity is enabled attempt to switch to the standby PNC using the reset PNC interchange command 2 Repeat the short test sequence 3 If test continues to fail reset the EI circuit pack via the reset board UUCSS command 4 If the EI cir...

Page 1527: ...n duplicated PNC system with a Center Stage Switch if the EI circuit pack in the PN is busied out new service to that PN only will be denied However if the EI circuit pack resides in the PN new service to every PN will be denied until the EI circuit pack is released from the busyout state If the system does not have duplicated PNC the reset of any EI is allowed but it will result in the resetting ...

Page 1528: ...t again 1015 ABORT The system will not allow this test to be run because the EI circuit pack has not been busied out Busyout the EI circuit pack Repeat the reset board UUCSS command 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the comma...

Page 1529: ...ere resolved when the PN went down These errors may have been resolved BECAUSE the PN went down When there is no Tone Clock generating the system clock on an PN then an EI circuit pack can only be reset once Every subsequent reset attempt fails It is also possible that the system itself may have already tried to reset the EI circuit pack Refer to TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit for Tone Clock problems ...

Page 1530: ...the different paths the test uses Figure 8 44 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test Packet Endpoint Loop The path shown in Figure 8 44 is used when testing an PN EI that is on the active PNC 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Resolve either wrong board error 125 or no board error 131 issues 2 Check that the board is properly translated and inserted If so check for hyperactivity err...

Page 1531: ...N EI that is on the standby PNC In a Direct Connect configuration this path is used on any PN EI or on an PN EI that is on the standby PNC Figure 8 46 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test PN to CSS Loop The path shown in Figure 8 46 is used when running the test on a PN EI in a Center Stage configuration optional PKT INT EXP INTF EXP INTF Packet Bus PPN Packet Bus PN X CSS INTERFACE SWITCH NO...

Page 1532: ...rface Packet Interface Test PN to PN link The path shown in Figure 8 47 is used when the EI under test is one that provides connectivity between the two PNs in a Direct Connect configuration INT PKT EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF Packet Bus PPN Packet Bus PN X Packet Bus PN Y ...

Page 1533: ...tion DIRECT CONNECT 1 Issue the list config command for the cabinet and carrier where the neighbor EI circuit pack resides If the results reveal that the board is not recognized by software the board is out of service because of this condition Perform the following steps a If this test is being executed on an EI circuit pack located in the PN enter display errors and resolve any EXP PN errors for ...

Page 1534: ...or code reseat the EI circuit packs or DS1 CONV circuit pack if so equipped on the PNs This will not be destructive since the circuit pack cannot be serving as the Expansion Archangel if it is not in service 5 Run Test 237 on each of the PN EI circuit packs and check for EXP INTF circuit pack Error Type 1281 in the error log If Error Type is present and or Test 237 does not pass see repair procedu...

Page 1535: ...281 is present or if Test 237 does not pass see the repair procedures for Test 237 in Table 8 303 on page 8 787 2 If Test 237 passes rest the EI pack Note that this will not be destructive to the port network where EI circuit pack resides because it will not be serving as the expansion Archangel if it is not in service 3 Repeat this test 1395 ABORT This test cannot be run on an EI circuit pack if ...

Page 1536: ...nter Stage Switch configuration It means that the test failed but that this test was then run on the PN EI on the same PNC as the EI under test and that test failed This means that the EI originally tested is probably not at fault 1 Resolve any alarms that are logged against the PN EI that is on the same PNC as the EI under test 2 If there are no alarms logged against the PN EI run Test 589 agains...

Page 1537: ...ers in an unduplicated PNC run the short test sequence on both of the PN s EI boards and follow procedures for Test 589 3 Enter display errors and resolve any PKT BUS errors 4 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links PASS Although this test has passed there may be related problems on other EIs used in connectivity to and from this EI Software may have conducted tests on these other components a...

Page 1538: ...utes MAINT may inhibit operation of the EXP INTF by holding the EI circuit pack in a reset state This condition may result in an unsuccessful reset of the EI circuit pack If the reset command returns with PN is unavailable execute the following 1 Use the change circuit pack P PN s number command 2 For the EI circuit pack you wish to reset add an entry to the Circuit Pack form for the TN776 EI circ...

Page 1539: ...lts of its initialization tests 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the test continues to abort replace the circuit pack or transceiver 1 FAIL The EI did not successfully reset 1 If the EI circuit pack is in the PN the PN s Maintenance board may be holding the EI circuit pack reset Attempt to rectify this condition by executing the test maint P long command on the Maintena...

Page 1540: ...Clock errors may have been resolved because the PN went down When there is no Tone Clock generating the system clock on an PN then an EI circuit pack can only be reset once Every subsequent reset attempt fails It is also possible that the system itself may have already tried to reset the EI circuit pack See TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 for recommended maintenance strategy for Tone Clo...

Page 1541: ...reset with the same error code replace the EI circuit pack 5002 FAIL Initialization failure EI circuit pack reset successfully and restarted execution But the EI circuit pack has determined that a lightwave transceiver was not attached to the backplane connector when the EI circuit pack was last reset If this system does not have duplicate EI links every user in the PN will be without service unti...

Page 1542: ...me tests on this EI circuit pack are failing or other errors have been logged against this circuit pack replace the lightwave transceiver and or the EI circuit pack PASS The EI was successfully reset and it restarted execution It also passed all of its initialization tests and detected a lightwave transceiver Remove the EI circuit pack from the busyout state by using the release board PCSS command...

Page 1543: ...actions When investigating alarms logged against an EPN problems involving the EI an ATM EI circuit pack acting as the Expansion Archangel and problems that may involve loss of communication between the EPN and the media server should be investigated This could ultimately include fiber links FIBER LK DS1 CONV circuit packs DS1 CONV BD SNI circuit packs SNI BD and Switch Node Configurations SN CONF...

Page 1544: ...et Level 2 PN Cold Restart is required to return it to service PN Cold Restarts If the PN to PN link has failed and has not been recovered within 30 seconds the PN is taken out of service and can be brought back into service only with an PN Reset Level 2 PN Cold Restart Effects of an PN Cold Restart include a reset of every circuit pack in the PN and the disconnection of every call to or from the ...

Page 1545: ...Reset Level 1 PN Warm Restart has been executed on this PN b This is an informational entry only indicating that an PN Reset Level 2 PN Cold Restart has been executed on this PN This does not include restarts done at system initialization time c Indicates that an PN is not in service when it is expected to be The value specified in the port field of the error log is the PN number of the affected P...

Page 1546: ... 2 command P is the port network s number and 1 or 2 specifies the reset level PN Cold Restart 955 PN Cold Restart or PN Reset Level 2 using the command reset port network P level 2 is used as a recovery mechanism for an PN that has been taken out of service It is executed as a result of PN recovery escalation when a Warm Restart is not possible or as a result of a system technician demanded PN re...

Page 1547: ...LINK and resolve the link problem 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to execute this reset 2000 ABORT Response to a request made in the internal portion of this reset procedure was not received within the allowable time period 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute...

Page 1548: ... not allocate the necessary system resources to execute this reset 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1386 ABORT The system link to this PN is unavailable and cannot be used This reset cannot be executed without the link being operational 1 See SYS LINK and resolve the link problem 1387 ABORT This PN is not in a state where it is possible to perform a Warm Restart on the PN It...

Page 1549: ...alarm connection for cabinet UU The major minor designation specifies the port not the alarm level associated with the connection for example the major port can be administered as a major minor or warning alarm and the minor port can be administered as a major minor or warning alarm In addition Analog line ports can also be administered as external device alarms NOTE An unadministered Maintenance ...

Page 1550: ...estigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system For example by clearing error codes associated with the Battery External Device Alarm test 120 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 0 Any Any Any test eda external device alrm physica...

Page 1551: ... Error Code resolve every maintenance circuit pack error Then repeat the test 2029 2100 2319 2320 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times ANY FAIL The External Device Alarm has been activated by the external device 1 Clear the major alarm on the external device and rerun the test 2 If the test still fails then disconnect the External Device Alarm Le...

Page 1552: ...d with the same fiber link s number The fiber links are designated by F P where F is the fiber link s number and P is the PNC A PNC or B PNC In addition a DS1 converter complex may be assigned to the fiber link In a duplicated PNC configuration both the A and B PNC s DS1 converter complexes are administered with the same fiber link s number DS1 facilities and parameters can be modified via change ...

Page 1553: ...k because a fiber out of frame condition will exist The 9823a lightwave transceiver should be used for distances up to 4900 feet and the 9823b lightwave transceiver should be used for distances up to 25 000 feet Control Path The path between the two fiber endpoints that is necessary for the two endpoint circuit packs to communicate Circuit Path The path between the two fiber endpoints that is nece...

Page 1554: ...to the LED states see EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 762 Notes a A Fiber is out of frame or a fiber loss of signal condition exists b DS1 CONV fiber endpoint communication is down c The DS1 channel is down between the two DS1 CONVs in the DS1 converter complex Table 8 317 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Amber LED Flashing Codes Condition LED on LED off Fiber Out of Frame 0 1 ...

Page 1555: ...mmand d This error indicates problem with the circuit path to the neighbor e This error indicates problem with the packet path to the neighbor Table 8 319 Fiber Link Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and...

Page 1556: ...r Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system For example by clearing error codes associated with the EI Out of Frame Query test 238 you may also clear errors generated by other tests later in the sequence Table 8 320 Error Log Entries for Slip Errors Circuit Pack Name Error Log Name Error Log Entry for Slips DS1 Interface DS1 BD 30...

Page 1557: ...re audit 777 X X ND Fiber Out of Frame query 989 X X ND Destructive Facility test 757 X D Off Board Destructive Facility test 756 X D Fiber Link Reset test 768 X D Table 8 323 Tests Run for an SNI to SNI Fiber Link Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Fiber Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Configuration audit 759 X X ND Failure audit 777 X X ND Fiber ...

Page 1558: ... Pack 2031 ABORT The attempt to send the message to the EI circuit pack asking it who it s neighbor is was not successful 1 Run the test board UUCSS test separately for each EI endpoint on this fiber link and follow the procedures for this test in EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Run the test board UUCSS test separa...

Page 1559: ...have been busied out 2 If the link still does not come up reset one or both EI and or SNI circuit packs on the link Table 8 325 Test 238 Expansion Interface Fiber Out of Frame Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error software 1 Run the test board UUCSS test separately for each EI endpoint on this fiber link and follow the procedures for this test in ...

Page 1560: ...vely 1 Clear any SYNC and TDM CLK errors listed in the error log 2 Run the test board UUCSS test for each EI board on this fiber link and follow the appropriate repair sequence for any failing tests 3 If the EI circuit pack fails Test 238 and is in the PN and the red LEDs are ON for a large number of circuit packs then reseat any Tone Clock circuit packs in the PN See the How to replace Tone Clock...

Page 1561: ...link message necessary to run this test 2304 ABORT SNI circuit pack responded that it is not able to run the test requested by software 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2306 ABORT A fiber link s SNI circuit pack is not responding to test requests sent by software 1 Run the test led switch node for the switch node where the SNI board s reside to verify whether their LEDs ligh...

Page 1562: ...wave transceiver should not be present do nothing For example an SNI connected to a DS1 CONV circuit pack or an SNI with a metallic connection does not have a lightwave transceiver This test can only be run when a lightwave transceiver exists 2 Check the lightwave transceiver connections 3 Replace the lightwave transceiver If a fiber out of frame condition exists and lightwave transceivers are use...

Page 1563: ...round on Endpoint 2 of the fiber link list fiber link can be used to display fiber link endpoints 1 Check the lightwave transceiver 2 Replace the lightwave transceiver If a fiber out of frame condition exists and lightwave transceivers are used check that the lightwave transceivers are of the same type both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave tran...

Page 1564: ... their LEDs light If not continue with the following steps 2 If LEDs light on other boards in the same carrier but not on this board issue test board UUCSS l 760 for the active SNC in this carrier Wait 5 minutes and try step 1 again If the board s LEDs still do not light replace the board Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI 3...

Page 1565: ...r endpoint can be viewed with the list fiber link command This test can only detect if the fiber endpoint connected to the SNI is in a different carrier slot location than the administered fiber endpoint If the SNI is connected to the same type of fiber endpoint as the administered fiber endpoint but the location is the same as administered except for the cabinet no phone calls will work correctly...

Page 1566: ...responding to test requests sent by software 1 Run the test led switch node for the switch node s where the SNI s reside to verify whether the LEDs on the board s light Follow the steps below for the SNI s that had no LEDs light 2 If the LEDs on the other boards in the carrier light but the LEDs on this board do not light run Test 760 via test board UUCSS l for the active SNC in this carrier Wait ...

Page 1567: ...ER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 257 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 257 replace the SNI in slot 3 104 FAIL The SNI...

Page 1568: ...PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 1025 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 1025 replace the SNI in slot 6 107 FAIL The...

Page 1569: ...e SNI PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 1793 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 1793 replace the SNI in slot 9 112 FA...

Page 1570: ...SNI PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 2305 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 2305 replace the SNI in slot 14 115 FAI...

Page 1571: ... errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 3073 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 3073 replace the SNI in slot 17 118 FAIL The SN...

Page 1572: ...the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 3841 replace the SNI in slot 20 133 FAIL No neighbor link is assigned but the SNI Endpoint 1 has an EI neighbor The list fiber link command displays a fiber link s endpoints 1 Administer the SNI on a fiber link to the EI neighbor it is connected to via the add fiber link next...

Page 1573: ...r but it physically resides in another location 1 Enter list fiber link and verify that the fiber optic and metallic cables are installed as administered 2 If the problem does not seem to be caused by either a physical connection or an administration problem replace the neighbor circuit pack The neighbor circuit pack may have a hardware problem causing it to report a wrong angel address physical c...

Page 1574: ...Fiber Links on page 4 19 This should resolve multiple SNI PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 1 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER...

Page 1575: ... errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 769 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 769 replace the SNI in slot 5 206 FAIL The SNI c...

Page 1576: ...SNI PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 1537 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 1537 replace the SNI in slot 8 209 FAIL...

Page 1577: ... the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 2049 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 2049 replace the SNI in slot 13 214 FAIL The SNI circuit pa...

Page 1578: ...SNI PEER errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 2817 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 2817 replace the SNI in slot 16 217 FAI...

Page 1579: ... errors 2 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER Error Type 3585 replace the SNI being tested Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting Refer to the SNI BD section for the procedure to replace an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested still has SNI PEER Error Type 3585 replace the SNI in slot 19 220 FAIL The SN...

Page 1580: ...ack Endpoint 2 cannot communicate with its neighbor The list fiber link command can be used to display fiber link endpoints The SNI has an administered neighbor but cannot communicate with its neighbor 1 Check if the administered neighbor is inserted If not insert the neighbor circuit pack 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 236 FAIL The Endpoint 2 SNI s administered neighbo...

Page 1581: ...lled as assigned If not change administration to remove the DS1 converter complex from the SNI s fiber link by 1 Issuing list fiber link to locate this SNI endpoint s fiber 2 Issuing remove fiber link for this SNI endpoint s fiber 3 Issuing add fiber link to replace the fiber without assigning the DS1 converter complex 240 FAIL The SNI Endpoint 2 is physically connected to a DS1 CONV but is not as...

Page 1582: ...he EI For an SNI to SNI fiber link the SNI farthest from the PN is reset first followed by the SNI nearest to the PN When an EI endpoint is reset the Expansion Interface Reset test 336 is executed When an SNI endpoint is reset the SNI Reset test 761 is executed These tests are described in the EXP INTF and SNI BD sections This test starts the other reset test mentioned above and returns PASS witho...

Page 1583: ...s with category PNC to view SNI BD and FIBER LK errors and display errors with category PNC PEER to view SNI PEER errors For EI to EI fiber links this test is not run For EI to SNI fiber links this test is run on the SNI circuit pack endpoint of the fiber link For SNI to SNI fiber links this test is run on both SNI circuit pack endpoints of the fiber link Table 8 330 Test 777 Failure Audit Error C...

Page 1584: ...for the boards in the same carrier as this board fix any problems associated with the connectivity of this carrier to the media server Use list fiber link to determine the fiber connections to this carrier Check the LEDs on every SNI and EI and fix any fiber problems Enter display errors and resolve any EXP INTF error entries associated with the PPN Also resolve any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or ...

Page 1585: ...ink endpoints 1 If a lightwave transceiver should not be present for example an SNI connected to a DS1 CONV circuit pack do nothing 2 Otherwise continue with the following steps 3 Check the lightwave transceiver connections 4 Replace the lightwave transceiver 5 Replace the SNI circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute...

Page 1586: ... condition but no loss of signal condition Also a lightwave transceiver is connected to the SNI circuit pack 1 Check that the connected circuit pack is physically installed The connected circuit pack is the other endpoint of the fiber link if no DS1 CONV complex is administered check via list fiber link Otherwise if a DS1 CONV complex is administered the connected circuit pack is the DS1 CONV circ...

Page 1587: ...circuit pack is the other endpoint of the fiber link if no DS1 CONV complex is administered check via list fiber link Otherwise if a DS1 CONV complex is administered the connected circuit pack is the DS1 CONV circuit pack connected to the SNI circuit pack 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 in Chapter 5 3 Replace this SNI circuit pack 4 Replace the connected circuit pack 145...

Page 1588: ...nected circuit pack is the other endpoint of the fiber link if no DS1 CONV complex is administered check via list fiber link Otherwise if a DS1 CONV complex is administered the connected circuit pack is the DS1 CONV circuit pack connected to the SNI circuit pack 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 in Chapter 5 3 Replace this SNI circuit pack 4 Replace the connected circuit p...

Page 1589: ...circuit pack is the other endpoint of the fiber link if no DS1 CONV complex is administered check via list fiber link Otherwise if a DS1 CONV complex is administered the connected circuit pack is the DS1 CONV circuit pack connected to the SNI circuit pack 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 in Chapter 5 3 Replace this SNI circuit pack 4 Replace the connected circuit pack 245...

Page 1590: ...endpoint of the fiber link if no DS1 CONV complex is administered check via list fiber link Otherwise if a DS1 CONV complex is administered the connected circuit pack is the DS1 CONV circuit pack connected to the SNI circuit pack 2 Perform the Fault Isolation for Fiber Links on page 4 19 in Chapter 5 3 Replace this SNI circuit pack 4 Replace the connected circuit pack PASS No problems associated w...

Page 1591: ...Protocol The image is then copied to the target circuit packs FLASH memory For C LAN this is done over the TDM bus for VAL the source and target are the same The transfer of the download image from the source board to the target board is done under switch software control This process is initiated using the S8700 Multi Connect SAT System Access Terminal interface NOTE The announcement directory on...

Page 1592: ...ing the firmware download feature enable filesystem disable filesystem list directory remove file change firmware download disable firmware download display firmware download status firmware download test firmware download display initcauses SPE Download control TDM bus CCMS control data CCMS control data Source board Download control TFTP TFTP Flash write OSHDLC OSHDLC DRAM file system FTP TCP IP...

Page 1593: ... If the system does a reset 1 or 2 and no alarms are present execute the display init cause command Clear any errors and retest by executing the test firmware download command 8 If errors alarms exist they can be resolved cleared by executing the test firmware download command 9 If there are no errors alarms and the Remove File option is set to y on the firmware download screen the image file is r...

Page 1594: ...AP circuit pack using the put command The file extension on the firmware image filename is required 4 Ensure that the file is present by listing the contents of the root directory on the VAL circuit pack 5 At the SAT type change firmware download and press return The Firmware Download screen Screen 8 3 appears Screen 8 3 Firmware Download screen change firmware download Page 1 of 1 Server SPE A FI...

Page 1595: ...fix field 10 Type 0 in the Firmware Vintage field 11 If you want to schedule the firmware image download for a later time type y in the Schedule Download field Otherwise type n to download the firmware image file now 12 If you want the firmware image file erased after the download type y in the Remove Image File After Successful Download field Otherwise type n to leave the downloaded firmware imag...

Page 1596: ... test firmware download and press return The Test Results screen Screen 8 5 appears Screen 8 5 Test Results screen status firmware download Server SPE A STATUS FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Location 01C08 Firmware Image File Name firmware_file Target Board Code TN2501 Suffix AP Firmware Vintage Schedule Download n Remove Image File After Successful Download y Target Target Target Target Target Lo...

Page 1597: ...e set boot image board 1C07 2 NOTE The new firmware image file resides in image 2 after a successful download In most cases use image 2 as the new firmware image file The system responds with Command Successfully Completed 2 Reseat the circuit pack to activate the new firmware image WARNING To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD be sure to wear a grounding strap while handling the circuit pack a L...

Page 1598: ...or Type Aux Data Cause Of Error Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 257 a See associated note Download failure MINOR OFF test firmware download UUCSS 258 b See associated note Download failure MINOR OFF test firmware download UUCSS 259 c See associated note Download failure MINOR OFF test firmware download UUCSS 513 d See associated note Download failure MINOR OFF test firmware download U...

Page 1599: ...ownload 2 Target board query failed Check for system wide problems clear every error and retry the download 3 Allocating resources failed Check for system wide problems clear every error and retry the download 4 Firmware Download Information table query failed Check for system wide problems clear every error and retry the download 5 Header message failed Check for system wide problems clear every ...

Page 1600: ...rd absent not responding check board location translations and retry 2 Incorrect target board for download schedule verify board location and schedule 3 Target failed to go into DL Mode retry 4 Target received bad file header 5 Bad image checksum on image on source board get new image retry 6 TFTP protocol error One reason for this type of failure could be that the target board has ami zcs line co...

Page 1601: ...ady in progress Internal firmware error on target board retry download if fail then escalate 30 A start download sequence error Internal firmware error on target board retry download if fail then escalate 32 The file name is too long Internal firmware error on target board retry download if fail then escalate 40 FLASH programming failed on firmware Internal firmware error on target board retry dow...

Page 1602: ...esolve and alarms to clear 1 This test verifies that the information on the FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD screen is correct It also verifies that the source board is of the correct type that the file to be downloaded is present on that source board and that the file is error free In addition it verifies that the target board code and suffix are correct It also retrieves the new firmware vintage for the target...

Page 1603: ...firmware download command and enter the new file name on the screen 5 FAIL The TN code of the firmware image file on the source board does not match the TN code entered on the screen The firmware file is incorrect for the board type entered on the screen Execute the list directory command and verify that a file system is enabled on the board and the file is present If the file system is not enable...

Page 1604: ...is circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted Ensure that the board translations are correct If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so th...

Page 1605: ...essential for maintenance of other circuit packs for example Tone Clock The GPTD MO defines a set of tests to ensure that the GPTD port s general purpose tone detection is functioning properly For every Tone Detector circuit pack level error DETR BD see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM P...

Page 1606: ...l progress tones If this error is logged constantly replace the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective GPTD port d This Error Type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for at least 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 8 336 General Purpose Tone Detector Port CPTR Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Al...

Page 1607: ...Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Tone Detection Verification test 42 X X ND Tone Detector Audit Update test 43 X X ND Table 8 337 Test 42 Tone Detection Verification Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT The system was not able to allocate every resource needed for this test or there was an Internal system error 1 ABORT The system could not allocate every res...

Page 1608: ...d at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 101 122 FAIL 1 Run the short test sequence test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 2 If the problem persists the system is still operating properly but system capacity will be reduced In order to restore the system performance to normal replace ...

Page 1609: ...d try again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Hardware audit failed 1 Run the short test sequence test port UUCSSpp short repeat 1 2 If the problem persists the system is still operating properly but syste...

Page 1610: ... H 323 D channel may actually come up and down on a call by call basis So the H 323 D channel is actually a TCP IP signaling channel Layer 1 and 2 of this signaling channel can be monitored by IP PING testing Performance in terms of voice latency for a signaling group is monitored by background measurements being collected by the TN802B Media Processor board H 323 B channels actually use TN802B Me...

Page 1611: ...ne No physical piece of hardware is removed from service release port UUCSSpp This command on a specific H 323 B channel effectively increases the trunk group s capacity by one No physical piece of hardware is actually added to service status trunk grp mbr This command is used to find the current status of the specific B channel Additional status for an H 323 B channel shows near and far end IP si...

Page 1612: ...e Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 grp is the signaling group number 1 166 the test sequence can be either short or long Full Name of MO H323 SGRP MINOR test sig group grp H323 Signaling Group H323 SGRP WARNING test sig group grp H323 Signaling Group Table 8 340 H323 SGRP Signaling Gr...

Page 1613: ...connections for the trunk members of the signaling group g Error Type 1794 The Sig Group reported that the far end has detected excessive packet latency or loss h Error Type 2049 A Keep Alive timer is set for every registered endpoint on the Remote Office and the switch expects Keep Alive update within that timer s time period If the update does not occur a message is generated that causes an erro...

Page 1614: ...ce the test passes if it is OOS out of service the test fails NOTE Failure of this test will put the SIG GRP in the OOS state Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive CLAN Ethernet Status test 1386 X X ND MedPro Status test 1392 X X ND H 323 Signaling Group Ping test 1387 X X ND Table 8 341 Test 1386 CLAN Ethernet Status Test Error Code ...

Page 1615: ...f the other ports on the board are idle amber LED is off Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS commands 2 If this result occurs again replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT The necessary system resources to execute the test could not be allocated 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Ret...

Page 1616: ...scription Recommendation 1 2 ABORT Internal Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 7 ABORT Destination unreachable 1 Verify that the C LAN has been administered with an IP Route that enables the C LAN to reach the far end IP address 2 Once verified execute test sig group grp command to verify that the H 323 Signaling Group Ping test 1387 passes 1005 ABORT Configuration for t...

Page 1617: ... at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3times 2800 ABORT No C LAN in the same region 1 Verify translations and retest 2801 ABORT No IP address defined 1 Verify translations and retest 2802 ABORT Different IP address pinged than software had allocated for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 7...

Page 1618: ... Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT The necessary system resources to execute the test could not be allocated 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times FAIL No MEDPRO ports in this region are in service Every session is down 1 Execute test sig group grp and verify t...

Page 1619: ...is not driven by board insertion rather it is driven by successful registration of the endpoint It is maintained via a set of explicit TCP IP ping requests and errors reported by the switch software which terminates the H 323 signaling portion of each endpoint The MO follows standard maintenance methodology and supports test busyout release and status commands Error Log Entries and Test to Clear V...

Page 1620: ...es out the test fails c Error Type 513 This error tracks failures with the media path PING test The test attempts to send a PING packet to the endpoint IP address as reported during registration The PING packet originates with a Media Processor board Any Media Processor board may be used as long as it is administered to be in the same network region as the C LAN board through which the endpoint is...

Page 1621: ...f a C LAN ethernet port A registered extension has a port type SNNNNN where N is a digit from 0 9 A non registered extension has an X port Table 8 345 Test 1372 Registration Status Inquiry Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 2 3 FAIL The endpoint is not successfully registered 1 Verify that the user is entering the correct extension and security code C LAN IP address 2 Verify that ...

Page 1622: ...ved in the data path of a peer to peer IP layer connection This nondestructive test runs due to in line errors during periodic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 8 346 Test 1373 Signaling Path PING Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Esc...

Page 1623: ...nk is up 3 If PING to every destination fails test the C LAN port test port UUCSSpp short and follow repair procedures for Session Status test 1286 failures 4 If only this station cannot be pinged Make sure the PC is up Make sure the PC has a network connection ethernet or dialup Check the ethernet cabling PASS The system can successfully send IP packets to the registered endpoint from the C LAN T...

Page 1624: ...dic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 8 347 Test 1374 Media Path PING Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Escala...

Page 1625: ...page 8 904 for related line information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO HYB BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Hybrid Line circuit pack HYB BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh Hybrid Li...

Page 1626: ...vice in service or disconnect The latter is equivalent to the ready for service state MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO HYB LINE MINOR test ...

Page 1627: ...o Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40987 None WARNING OFF 15 j Any Hybrid Line Audits test 161 18 b 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WARNING OFF release port UUCSSpp 130 c None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp sh 257 d 409...

Page 1628: ...pes 769 and 1281 by themselves create Warning alarms only but if both are present a Minor alarm will be logged g The port has reported a problem with the data link to the voice terminal Ignore this error if there are no complaints about the voice terminal Otherwise make sure the voice terminal is connected check for defective wiring check for a defective voice terminal and decrease the length of t...

Page 1629: ...rs generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 349 System Technician Demanded Tests DS1 BD Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Hybrid Electronic Power Feed test 56 X ND Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit test 57 X ND Local Digital Looparound test 58 X ND Remote Digital Looparound test 59 X...

Page 1630: ...mand at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test This could be a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If t...

Page 1631: ...te the necessary system resources to run this test This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL This test can fail due to on board or off board problems Off board problems of concern include EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated with the tone detectors tone generators Clear every off board problem before...

Page 1632: ...rnal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board co...

Page 1633: ...e to assume that the test sensed no problems with the power to the station To verify that the station is powered up correctly run a self test on the station if available and check that every feature button is operating 3 If Error Type 257 appears in the Error Log this indicates some problem with the power to the station Check for a short in the wiring a damaged jack a defective voice terminal or a...

Page 1634: ...esources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 ...

Page 1635: ...als up to 5 times 2100 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone generator for the test 1 Resolve any TONE PT errors 2 If no TONE PT errors appear in the Error Log retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2103 ABORT The system could not make the conference connection for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 7 FAIL Conference test failed User may be able to us...

Page 1636: ... but not both types of power units To investigate problems with a power unit see CARR POW Carrier Power Supply PASS Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit test passed The hybrid circuitry is transmitting properly 1 If complaints still exist investigate by using other port tests and by examining the station wiring and connections 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no bo...

Page 1637: ...d at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to...

Page 1638: ...d or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage betwe...

Page 1639: ...urce was correctly allocated 1 Look in the error log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port If this Error Type is present release the port via the release port UUCSSpp command or the release station extension command and then run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run thi...

Page 1640: ...d The hybrid circuit pack is sending and receiving proper messages to and from the voice terminal 1 If problems still exist investigate using other circuit pack tests and by examining the station wiring and connections 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insan...

Page 1641: ...s may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set 1 Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is correct 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension number of the port Use the status station c...

Page 1642: ...oard is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ...

Page 1643: ...test was aborted due to an internal system error during the switchhook audit 2 ABORT Internal system error occurred during bad scan inquiry audit 1 Make sure that the station is not in an out of service state 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT This port may have been busied out by system technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port...

Page 1644: ...SS Hybrid Line Audits test passed 1 Although this test never actually returns a FAIL result except for the previous Internal system error it can enter Error Types 257 and 513 into the Error Log To check for problems that don t show up in the test result look for these error types in the Error Log 2 If these errors appear in the Error Log or if user complaints still exist investigate by using other...

Page 1645: ...e station extension number of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until it is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1392 ABORT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the displ...

Page 1646: ...nfig command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If this is not the case dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid ...

Page 1647: ...ll Although the INADS Link MO never alarms its errors are logged and these errors are only logged by issuing the test inads link command Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values The Hardware Error Log entries are described as part of the following INADS Link test description System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes The test inads link command is different from other test com...

Page 1648: ...ttempting to report active alarms to the alarm receiver As any error conditions are encountered during the test they are logged against the INADS Link MO If the initial test result was Command successfully completed any logged error codes would range from 1 9 If the initial test result was Command failed any logged error codes would be 10 or 11 An error is logged at the alarm receiver even if the ...

Page 1649: ...ated System Parameters form 3 Enable alarm origination via the Maintenance Related System Parameters form Test the SYSAM System Access Maintenance by issuing the test maintenance a b command 4 Retry the command 5 0 The alarm receiver s phone number is not assigned 1 Assign the alarm receiver s phone number via the Maintenance Related System Parameters form 2 Retry the command 6 0 The alarm receive...

Page 1650: ...nd is already in progress 1 Wait 10 minutes for the current command to finish 2 Review the current command s results by viewing the Error Log and selecting the category inads link 11 0 The switch is trying to report alarms to the alarm receiver The test cannot be run at this time 1 Wait 10 minutes and retry the command Table 8 358 INADS Link Test Error Log Entries Continued Error Code Test Result ...

Page 1651: ...rovide voice over IP connectivity The TN2302 to acts as a service circuit to terminate generic RTP streams used to carry packetized audio over an IP network As part of the overall H 323 implementation the TN2302 circuit pack handles the audio streams while the TN799DP C LAN handles the TCP IP signaling channels This MO applies only to a TN2302 MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command...

Page 1652: ...ered but not inserted WARNING OFF add ds1 UUCSS 125 d none Wrong board MINOR ON 257 e 65535 Control Channel Loop test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 513 f 4352 4353 4355 4356 4358 TN2302 On board hardware errors MINOR ON 769 g 2 Way Transmission tests 1505 1506 MINOR OFF 1025 h Any FPGA Query test 1406 MINOR 1281 i Any TSI Health Query test 1406 1538 j Any Circuit pack is hyperactive MINOR ON...

Page 1653: ... is inserted in the correct slot Completely remove the IPMEDPRO from the system using the following steps a Remove the administered IP Interface associated with the circuit pack b Physically remove the circuit pack from the slot c Execute the remove medpro UUCSS and change circuit pack UUCSS commands b Error Type 18 The IPMEDPRO interface circuit pack has been busied out by a busyout board UUCSS c...

Page 1654: ...int as to the problem with the FPGA The diagnostic strategy for this inline error is to take the switch resources associated with all of the DSPs out of service and then to reset the FPGA The reset of the FPGA will cause an uplink response as to whether the reset passed or not There are several error conditions that can be sent up in the error message for the FPGA they will all be treated as the s...

Page 1655: ...t can be sent up in the error message for this problem they will all be treated as the same failure by switch software For the repair procedure see associated Test 1406 o Error Type 3073 Associated with a circuit board reset The diagnostic strategy for these inline errors is to take the switch resources associated with all of the DSPs out of service and then reset the board as the failure of the S...

Page 1656: ...so clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 360 System Technician Demanded Tests Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Control Channel Loop test 52 X X ND SAKI Sanity test 53 X X D IP Address query 1371 X X D NIC Query test 1383 X X ND Local Ping test 1379 X X ND MP Diagnostic test 14...

Page 1657: ...e circuit pack failed to return the circuit pack code or vintage 1 Retry the command up to 5 times 2 If the problem continues replace the circuit pack 3 Retry the command up to 5 times PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board i...

Page 1658: ...edia processor IP interface 2 Execute the command again 1 FAIL The circuit pack failed to reset 1 Execute command again 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2 2000 FAIL The circuit pack failed to restart 1 Execute command again 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly Run the short test sequence Any NO BOARD This is normal if the ...

Page 1659: ... test fails it is an indication that an illegal change was made and the customer should be notified Table 8 363 Test 1371 IP Address Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Insufficient system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2801 ABO...

Page 1660: ... 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The Ethernet port is not connected and you cannot talk on the network PASS The Ethernet port is connected and you can talk on the network 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted...

Page 1661: ...reachable 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through this port is up 2 Repeat the test 3 If the test still aborts escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the Media processor circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If this result occurs repeatedly attempt to reset the circuit pack Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board UUCSS and ...

Page 1662: ...e FPGA If the reset passes or the original test passes the DSPs are placed into service 2805 FAIL The number of pings received did not match the number sent normally one ping sent This means that no ping responses were received from the gateway defined on the ip interfaces form for the Media processor 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2807 ABORT The board is administered but ...

Page 1663: ...rencing and gain adjustment This is done by setting up connections on TDM bus time slots There are three different inline errors that can be generated due to the Scotch devices on the board NPE SCOTCH 0 NPE SCOTCH 1 and NCE SCOTCH If any of these errors are reported from the board the DSPs are taken from service and a circuit pack reset is executed by running the SAKI test Table 8 366 Test 1406 MP...

Page 1664: ... board UUCSS long command If the board continues to fail replace the board 12288 12424 FAIL The TSI DSP test failed 1 Issue the busyout board UUCSS command 2 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 3 Issue the release board UUCSS command 4 Issue the test board UUCSS long command If the board continues to fail replace the board 16384 16900 FAIL A SCOTCH device failed 1 Issue the busyout board UUCSS com...

Page 1665: ...nsane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Administer the IPMEDPRO interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseating the board re initializes the board 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in st...

Page 1666: ...on IP Media processor board The destination media processor board is chosen by the system The destination media processor is chosen from a port network other than the port network containing the source media processor In addition the destination media processor board is chosen from the same IP network region as the source media processor board or is chosen from an IP network region that is adminis...

Page 1667: ...d Verify that at least one Tone Detector resides in this PN If not this test always aborts but does not harm the system 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received in the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2012 ABORT Generic system call fa...

Page 1668: ... to source direction failed The source to destination direction passed Resolve all other board alarms for the specified source IP Media processor Resolve all other board alarms for the IP Media processor boards in the destination PN Use the ping and traceroute commands to localize the problem to the customers LAN WAN IP network XX XX PN PASS The board is functioning properly The test tone was tran...

Page 1669: ... IP network region of the source IP Media processor The test passes if the source IP Media processor A has 2 way voice connectivity to all other IP Media processors The test fails and stops immediately when the source IP Media processor A cannot verify 2 way talk path to any destination IP Media processor The failure code indicates the port network that contains the destination media processor tha...

Page 1670: ...ne Tone Detector resides in this PN If not the test always aborts for this circuit pack but does not harm the system 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received in the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2012 ABORT Generic system call faile...

Page 1671: ...as not successfully sent in the reverse direction Destination to source direction failed Source to destination direction passed Resolve all other board alarms for the specified source IP Media processor Resolve all other board alarms for the IP Media processor boards in the destination PN Use the ping and traceroute commands to localize the problem to the customers LAN WAN IP network PASS The cust...

Page 1672: ...lowing elements in descending order of priority Tone Clock PKT INT Archangel The active media server s maintenance software is responsible for maintaining the SOH of both IPSIs active and standby in each PN If an active IPSI s SOH is lower than the standby s IPSI interchange is initiated The following list contains failures actions that would result in the interchange Active IPSI has a faulty Tone...

Page 1673: ...ve faulty Tone Clock then the PN is out of service If both of an PN s IPSIs have faulty components but at least one has a good Tone Clock circuit then the PN falls back to EI EAL mode of operation where The PN s EI provides Archangel functionality Another PN s IPSI provides PKT INT functionality For details see EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 762 The following tables show the o...

Page 1674: ...0 on page 8 954 shows a critical reliability system with duplicated IPSIs and CSS connected PNCs Table 8 371 IPSI B is Active Function IPSI A IPSI B EI IPSI in Another PN Tone Clock X PKT INT X Archangel X Table 8 372 IPSI A Provides Tone Clock Fall Back to EI EAL Function IPSI A IPSI B EI IPSI in another PN Tone Clock X PKT INT X Archangel X Table 8 373 IPSI B Provides Tone Clock Fall Back to EI ...

Page 1675: ...ay 2002 8 953 555 233 143 Figure 8 49 Duplicated IPSI Duplicated Direct Connect PNC Connectivity PKT INT AA T C IPSI A EPN 1 EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI MAINT Test PORT CARRIER PORT CARRIER EPN 2 EPN 3 T C AA PKT INT IPSI B LAN TDM TDM LAN ...

Page 1676: ...with Center Stage Switch Connectivity CSS A CSS B EPN IPSI A IPSI B Switch Node Switch Node Switch Node Switch Node T C AA PKT INT Maint Test TDM LAN EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I EPN 1 EPN n EPN n m EPN 64 5 5 T C AA PKT INT LAN TDM ...

Page 1677: ...hange is moving the Archangel s functionality from the IPSI to the EI or from the EI to the IPSI Error Codes for Software Requested Interchanges See Table 8 376 50000 Craft demand interchange of IPSI to A side 0 51000 Craft demand interchange of IPSI to B side 0 60000 Daily interchange of IPSI to standby failed 0 61000 Daily interchange of IPSI back to previous active failed 0 Table 8 375 Encoding...

Page 1678: ...rence switch 20 Interchange from A side to B side IPSI 30 Control archangel moves from A side IPSI to EI 40 Interchange from B side to A side IPSI move archangel to EI 50 Interchange from A side to B side IPSI move archangel to EI 60 No IPSI interchange control archangel moves to A side IPSI 70 No IPSI interchange control archangel moves to B side IPSI 80 Interchange from B side to A side IPSI mov...

Page 1679: ...ll vary depending on the fault being processed as well as the existing state of health SOH of the IPSIs in the PN An IPSI interchange if necessary will always happen before a control change moving of the archangel to from IPSI EI If both IPSIs are equally healthy software preferentially migrates to the A side IPSI However this preferential migration is not done if craft has set to a B side IPSI Cr...

Page 1680: ...dy active If set to a B side IPSI it will be marked as craft set and will not preference switch back to the A side by software 2338 FAIL The SOH of the set to IPSI is bad Use list ipserver interface to display the current IPSI s SOH 2340 The archangel function is not on an IPSI 2341 An error occurred during the interchange 2342 The set to IPSI has been busied out Run release ipserver interface Uc ...

Page 1681: ...quivalent to TN2182B Tone Clock circuit pack Ethernet interface for connectivity to the media servers Ethernet interface for connectivity to Services laptop PCs Maintenance board interface for communication with the PN s TN775 Maintenance board For S8700 systems the processors and the PKTINTs are located in different cabinets connected to each other via the control networks All communication betwe...

Page 1682: ...uit Pack Alarm LED Red In Use LED Amber Test In Progress LED Green A 0 1 Switch ID One character Cabinet Number Two digits Ethernet Link Status Services Interface RJ45 Control Network Interface RJ45 IP Server Intfc Top bar for Services Interface LANIS NCEs DSP MPC8260 Ethernet Ethernet RS232 Control Network Interface RJ45 Maintenance Board Maintenance Board Interface Interface Clocks Bottom bar fo...

Page 1683: ...via the faceplate or the backplane The Avaya MultiVantage software talks to the Maintenance board via the IPSI s archangel through this interface for cabinet maintenance cabinet temperature voltage emergency transfer and etc This interface also allows the Maintenance board to reset the IPSI board when it detects insanity of the IPSI s archangel When the ribbon cables are connected between the IPSI...

Page 1684: ...the Spitfire2 device to generate clock pulses for the backplane IPSI Circuit Pack Faceplate The faceplate view of the IPSI is shown in Figure 8 51 on page 8 960 and described in the following sections IPSI LEDs There are four LEDs on an IPSI s faceplate The top three LEDs are the standard ones found on most TN circuit packs The fourth LED imitates the TN2182B Tone Clock s amber LED The following t...

Page 1685: ...k Angel logically or ed together Amber Off Archangel inactive Flashing 2 sec on 0 2 sec off Archangel active Clock status same as TN2182B Amber Flashing 2 7 sec on 0 3 sec off Active Master clock using offboard synchronization source Winking 0 3 sec on 2 7 sec off Active Master clock using its local reference source Steady on Active Board has been reset and is providing clocks but has not been tol...

Page 1686: ... adapter is not plugged onto the Amphenol connector located on the rear of the carrier PN s Maintenance Board Interface The PN s Maintenance board interface is a header on the IPSI circuit pack with a slit on the faceplate of the IPSI for the ribbon cable to connect to the PN s TN755D Maintenance board Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Notes Error Type 18 This error type is logged when th...

Page 1687: ...other TN464C Ds or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit packs The TN722 cannot be used for this application The B channels are connected to the TDM Bus Two types of DS1 interfaces exist 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps link 31 DS0 channels 1 framing channel on a 2 048 Mbps link On 24 channel interfaces the B channels may use any of the first 23 ports The signaling link is assigned to the 24th port On 32 cha...

Page 1688: ...s can be made over this D channel b This Error Type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 8 380 ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes...

Page 1689: ...acket bus transmit buffers overflow This condition probably indicates a hardware problem The actual alarming level will depend on the options chosen via the set options command on the G3 MT terminal ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port alarms are treated as Station alarms and their default alarming option is to downgrade every alarm to Warning The value shown in the preceding table indicates the normal un...

Page 1690: ...ink Board Check Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort The PRI terminal adapter associated with this D channel port is detached from the circuit pack This is normal when the rollabout video feature is enabled To complete a test on this port 1 Re attach the disconnected PR...

Page 1691: ...ling group until the port is released 1139 ABORT This port network s packet bus is out of service 1 Follow repair procedures for the packet bus 2 Enter test port UUCSSpp long command and check results of this test 939 1141 ABORT The Packet Interface circuit pack is out of service 1 Follow repair procedures for PKT INT 2 Enter test port UUCSSpp long command and check results of this test 939 2012 A...

Page 1692: ...67 DS1 Interface circuit packs The TN722 cannot be used for this application The B channels are connected to the TDM Bus Two types of DS1 interfaces exist 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps link 31 DS0 channels 1 framing channel on a 2 048 Mbps link The 32 channel mode is supported only on TN464 series circuit packs and on G3r V2 systems On 24 channel interfaces the B channels may use any of the firs...

Page 1693: ... calls can be made over this D channel b This Error Type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 8 383 ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test p...

Page 1694: ...ket bus transmit buffers overflow This condition probably indicates a hardware problem The actual alarming level will depend on the options chosen via the set options command on the G3 MT terminal ISDN PRI Signaling Link port alarms are treated as Station alarms and their default alarming option is to downgrade every alarm to Warning The value shown in the preceding table indicates the normal unfi...

Page 1695: ...stem error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort The PRI terminal adapter associated with this D channel port is detached from the circuit pack This is normal when the rollabout video feature is enabled To complete a test on this port do one of the following 1 Re attach the disconnected PRI ter...

Page 1696: ...fies the connectivity of an ISDN PRI signaling port D channel across the packet bus also known as the LAN bus It will execute only if the port is out of service Failure of this test indicates a fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack Figure 8 52 Signaling Port LAN Packet Bus Loop back Packet Bus Packet Interface TN1655 UDS1 TN464 ...

Page 1697: ... of this test 939 1141 ABORT The IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is out of service 1 Follow repair procedures for PKT INT 2 Enter test port UUCSSpp long command and check results of this test 939 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues ...

Page 1698: ...channels 1 framing channel on a 2 048 Mbps link The following discussion describes 24 channel interface signaling groups The 32 channel interface works the same way except that only port number 16 is used for signaling instead of port number 24 Ports 1 through 15 and 17 through 31 are used for B channels The 32nd channel port 0 is always used for framing ISDN PRI D channel signaling can be combine...

Page 1699: ...gnaling group The operation of the entire ISDN PRI signaling group depends on several other entities the ISDN PRI signaling channel ports the TN464C D UDS1 Interface circuit pack on which the D channels reside and the system link that is carried over the packet bus to the processor When there are problems with the ISDN PRI signaling group also investigate ISDN LNK ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port UDS1...

Page 1700: ...ling channel does not exist or is not in service the associated B channels will be placed in the ISDN Maintenance Far End state The B channels will not be usable for outgoing calls although incoming calls will still be accepted The switch will automatically attempt to recover the signaling link Pay particular attention to the results of Test 636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check in the test se...

Page 1701: ...t 637 fails twice in a row the B channels will be alarmed and made unavailable for outgoing calls although incoming calls will still be accepted When Test 637 succeeds and the far end switch starts responding properly the DS1 ISDN Trunk B channels will be placed back into normal operation and their alarms will be retired g A SERV or SERV ACK ISDN D channel message has been received by a non US typ...

Page 1702: ...mple the local switch has requested use of a B channel that the far end switch had just reserved for use on another call 1 From the circuit pack and port number in the Aux Data field determine the trunk group against which the error was reported 2 Issue the status trunk command for the indicated trunk 3 Refer to the DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States and ISDN PRI Trunk Service States sections of ISDN T...

Page 1703: ...oup 3892 Protocol detail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints and no other cause can be found escalate the problem and provide the next tier with this Error Log information 3894 Protocol detail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls d...

Page 1704: ... is not implemented Follow the previous recommendation for Error Type 3890 3910 Only restricted digital BC available 3919 Service or option not implemented unspecified Used when no other cause in this class applies 3928 A call was denied because of a basic incompatibility between the type of call and either the facilities selected by the routing pattern or the called user itself This error might b...

Page 1705: ...36 X X ND Secondary Signaling Link Hardware check 639 X X ND Layer 2 Status test 647 X X ND Remote Layer 3 Query test 637 X X ND Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1700 ABORT Rollabout video abort The PRI terminal adapter associated with the primary D channel port is detached from the circuit pack Th...

Page 1706: ...RI Signaling Group errors of type 2305 for evidence of a Remote Layer 3 Query failure Tests 639 and 636 check the health of the D channels and DS1 UDS1 Interface circuit packs As shown in Figure 8 53 this test goes one step further by checking the communication path from the processor from the processor through the TDM packet bus and DS1 UDS1 Interface circuit pack and on to the far end switch or ...

Page 1707: ...at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 or none ABORT Internal system error or administration problem 1 Determine whether any B channels are administered If not then this is a normal ABORT since this test cannot run unless at least one B channel is administered If at least one B channel is administered there is an internal system error Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL In...

Page 1708: ...uery test 637 will detect most problems caused by hardware failures or incorrect administration However this layer 3 test cannot detect end to end transmission problems with the standby D channel since layer 3 messages are not sent on the standby channel Table 8 389 Test 639 Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retr...

Page 1709: ...ssible since an administered DS1 circuit pack must be specified when a Signaling Group is administered 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 FAIL Layer 2 of the primary signaling channel is down 1 Examine the results of the Primary Signaling test 636 and follow recommendations provided ther...

Page 1710: ...el at the far end has not been administered correctly or if the Signaling Channel has been busied out Verify that the Primary and Secondary Signaling Channel D channel at the far end has been administered correctly Verify that the DS1 port used for the Primary and Secondary D channels has not been busied out at the far end PASS The Primary Signaling Channel is up and if administered the Secondary ...

Page 1711: ...in which signaling is carried in the same channel as the voice or data traffic One D channel or ISDN signaling link ISDN LNK carries signaling messages for several B channels forming an ISDN signaling group ISDN SGR A B channel may be a port on either a TN464 series UDS1 circuit pack or a TN767 series DS1 Interface circuit pack Two types of DS1 interfaces exist 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps link...

Page 1712: ...ing US the signaling protocol used for the maintenance of the B channel is defined by the Avaya ISDN PRI specification For interfaces using country protocols other than 1 the signaling protocol used for the maintenance of the B channel is defined by the CCITT ISDN PRI Specification There are five possible service states for a B channel The service state is negotiated with the far end switch change...

Page 1713: ...he health of these other MOs In turn the ISDN D channel depends on the packet bus PKT BUS for transmission through the system Keep this hierarchy of dependencies in mind when diagnosing problems DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States The status trunk command displays the following possible service states for ISDN trunks Table 8 391 on page 8 993 gives recommended procedures for each state In Service INS Th...

Page 1714: ...ISDN PRI test call This test will change the state of the trunk member to MTC NE for the duration of the test unless a call request comes in from the far end In that case the test would abort Note that transitions into MTC NE do not drop stable calls In this state the B channel is not usable for new incoming or outgoing calls Pending States In addition to one of the previous components the service...

Page 1715: ...ce message was sent and the switch is waiting up to 2 min for a reply from the far end Wait 2 minutes and check service state after the pending state has cleared maint NE None ISDN test call in progress test trunk long and test isdn testcall commands Wait several minutes for test to finish and check status again None System link has been busied out by command Check link status Release link with re...

Page 1716: ... long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp 1 a Any None test port UUCSSpp 15 b Any Audit and Update test 36 18 0 busyout trunk grp mbr release trunk grp mbr 19 c 0 None 129 d None WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp 130 e None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp 257 f Any None test port UUCSSpp 513 g Any None WARNING OF...

Page 1717: ...7 series DS1 Interface circuit pack Two types of DS1 interfaces exist 1 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps link or 2 31 DS0 channels 1 framing channel on a 2 048 Mbps link For additional maintenance information see also DS1 BD DS1 Interface Circuit Pack for TN767 ports and UDS1 BD UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack for TN464C D ports d The far end switch changed its ISDN service state to either out of servi...

Page 1718: ... user The following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the trunk s ISDN call state at the time the unexpected request to restart the channel was received from the remote switch This information can be useful if dropped calls cutoffs are reported by users of the ISDN PRI trunks The meanings of Aux Data values are shown below ignore any others Aux Data Cause 0 A idle trunk received a rest...

Page 1719: ... uses this trunk is answered by the called endpoint If problems persist then busyout the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt group System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system For example by clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk test 6 you may also clear error...

Page 1720: ...ds to determine when the port is available for testing 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service ...

Page 1721: ... 1 Wait 2 minutes and then try again 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose ...

Page 1722: ... trunk 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error 2000 ABORT Response to the test re...

Page 1723: ...ription Recommendation 1018 ABORT Maintenance is disabled on this trunk 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form ABORT Internal system error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test FAIL Test failed due to i...

Page 1724: ...T 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1018 ABORT Maintenance is disable on this trunk 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 4 FAIL There is a problem with the signaling channel 1 Consult the procedures for the ISDN PRI Signaling Group ISDN SGRP Further i...

Page 1725: ...otocol 1 the Service State Audit executes only if the trunk is in the out of service far end state A message is sent to the far end switch to attempt to bring the trunk back into the in service state A PASS for this test simply means that the message has been successfully sent Two minutes are allowed for a reply If no reply is received within that 2 minute window the message is sent out again If a...

Page 1726: ...nd ISDN LNK ISDN Signaling Link Port FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Wait 4 minutes and then check the Error Log for any new errors of type 3073 If there are none then both sides of the ISDN connection agree on the service state the negotiation succeeded If there is a new 3073 error then the negotiation failed the far end switch twice failed ...

Page 1727: ...unk 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1019 ABORT An audit is already in progress 1 Wait 2 minutes and try again 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk 1 Check the results of Test 255 Signaling Link State Check 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional s...

Page 1728: ...a test pattern bit stream that is sent to the far end switch and echoed back The received pattern is then compared to the sent pattern and checked for errors that indicate a loss of integrity on the communications path If a test call is running when scheduled maintenance starts the green LED is turned off To determine whether a test call is still running Issue the list isdn testcall and status isd...

Page 1729: ...by reporting bit and block error rates of the tested B channel clear isdn testcall group member This command terminates an outgoing test call already in progress Measurements already collected are not cleared until the next test call begins A PASS of the asynchronous test indicates only that the test call was successfully established Use the status and list commands to get the results of the test ...

Page 1730: ...nd to find out the duration and start time of the test call 3 Issue the clear isdn testcall command to stop the test call from running 4 If time and duration indicate that the test call should have stopped and the clear isdn testcall command does not work see M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port for recommended maintenance strategy 1020 ABORT There is a problem with the DS1 Interface circuit pack...

Page 1731: ...p trunk member command to busyout the DS1 ISDN Trunk When the trunk is idle retry the test 1120 ABORT The DS1 ISDN Trunk is in the ISDN out of service far end state 1 Try to change the service state via Test 256 Service State Audit Test and then try this test again Keep in mind that the trunk may be in the out of service far end state due to problems at the far end switch If that is the case no re...

Page 1732: ... T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port 2075 ABORT Internal system error Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2012 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2104 ABORT Call dropped or could not be originated 1 Make sure service is provisioned by the network 2 Check the administration of the far end test line ...

Page 1733: ... test Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2100 2042 FAIL Comparison of data sent to data received indicates a loss of integrity on the communications path 1 Take the trunk out of service and check the quality of the DS1 connection including the transmission facility and any external equipment such as DACs CSUs etc Use test isdn testcall and status isdn testcall commands to get the bit and block ...

Page 1734: ...PRNT Journal Printer Link and PMS PRNT PMS Printer Link are the same Refer to the PMS PRNT JNL PRNT PMS Printer Link section of this chapter MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run Full Name of MO JNL PRNT MINOR test journal wakeup log Journal Printer Link JNL PRNT WARNING test journal wakeup log Journal Printer Link ...

Page 1735: ...LGATE AJ Issue 1 May 2002 8 1013 555 233 143 LGATE AJ See BRI SET LGATE BD See BRI BD LGATE PT See BRI PT ...

Page 1736: ...lization a query is made to a software module called the License Server This module Reads the serial number in a License file Compares this file s serial number to a serial number in hardware Compares the file s serial number with a running software version and if a match occurs delivers permission to run to the MultiVantage software along with a new feature mask The feature mask controls revenue ...

Page 1737: ...g calls to emergency numbers and incoming calls to an Administration number only See NO LIC No License Error Type 513 c Error Type 769 This error indicates that feature usage has exceeded limits if the license has expired the 6 day timer begins When the 6 day timer has expired Avaya MultiVantage software will be restricted to outgoing calls to emergency numbers and incoming calls to an Administrat...

Page 1738: ... The License file includes a license serial identification number that is matched against the hardware in the system as well as information about the software version Avaya MultiVantage and Call Center features Offer Category and capacities Once installed or initialized every hour the system compares these parameters which determine the system status If everything matches the switch runs the desig...

Page 1739: ...ed on the Feature Related System Parameters form change system parameters features Active stable calls are not affected when the switch enters No License mode System resets do not reset the 6 day timer If a system in License Error mode is reset and the license error remains the timer picks up the countdown where it left off To clear LIC ERR alarms the License file must match the switch hardware an...

Page 1740: ...epending on the conditions When License Error Golden IPSI Not Responding or some other description appears the system is telling you that The switch is in License Error mode The system detected a serial number mismatch between the License file and the actual hardware in the switch When Call Processing Will Be Blocked in Approximately xxx hours appears the system is telling you that The switch is i...

Page 1741: ...t Reference IPSI not responding The License file has expired Feature usage does not match the License file Clear the License Error mode by Correcting the error or mismatch that caused going into this mode Installing a valid License file that is consistent with the switch No License Outgoing and incoming calls only to administered emergency numbers If you initially login to the SAT and get a messag...

Page 1742: ...D license serial identification number release number and capacities Type III features cannot be changed by any login under any circumstances IP Telephones IP Softphones IP Agents and R300 Remote Office phones Table 8 403 Error messages indicating a change of mode If the system goes into this mode And reports this error message It means that No License License File is Missing or Corrupted License ...

Page 1743: ... TYPE III features is causing the error compare the Used field with the value of the field itself the License file value NOTE Before usage is checked if the value of the field is not between the upper and lower values in the License file the value of the field is changed in translation to the lower value in the License file License Error Software Upgrade Requires New License The system reports thi...

Page 1744: ...ble on a per login ID basis Refer to the DEFINITY ECS Administrator s Guide for information about administration required for the Security Violation Notification feature and the option to disable a login ID following detection of a security violation involving the affected login ID MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 Where login ID is the Avaya services login ID for wh...

Page 1745: ...g that login ID is administrable on a login ID basis e The enable login command is used to both enable a login that has been disabled and to retire any login security violation alarms associated with the login ID f Use of the enable login command to enable a login and or retire alarms must be executed using a login ID with greater service level hierarchy permissions g Access to the enable login co...

Page 1746: ...uous as the failure of Avaya services automatic login software to something as insidious as a hacker attempting to gain access to the switch system management interface Prior to retiring an SVN alarm and enabling the associated login ID the monitor security violations login command can be used to access information about the invalid login attempts that caused the security violation This informatio...

Page 1747: ... pack from running The PN s Maintenance circuit pack has alarm LEDs which indicate the presence of Major Minor and Warning alarms A flashing LED indicates the presence of an alarm within the cabinet A continuously lit LED indicates the presence of an alarm elsewhere in the system A management terminal G3 MT can be directly connected to the PN s TN775D Maintenance circuit pack This link operates at...

Page 1748: ...nance circuit pack There are three serial interfaces one for each possible Expansion Interface circuit pack and one for the terminal Since the PN s Maintenance circuit pack supports environmental maintenance in the PN trouble with the PN s Maintenance circuit pack can cause environmental maintenance to falsely detect problems In a multicarrier cabinet PN these environmental MOs include POWER Batte...

Page 1749: ...ies Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test maintenance sh r 1 1 a 0 1 PN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset test 306 MINOR ON test maintenance l 513 a 0 1 MGR I Channel Loop...

Page 1750: ...fective System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system For example by clearing error codes associated with the Sanity Handshake test 106 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1...

Page 1751: ...dation ABORT Internal system error 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 2000 ABORT Response to cabinet query was not received in the allowable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2046 ABORT The PN s Maintenance circuit pack reported an invalid cabinet type Not knowing the cabinet type of the PN will pr...

Page 1752: ...s this test should also PASS Use the following steps to determine whether the PN s Maintenance circuit pack or its serial link is defective Duplicated Port Network Connectivity PNC 1 Switch PNC by entering reset pnc interchange 2 Run the short test sequence against the PN s Maintenance circuit pack If Test 106 still fails replace the Maintenance circuit pack and retest Otherwise follow the error r...

Page 1753: ... and retry the test up to 5 times 22801 ABORT Test disabled via software patch FAIL Test failed which means the PN terminal is not usable 1 Run the test three more times 2 If the test continues to fail replace the PN s Maintenance circuit pack PASS The serial interface circuitry on the PN s Maintenance circuit pack which controls the PN connected terminal is functioning properly If there are still...

Page 1754: ... pack has 3 separate serial interfaces one to each of the following Management terminal which is tested by Test 228 Active EI circuit pack which is tested by Test 229 Standby EI circuit pack which is tested by Test 229 Table 8 408 Test 229 Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available ...

Page 1755: ...ong as you do not interchange the PNCs Otherwise the connection to the PN s Maintenance circuit pack will be lost Losing this connection would mean losing connectivity to the terminal and PN Environment maintenance The PN s Maintenance circuit pack must be replaced to correct this problem PASS The on board circuitry associated with both Expansion Interface circuit pack serial links is good If ther...

Page 1756: ...The Sanity Maze test passes if Part 1 is successful and Part 2 fails Table 8 409 Test 303 PN s Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 2033 ABORT 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to ...

Page 1757: ...5 times 1018 ABORT Test disabled via software patch 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1204 FAIL 1205 EI circuit pack could not reset the PN s Maintenance circuit pack For duplicated Port Network Connectivity 1 The standby EI circuit pack may be defective a...

Page 1758: ...ee more times If it continues to fail the Maintenance circuit pack the active EI circuit pack or the serial link is defective To determine which is defective follow the appropriate procedures that follow Duplicated Port Network Connectivity 1 Interchange PNCs by entering reset pnc interchange 2 Run the short test sequence against the PN s Maintenance circuit pack If Test 306 still fails replace th...

Page 1759: ...0 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The hardware vintage of the PN s Maintenance circuit pack does not support battery holdover for all carriers NOTE This failure indicates t...

Page 1760: ...try the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The serial link between the currently standby EI circuit pack and the PN s Maintenance circuit pack is defective If the standby EXP INTF is on the A carrier then error type 3329 is logged If the standby EXP INTF is on the B carrier then error type 3585 is logged 1 If error type 3585 was logged check to see if the ICCA ICCB cables between car...

Page 1761: ...D PC CPU but busyout board only busies out every emulated port on the board Switch resets that take the switch out of service for more than 20 seconds also cause the MAPD s PC to reboot which takes several minutes to complete Switch Demanded Tests Switch demanded diagnostic tests on the TN802 do not run unless the Internet trunking application is running on Windows NTTM located on the circuit pack...

Page 1762: ...trings with embedded pauses Compression limitations Every IP trunk call goes through A D conversion which uses compression to reduce bandwidth Each compression degrades the voice signal and creates call processing delay No more than 3 compression decompression cycles for any call NOTE The compression decompression that most voice mail systems use must be counted as 1 cycle Call Classifier IP trunk...

Page 1763: ...ect involving local parties and only 1 party on the other side of an IP trunk DCS Know limitations Auto Callback Coordinate specific administration and between the IP trunk and S8700 Multi Connect for any DCS functionality Some limitations on routing flexibility may apply ISDN IP trunking has no signalling capability ISDN not supported This includes 10 digit number display QSIG Path replacement Vo...

Page 1764: ...software Table 8 414 Backing up TN802 administration data Step Description Comments 1 Busyout circuit pack At the S8700 Multi Connect terminal type busyout board UUCSS the address of the TN802 circuit pack and press Enter 2 Backup administration TN802 to disk At the Windows NT desktop double click on the IP Trunk Backup Restore icon The IP Trunk Backup Restore Utility screen appears 3 Select utili...

Page 1765: ... a poor response time to the ping S8700 Multi Connect s ARS or AAR network routing patterns bypass those ports and direct the call to another port typically on a PSTN trunk When the remote destinations show acceptable response times to subsequent pings the corresponding ports are returned to idle where they are available for service Table 8 415 Restore TN802 administration data Step Description Co...

Page 1766: ...circuit pack UPS Protection An uninterruptible power supply UPS protection is strongly recommended for an PN containing a TN802 circuit pack Faceplate Figure 8 55 shows the TN802 faceplate Figure 8 55 TN802 faceplate Figure Notes 1 LCD display see Table 8 416 on page 8 1045 2 Reset button recessed 3 Red board status LED 4 PCMCIA card slot 5 Amber PCMCIA disk in use LED 1 2 3 4 5 fpdfmapd KLC 03089...

Page 1767: ...serial port of your laptop 2 Launch the pcANYWHERE application 3 Click on Add Remote Control Item 4 In the Properties window choose the communication port to which you connected the cable in Step 1 5 Click on Details and configure the settings Table 8 417 Table 8 416 TN802 LCD messages for IP trunks Display Explanation PC BOOT The TN802 MAPD PC is booting up IP TRK IP Trunk application is running ...

Page 1768: ...xternal cable assembly Table 8 417 Remote connection settings Field Value Speed 38 400 Parity None default Flow Control RTS CTS Started by Carrier detect DCD Ended by Carrier detect DCD Continued on next page Figure Notes 1 To TN802 cabinet backplane 2 VGA monitor 3 USB Universal Serial Bus 4 Keyboard 5 Mouse 6 Ethernet 7 25 pin modem connection 8 25 pin COM2 connection cbdfocto AWF 122398 2 1 3 4...

Page 1769: ...ssembly 5 Insert the circuit pack to cause it to boot Troubleshooting LAN Connections This section contains information for troubleshooting External Connections to the LAN Internal Connections to the LAN External Connections to the LAN Test the external connections to the LAN by pinging the local host the external IP trunk server and another device connected to the network 1 Click Start in Windows...

Page 1770: ... and 6 in Figure 8 58 on page 8 1051 d Try pinging another device in the same subnet e Try pinging the gateway to the rest of the network from the subnet f Try pinging a device outside the local subnet but inside the network or another subnet 5 When finished type exit at the command prompt and press Enter Internal Connections to the LAN Test the internal connections to the LAN by pinging the local...

Page 1771: ...loose b Otherwise replace the circuit pack 4 At the command prompt type ping 10 32 64 96 the IP address of the internal Motorola MPC860 processor and press Enter If configured correctly the system displays Reply from nnn nn nn nn bytes 32 time ms TTL If there is no reply a Check that the internal cables on the TN802 circuit pack Notes 4 and 6 in Figure 8 58 have not worked loose b Otherwise replac...

Page 1772: ...rcuit pack with the two additional boards connected through the side plane Figure 8 57 TN802 board assembly Figure Notes 1 Main TN802 board 2 Texas Microsystems Inc TMI board 3 Analogic board 4 Side plane 5 SCSA Signal Computing System Architecture ribbon cable 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 indfmap2 KLC 031699 1 3 4 5 2 ...

Page 1773: ...the thee boards and interconnecting cables that make up the TN802 Figure 8 58 TN802 board assembly and cables side view Figure Notes 1 Main TN802 board 2 Side plane 3 Analogic board 4 SCSA Signal Computing System Architecture ribbon cable 5 Hard drive 6 Processor I O ribbon cable cddfmap2 KLC 040699 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 1774: ...y and cables end view Figure Notes 1 Analogic board 2 TMI Texas Microsystems Inc board 3 SIMMs memory 1 4 SCSA Signal Computing System Architecture ribbon cable 1 If the board is seated and you hear fast beeping it means that one of the small boards containing the memory chips is dislodged Secure the memory board firmly in the receptacle and reseat the circuit pack ckdfmap3 KLC 040699 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 1775: ...e circuit pack and remove it from the carrier 3 Remove the hard drive Remove the 2 screws and lift the hard drive out of its mounting bracket 4 Replace the hard drive Position the new hard drive in the mounting bracket and replace the 2 screws Step 3 5 Replace the circuit pack Slide the circuit pack into the slot and lock the latching lever 6 Wait for initialization Wait for the circuit pack to re...

Page 1776: ...RN3 ON 769 i 46085 MIN WRN3 ON 770 j 46096 MIN WRN3 ON 1025 d 4363 NPE Audit test 50 1281 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 MIN WRN3 OFF test board UUCSS 1537 k 46082 MIN WRN3 ON 1538 l Any MIN WRN3 ON 1793 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 MAJ MIN WRN 3 OFF test board UUCSS 2049 Any Red Alarm Inquiry test 140 MIN WRN 3 OFF test board UUCSS 2305 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 MIN WRN3 OFF...

Page 1777: ...test 145 MIN WRN3 OFF test board UUCSS r 6 3840 p Any None 3841 q 4358 3842 r 46097 3843 s 46081 3999 t Any None 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 2 If ports are assigned to the circuit pack then a minor alarm is raised If no ports are assigned to the circuit pack th...

Page 1778: ...stem attempts to reset the board If the reset fails the board is probably bad 1 Replace the circuit pack c Error Type 18 The circuit pack has been busied out 1 Release the board release board UUCSS d Error Type 23 and 1025 The MAPD BD circuit pack is not completely administered In addition to insertion the MAPD circuit pack must have all of the following administration Have an entry in the circuit...

Page 1779: ...nsmit FIFO Underflow threshold is 3 errors within 10 minutes the circuit pack cannot find the end of frame bit when transmitting a frame to the packet bus 1 Clear the alarm using the following command sequence a busyout board UUCSS b reset board UUCSS c test board UUCSS long clear d release board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 10 minutes replace the circuit pack See Shutting Down NT on the TN8...

Page 1780: ...ircuit pack l Error Type 1538 Hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms The common circuit pack tests for example Test 50 and or Test 52 abort with Error Code 2000 Port tests on this circuit pack return NO BOARD A busyout release of the circuit pack has no effect on test results A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and port...

Page 1781: ...channel message from the switch This error is not service affecting and requires no action The Aux Data describes the following error events q Error Type 3841 The circuit pack detected a transient hardware logic error for example program logic inconsistency This error resolves when no faults are detected for 100 minutes The value in Aux Data field 4358 indicates the type of hardware problem r Erro...

Page 1782: ... in the testing sequence Error Type 1538 hyperactivity also present Then the switch Y Takes the circuit pack out of service due to hyperactivity N Does not take the circuit pack out of service but the circuit pack has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This may be normal during heavy traffic periods Table 8 420 Windows NT shutdown procedures Step Faceplate button P...

Page 1783: ...2 2 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Connection Audit test 50 Y X ND Control Channel Loop test 52 Y X ND Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 N X X ND Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 N X X ND Red Alarm Inquiry test 140 N X X ND Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 N X X ND Major Alarm Inquiry test 142 N X X ND Minor Alarm Inquiry test 143 N X X ND Slip Alarm Inquiry test 144 N X X ND Misframe Alarm Inqui...

Page 1784: ...it pack s SCOTCH NPE chip has been updated with its translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the MAPD interface if it is not alread...

Page 1785: ...ion with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the MAPD interface if it is not already administered 2 If the...

Page 1786: ...failed to restart 1 Execute the reset board command again 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly 1 Run the short test sequence 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that th...

Page 1787: ...Loss of Signal Inquiry Test 138 results WindowsNT up on the TN802 Then Cause Y Test passes Y Test aborts with ABORT 2000 Error Code Windows NT is not communicating with the angel firmware N Test aborts with ABORT 2000 Error Code Windows NT down Table 8 426 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test 139 results WindowsNT up on the TN802 Then Cause Y Test passes Y Test aborts with ABORT 2000 Error Code Windows NT is n...

Page 1788: ...TN802 MAPD circuit pack Table 8 430 details the test results Table 8 428 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test 141 results If Windows NT is up on the TN802 When the switch confirms Yellow alarm Y Test passes N Test aborts with ABORT 2000 Error Code Table 8 429 Major Alarm Inquiry Test 142 results If Windows NT is up on the TN802 When the switch confirms Major alarm Y Test passes N Test aborts with ABORT 2000 ...

Page 1789: ...information to the MAPD Interface circuit pack Translation includes the following data administered for a MAPD Interface circuit pack report from display ds1 UUCSS command DS1 Link Length between two DS1 endpoints Synchronization Source Control All Zero Suppression Framing Mode Signaling Mode Time Slot Number of the 697 Hz tone Time Slot Number of the 700 Hz tone Table 8 431 Slip Alarm Inquiry Tes...

Page 1790: ...to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the MAPD interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut ...

Page 1791: ...unning the Media Processor application The MedPro hardware combines an angel complex a Windows NT PC and a TAP802 DSP card in a 3 slot package When operating as an IP trunk circuit pack the MedPro emulates a DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack and blindly responds to DS1 trunk maintenance requests Actual maintenance is accomplished via the windows NT interface and the ITS software diagnostics The Media Pro...

Page 1792: ...a warning alarm is raised The alarm is raised after the circuit pack has been missing for a period of 15 minutes Warning alarms are also raised against any ports administered on the circuit pack ON 18 b 0 busyout board UUCSS WARNING OFF release board UUCSS 23 c 0 WARNING OFF add ds1 UUCSS 125 d None None MINOR WARNING3 3 Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on values s...

Page 1793: ... functioning MedPro circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot or Completely remove the MedPro from the system using the following steps a Remove the administered IP Interface associated with the circuit pack b Physically remove the circuit pack from the slot c Execute the remove medpro UUCSS and change circuit pack UUCSS commands b Error Type 18 The MedPro Interface circuit pack has been busied...

Page 1794: ...e taken out of service See error Type 3999 g Error Type 2049 indicates that the operating system is down An attempt is made to reset the board automatically If the reset fails the board is probably bad and should be replaced h Error Type 3841 inconsistent downlink message This error is not service affecting No action is required i Error Type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number...

Page 1795: ...he Control Channel Loop test 52 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 435 System Technician Demanded Tests Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Control Channel Loop test 52 X ND SAKI Sanity test 53 X D IP Address Query 1371 X X D NIC Query test 1383 X X ND PING test ...

Page 1796: ...5 times PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Administer the MedPro interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was a...

Page 1797: ... circuit pack 2 Execute command again 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2803 ABORT It is necessary to reset the board 1 Use the change ip interfaces form to disable the Media Processor IP interface 2 Execute the command again 1 FAIL The circuit pack failed to reset 2 FAIL The circuit pack failed to restart 1...

Page 1798: ...ion When this test fails it is an indication that an illegal change was made and the customer should be notified Also writing the IP address parameters to the registry requires NT to reboot If the IP addresses match there is no need to update the registry and reboot NT Table 8 438 Test 1371 IP Address Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry ...

Page 1799: ...est 1379 Ping Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 2 ABORT Internal Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 7 ABORT Destination unreachable 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through this port is up 2 Repeat the test 3 If the test still aborts escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the Media Processor circu...

Page 1800: ...e intervals up to 3 times 2807 ABORT The board is administered but not enabled in the change ip interfaces form 7 89 1007 FAIL Ping to the destination failed through this port due to the destination down 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through this port is up 2 Once verified execute test port UUCSSpp command to verify that the H 323 Signaling Group Ping test 1387 passes PASS Ping ...

Page 1801: ... board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Administer the MEDPRO interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board re initializes it 3 If the board was f...

Page 1802: ... connected and you cannot talk on the network PASS The Ethernet port is connected and you can talk on the network 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Administer the MedPro interface if i...

Page 1803: ...MEDPROPT is physically made up of 11 individual DSPs but is treated logically as one port If individual DSPs on the TN802B TN2302 MAPD fail the MEDPROPT remains in service at lower capacity The MEDPROPT is a shared service circuit It is shared between H 323 trunk channels and H 323 stations An idle channel is allocated to an H 323 trunk station on a call by call basis Error Log Entries and Test to...

Page 1804: ...TN802B only this error type indicates that every DSP is OOS out of service and a MINOR alarm is raised The Aux Data field contains the number of DSPs that are OOS f Error Type 1025 The port is OOS out of service because of a board level failure Check for errors alarms against the board in particular ping problems IP address inconsistency or board sanity problems 1 Verify correct administration 2 C...

Page 1805: ...ils and reports the number of failed DSPs A failure of 3 or fewer DSPs does not result in an alarm A failure of more than 3 and up to 8 DSPs results in a warning alarm A failure of more than 8 DSPs results in a minor alarm In all cases except when every DSP fails the MEDPROPT continues to provide reduced capacity For the TN2302 When using the TN2302 this test polls the circuit pack for the state o...

Page 1806: ...ervals up to 3 times 1 11 FAIL Some DSPs on the circuit pack have failed The FAIL code is the number of bad DSPs reported TN802B only FAIL For the TN2302 only the DSP failed If it continues to fail it will be taken out of service PASS All 11 DSPs are functioning and in service 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check the Error Log for wrong board Error Type 125 or no board Error Type 1...

Page 1807: ...m could not allocate timeslots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have timeslots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the system has TDM BUS errors clear any errors and retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 3 If the ...

Page 1808: ...work that contains the media processor under test 2 If the tone clock is healthy test the media processor board again 3 If the test continues to fail replace the media processor board PASS The board is functioning properly 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Resolve either wrong board Error 125 or no board Error 131 issues if applicable 2 Check that the board is properly translated and ...

Page 1809: ...r any errors and retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 3 If the command continues to abort escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received in the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500...

Page 1810: ...nance documentation for related line information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO MET BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh MET Line circuit pack MET BD WARNING test board UUCSS sh MET...

Page 1811: ... station is in the ready for service state MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO MET LINE MINOR test port UUCSSpp l MET Line MET LINE WARNING te...

Page 1812: ... Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40987 None 18 b 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WARNING OFF release port UUCSSpp 130 c None WARNING ON test port U...

Page 1813: ...receives an epf on ok or an epf off ok message the system will take action to retire the alarm f The port has reported a problem with the data link to the voice terminal Ignore this error if there are no complaints about the voice terminal Otherwise make sure the voice terminal is connected check for defective wiring check for a defective voice terminal and decrease the length of the wiring betwee...

Page 1814: ...stic test 35 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 8 448 System Technician Demanded Tests MET LINE Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Port Diagnostic test 35 X ND MFAT Electronic Power Feed test 56 X ND Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit test 57 X ND Station ...

Page 1815: ...te intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has...

Page 1816: ...ck and attempt to diagnose the already existing error 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL This test can fail due to on board or off board problems Off board problems of concern include EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated w...

Page 1817: ...board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal...

Page 1818: ...us is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing NOTE The battery...

Page 1819: ...to the port 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 i...

Page 1820: ...port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The test failed with an internal error while it...

Page 1821: ... command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If this is not the case check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted T...

Page 1822: ...conference channels and the second half verifies the NPE s remaining four conference channels The test puts the NPE in loop around mode and instructs it to talk on a specified time slot while listening to a 1004 Hz tone using the Conference Channels A GPTD then measures the signal and noise levels of the conferenced output and reports whether or not these fall within a specified acceptable range T...

Page 1823: ... intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ...

Page 1824: ...gainst the GPTD BD the TONE BD and the TONE PT 1 This error can be caused by a disconnected terminal First ensure that the terminal is connected and the wiring is OK 2 Then issue the display port and station status commands to determine whether the station is idle If so issue the test port command for this port 3 If test continues to fail issue the busyout port and release port commands and then r...

Page 1825: ...insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the i...

Page 1826: ...ute intervals up to 5 times 3 ABORT Station is in ready for service or out of service state This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set 1 Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is correct 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port...

Page 1827: ...is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID an...

Page 1828: ...nd to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp com...

Page 1829: ... test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board com...

Page 1830: ...state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Hybrid Station Ringer Update passed 1 If complaints persist investigate using other circuit pack tests and by examining the terminal wiring and co...

Page 1831: ...release mis command should be entered at the terminal This will clear the Warning alarm and allow the switch to send ACD data to the MIS Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run Full Name of MO MIS WARNING release mis Management Information System Table 8 456 Management Information System Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associat...

Page 1832: ...mination There are 32 ports also called resources on the circuit pack See MMI PT for maintenance of these resources The MMI circuit pack contains 4 digital signal processors that manage the 32 resources NOTE Refer to Multimedia Call Handling MMCH in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting for MMCH troubleshooting information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 Wher...

Page 1833: ...ts connecting an ESM Expansion Services Module See Figure 8 61 for connectivity Provides T 120 data sharing capability on a MMCH multipoint H 320 video conference Each conference participant must have endpoints administered and a personal computer with the H 320 video application installed The S8700 Multi Connect must have the expansion service module installed ...

Page 1834: ...ction of an ESM to the S8700 Multi Connect configuration 1 Port B Y cable connector to a TN787 MMI Multimedia Interface circuit pack 2 Port A Y cable connector to a TN2207 PRI circuit pack 3 25 pair Y cable 4 356A adapter 5 D8W cord connected to 356A adapter port 1 6 Expansion Service Module ESM 7 Port B on compatible PRI primary rate interface card cydf012 KLC 092801 4 5 3 6 7 8 1 2 ...

Page 1835: ...the error in the error log by locating the slot indicated by the error Table 8 457 MMI BD Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS sh r 1 1 a...

Page 1836: ...e the repair procedures in note b for Error Type 1 f This MMI circuit pack reported a loss of MMI synchronization Refer to Test 1123 for repair procedures g A failure of the time slot interchanger has been detected Reset the circuit pack using the busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS commands If the reset passes then the on board circuitry is healthy Retire the alarm using...

Page 1837: ...eserved for other connections If the TSI is not working correctly one way and noisy connections may occur If the test passes then the TSI can communicate over the TDM bus This test is part of the circuit pack s demand and scheduled long test sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete Table 8 458 System Technician Demanded Tests MMI BD Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence L...

Page 1838: ...ce 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the MMI BD circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If this result occurs repeatedly attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other ports are idle Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout boar...

Page 1839: ...s up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the Ton...

Page 1840: ...board command is entered initiating the recovery of synchronization Test 1123 runs when the short option of the test board command is entered giving the status of the synchronization You need not necessarily run the long option since synchronization signal recovery should be taking place within software running in the background Use the long option only if synchronization is not established within...

Page 1841: ...hronization Run the long option of the test board command 1 Wait up to 5 minutes and then reset the circuit pack with these commands busyout board UUCSS then reset board UUCSS followed by release board UUCSS 2 Rerun the test if the same result occurs again replace the circuit pack 1100 PASS The MMI circuit pack is providing the synchronization correctly This MMI circuit pack is designated as the M...

Page 1842: ...circuit pack contains up to 32 ports If the number of in service MMI ports falls below the minimum port capacity value entered on the System Parameters Maintenance form under the Minimum Maintenance Threshold section and in the MMI field a MMI LEV error is logged If this outage continues for 15 minutes a MAJOR alarm is raised Resolving MMI LEV Errors Alarms MMI ports are a key part of the MMCH fea...

Page 1843: ...ify the number of MMI ports 3 Compare this number with the value listed in the MMIs field on the System Parameters Maintenance form number listed in step 1 a minimum thresholds number for MMI ports of between 0 128 Each MMI circuit pack contains up to 32 ports If this number in the MMIs field is less than or equal to 32 one MMI circuit pack is needed If this number is 64 then two MMI circuit pack ...

Page 1844: ... BD or MMI PT MOs an MMI circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the MMI LEV error alarm To resolve a MMI LEV MAJOR alarm restore the number of MMI ports available for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port capacity See the Resolving MMI LEV Errors Alarms section above for details 3 If the error continues to alarm escalate the problem System Technician Demanded Tes...

Page 1845: ...pack is inserted 32 resources are inserted into the system The MMI circuit pack contains 4 Digital Signal Processors DSPs which manage the 32 resources These resources are directly mapped to DSPs All 8 resources that the circuit pack controls may be placed out of service by the failure of one of these DSPs MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 Where UU is the universal c...

Page 1846: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 143 8 1124 Issue 1 May 2002 Figure 8 62 TN787 MMI MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK ...

Page 1847: ... is logged for all 8 resources connected to this particular DSP If this DSP continues to fail sanity a Minor alarm is raised Replace the circuit pack e This error occurs when the Resource Loop around test 1111 fails Run the long test sequence and note the results of Test 1111 Table 8 463 MMI PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 ...

Page 1848: ...d here for logging purposes only System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Resource Loop Around Test 1111 This test is destructive This test checks the connectivity of the resource within MMI circuit pack and out to the TDM bus The object is to test the circuitry that an H 221 bit stream comes in contact with when that stream is demultiplexed pre processed written to the TDM bu...

Page 1849: ...ed for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors are out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The resource has been seized by a user for a valid call Use the status conference command to verify that there is a conference call active 1 If there are no confere...

Page 1850: ...ity and is out of service The following error codes indicate failure of a particular media loop 0 video 1 audio 2 low speed data 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The resource is functioning normally Table 8 464 Test 1111 Resource Loop Around Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 1851: ...ly case of an MMI losing this reference an uplink message is sent from the MMI circuit pack that lost the signal to maintenance which also clears the event counter on this MMI with a downlink message This forces the MMI circuit pack to return the current state of the synchronization signal If the signal is still lost then the recovery algorithm is entered Note that during this time the MMI circuit...

Page 1852: ...t allowed for 15 minutes to avoid hyperactive switching If every MMI has an alarm then no switch is made If the MMI circuit pack that provides synchronization is craft busied out it will not affect the PN synchronization The signal is still provided by the busied out pack There is no effect on synchronization if the technician issues a release of the busied out MMI Synchronization is not affected ...

Page 1853: ...ort for related port information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO MODEM BD MIN test board UUCSS sh Modem Pool circuit pack MODEM BD WRN test board UUCSS sh Modem Pool circuit ...

Page 1854: ...wn in Figure 8 63 on page 8 1133 In the case where a local data call originates from an analog port normally used for voice service only and terminates on a digital port a Data Origination access code must be dialed before the extension number for the Modem Pool conversion resource to be included in the connection Each Modem Pool conversion resource contains two ports One of these an analog port i...

Page 1855: ...rt is connected through the PBX network to the analog line or trunk port containing the analog modem signals The digital port connects through the PBX network to the digital line or trunk port in the call The figure below shows a typical end to end connection using a conversion resource on the integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack Figure 8 63 Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Integrated P...

Page 1856: ...on rates The Combined Modem Pool conversion resource consists of a port on an Analog Line circuit pack an external modem a Data Module and a port on a TN754 Digital Line circuit pack The tip and ring interface of the Analog Line is connected to the modem the RS 232C interface of the modem connects to the Data Module and the DCP interface on the Data Module is connected to the Digital Line port The...

Page 1857: ...itched Connection with Combined Modem Pool HOST COMPUTER DATA MODULE TERMINAL CENTRAL OFFICE TRUNK TN747B DIGITAL DIGITAL LINE DATA MODULE MODEM ANALOG LINE RS 232 DCP DCP PCM PCM DCP ANALOG ANALOG DCP COMBINED MODEM POOL DCP Tip Ring TN754 LINE TN754 PBX DIGITAL NETWORK TELEPHONE NETWORK MODEM ...

Page 1858: ...he same tests as the test port short command performed on a Modem Pool port However the test modem pool command can automatically test every port in the Modem Pool group number specified in The test board command performs the same tests as test port and test modem pool plus additional tests for circuits common to the entire circuit pack See XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 for inform...

Page 1859: ... Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 18 0 busyout UUCSS WARNING OFF release port UUCSS 1302 2 This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been r...

Page 1860: ...ld not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Det...

Page 1861: ... to fail or abort replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest 6001 ABORT System resources needed to complete the test could not be allocated for the analog section of the Modem Pool conversion resource Follow the test procedures for the previous error code None FAIL The test failed This error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces 1 ...

Page 1862: ...ndling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABO...

Page 1863: ...intervals up to 5 times 2 Issue the test port long command on the port on which the test aborted If any test aborted or failed follow recommended maintenance strategy for the appropriate port type for example ANL LINE DIG LINE None FAIL The test failed This error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and does not involve external equipment or interfaces 1 Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Mo...

Page 1864: ...rt circuit via time slot B where the patterns are checked for accuracy Finally the test forces a disconnect by breaking the connection between the Maintenance Test board s digital port and the Modem Pool port time slot A and verifying that the Maintenance Test board s digital port and Modem Pool port go on hook within the proper time This test attempts to allocate a Maintenance Test board s digita...

Page 1865: ...ersion resource under test Rerun the test 4 If the test continues to abort replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest 1180 ABORT A Maintenance Test board s digital port could not be allocated for this test Since this error more closely relates to the digital ports on the specific Maintenance Test board used than to the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack itself any hardware testing or replacemen...

Page 1866: ...aborts replace the circuit pack 2005 ABORT The Maintenance Test and the Pooled Modem boards digital ports failed to handshake 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test still aborts replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack 2312 ABORT The Loop around test did not complete failed to receive loop back data 1 Retry the test if still aborts replace the Pooled Modem board 2313 AB...

Page 1867: ...to abort replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest 2325 FAIL The Modem Pool port did not respond with an on hook message when the connection to the TN711 Maintenance Test digital port was broken indicating a likely problem with the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack 1 Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem conversion resources on the circuit pack containing the failing conversion resource 2 If...

Page 1868: ...Description Recommendation None ABORT The system was not able to allocate every necessary resource to execute this test An ABORT simply indicates that the conversion resource was in use when the audit was performed No repair action is necessary unless the conversion resource was known to be idle during the test amber in use LED was off or was busied out before the test was run In that case a TN758...

Page 1869: ... can reduce service it will not block service To accurately measure the performance and health of analog trunks replace an alarmed TN771D when a new circuit pack is available Figure 8 66 ATMS Tie Trunk Test Call MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the nu...

Page 1870: ...k of the Maintenance Test analog port This error is not service affecting and no action is required Table 8 471 M T ANL Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 a 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any...

Page 1871: ...e slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections One or more Network Processing Elements NPE reside on each circuit pack with a TDM bus interface The NPE controls port connectivity gain and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis If the NPE is not working correctly one way and or noisy connections may be observed This test is part of a port s long test sequenc...

Page 1872: ... system technician terminal 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neith...

Page 1873: ...onference test for the primary information channel This is the same test as Conference test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of the two tests If either fails or aborts the sequence is stopped Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This will cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 If the remaining ports are currently idle amber LED is ...

Page 1874: ...ancy is greater than 50 or when the System Management and the Call Processing Occupancies together exceed 65 To view the system occupancy measurements enter the command status system health on the system technician terminal 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat the test at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone rece...

Page 1875: ...ary information channel is not transmitting properly User may not notice any interruption in service or may not be able to use this port 1 Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using test board UUCSS 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack See the section on Tone Gener...

Page 1876: ...ssage will be sent once when the counter reaches some preset threshold and then not sent again until the counter is cleared This test is used to clear the counter so that if the port continues to fail during or after Avaya MultiVantage software demanded testing the Angel will send a message to indicate that fact This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance Test circuit ...

Page 1877: ... the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the test continues to abort replace the circuit pack and repeat the test 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times Any FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the test continues to fail reset the circuit pack via...

Page 1878: ...request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed the test could not be completed 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 50 FAIL The switch was unable to communicate with the port circuitry used for analog trunk testing 1 Reset the circuit pack via the busyout bo...

Page 1879: ... BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 for circuit pack level errors See also related maintenance test information for analog digital and packet bus ports M T ANA Maintenance Test analog port M T DIG Maintenance Test digital port M T PKT Maintenance Test packet bus port Every port except the analog port Port 1 of the Maintenance Test board is automatically administered when the circuit pack i...

Page 1880: ... release board UUCSS if the problem does not go away replace the circuit pack Maintenance Test Board Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level1 1 Major or Minor alarms on this MO may have been downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options command On Off Board Test to Clear Value 02 2 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the l...

Page 1881: ...back This error type can be ignored but may lead to errors of other types being reported against this circuit pack i Excessive number of messages have been received from the Maintenance Test circuit pack This may be due to a hardware problem on the circuit pack The switch will take the board out of service and periodically put it back into service to see if the problem has disappeared If the probl...

Page 1882: ... For example by clearing error codes associated with the Control Channel Loop Around test 52 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Repair procedures for the above tests are described in XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Control Channel Loop Aroun...

Page 1883: ...t calls The Maintenance Test digital port maintenance ensures that the digital trunk testing function is operating correctly The Maintenance Test digital port is alarmed if maintenance determines that the digital port is operating incorrectly NOTE An alarm on the Maintenance Test digital port reduces service but does not block it since the ISDN TRK has other means to determine the health of the IS...

Page 1884: ...1 and checked by digital port 2 on the TN771 Digital Port 1 TN771 Maintenance Test SPE UN332 MSSNET TN1655 PKT INT TDM Bus Control Loop back Circuitry Far End Equipment B channel carries looped back test signal D Channel instructs far end to connect loop back circuitry across B channel signal External DS1 Facility PBX Equipment TN464 DS1 Interface Packet Bus Digital Port 2 ...

Page 1885: ...3 e This error indicates that the Maintenance Test digital port has been unable to successfully loop data from a tone generator to a tone detector f This error indicated that call processing records did not agree with on board records for the hook state on off hook of the Maintenance Test digital port This error is not service affecting and no action is required M T DIG Error Log Entries Error Typ...

Page 1886: ...nterface The NPE controls port connectivity gain and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis The NPE Crosstalk test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not working correctly one way and or noisy connections may be observed This test is part of a port s long test sequence ...

Page 1887: ...system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of to...

Page 1888: ... tested port was found to be transmitting in error This will cause noisy and unreliable connections 1 If the remaining ports are currently idle amber LED is off try to reset the circuit pack Then repeat the test 2 If the test fails again replace circuit pack PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests a...

Page 1889: ... error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1000 ABORT The port is use on a valid ISDN PRI test call Use the list isdn testcall command to determine which call is using the port from the M T Port column Either wait for the test call to complete as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields in the above display or abort t...

Page 1890: ...ve display 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is idle escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate t...

Page 1891: ...it pack using test board UUCSS 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack 3 If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly and the test still fails replace the Maintenance Test circuit pack PASS The Maintenance Test digital port digital trunk testing capability is operating correctly Table 8 478 Test 13 ...

Page 1892: ...Background Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once This test is used to clear the counter so that if the port continues to fail during or after Avaya MultiVantage software demanded testing the Angel will send a message to indicate that fact This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance Test circuit pack Therefore this test should never abort or fail Table 8 ...

Page 1893: ...ill abort if an ISDN test call is in progress on either Maintenance Test digital port when the test is requested or if an ISDN test call is initiated while the Digital Port Sanity test is in progress Table 8 480 Test 565 Digital Port Sanity Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT One of the Maintenance Test digital ports is busy with background maintenance 1 Either wait f...

Page 1894: ...cated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display or abort the test call with the clear isdn testcall grp mem command where grp mem is determined from the B channel field of the above display 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is idle escalate the problem 1138 ABORT This test does not run on port 3 of the Maintenance...

Page 1895: ... port 2 to port 3 successfully in synchronous mode 103 FAIL Data was not sent from port 3 to port 2 successfully in synchronous mode 1 Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS release board UUCSS command sequence 2 Test the port again via the test port UUCSS02 l command 3 If the test fails again replace the circuit pack PASS The Maintenance Test digital port digital tru...

Page 1896: ...pack and repeat the test 3 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem Any FAIL Internal system error This test should never return a failure 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the tes...

Page 1897: ...are operating correctly The Maintenance Test packet bus port is alarmed if maintenance determines that the port s maintenance functions are operating incorrectly When M T PKT maintenance determines that the packet bus port is defective the packet bus fault detection and reconfiguration functions provided by the port will be turned off M T PKT maintenance interacts with packet bus maintenance There...

Page 1898: ...if the circuit pack is inserted if the system is restarted or if the port is released from a busyout state Therefore it is normal for this error to be present in the error log If the M T PKT reconfigures the packet bus 6 times within 15 minutes a Minor alarm is raised indicating that either Packet bus maintenance functions are not operating correctly Many changes are taking place on the packet bus...

Page 1899: ... Ignore the packet bus error indication since the Maintenance Test circuit pack has been determined to be defective If there is other activity on the Maintenance Test circuit pack i e ISDN test call or if there is an indication of a correctable fault on the packet bus the amber LED will be on steady If there is an ISDN test call in progress it must be halted via the clear isdn testcall grp member ...

Page 1900: ...m flooding the Avaya MultiVantage software with a continuous string of identical error messages This test is used to clear the counter so that if the port continues to fail during or after Avaya MultiVantage software demanded testing the Angel will send a message to indicate that fact This test is only used to send a downlink message to the Angel on the Maintenance Test circuit pack Since the Ange...

Page 1901: ...ources necessary to run this test are not available 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed and the test could not be completed 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2059 FAIL The M T PKT has reported a failure of the on board self test 2060 FAIL The M T PKT has reported an invalid state for the packet bus 2061 FAIL The Avaya ...

Page 1902: ...ency numbers Incoming calls will be restricted to a Administration Attendant Console number The license file feature is loaded onto a switch during initialization of the switch software restore of translations and periodically After initialization a query is made to a software module called the license server This module reads the license file compares a serial number in the license file to a seri...

Page 1903: ...imits mode and also that a License Error failure has occurred The feature usage has exceeded limits and the 6 day timer has expired Call processing software stops every new call except outgoing calls to an emergency number and incoming calls to an administration number d Error Type 1281 This error indicates that a new license was not installed after an upgrade The 6 day timer has expired and a Lic...

Page 1904: ...ftware to stop every new call origination except outgoing calls to an emergency number and incoming calls to an administration number g Error Type 2305 This error indicates that the Offer Category of the License does not match the Offer Category in translations Maintenance software notifies call processing software to stop every new call origination except calls to an emergency number and incoming...

Page 1905: ...ts system technician demanded tests and alarm resolution and escalation Two service states are specified in a DS1 OPS Line maintenance They are out of service in which the line is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or outgoing calls or in service in which the line is in an activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls If the DS1 Interface circuit p...

Page 1906: ...s raised against the OPS LINE port However there should be errors logged against the DS1 Interface circuit pack Look for DS1 BD UDS1 BD errors in the Hardware Error Log and follow the appropriate procedures provided in the DS1 BD DS1 Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 586 Table 8 484 DS1 OPS Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Valu...

Page 1907: ...t working correctly one way and noisy connections may be observed This test is usually only part of a port s long test sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND DS1 OPS Switchhook Inquiry test 312 X X ND Audit and Update test 36 ...

Page 1908: ... is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or due to a more general error on the circuit pack 1 Examine the error log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt t...

Page 1909: ...gated using other port tests and by examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are ...

Page 1910: ... system could not allocate time slots for the test The system might be under heavy traffic conditions or it might have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors The status health command may be used to determine whether the system is experiencing heavy traffic 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors is not handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute interva...

Page 1911: ...rted because response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test aborts with error code 2000 again run short test sequence on the associated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD are also aborting with error code 2000 hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated ...

Page 1912: ...d troubles have been reported coordinate isolation with the far end PBX Make sure that the near and far end switches and any NTCE equipment the CSUs have the correct administration 6 Replace the circuit pack NOTE If the conference circuit test fails for every port on a circuit pack a 5 Volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power ...

Page 1913: ...an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between th...

Page 1914: ...ilable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the station is out of service This condition may be accompanied by an error type 18 entry in the error log You may want to determine why the station was taken out of service When stations are taken out of ...

Page 1915: ...command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue...

Page 1916: ...n administered in station administration 1 Using the display station command verify that the station is not the 24th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack while common channel signaling is specified Use the display ds1 command to check the signaling type of the DS1 circuit pack 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the station is out of service This condition may be accompanied by an error type...

Page 1917: ...tiplexer is used as the remote DS1 endpoint to which the station connects refer to the multiplexer vendor s maintenance document for diagnosis 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS The station hook states in both switch software and DS1 Interface circuit pack are consistent 0 2012 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to in...

Page 1918: ... XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 Digital line circuit packs include the TN754 TN754B TN413 TN2136 See DIG LINE for more information about the characteristics of these circuit packs MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot...

Page 1919: ...PDMs and TDMs respectively Later models are designed to provide a variety of interfaces by using interchangeable modules and are thus called modular data modules Both types are supported by the tests described in this section Interfaces to MPDM Modular Processor Data Module DTE data terminals host computers printers etc MTDM Modular Trunk Data Module DCE modems data modules etc Table 8 490 Data Ad...

Page 1920: ...n in mind when investigating customer reported problems with data modules Data modules provide a variety of option switches to allow the customer to select data rates parity keyboard dialing local and remote loop back etc The DAA2 Data Adaptor has an AT Hayes type interface that allows selection of the above parameters as well as mode linked or stand alone An incorrect selection will not necessari...

Page 1921: ... stand alone mode Primary Information Channel Physical Connection Digital Line Circuit Pack Secondary Information Channel unused Signaling Physical Connection Primary Information Channel Host Computer with DCE Interface MTDM Physical Connection Secondary MTDM Primary MTDM Host Computer with DCE Interface Host Computer with DCE Interface Primary Information Channel Physical Connection Signaling Dig...

Page 1922: ... port UUCSSpp 257 f 40971 None 513 0 Data Module audits 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 6 769 g n 40988 None WARNING OFF 1281 Any Data Module audits 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 4 1537 h n 40968 None WARNING OFF 1793 Information Channel and Control Channel Looparound 13 MINOR ON test port UUCSSpp l r 3 2049 NPE Crosstalk 9 MINOR ON test port UUCSSpp l r 3 2304 i None 2305 j 32770 No...

Page 1923: ...data module See the recommendations in note n This may also be caused by the PTC being in the tripped position due to a short on the power line You can correct this by removing the short unplugging the data module from the wall for about 30 seconds and plugging it back in h Error type 1537 indicates that an in line maintenance error has generated an off board warning due to some problem with the l...

Page 1924: ... mode its range is limited by the Italtel digital phone s limit 0 7 Km 2300 ft on 26 gauge wire or 1 8 Km 5900 ft on 22 gauge 0 6 mm wire If in stand alone mode it is limited by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface DLI component up to 3 5 Km 2 miles on 22 gauge 0 6 mm wire System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the or...

Page 1925: ...rt is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM B...

Page 1926: ...equest was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate ...

Page 1927: ... display port UUCSSpp command to determine the data module extension Then use status data module command with the extension number to determine the service state of the data module If the service state indicates that the data module is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1...

Page 1928: ...g able to use this port 15 FAIL The control channel between the processor and Digital Line circuit pack is not transmitting properly This can cause a wide range of effects The user may notice nothing or the port may be totally unusable This could also disrupt other users 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test board UUCSS short comman...

Page 1929: ...inger Update This updates the data module s ringer state according to processor records Translation Update This is a message normally used with digital stations to refresh the default value that causes the station to send touch tones only in the primary information channel This test is not used with data modules Table 8 494 Test 17 Data Module Audits Test Error Code Test Result Description Recomme...

Page 1930: ...imes 1392 ABORT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If either list config or display port indicate that the port is not a TTI port escalate the problem If both commands indicate tha...

Page 1931: ...ure 8 70 Internal Loop Around Test A signaling message is sent through the digital port circuit pack to the data module requesting it to enter loop around mode A test pattern is then sent from the TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack over the path illustrated above and back to the TN771D where it is checked for consistency The test aborts if any of the following local PBX resources are not availab...

Page 1932: ...03 on the M T BD are absent see M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port 3 If the digital ports are present try the command again at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1181 ABORT No time slots available to connect digital ports for the test 1 Try the command again at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1182 ABORT Internal system error Failed to connect the digital ports with time slots 1 Retry the command...

Page 1933: ... Data Module 2312 ABORT The loop around test did not complete failed to receive loop back data 1 Check for M T DIG error in the Error Log If present see M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port 2 Retry the test if still aborts replace the Data Module 3 If the test aborts again replace the Digital Line circuit pack 2313 ABORT The Maintenance Test digital port allocated for this test did not respond to...

Page 1934: ...op back does not match data sent 1 Check for faulty wiring 2 Replace the data module and repeat the test 3 If the test fails replace the Digital Line circuit pack associated with the data module and repeat the test PASS Data Module Loop around test passed Table 8 495 Test 175 Data Module Internal Loop Around Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 1935: ...erminal adapters In the same sense that a S8700 Multi Connect data module acts as a DCP or BRI terminal adapter between endpoint data such as V 35 and dialing interfaces such as RS 366 and a DCP interface a PRI terminal adapter acts as a wideband terminal adapter between endpoint data and dialing interfaces and S8700 Multi Connect s line side ISDN PRI interface Wideband switching introduces PRI en...

Page 1936: ...s initialized to Out Of Service Far End and an attempt is made to negotiate it to In Service The service state of a particular PRI endpoint port s B channel can be displayed with the status pri endpoint extension command If a call is present the Specification defines the permissible call states as well There are tests in the short and long test sequences for the PRI endpoint port designed to audit...

Page 1937: ...ons PRI Endpoint Port Service States The status pri endpoint extension command displays the following possible service states for PRI endpoint ports The table that follows gives recommended procedures for each state The figure following that shows typical progressions from one service state to another Refer also to Troubleshooting Wideband Problems in Chapter 4 Alarms Errors and Troubleshooting fo...

Page 1938: ... a certain amount of time This state is different from OOS FE since the signaling link must have initially been up and the B channels in service The switch will periodically send messages to the far end terminal adapter to try to negotiate the port B channel into service The port is unusable for outgoing calls to the terminal adapter but will service incoming call requests from the far end Other p...

Page 1939: ...ter OOS FE PINS Service message was sent and the switch is waiting up to 2 minutes for a reply from the far end terminal adapter Wait 2 minutes and check service state after the PINS state has cleared MTC NE System link demand busied out Check link status Release with release link link MTC FE Warning Signaling channel has been down for over 90 sec Consult ISDN SGRP ISDN LNK and or SYS LINK Far end...

Page 1940: ...E D CHANNEL HAS BEEN DOWN FOR AT LEAST 90 SECONDS FAILED TO RECEIVE REPLY FROM FAR END MTCE WILL PERIODICALLY TRY TO RESEND THE MESSAGE RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM THE FAR END RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM THE FAR END FAILED TO RECEIVE REPLY FROM FAR END MTCE WILL PERIODICALLY TRY TO RESEND THE MESSAGE ADMINISTER B CHANNEL AS MEMBER OF A PRI ENDPOINT OUT OF SERVICE NEAR END OUT OF SERVICE FAR EN...

Page 1941: ...lls can still be made to other ports within this PRI endpoint if they are in service Table 8 497 PRI endpoint port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any te...

Page 1942: ...minal adapter Investigate the PRI endpoint administration for both the switch and the terminal adapter and make sure they agree h The Conference Circuit test 7 failed on this port See Test 7 for repair procedures i The NPE Crosstalk test 6 failed on this port See Test 6 for repair procedures j This error indicates a failure of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack The results of the Signaling Link State...

Page 1943: ...red unexpectedly by the far end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message 1 3 6 265 A call that has not yet reached a ringing state was cleared unexpectedly by the far end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message 11 12 19 531 267 268 A call that was already in the process of clearing has been cleared by the far end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message If this condition occurs fre...

Page 1944: ...ots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM Bus errors Use the status health command to determine whether the system is experiencing heavy traffic Investigate and resolve any errors against TDM BUS 1 If the system has no TDM Bus errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABO...

Page 1945: ...ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This will cause noisy and unreliable connections The PE BCHL is moved to out of service near end state 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port can communicate over the TDM bus Table 8 498 Test 6 N...

Page 1946: ...alid call Use status pri endpoint extension to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing er...

Page 1947: ... period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test FAIL Test failed due to internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Port translation has been updated successfully The current port states kept in the UDS1 interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent If the port is busied out the test will not run but will retu...

Page 1948: ...T Rollabout video abort The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled 1 Either reconnect the disconnected PRI terminal adapter or disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack To do the latter enter change ds1 UUCSS and set the Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached fiel...

Page 1949: ... PRI endpoint If an incoming call that uses this port is presented while in such a state a Service State audit attempt will immediately be attempted that is the switch will not wait for the 15 minute cycle but will instead try to recover immediately To investigate the status of this PRI endpoint port issue the status pri endpoint extension command Table 8 502 Test 256 Service State Audit Test Erro...

Page 1950: ...ype 3073 If there are none then both sides of the ISDN connection agree on the service state the negotiation succeeded If there is a new 3073 error then the negotiation failed the far end terminal adapter twice failed to respond within the mandatory 2 minute window This switch will automatically retry approximately every 15 minutes If the port was initially in the INS in service state it will now ...

Page 1951: ...d PRI terminal adapter or disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack To do the latter enter change ds1 UUCSS and set the Alarm when PRI Endpoint Detached field to y 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS...

Page 1952: ...se are absent from the system The tests may yield inconsistent results if any of this hardware is defective The individual test descriptions provide more information The interactions between the packet bus and the circuit packs that use the bus are complex Circuit pack failures can alarm the packet bus while packet bus faults can alarm or interrupt service to one or more circuit packs and their po...

Page 1953: ...he error log but are not acted upon Port level BRI PORT ABRI PORT in line errors on Packet circuit packs which indicate possible Packet Bus failures are not logged or acted upon Circuit pack and port in line errors that are not relevant to the Packet Bus or that indicate a circuit pack failure are acted upon in the normal fashion Periodic and scheduled background maintenance are not affected Foreg...

Page 1954: ... for more specific PKT BUS errors Table 8 504 PKT BUS Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board1 1 ON BOARD indicates a problem with the packet bus itself Test to Clear Value 02 2 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test...

Page 1955: ... open leads on the packet bus The Aux Data value indicates the number of open leads f Packet circuit pack port and endpoint maintenance has been disabled due to a packet bus failure The Aux Data value indicates the cause Keep in mind that although only packet circuit packs can detect and report packet bus problems such problems can be caused by any circuit pack g Packet circuit pack port and endpo...

Page 1956: ...ystem Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables For example by clearing error codes associated with the Packet Circuit Pack Audit test 573 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Maintenance Test Circuit Pack Query Test 572 This test queries the Maintenance Test packet bus port...

Page 1957: ...e replaced b the Maintenance Test circuit pack has been busied out and should be released or c there is no Maintenance Test circuit pack in thisPN and one must be installed 2 In an PN of a system without PNC duplication the Maintenance Test packet bus Port is not required and may not be present If it is present and is busied out or has failed release or replace the circuit pack If there is no Main...

Page 1958: ... packet bus around the faulty leads This action only occurs in high critical reliability systems duplicated PNC 2xxx The Maintenance Test packet bus port is unable to correct every Packet Bus fault it has detected x0xx None of the packet bus faults are open faults x1xx At least some of the packet bus faults are open faults Look for error type 2305 in the Error Log The Aux Data value indicates the ...

Page 1959: ... Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed the test could not be repeated 1 Re enter the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 FAIL One Packet circuit pack has reported packet bus related in line errors within the last minute 2 FAIL More than one Packet circuit pack has reported packet bus related in line errors within the last minute PA...

Page 1960: ...lot and provides an Ethernet interface back to the media servers The PKT INT interface on the IPSI is like previous DEFINITY TN1655 PKT INT boards However the IPSI s PKT INT does not support DMI Mode 2 3 data or BX 25 links The PKT INT supports links used for call setup of every port located in an PN In a duplex reliability system unduplicated IPSIs a Packet Interface failure Obstructs the origina...

Page 1961: ...o a failure of the standby IPSI s Packet Interface lowers the standby s SOH preventing a subsequent interchange The links that pass through the Packet Interface circuit are identified as either application or system links as follows 1 Application links a Endpoints requiring connectivity to the media server via the C LAN board s Socket interface These links pass over the packet bus and through C LA...

Page 1962: ...ndby PKT INT in each PN that is up to 64 for ATM PNC or 44 for CSS PNC active PKT INTs in the system As shown in Figure 8 73 EPNs 1 and 2 have IPSIs that terminate LAP D links EPNs 3 and 4 do not have local IPSIs so their LAP D links are terminated by IPSIs in EPNs 1 and 2 respectively Figure 8 73 Distributed PKT INTs IPSI IPSI EI EPN 1 IPSI IPSI EPN 2 EPN 3 Server A Server B Control Network A Con...

Page 1963: ...the active media server communicates directly with both active and standby PKT INTs and performs maintenance activities on both PKT INTs without the standby media server getting involved Earlier G3r PKT INT duplication relied on the duplication hardware to automatically duplicate and write each command from the processor into both the active and standby PKT INT s dual port RAMs The standby PKT INT...

Page 1964: ...ation by sending commands to the active and standby PKT INTs to make a peer link between the PKT INTs and to start the link migration process Down stream and up stream messages can be processed by the PKT INTs during the link migration process As long as the PKT INT interchange has not been completed PCD should continue to send down stream messages to the active PKT INT If a down stream data packe...

Page 1965: ... every down stream message to the active mig PKT INT and has the active mig PKT INT forward it to the active mig PKT INT of links that have not yet migrated standby mig PKT INT of links that have migrated At the end of the migration the active mig PKT INT tells the PCD that the migration is finished and PCD tells the standby mig PKT INT to go active hot interrupt Some coordination verifies that ev...

Page 1966: ...twork Since the IPSIs are not duplicated the PKT INT circuits contained within them are also not duplicated Figure 8 74 Duplex Reliability Configuration Table 8 507 Reliability Options Configurations Servers Control Networks and IPSIs Bearer Networks Duplex Reliability Duplicated Unduplicated Unduplicated High Reliability Duplicated Duplicated Unduplicated Critical Reliability Duplicated Duplicate...

Page 1967: ... configuration every IPSI connected EPN must have duplicated IPSIs The duplicated control network prevents a single fault in the control network such as a bad Ethernet switch from bringing the whole system down Since the IPSI s are duplicated in this configuration the PKT INT circuits are also duplicated Figure 8 75 High Reliability Configuration EI EPN 3 Server A Server B IPSI IPSI EI EPN 2 IPSI ...

Page 1968: ...ed in this configuration the PKT INT circuits are also duplicated Figure 8 76 Critical Reliability Configuration Packet Interface Service Operations The following sections provide more background information about service operations for the Packet Interface circuit Administration PKT INTs are automatically administered as a component of an IPSI circuit pack See add ipserver interface remove ipserv...

Page 1969: ...Interface maintenance software maintains a state variable to monitor the in service out of service state of each Packet Interface circuit In a duplex reliability system unduplicated IPSIs if maintenance software detects that a Packet Interface has a fatal fault it automatically attempts to reset the circuit pack as quickly as possible An extensive set of diagnostic tests is run when the circuit pa...

Page 1970: ...ntenance software attempts to run the Packet Interface Reset test In a high or critical reliability system this results in a requested IPSI interchange instead of a Packet Interface reset since stable calls are preserved across the interchange Maintenance Object Interactions Packet Bus maintenance A Packet Interface circuit physically interacts with the PKT BUS So for certain types of Packet Inter...

Page 1971: ... the links are shown as Failed Links then the Packet Interface circuit is probably not the source of the problem Some typical sources of individual link failures include a Failed BRI telephone set Disconnected cord to a BRI set causes three link failures Failed or removed EI circuit pack in an PN causes one link failure For a case where not every link appears in the Failed Links category examine t...

Page 1972: ...a standby IPSI can be reset independent of its service state 10 b 0 None 50 c 0 None 257 d Any None MAJOR ON reset packet interface Uc 513 e Any None MAJOR ON reset packet interface Uc 769 f Any Maintenance Loop around test 886 MAJOR ON test packet interface Uc s r 2 1025 g Any Private Loop around test 885 MAJOR ON reset packet interface Uc2 1281 h Any None MAJOR ON reset packet interface Uc2 1537...

Page 1973: ... Packet Interface maintenance software caused an escalating system WARM restart as part of a recovery action for certain Packet Interface circuit failures A SYSTEM error type 10 should also be present indicating that a software initiated WARM restart occurred 1 Check to see if error types 513 1025 or 3074 are present in the hardware error log If they are present refer to the repair procedures for ...

Page 1974: ...ound test may have caused an IPSI interchange which would result in an alarm associated with error code 769 being reported against the standby IPSI s Packet Interface circuit If so it may be necessary to force another IPSI interchange using the set ip server interface command For more information refer to the repair procedures of Test 886 g Error 1025 indicates a failure of the Private Loop around...

Page 1975: ...Packet Interface circuit received packets with parity errors from the packet bus 1 Check for errors logged against the packet bus and Maintenance Test circuit pack Refer to the appropriate repair procedures to clear those errors first 2 Check every other circuit pack connected to the packet bus in the same cabinet Packet bus failures are likely to be caused by a faulty circuit pack connected to th...

Page 1976: ...way circuit pack the Packet Data Line circuit packs associated with the System Ports BRI Line circuit packs and BRI endpoints and the Universal DS1 circuit packs supporting PRI service Errors against those components should be cleared first 2 Enter the test packet interface short command against the Packet Interface circuit associated with the error If the Maintenance Loop Around test 886 passes t...

Page 1977: ... Packet Interface circuit to run private non destructive memory checksum tests on the firmware text residing in Boot PROM and FLASH memory If the test fails during background testing the IPSI circuit pack remains operational until an executed reset Then the initialization firmware fails and puts the IPSI circuit pack in an out of service state Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test S...

Page 1978: ...ed operation with a full command queue would cause a system WARM restart that may escalate to more severe restart levels 1 Retry the command at 10 second intervals up to 5 times 1335 ABORT Internal IPSI error The Packet Interface is on the standby IPSI so this test is not allowed to execute 1 To run this test on the standby Packet Interface enter set ipserver interface Uc to activate it 2000 ABORT...

Page 1979: ...1 Retry the command 2 If the same error code occurs a If this is a duplex reliability system replace the circuit pack at a time that would cause the least disruption of service The circuit pack is still functional but should be replaced since it may not operate after a system reboot and it will enter a fatal fault state if it is reset for other reasons b If this is a high or critical reliability s...

Page 1980: ... sent to the Packet Interface circuit s maintenance software and the Packet Interface circuit is put in the out of service state Therefore repair procedures associated with Abort Code 1137 out of service would normally follow failures of the level 2 test Table 8 510 Test 885 Private Loop Around Tests Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1006 1137 ABORT Packet Interface circuit is out ...

Page 1981: ...ace the IPSI circuit pack 2 FAIL The Private Level 2 Loop Around test failed When this occurs the circuit pack enters a fatal fault state and the Packet Interface maintenance software should put the circuit out of service Therefore by the time further action is taken the test should abort with ABORT code 1137 and a demand reset should be used to test the circuit pack 1 Enter reset packet interface...

Page 1982: ...by IPSI to go active Then enter the test packet interface Uc command to run the Maintenance Loop Around test and verify that the problem has been cleared Table 8 511 Test 886 Maintenance Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1006 1137 ABORT Since the IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is out of service normal maintenance tests do not run on that circuit pack ...

Page 1983: ...o 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command NO BOARD The IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is assigned but is not detected as being physically present 1 If the IPSI circuit pack is present replace it 2 If not insert a TN2312...

Page 1984: ...acing the IPSI circuit pack run the test packet P long command If any of the tests fail the fault may be on the packet bus See PKT BUS Packet Bus on page 8 1230 for recommended repair procedures 4 If the test continues to fail after the circuit pack is replaced and with no other alarms associated with the packet bus or circuit packs connected to the packet bus follow normal escalation procedures P...

Page 1985: ...lt Description Recommendation 1006 1137 ABORT The IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is out of service so normal maintenance tests do not run on the circuit pack 1 Enter the reset packet interface Uc command to reset the Packet Interface circuit For repair procedures see Table 8 509 on page 8 1256 the Packet Interface Reset test 1335 ABORT Internal IPSI error The test is on standby IPSI ...

Page 1986: ... packs is presented in the first section of this repair procedure Refer to the repair procedures for those circuit packs in this manual to clear those errors first c If this is a standard or duplex reliability system replace the circuit pack at a time that would cause the least disruption of service The circuit pack is still functional but should be replaced d If this is a high or critical reliabi...

Page 1987: ...ce circuit replace the IPSI circuit pack 1024 1096 FAIL The standby IPSI s Packet Interface circuit has bad Translation RAM locations A MINOR alarm is generated when the number of bad locations is from 1 and 4 A MAJOR alarm is generated if the number of bad locations is 5 or more The MAJOR alarm prevents a planned IPSI interchange A planned interchange may be administered to occur automatically ev...

Page 1988: ...ommendation 1006 1137 ABORT An IPSI s circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is out of service so normal maintenance tests do not run on this circuit pack 1 Request a Packet Interface circuit reset using the reset packet interface Uc command For further action see repair procedures in Table 8 509 on page 8 1256 Packet Interface Reset test 1139 ABORT The packet bus is alarmed 1 Try to retire the a...

Page 1989: ...quest was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command NO BOARD The IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface circuit is assigned but is not detected as being physically present 1 If the IPSI circuit pack is present replace it 2 If not insert a TN2312AP IPSI circuit pack in the assigned slot an...

Page 1990: ...vice try the Reset command again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command NO BOARD The IPSI circuit pack s Packet Interface is assigned but is not detected as being physically present 1 If the IPSI circuit pack is present replace it 2 If not ...

Page 1991: ...T and finds an alarm against the PLAT ALM MO must 1 Log into the media server s Linux shell 2 To see the media server s current list of alarms execute the almdisplay command 3 To clear the problems follow the troubleshooting procedures listed there for media server alarms NOTE After repairing the media server use the Linux almclear command to manually clear every media server alarm This action wil...

Page 1992: ...stered as a data extension The PMS link to the processor is via a TN799 C LAN port For information about C LAN connectivity refer to CLAN BD Control LAN Circuit Pack on page 8 411 PMS Link maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the switch and a PMS device The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis detection of errors during normal operation actions for tr...

Page 1993: ...nk is down then continue with the next step 2 Where does the PMS Link connect Enter display system hospitality and find out the destinations of the PMS Link 3 Determine the status of the data extension Enter status data extension command and verify whether the data extension is in the in service idle state If the data extension is not available then look for the extension number in Alt Name field ...

Page 1994: ...Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test pms sh r 1 18 a 0 busyout pms link WARNING OFF release pms link 257 b Any Link Retry test 215 MINOR WARNING2 2 Minor alarms on this MO may be down graded to Warning alarms based o the value in the se...

Page 1995: ...the Hardware Error Log f The link was taken down because the switch could not send an outgoing message The message which was sent but not acknowledged was flushed If this error type occurs frequently more than once a month advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device Once the PMS Link is successfully established this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log g T...

Page 1996: ...fully established this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log The PMS should be checked to make sure that it will attempt to start the protocol according to the PMS PBX protocol specifications No alarm is raised against this error l For Error Type 2817 look for the following AUX data The PMS should be assessed for adherence to the PMS PBX protocol specifications 10x The PMS violated the appl...

Page 1997: ... was taken down by the switch because the threshold for link protocol violations has been exceeded by the PMS PMS is sending garbage to the switch System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below For example by clearing error codes associated with the Link Tear Down test 213 you may also clear errors generated from oth...

Page 1998: ...3 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 40 50 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1010 ABORT The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the out of service state 1 Enter release pms link command to release the PMS Link from busyout state 2 Retry test pms long command to execute the test 2012 ABORT Internal system er...

Page 1999: ...command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 Refer back to Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link on page 8 1271 for resolution 1010 ABORT The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the out of service state 1 Enter release pms link command to release the PMS Link from busyout state 2 Retry test pms command to execute the test 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Re...

Page 2000: ...tween Journal and Scheduled report printers is logical rather than physical Whether or not there are two printers the scheduled reports are always sent to the printer that journals the wakeup and emergency access events A scheduled report will temporarily suspend the journal activity Upon completion of the scheduled report journaling will be resumed after the printing of every withheld event The j...

Page 2001: ...s The list pms down command lists every meaningful event to the PMS that occurred while the link between the switch and the PMS was down For example any room status codes entered by hotel housekeeping staff during a time of PMS outage would be reflected in this report Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link 1 Determine the status of the PMS Printer Link Enter status journal printer wakeup lo...

Page 2002: ...ed off or the data extension where the printer device connects to has been busied out Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket data module and the printer device Enter status data extension and verify that the data extension of the printer device is in the in service idle state If the data extension is not available then see Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link on page 8...

Page 2003: ... external printer device If the link has been disconnected already this test just returns PASS Every resource allocated for a PMS Printer Link is released after this test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Link Tear Down test 213 X D Link Retry test 215 X X ND Table 8 519 Test 213 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result Descript...

Page 2004: ...20 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 See Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link on page 8 1271 for instructions 1010 ABORT The PMS Printer Link has been busied out to out of service 1 Enter release journal wakeup log pms log command to release the link from busyout state 2 Retry test journal wakeup log pms log l comm...

Page 2005: ...ures PNC duplication architecture utilizes an active standby duplication scheme in which one complete set of PNC components supports call processing while the duplicate PNC is held in reserve All calls on the active PNC are simultaneously set up or shadowed on the standby PNC in order for it to be capable of instantly assuming active status when necessary allowing for interchanges without service ...

Page 2006: ...NC component cannot be busied out A standby PNC component can only be busied out when the standby PNC is first busied out The standby PNC cannot be released unless all standby PNC components are released status pnc This command displays information about the operational status of both PNCs including state of health alarms busyouts and locks and so on reset pnc interchange This command is used to i...

Page 2007: ...May 2002 8 1285 555 233 143 Figure 8 77 Duplicated Direct Connect PNC Connectivity PKT INT AA T C IPSI A EPN 1 EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI MAINT Test PORT CARRIER PORT CARRIER EPN 2 EPN 3 T C AA PKT INT IPSI B LAN TDM TDM LAN ...

Page 2008: ...ter Stage Switch Connectivity CSS A CSS B EPN IPSI A IPSI B SWITCH NODE SWITCH NODE SWITCH NODE SWITCH NODE T C AA PKT INT MAINT Test TDM LAN EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I S N I EPN 1 EPN 10 EPN 11 EPN 44 5 5 T C AA PKT INT LAN TDM ...

Page 2009: ...CSS circuit pack insertion For Direct Connect configurations this is declared complete at 5 minutes after the first appearance of the terminal login prompt 6 The PNC DUP initialization anti thrashing timer must expire this occurs 5 minutes after completion of board insertion PNC interchange or system reset of level 2 or higher To Disable PNC Duplication To disable PNC duplication perform the follo...

Page 2010: ...ed The B PNC carriers and associated circuit packs should not be alarmed 7 Disable PNC duplication on the change system parameters customer options form by changing PNC Duplication to no If an alarm exists against any Expansion Interface circuit pack connected to a B PNC carrier attempt to use test board UUCSS long clear to clear the alarm Alterations to PNC which involve only the addition of fibe...

Page 2011: ...es of health of both PNCs The fields making up the indexes are two digit numbers separated by periods with each field representing a different class of faults The fault class fields are arranged in order of decreasing importance from left to right In other words each field in the index supersedes the following fields in determining which PNC is healthiest A fault class drives an interchange only w...

Page 2012: ...t class field is not updated to reflect the improved state of health until the refresh is done The state of health indexes will not agree with the current alarm status during this period Inter SN Index FC_SNIL s11 s10 FC_SNIHW Table 8 521 PNC State of Health Fault Classes Fault Class Priority Description MOs FC_EAL 1 Number of PNs with EALs down EXP PN FC_INL 2 Number of PNs with LINL RINL or EI S...

Page 2013: ...se the standby PNC for busy out Refresh and Unrefresh of the Standby PNC In a fully functional PNC with healthy standby and active sides the standby PNC has a complete set of call connections corresponding to those in the active PNC If however the state of health of the standby PNC degrades a selective unrefresh of those connections which utilize the faulted component s is performed If the health ...

Page 2014: ...change 1 The Expansion Interfaces currently acting as archangels in the PNs are deactivated as indicated by the amber LEDs going from flashing to on solid 2 The EIs in IPSI port networks are interchanged as indicated by the new standby EI amber LED off and the new active EI amber LED on solid 3 One by one the EIs in non IPSI port networks are interchanged as indicated by new standby EI amber LED t...

Page 2015: ...r a period of 30 seconds During antithrashing mode demand interchanges are also prevented unless the override option is specified Use of this option will cause a service disruption Repairs on the Standby PNC Components CAUTION If there is a TDM CLK alarm system timing may be routed through part of the standby PNC and circuit switched data may be affected by the following repair procedures This can...

Page 2016: ...erchanges A system reset of level 1 warm 2 cold2 or 4 reboot does not change which PNC is active If a PNC interchange was in progress when the reset took place the PNC interchange still goes to completion If a system reset level 1 warm takes place during a PNC interchange the reset is escalated to level 2 cold2 Fault Isolation Using Duplicated PNC PNC duplication can in some cases aid in the isola...

Page 2017: ...uld be an alarm against the PNC component that drove the interchange There are no PNC DUP test sequences but status pnc will provide information regarding the status of the PNCs The information given in the following tables will help to identify areas of the Alarm Log to be investigated to find the source the problem Error Code Aux Data Error Code Aux Data 00000 a None 20200 20263 s 1 10000 10063 ...

Page 2018: ... status pnc to look at the state of health indexes for the PNCs and investigate any associated alarms Adding 1 to the last two digits of the error code gives the PN number of the port network that reported the retired alarm 10203 points to port network 4 List config port network gives the cabinet number associated with a port network e A spontaneous PNC interchange took place in response to the re...

Page 2019: ...pontaneous PNC interchange took place in response to the occurrence of a major or minor alarm on the A PNC associated with fault class FC_ EAL This indicates that one or more Expansion Archangel Links are down Investigate any EXP PN alarms Adding 1 to the last two digits of the error code gives the PN number of the port network that reported the alarm 11003 points to port network 4 List config por...

Page 2020: ... error code indicate the fiber link number 01 64 of the fiber that reported the retired alarm List fiber link gives the location of the fiber p A spontaneous PNC interchange took place in response to the occurrence of a major or minor alarm on the A PNC associated with fault class FC_ SNIHW This indicates one or more faults on hardware connecting SNIs on different switch nodes Investigate any alar...

Page 2021: ...ce in response to the retiring of an alarm on the B PNC associated with fault class FC_BFD Use status pnc to look at the state of health indexes for the PNCs and investigate any associated alarms Adding 1 to the last two digits of the error code gives the PN number of the port network that reported the retired alarm 20203 points to port network 4 List config port network gives the cabinet number a...

Page 2022: ...s against SNI PEER Adding 1 to the last two digits of the error code gives the PN number of the port network that reported the alarm 21303 points to port network 4 List config port network gives the cabinet number associated with a port network ac A spontaneous PNC interchange took place in response to the occurrence of a major or minor alarm on the B PNC associated with fault class FC_ DS1 This i...

Page 2023: ...C interchange took place upon the unlocking of the PNCs with the set pnc unlock command ah A spontaneous PNC interchange took place upon the completion of a global refresh of the standby ai A demand interchange was executed with the reset pnc interchange command aj A demand interchange was executed with the reset pnc interchange command using the override and lock option ...

Page 2024: ... for the J58890CH unit consists of one battery assembly and charger The battery backup for the J58890CE unit consists of three 48V batteries and a battery charger Each cabinet so equipped has its own independent battery backup unit When power to the cabinet is interrupted a warning alarm is logged against AC POWER and the system draws power from the backup batteries This is known as Nominal Power ...

Page 2025: ...ke 30 hours to fully charge after being drained A fully charged battery pack should bridge two power failures without causing a low battery warning to occur Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger J58890CE 1 Move the power switch on the battery charger to OFF WARNING Always turn off the battery charger before replacing the batteries Failure to do so will result in damage to the 397C battery char...

Page 2026: ...tion unit J20 4 Remove the battery assembly from the rear of the cabinet 5 Install the new battery assembly in the reverse order 6 Plug the BIU back into the power distribution unit Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 522 Battery and Battery Charger Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence fir...

Page 2027: ...or a description of this test d See CABINET Cabinet Sensors on page 8 383 for a description of this test e See EXT DEV External Alarm for a description of this test f See RING GEN on page 8 1357 for a description of this test Table 8 523 System Technician Demanded Tests POWER Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Battery and Battery C...

Page 2028: ...ch off the charger and remove its white power cord 4 Verify that the power cord has at least 106 VAC 5 Verify that the connector on the rear of the charger is properly inserted 6 Re insert the charger power cord and switch on the charger 7 Plug the battery back in 8 Run the test environment The batteries will probably need charging and may be drained if there were power outages Reconnect the batte...

Page 2029: ...Restore power and the system will reboot No manual intervention is required 3 Rerun the test If the test still fails then the PN s MAINT Maintenance circuit pack could be reporting this condition incorrectly Resolve every alarm on this MO and rerun the test There are failures that can occur on the PN s Maintenance circuit pack that will not be detected by their respective maintenance but which wil...

Page 2030: ...er J58890CE before proceeding 3 Rerun the test If the test still fails then the PN s MAINT Maintenance circuit pack could be reporting this condition incorrectly There are failures that can occur on the PN s Maintenance circuit pack that will not be detected by their respective maintenance but which will cause many if not every environment test to fail If many environment tests are failing the sus...

Page 2031: ... their respective maintenance but which will cause many if not every environment test to fail If many environment tests are failing the suspect circuit pack depending on the system configuration should be replaced and the test rerun 3 Procedures for a Global MCC J58890CH a Look to see if any red LEDs are on on any of the rectifier modules or the BIU Battery Interface Unit located in the Power Dist...

Page 2032: ...ctifiers per cabinet per cabinet 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 4 If the number of rectifiers is correct replace the maintenance circuit pack in the PN 10 FAIL Error codes 2 and 8 have occurred Refer to these descriptions Also refer to this test s description for error code 14 12 FAIL Error codes 4 and 8 have occurred Refer to these descriptions Also refer to this test s description for error code 14 14 FAIL E...

Page 2033: ...multicarrier cabinets with battery backup For DC powered cabinets you cannot clear the error and it should be ignored MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the cabinet number indicated in the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log Full Name of MO POWER MINOR test environment UU Battery and Battery Charger Table 8 525 Battery and Battery Charger Error Log Entries Er...

Page 2034: ...sequence Notes a See AC POWER on page 8 4 for a description of this test b See CARR POW Carrier Power Supply on page 8 393 for a description of this test c See EMG XFER for a description of this test d See CABINET Cabinet Sensors on page 8 383 for a description of this test e See EXT DEV for a description of this test f See RING GEN on page 8 1357 for a description of this test Order of Investigat...

Page 2035: ...RT Battery charger is not connected DC powered cabinets do not have battery backup ignore this error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2028 ABORT Internal system error prevented the extinguishing of the Battery Charger status LED 1 Since this test is not relevant for DC powered systems an occurrence of this error indicates possible existence ...

Page 2036: ...ircuit pack The PGATE or PI can be used with the C LAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connectivity Control LAN Congestion Controls The switch activates congestion controls on C LAN when it detects buffers exceeding the threshold The switch releases the congestion controls when the C LAN reports that its buffer level has returned to normal levels MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm...

Page 2037: ...lear the alarm test port UUCSSpp long clear Table 8 527 PPP PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp s 1 a 0 SCOTCH Sync Looparound test ...

Page 2038: ...ong clear e Error Type 1281 System software received an indication that the far end has requested a disconnect of a session on this link This is a log only error f Error Type 1537 1538 Some or all port sessions sockets are down 1 Test the port test port UUCSSpp short 2 See Session Status Test 1286 on page 8 1322 for repair procedure to verify repair g Error Type 1793 1920 system software received ...

Page 2039: ...or repair procedures j Error Type 3585 TDM Port Loop around test 1285 failed 1 Test the port test port UUCsspp long 2 See TDM Loop Around Test 1285 on page 8 1318 for repair procedure System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Investigate errors in the order they appear in the table below Table 8 528 System Technician Demanded Tests PPP PT Order of Investigation Short Test Seque...

Page 2040: ...t The test fails Table 8 529 Test 1285 TDM Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT The port is in use 1 Determine port status status clan port UUCSSpp 2 Retry the command when the port is idle The port may be forced to the idle state by executing a busyout port UUCSS command 3 Escalate if the problem persists NOTE The busyout port command is destructive causin...

Page 2041: ...circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the pro...

Page 2042: ...pp 2 The port may be forced to the idle state by executing a busyout port UUCSSpp command NOTE This command is destructive causing every call and link using the port to be torn down 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 If this problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the problem pe...

Page 2043: ...link n or display data module 2 If the link is not enabled enable the link change data module 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1125 ABORT PPP link not in service 1 Verify whether ppp link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 If the ppp link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persi...

Page 2044: ...the problem persists re administer the PPP connection through a different PPP port if available 4 If the problem still persists or if there are no other available PPP ports replace the circuit pack 1007 FAIL Ping to the destination failed due to the destination down 1 A PPP destination or a component in the path e g DS1 trunk may be down Check the status of the destination or other components in t...

Page 2045: ...eset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 1 FAIL System sof...

Page 2046: ...led enable the link change data module 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1125 ABORT PPP Link is not in service 1 Verify whether PPP link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 If the PPP link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system...

Page 2047: ...ath e g DS1 trunks 4 If the destination and other components in the path are in service and the test still fails execute busyout port UUCSSpp and release port UCCSSpp and repeat the test 5 If the test still fails reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS Repeat the test 6 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack PASS PPP link is up Table 8 533 Tes...

Page 2048: ...rnal CDR output devices include 94A Local Storage Unit LSU TELESEER CDR Unit Call Accounting System CAS Call Detail Recording Unit CDRU Printer Host computer Personal computer PC Customer provided equipment CDR Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the system and an external CDR output device The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis detection of e...

Page 2049: ...e next step 3 Enter the status data extension command and verify whether the data extension is in the in service idle state If the data extension is not available then look for the extension number in the Alt Name field of the Hardware Error Log and see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 for resolutions 4 Is the external CDR output device available Make sure that the CDR output device ...

Page 2050: ...he display system parameters maintenance command to see the start time of daily maintenance If the error occurs and is resolved during of daily maintenance it can be ignored d This error indicates that the CDR output device is in an off line state for example due to paper jam or paper out for a printer device The CDR link is torn down Check the CDR output device and act promptly to put it back to ...

Page 2051: ...e testing sequence Link Tear Down Test 213 This test is destructive This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external CDR output device If the link has been disconnected already this test just returns PASS Every resource allocated for a CDR link is released after this test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructiv...

Page 2052: ...commendation 10 ABORT Internal system error 20 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 See Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link for instructions 1010 ABORT The CDR link has been busied out to out of service 1 Enter release cdr primary secondary command to release the CDR link from busyout state 2 Retry test cdr primary s...

Page 2053: ...ty Audits MO has no alarms and no tests Certain errors are logged to the Hardware Error Log for information purposes only Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Note a These errors indicate that a system recovery action has been taken because one or more software processes failed to respond to a sanity audit in a timely fashion As a result of the recovery action the system may have temporarily...

Page 2054: ...by_PN_Check test failed This periodic test 1 Queries the standby media server about the state of health of its PNs 2 Compares the acquired information to an administered value A failure indicates that a mismatch occurred and that the standby media server is out of sync If this test fails 2 consecutive times the following Major alarm is logged 1 ACT SME A 2 MAJ Standby Port Network check failed Sys...

Page 2055: ... Pack on page 8 1872 Ringing Caused by Maintenance Testing Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing disturbs the customer or the terminal equipment disable it in the Tests field of the change station extension form Be aware that this action will also disable Test 35 on that station MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to R...

Page 2056: ...ot connected when ringing was attempted Run the short test via the test port UUCSSpp command and follow the procedure for the results of Test 48 b Error type 15 A software audit error that does not indicate hardware malfunction Run the short test sequence and investigate associated errors Table 8 539 Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to...

Page 2057: ...ension form to n On some software releases this will also disable Tests 7 and 35 e Error type 2817 Indicates that the endpoint caused a large number of control channel messages to be sent to the switch within a short period of time 50 or more CCMS uplinks within 10 seconds The station will be taken out of service for 30 seconds due to the hyperactivity This may be completely normal during heavy tr...

Page 2058: ...rted Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment ot...

Page 2059: ...etry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail determine whether the customer is experiencing problems on this line Replace the circuit pack only if the customer is experiencing problems PASS The port s battery feed chip can provide power to the station equipment to detect on off hook but may not be able to supply power for touch tones If touch tones are inope...

Page 2060: ...allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem The switchhook audit failed The other updates were not performed because of this failure This may occur when the audit is performed at the same time the terminal equipment goes off hook Use the s...

Page 2061: ...as aborted Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use Wait until the port is idle 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may...

Page 2062: ...e 8 1357 3 Check all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch Then run the test again 4 If the test still fails the set may be defective Check the set and replace it if necessary 5 Some terminal equipment could fail even when it is connected properly If so disable the test using the change station extension command enter n into the Test field Note that this action also disables T...

Page 2063: ...e error conditions which results in media server controlled testing There are instances where the service state of a station is mentioned The different service states that apply to a remote digital line station are as follows MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or ...

Page 2064: ...terminal If nonvolatile memory fails with power still present the terminal reverts to its default factory settings except for its A law mu law companding settings which are stored in RAM If power is removed after the nonvolatile memory fails the terminal reverts to its factory default settings NOTE The mu law companding mode is assigned as a default setting at the factory For the United States a p...

Page 2065: ...t restart regardless of whether the parameters have been downloaded previously 2 Periodic tests If the download flag is still set when periodic tests are run on a terminal a download action will occur This action is required in case a terminal could not be downloaded previously either because the terminal was off hook when the System first booted Translations associated with downloadable parameter...

Page 2066: ...aded automatically when it is activated using the TTI Terminal Translation Initialization feature Therefore no special user actions are required for TTI NOTE Plugging the station cord into a terminal does not automatically cause the terminal to be downloaded If this terminal has factory defaults or if the terminal has been previously downloaded with parameters different than those desired use one ...

Page 2067: ...atus station and status attendant screens display the current download status of individual 84xx 603 and 301B1 terminals in the Download Status field The possible download states are Possible reasons for no terminal download include Terminal is off hook Terminal detected a bad checksum Terminal detected a bad or missing EEPROM refer to hardware error log Terminal is busy programming data from a pr...

Page 2068: ... procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 1 20 40987 None WARNING OFF 18 b 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WARNING OFF re port UUCSSpp 257 c 40971 None 513 d 0 Station Digital Audits test 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 6 767 e 40964 None WARNING OFF 769 f 40963 40988 None WARNING OFF 1025 g None WARNING OFF 1281 Any Station Digital Audits test 17 WARNING OFF test port UUCSSpp sh r 4 153...

Page 2069: ...rror Type 18 Logged when the port in question is busied out by maintenance personnel Make sure the port is released from busyout by the release port UUCSSpp PCSSpp command c Error Type 257 Indicates problems transmitting to the voice terminal which can be caused by defective wiring Defective wiring can cause varying degrees of problems on different types of sets d Error Type 513 The result of an I...

Page 2070: ...aints are received Otherwise make sure the voice terminal is connected check for defective wiring check for a defective voice terminal and move the voice terminal to a jack that is closer to the switch in terms of feet of wiring between the jack and the switch If the problem persists replace the circuit pack Once the problem has been resolved the alarm disappears after a predetermined amount of ti...

Page 2071: ...estoration test In this test the processor requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port and an attempt is made to turn on the power supply to the station If no current is drawn the station is probably not connected If an overcurrent condition is sensed there may be a short in the loop A message is returned reporting that either the EPF was successfully turned on or that an overcurrent condi...

Page 2072: ...t 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Electronic Power Feed test passed The message to turn on the power to the station was successfully sent to the port 1 Although this test will never actually return a FAIL result except for the Internal system error described above it will log an error indicating the real resul...

Page 2073: ...tation command to verify the state of the station 2 Make sure the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use display port UUCSSpp to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine t...

Page 2074: ...st to the station The station returns its configuration information and health information The information is checked and a pass fail result is provided Ringer update This updates the digital telephone s ringer state according to the media server s records DTMF Administration update This sends the digital station a message to refresh its default value sending touch tones only in the primary inform...

Page 2075: ...ny outstanding circuit pack maintenance problems 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 5 ABORT Ringer update aborted due to station being in ready for service or out of service state 6 ABORT This port may have been busied out by a system technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 port busied out for this port If this error is present release the port using the release s...

Page 2076: ... Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS Station audits passed This Digital Port circuit pack is functioning properly 1 If complaints persist investigate by using other port tests and by examining the station wiring and connections Table 8 548 Test 17 Station Digital Audits Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 2077: ...er of routes that were added from the TN799DP C LAN route tables MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO REM OFF MINOR ping node name ip address addr Remote Office REM OFF WARNING pi...

Page 2078: ...egistered endpoint on the Remote Office The switch expects keep alive update information within a certain time period and if that time limit is exceeded an error is logged The error is a log only error because there is no way to determine which entity has failed However the aux data associated with this error indicates whether the endpoint that failed to respond was a DCP Analog or Signaling Group...

Page 2079: ...ults in loss of ringing on analog phones Ringing on digital and hybrid phones is not affected The ringing voltage is monitored by the Tone Clock circuit pack In a port network with duplicated Tone Clocks the active Tone Clock performs this function In an PN made up of single carrier cabinets the Tone Clock monitors the ringing voltage of only the carrier where it resides The TN2036 Voltage Range c...

Page 2080: ...passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test environment UU 1 Analog Ring Generator Query 118 MAJOR ON test environment UU r 3 Table 8 551 Multicarrier Cabinet Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Analog Ring Generator Initialization test 117 X...

Page 2081: ...ription of this test Notes a See DC POWER for a description of this test b See EMG XFER for a description of this test c See EXT DEV for a description of this test Table 8 552 Single Carrier Cabinet Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Analog Ring Generator Initialization test 117 X X ND Analog Ring Generator Query test 118 X X ND Si...

Page 2082: ...1001 1003 1115 2012 2100 ABORT The system software is unable to determine the active Tone Clock circuit pack unable to allocated the resources necessary to run the test or unable to send a down link message 1 Wait for the green LED on the active Tone Clock to go out use the status port network command to determine the active Tone Clock circuit pack 2 Rerun the test If the test aborts again see TDM...

Page 2083: ...cabinet system 1 If this is a duplicated system then determine the active Tone Clock circuit pack by issuing a status port network command Make the standby Tone Clock circuit pack active via the set tone clock PC command and rerun the test a If the test passes then the trouble is with the now standby Tone Clock circuit pack See TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 for details on replacing the...

Page 2084: ...ew stand by Tone Clock circuit pack See TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 for details on replacing the standby Tone Clock circuit pack After the circuit pack is replaced make this Tone Clock active again by issuing the set tone clock PC command and rerun the test b If the test fails then proceed with Step 2 2 Unseat every analog circuit pack in the cabinet that contains the active Tone Clo...

Page 2085: ...rt on page 8 1364 for related port information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO S SYN BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Speech Synthesis circuit pack S SYN BD WARNING test board UU...

Page 2086: ...ia a voice time slot The station set may be connected to the Speech Synthesis port through either a line or trunk circuit When there is an incoming call to a port the listen network time slot is connected to the DTMF receiver input and the talk network time slot is connected to the SSD output This enables the Speech Synthesis port to support speech synthesis features or touch tone input with voice...

Page 2087: ...t test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port UUCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 17672 None 18 0 busyout port UUCSSpp WARNING OFF release port UUCSSpp 130 b None WARNING ON test port UUCSSpp sh 257 Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake test 168 MAJOR ON test port UUCSSpp sh r 2 513 17922 Spe...

Page 2088: ... Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake test 168 X X ND NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver test 163 X ND Speech Synthesis Memory test 166 X X ND Speech Synthesis DSP Tone test 165 X X ND Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry test 167 X X ND Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry test 164 X ...

Page 2089: ... the test and the test has been aborted Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already exist...

Page 2090: ...ests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test and the test has been aborted Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an alre...

Page 2091: ...call and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up ...

Page 2092: ...Receiver Inquiry Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off...

Page 2093: ...o abort verify that every Tone Detector circuit in the system is functioning correctly by checking the Error Log and using the test board UUCSS long command Replace any faulty circuit packs containingTone Detector circuits and repeat the test 3 If the test continues to abort replace the Speech Synthesis circuit pack 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time...

Page 2094: ...and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1019 ABORT Test is already running on a different port possibly due to background maintenance activity Only one of these tests may be active on a circuit pack at a time 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5...

Page 2095: ...n this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request...

Page 2096: ... resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the ...

Page 2097: ...ute intervals up to 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle amber LED is off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1...

Page 2098: ...at the SNI can communicate with and compares this data to the administered data For SNC circuit packs test 759 queries the SNC for SNCs and SNIs in the same switch node carrier that the SNC can communicate with and compares this data to the administered data Switch node carriers are part of port network connectivity PNC For background information about PNC refer to the Maintenance Architecture and...

Page 2099: ...or Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS sh r 1 5000 a Any processor route audit 760 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS l rep 1 6000 b 1 configuration a...

Page 2100: ...or refer to FAIL code 138 for test 759 f A peer link does not exist to another equipped SNI The aux data equals the slot number of the SNI to which this SNI or SNC does not have a peer link To resolve this error refer to the FAIL code for test 759 corresponding to the aux data on the following table g A link does not exist to one of the SNCs If the aux data is not 1 or 2 the link from this SNI to ...

Page 2101: ...ested is a Switch Node Clock circuit pack slots 10 or 12 SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack when the circuit pack tested is a Switch Node Interface circuit pack slots 2 9 or 13 20 This test is run via the test board short or test board long command for SNI circuit packs or SNC circuit packs For SNI circuit packs this test queries the SNI for SNCs in the same switch node carrier SNI peers DS1Cs and EI or SNI ...

Page 2102: ... The test led command can be used in this case to check connectivity 1 Run the test led port network command on each administered port network and verify that the LEDs on the correct port network are lit 2 If they are not lit check that the fiber connections to the port network are consistent with the administered fibers list fiber link that does not light the LEDs as expected 3 Run test led switc...

Page 2103: ...at are administered to and terminate on the distant switch node 2 Run the test led port network command on an EPN connected to the distant switch node and verify the LEDs on the correct EPN are lit 3 Use the status sys link command and select the active EI in the IPSI connected EPN connected to the distant EPN under test The display will show the path from the IPSI connected EPN and the SNI to SNI...

Page 2104: ...llocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2301 ABORT The software timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up ...

Page 2105: ...hysical configuration and is correct insert the missing circuit packs in this switch node carrier If administration does not match the physical configuration and is incorrect change the administration and run this test again If none of the administered boards in this switch node carrier were inserted fix any other SN CONF errors by following the associated repair procedures for SN CONF Use display...

Page 2106: ...tion for the switch node carrier The active SNC receives timing for the switch node carrier from each SNI circuit pack in the carrier and chooses the SNI with the best timing reference for the switch node carrier timing signal the SNC puts out on the clock buses The timing reference for each SNI is derived from the fiber signal to each SNI The active SNC chooses the SNI to receive timing from by c...

Page 2107: ...e signals SNC circuit packs are part of port network connectivity PNC For background information about PNC refer to the Maintenance Architecture and Hardware Configurations chapters Figure 8 79 A Center Stage Switch Configuration Online Switcher OLS power supply carrier EI PPN 21 EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN 20 18 17 16 15...

Page 2108: ...duplicated PNC an SNC in a standby switch node carrier is lit since it is providing timing for the standby carrier Clear Firmware Counters Command SNC firmware generates error reports independently of technician demanded tests Therefore the test board UUCSS clear command will not affect the error status reported by firmware The clear firmware counters command will clear every firmware generated er...

Page 2109: ...fixed and off board alarms associated with the problem are still active Replacing SNC Circuit Packs WARNING Do not power down a Switch Node carrier to replace a circuit pack Replacing an SNC on a system with unduplicated SNCs disrupts service High Reliability System Duplicated Server and SNCs Unduplicated PNC This procedure is nondestructive 1 If the SNC circuit pack to be replaced is the active S...

Page 2110: ... status pnc Verify that the component to be replaced is on the standby PNC Enter busyout pnc Enter busyout board UUCSS UUCSS represents the cabinet carrier slot address of the circuit pack to be replaced Replace the circuit pack Enter release board UUCSS CAUTION Do not busyout any Expansion Interface circuit pack after this point Enter test alarms long clear for category exp intf Wait 5 minutes fo...

Page 2111: ... BD error type 1793 exists in the hardware error log follow the associated repair procedures for SNC BD error 1793 2 Enter display errors and if no SNI BD 1025 errors exist in the error log replace the active SNC Table 8 566 SNC Board Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run th...

Page 2112: ...replace the active SNC circuit pack Otherwise a Insert an SNC circuit pack 3 Check the error log via display errors If SNIs in the switch node carrier also have problems communicating with the active SNC i e error code 257 is logged against SNI BD then replace the active SNC 4 Replace the standby SNC circuit pack 5 Retry the test board command Check the error log via display errors If this error i...

Page 2113: ...cked in the following repair procedure and the status switch node command should not be used when this error type occurs If the switch node carrier has duplicate SNCs 1 Replace the SNC that does not have its yellow LED lit 2 Retry the test board command Check the error log via display errors If this error is still in the error log replace the SNC that has its yellow LED lit If the switch node carr...

Page 2114: ...r Test 777 Configuration Audit 759 This test is nondestructive This test is run via the test board short or test board long command for SNC circuit packs For SNC circuit packs this test queries the SNC for SNCs and SNIs in the same switch node carrier that the SNC can communicate with and compares this data to the administered data Failures of this test cause entries in the error and alarm logs ag...

Page 2115: ...n the carrier light but the LEDs on this board do not light run test 760 via test board UUCSS l for the active SNC in this carrier Wait 5 minutes and then try step 1 one more time If the LEDs on this board still do not light replace this board Replacing an SNC may be service interrupting See SNC BD Switch Node Clock Circuit Pack on page 8 1384 for the procedure for replacing an SNC 3 If none of th...

Page 2116: ... error persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 2 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 2 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the s...

Page 2117: ...rror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 3 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 3 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sam...

Page 2118: ...rror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 4 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 4 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sam...

Page 2119: ...rror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 5 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 5 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sam...

Page 2120: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 6 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 6 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the same...

Page 2121: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 7 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 7 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the same...

Page 2122: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 8 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 8 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the same...

Page 2123: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 9 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 9 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the same...

Page 2124: ...o have problems communicating with the active SNC i e error code 257 is logged against SNI BD then replace the active SNC 3 Replace the standby SNC circuit pack 4 Retry the test board command If this test continues to fail replace the active SNC If this test was run on the active SNC and if the switch node carrier is administered with only one SNC 1 Replace the SNC 112 FAIL cont d If this test was...

Page 2125: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 13 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 13 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2126: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 14 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 14 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2127: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 15 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 15 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2128: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 16 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 16 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2129: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 17 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 17 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2130: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 18 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 18 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2131: ...ror persists reset the active SNC circuit pack with reset board UUCSS If the error still persists replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI is supposed to be installed in slot 19 insert one 3 Display errors for category pnc If the SNC has SNC BD error 513 or SNC LINK errors with aux data 1 pointing to other SNIs besides the one in slot 19 replace the active SNC circuit pack 4 If SNIs in the sa...

Page 2132: ...it pack 4 If SNIs in the same carrier have SNI BD error 257 logged indicating they are having trouble communicating with the SNC replace the active SNC circuit pack 5 If the SNC being tested has SNC LINK error type 3841 replace the SNI in slot 20 Replacing an SNI may interrupt service See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI 6 If the SNC being tested still ...

Page 2133: ...etry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2301 ABORT The software timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2306 ABORT None of the circuit packs in this swi...

Page 2134: ...rocedures for SN CONF Use display errors with category pnc to view SN CONF errors Next check if any INLs LNLs or RNLs are down see SYS LINK System Links for fixing link problems PASS If this test passes every administered circuit pack in this switch node carrier was inserted 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check that SNC board is properly translated and inserted 2 Run the test again...

Page 2135: ... this test reports failures the results screen for the test board command will show FAIL with no FAIL code The error log must then be displayed via display errors with category PNC to view every SNC related errors SNC BD SNC LINK and SNC REF Table 8 569 TEST 777 Failure Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up ...

Page 2136: ... a Use the list fiber link command to obtain a list of the fiber connections to this carrier b Check the LEDs on every SNI and EI and fix any fiber problems c Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER erro...

Page 2137: ...reset the errors and alarms may take a while to come back therefore the reset board command can mask real problems 3 Run the test again If it fails the ID chip on board may be bad Replace the board and retest Table 8 570 TEST 778 SNC On Board Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1...

Page 2138: ...oblems associated with the connectivity of this carrier to the server a Use the list fiber link command to obtain a list of the fiber connections to this carrier b Check the LEDs on every SNI and EI and fix any fiber problems c Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated r...

Page 2139: ...est again If it fails the ID chip on board may be bad Replace the board and retest Table 8 571 TEST 779 TPN Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 1 Retry the command at 1 m...

Page 2140: ...btain a list of the fiber connections to this carrier b Check the LEDs on every SNI and EI and fix any fiber problems c Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries FAIL The test failed Replace ...

Page 2141: ...d should be used If the SNC is standby and the reset board command is executed the active SNC is told by software to reset the standby SNC via the TPN link An SNC should be reset instead of reseating the circuit pack The reset board command should almost never be used on an SNC It may be necessary to use the reset board command if the SNC circuit pack gets into a mode where it cannot communicate w...

Page 2142: ...is board fix any problems associated with the connectivity of this carrier to the server a Use the list fiber link command to obtain a list of the fiber connections to this carrier b Check the LEDs on every SNI and EI and fix any fiber problems c Enter display errors and follow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Foll...

Page 2143: ...t the board An SNC should be reset instead of reseating the circuit pack The reset board command should almost never be used on an SNC It may be necessary to use the reset board command if the SNC circuit pack gets into a mode where it cannot communicate with software If an SNC with active errors and alarms is reset the errors and alarms may take a while to come back therefore the reset board comm...

Page 2144: ...s SNC Link Table 8 573 SNC LINK Hardware Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data SNI Slot1 Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 02 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS r 1 1 1 a 2 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1 2 b 2 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 257 1 a 3 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 257 2 b 3 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF t...

Page 2145: ... Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 2561 2 b 15 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 2817 1 a 16 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 2817 2 b 16 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3073 1 a 17 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3073 2 b 17 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3329 1 a 18 Failure audit 777 MINOR OFF test ...

Page 2146: ...dministration again If the error still remains replace the active SNC circuit pack If an SNI should be installed in this slot but is missing insert an SNI circuit pack 6 Replace the SNI that the SNC is complaining about 7 Retry the command If this error is still in the error log continue with the following steps 8 Replace the SNC circuit pack 9 If a standby SNC the one with its yellow LED off has ...

Page 2147: ...it pack 7 If a standby SNC the one with its yellow LED off has this error escalate the problem Status switch node will also display the active and standby SNCs 8 Retry the command If this error is still in the error log escalate the problem System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the ...

Page 2148: ... 2 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS r 1 1 a Any 2 Failure audit 777 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 257 a Any 3 Failure audit 777 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 513 a Any 4 Failure audit 777 MAJOR OFF test board UUCSS r 1 769 a Any 5 Fail...

Page 2149: ...ve SNC in the carrier does not have this error reset the standby SNC via the reset board command The active and standby SNCs are displayed via status switch node If this error comes back after the standby has been reset replace the standby SNC 3 Retry the command If this error is still in the error log continue with the following steps 4 If the active SNC has this error use the set switch node clo...

Page 2150: ...he Configuration audit 759 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence See SNC BD Switch Node Clock Circuit Pack on page 8 1384 for descriptions of tests and results Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Configuration audit 759 X X ND Failure audit 777 X X ND Processor Route audit ...

Page 2151: ... These connections are referred to as fiber links The Switch Node Clock SNC provides timing for the SNIs in the entire carrier When two SNCs reside in the same switch node carrier one is in active mode and one is in standby mode The yellow LED on the active SNC will be on solid The yellow LED on the standby SNC will be off See SYNC Port Network Synchronization for an explanation of how SNIs are in...

Page 2152: ...slot number 19 I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S C N S C N S An EI or a DS1C circuit pack may reside in this slot A DS1C circuit pack may reside in this slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI EPN EI 21 PPN EI carrier node swit...

Page 2153: ...PN EPN EPN EPN EPN EPN EPN EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EI EPN EI PPN EI I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S 19 slot number switch node carrier 21 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 E C N S C N S E C N S C N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S I N S 19 slot number 21 20 18 17 ...

Page 2154: ...enance testing in progress The red and green LEDs will come on and then turn off when the circuit pack is reset NOTE If the red LED is on without any alarms active against the circuit pack replace the SNI circuit pack This indicates that SNI firmware has detected a fault and is unable to notify software The yellow LED indicates status information as follows SNI Yellow LED states Condition LED on L...

Page 2155: ... the add fiber link command A DS1C converter complex is added to a fiber link via the add fiber link command also For a duplicated PNC configuration administration must be done in the following order before SNIs will be inserted 1 Obtain a license file to activate PNC duplication 2 Cabinet Administration The switch node carriers and duplicate switch node carriers must be administered into the prop...

Page 2156: ...command should not be used as a replacement for the repair procedures associated with the hardware error log entries This command may be useful if a problem has been fixed and off board alarms associated with the problem are still active Replacing SNI Circuit Pack Unduplicated PNC WARNING Do not power down a Switch Node carrier to replace a circuit pack WARNING Replacing a Switch Node Interface ci...

Page 2157: ... the component to be replaced is on the standby PNC 2 Enter busyout pnc 3 Enter busyout board UUCSS UUCSS represents the cabinet carrier slot address of the circuit pack to be replaced 4 Replace the circuit pack 5 Enter release board UUCSS CAUTION Do not busyout any Expansion Interface circuit pack after this point 6 Enter test alarms long clear for category exp intf 7 Wait 5 minutes for SNI BD SN...

Page 2158: ... not inserted then NO BOARD is displayed for each board in the entire PNC either the a pnc or the b pnc As a result the link between the IPSI connected EPN s EI on the PNC where SNI and SNC circuit packs were not inserted and the connected SNI does not function properly If this case applies perform the following steps 1 Run the test board UUCSS command on the IPSI connected EPN s EI and fix any pr...

Page 2159: ...command 2 Disconnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave transceiver behind the circuit pack Expansion Interface or Switch Node Interface slot NOTE Note which is the transmit fiber and which is the receive fiber for proper re connection at the end of this procedure The fiber connected to the transmit side of the lightwave transceiver on one circuit pack should be connected to th...

Page 2160: ...ng the SNI If the yellow LED was blinking before starting this procedure and the yellow LED is not blinking now this circuit pack Expansion Interface or Switch Node Interface and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly 5 Replace faulty component s and reconnect the original fiber Be sure to reconnect the fibers properly as noted in Step 2 6 Release Expansion Interface circuit pack or Sw...

Page 2161: ...UUCSS r 1 18 c 0 busyout board UUCSS WARNING OFF release board UUCSS 125 d None MINOR ON 257 e any failure audit 777 a MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 513 f any failure audit 777 a MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 769 g any failure audit 777 a MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1025 h any failure audit 777 a MAJOR MINOR WARNING ON OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1281 i ...

Page 2162: ... display errors for other SNI circuit packs with the 257 SNI BD error If other SNI circuit packs in the same switch node carrier have error 257 then replace the active SNC 2 Replace this SNI 3 Replace the active SNC in the same switch node carrier 4 Enter display errors and if this error is still in the error log follow normal escalation procedures f This error indicates that the SNI cannot commun...

Page 2163: ...NC s location b If the problem goes away replace the SNC that was previously active Then set the SNC that was just replaced to active via the set switch node clock UUCSS command If the problem returns assume that the SNC that was just replaced was not at fault and go to step 2 below c If the problem persists switch back to the previously active SNC via the set switch node clock command and go to s...

Page 2164: ...ate with its neighbor The SNI is at fault 1 Replace the SNI circuit pack l This error indicates that the SNI cannot communicate with one of its peers The SNI is at fault 1 Replace the SNI circuit pack System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system For example by clearing error cod...

Page 2165: ...rvals up to 3 times 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2301 ABORT The software timer could not be set before sending the downlink message necessary to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2302 ABORT Software received incorrect message data from the SNI circuit pack 1 R...

Page 2166: ... with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 102 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 2 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD erro...

Page 2167: ...t Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 3 104 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 4 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 4 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair procedures for ...

Page 2168: ...s replaced first Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 5 106 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 6 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 6 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair ...

Page 2169: ...t Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 7 108 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 8 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 8 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair procedures for ...

Page 2170: ... first Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 9 113 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 13 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 13 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair procedur...

Page 2171: ... Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 14 115 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 15 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 15 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair procedures fo...

Page 2172: ...d first Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 16 117 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 17 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 17 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair proced...

Page 2173: ... Proceed as follows 3 Replace this SNI 4 Replace the SNI in slot 18 119 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 19 over the circuit path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 19 Use display errors to find any SNI BD errors and check display alarms to see whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associated repair procedures fo...

Page 2174: ...L The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with its neighbor via the circuit path 1 Fix any on board errors SNI BD EXP INTF and or DS1C BD against the components of this fiber link by using display errors and display alarms and following the associated repair procedures Use the list fiber link command to find the fiber link associated with this SNI The display fiber link command can then be used to...

Page 2175: ...ld almost never be used on an SNI It may be necessary to use the reset board command if the SNI circuit pack gets into a mode where it cannot communicate with software If an SNI with active errors and alarms is reset the errors and alarms may take a while to come back therefore the reset board command can mask real problems 3 Run the test again If it fails the ID chip on board may be bad Replace t...

Page 2176: ...ave transceiver exists 2 Otherwise check the lightwave transceiver connections 3 If OK replace the lightwave transceiver If a fiber out of frame condition exists and lightwave transceivers are used check that the lightwave transceivers are of the same type that is both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave transceivers 9823a is used for distances up...

Page 2177: ...ed repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 127 FAIL The data is not correctly looped around 1 Check the lightwave transceiver or metallic physical connections 2 If connections OK replace the lightwave transceiver or the metallic ...

Page 2178: ... has not been busied out Busyout the SNI circuit pack with busyout board Repeat the test board UUCSS long command 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2300 ABORT The downlink message necessary to run this test could not be sent 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2301 ABORT The soft...

Page 2179: ...F error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 127 FAIL The data is not correctly looped around 1 Replace the SNI circuit pack PASS No problems a...

Page 2180: ...witch Node Configuration SN CONF with the board location of the SNI or SNC Incorrectly Connected Administered Fibers Some physically connected fibers that do not match fiber administration can cause port network problems that are not detected and alarmed by PNC tests The symptoms will usually be many phone calls not working correctly and port network component alarms because of translation mismatc...

Page 2181: ...ystem link to a port network connected to the distant switch node The status sys link command can be used to determine the boards and fiber links in the path from an IPSI connected EPN to a specific port network A specific SNI to SNI fiber connection must be in the system link path to be checked with the port network LED test One method to force an SNI to SNI fiber connection to be used as a syste...

Page 2182: ... to determine the new path from the IPSI connected EPN to the this distant switch 6 Run the test led port network command on an EPN connected to the distant switch node and verify that the LEDs on the correct EPN are lit 7 Repeat steps 4 6 until the last SNI to SNI fiber to this distant switch node has been tested Table 8 579 TEST 759 Configuration Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommen...

Page 2183: ... EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1...

Page 2184: ...an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER error type 513 replace the SNI in slot 4 Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure f...

Page 2185: ...may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER error type 1281 replace the SNI in slot 7 Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for rep...

Page 2186: ...See SNC BD Switch Node Clock Circuit Pack on page 8 1384 for the procedure for replacing an SNC If other SNI circuit packs in the same carrier do not have SNI BD error type 257 logged proceed to step 2 2 Replace this SNI Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI 3 Replace the active SNC in the same switch node car...

Page 2187: ...an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER error type 2561 replace the SNI in slot 15 Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure...

Page 2188: ...an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI To view SNI PEER errors use the display errors command with category PNC PEER Retry the command 3 If the SNI being tested has SNI PEER error type 3329 replace the SNI in slot 18 Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure...

Page 2189: ... is administered but the SNI has an SNI neighbor 1 Administer the SNI on a fiber link to the SNI neighbor it is connected to via the add fiber link next command Or remove both fiber endpoints i e this SNI and its SNI neighbor and remove the fiber endpoints from circuit pack administration via change circuit pack 135 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with its neighbor The SNI has an admi...

Page 2190: ...ink associated with this SNI by 1 Determine which fiber that this SNI is an endpoint of by checking list fiber link 2 Remove this fiber with the remove fiber link command 3 Add the fiber back via add fiber link and do not administer the DS1 converter complex at this time 140 FAIL The SNI is physically connected to a DS1C but is not administered to be connected to a DS1C Either add the DS1 converte...

Page 2191: ... command if the SNI circuit pack gets into a mode where it cannot communicate with software If an SNI with active errors and alarms is reset the errors and alarms may take a while to come back therefore the reset board command can mask real problems 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check that board is properly translated and inserted 2 Run the test again If it fails reset the board A...

Page 2192: ...ot responding to test requests sent by software 1 Run the test led switch node for the switch node where the SNI resides to verify whether the LEDs on the board light 2 If the LEDs on the other boards in the carrier light but the LEDs on this board do not light run test 760 via test board UUCSS l for the active SNC in this carrier Wait 5 minutes and then try step 1 one more time If the LEDs on thi...

Page 2193: ... one of the firmware tests run during its reset sequence the red LED will stay on and the circuit pack should be replaced 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check that board is properly translated and inserted 2 Run the test again If it fails reset the board An SNI should be reset instead of reseating the circuit pack The reset board command should almost never be used on an SNI It may...

Page 2194: ... to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2302 ABORT Software received incorrect message data from the SNI circuit pack 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2303 ABORT The SNI circuit pack responded that the software test requested is invalid 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2304 ABORT SNI firmware is not able to run the tes...

Page 2195: ...low the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 102 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 2 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 2 Use t...

Page 2196: ...eplaced first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 3 104 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 4 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 4 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the a...

Page 2197: ...first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 5 106 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 6 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 6 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associate...

Page 2198: ...eplaced first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 7 108 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 8 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 8 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the a...

Page 2199: ...irst 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 9 113 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 13 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 13 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associat...

Page 2200: ...placed first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 14 115 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 15 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 15 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the...

Page 2201: ...first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 16 117 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 17 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 17 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the associ...

Page 2202: ...placed first 3 Replace the SNI being tested 4 Replace the SNI in slot 18 119 FAIL The SNI circuit pack cannot communicate with the SNI in slot 19 over the packet path 1 Fix any on board SNI BD errors against this SNI and the SNI in slot 19 Use the display errors command to find any SNI BD errors and use the display alarms command to determine whether the errors have on board alarms Then follow the...

Page 2203: ...splay errors command check the error log for other SNI circuit packs with SNI PEER error type 3841 If other SNI circuit packs have SNI PEER error type 3841 errors replace the SNI in slot 20 Replacing an SNI may be service interrupting See SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack on page 8 1429 for the procedure for replacing an SNI NOTE If other SNI circuit packs do not have SNI PEER error type 3841 errors the pro...

Page 2204: ...iber link the SNI Fiber Out of Frame Query 989 reports whether a fiber out of frame condition exists for an SNI endpoint and the Expansion Interface Fiber Out of Frame Query test 238 reports whether a fiber out of frame condition exists for an Expansion Interface endpoint 5 Replace the lightwave transceivers if present 6 Replace one of the endpoint boards 7 Replace the other endpoint board 8 Repla...

Page 2205: ...lures the results screen for the test board command will show FAIL with no FAIL code The error log must then be displayed via display errors with category PNC to view every SNI BD and FIBER LK error and category PNC PEER to view every SNI PEER error Table 8 582 TEST 777 Failure Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inter...

Page 2206: ... EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty FAIL The SNI circuit pack reported failures or retransmitted a cleared failure message 1 If this is the first time this test was run run the test again If there...

Page 2207: ...the board An SNI should be reset instead of reseating the circuit pack The reset board command should almost never be used on an SNI It may be necessary to use the reset board command if the SNI circuit pack gets into a mode where it cannot communicate with software If an SNI with active errors and alarms is reset the errors and alarms may take a while to come back therefore the reset board comman...

Page 2208: ...2 Otherwise check the lightwave transceiver connections 3 If OK replace the lightwave transceiver If a fiber out of frame condition exists and lightwave transceivers are used check that the lightwave transceivers are of the same type that is both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave transceivers 9823a is used for distances up to 4900 feet 9823b is ...

Page 2209: ...ow the associated repair procedures for any EXP INTF error entries associated with the controlling IPSI connected EPN d Follow the associated repair procedures for any SYNC SNI BD SNC BD FIBER LK or SNI PEER error entries 4 Follow the procedure described above SNI Manual Loopback to determine whether the circuit pack or the fiber connection is faulty 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the co...

Page 2210: ...he lightwave transceivers are of the same type that is both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave transceivers 9823a is used for distances up to 4900 feet 9823b is used for distances up to 25 000 feet 3 Perform the Fiber Fault Isolation Procedure described in Chapter 5 4 Replace this SNI circuit pack 5 Replace the connected circuit pack 143 FAIL The...

Page 2211: ...htwave transceivers are of the same type that is both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave transceivers 9823a is used for distances up to 4900 feet 9823b is used for distances up to 25 000 feet 3 Perform the Fiber Fault Isolation Procedure described in Chapter 5 4 Replace this SNI circuit pack 5 Replace the connected circuit pack 145 FAIL The SNI c...

Page 2212: ...is both are 9823a or both are 9823b If they are not the same type replace one of the lightwave transceivers 9823a is used for distances up to 4900 feet 9823b is used for distances up to 25 000 feet 3 Perform the Fiber Fault Isolation Procedure described in Chapter 5 4 Replace this SNI circuit pack 5 Replace the connected circuit pack PASS No problems associated with this test are detected on the S...

Page 2213: ...t where the circuit pack resides 01 21 Full Name of MO SNI PEER MAJOR test board UUCSS s SNI Peer Link SNI PEER MINOR test board UUCSS s SNI Peer Link SNI PEER WARNING test board UUCSS s SNI Peer Link Table 8 584 SNI PEER Hardware Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data SNI Slot1 Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 02 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS r 1 1 any 2 Failure audit ...

Page 2214: ...7 Failure audit 777 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3329 any 18 Failure audit 777 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3585 any 19 Failure audit 777 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 3841 any 20 Failure audit 777 MAJOR MINOR WARNING OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate ...

Page 2215: ...g If either of the following two conditions are present follow Procedure 2 below Do many SNIs have SNI PEER errors pointing to the same 2 adjacent SNIs Do 2 adjacent SNIs have SNI PEER errors pointing to many other SNIs If neither condition is present follow Procedure 1 below When using either procedure see SNI BD SNI Circuit Pack or SNC BD Switch Node Clock Circuit Pack for circuit pack replaceme...

Page 2216: ...s just replaced was not at fault and go to step 2 below 2 Replace the leftmost SNI from the pair of adjacent SNIs 3 Replace the rightmost SNI from the pair of adjacent SNIs 4 This could indicate a problem with the switch node carrier backplane System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in t...

Page 2217: ...l state then every alarm associated with the SREPN is downgraded to a WARNING alarm These include the EXP INTF in the SRP the EXP LINK between the SRP and the SREPN and every maintenance component in the SREPN 2 When the SRP is in control of the SREPN the EXP LINK is up between the SRP and SREPN the disaster recovery state is in effect A MAJOR alarm is raised against the SRP EPN MO Every other MO ...

Page 2218: ...cuit pack resides The Stratum 3 clock should never be connected to an IPSI connected EPN The only operation that software can perform is a query of the alarm leads The only recovery action that can be performed on a catastrophic failure of the Stratum 3 clock is using the local oscillator on the active TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack Neither software nor the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack can request...

Page 2219: ...fer to Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations Figure 8 85 Stratum 3 Clock Hardware Configuration Tone Clock TN780 Tone Clock TN780 TOC DS1 Ref A PAI Alarms PPN DS1 Ref B TOC ST3 ST3 CI CI A B A A B B DS1 TN464 TN767 or TN722 DS1 TN464 TN767 or TN722 Timing output Timing output 48V 48V ...

Page 2220: ... FAIL LED on this card indicates a failure with the card or the DS1 reference connected to it 2 Stratum 3 Cards ST3 Provides 24 hour holdover The red FAIL LED on this card indicates a failure with the card Replace the card 2 Timing Output Cards TOC Provides cable length compensation multiple output ports selection of the ST3 and CI outputs This type of card has two red failure LEDs one indicates a...

Page 2221: ...T B Red Failed Stratum 3 clock B PWR A Green 48VDC A present PWR B Green 48VDC B present CI FAIL Red Card failure DS1 Green DS1 source present CC Green Composite clock source1 present 1 Composite Clock CC source refers to the protocol used to electrically transfer timing from the Stratum 3 clock to the switch The Composite Clock source is not relevant to the system SRC ACTIVE Green Card is current...

Page 2222: ...ratum 3 Clock Alarm Query test 649 either reference B failed or the CI card B failed Table 8 586 Stratum 3 Clock Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test...

Page 2223: ...nd the switch is referencing the local oscillator on the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack If only the active TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack is faulty the standby TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack becomes active and remains synchronized to the Stratum 3 clock When the system switches to the standby Tone Clock circuit pack the alarm is resolved and a TDM CLK alarm is raised to indicate a possible problem on...

Page 2224: ...o check that the Tone Clock is receiving a signal from the Stratum 3 clock If every test passes switch to the new Tone Clock circuit pack via the set tone clock UC override command If Test 651 fails then the original TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack should be reinserted and the cable between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack should be replaced If Test 651 continues to fail the...

Page 2225: ...um 3 clock provides the system with the following six alarm indications via the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack Reference A failed or CI card A failed Reference B failed or CI card B failed One power supply failed Every power supply failed One clock unit failed Every clock unit failed CAUTION The removal of a card in the Stratum 3 clock may cause alarm s to be resolved and the query test to pass How...

Page 2226: ...owing instructions on site continued 1 FAIL continued If you are ON SITE use the following procedure 1 Look for a red LED on CI card A i e the left CI card If there is a red LED then replace the CI card if a spare is available If no spare CI is available on site proceed to Step 3 If after replacing the CI card the red LED on the new CI card lights also then proceed to Step 3 2 If a spare CI card i...

Page 2227: ...zation r 4 command to clear the alarm If any test repetitions fail then follow the procedures for those failures 8 FAIL Reference B failed or CI card B failed This condition usually indicates a failure of the DS1 reference however there may also be a failure of the CI card to which the reference is connected The system technician dispatched to investigate this problem should take a spare CI card i...

Page 2228: ...for the Stratum 3 clock is not supplied or if the battery backup holdover time has been exceeded then the system will be referencing the local oscillator on the active TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack until software detects that one or both power supplies have been restored approximately 40 minutes To speed up this restoration issue the test synchronization r 4 command Every test should pass If any r...

Page 2229: ...g circuit packs are allowed TN744 Call Classifier TN750 Integrated Announcement TN771 Maintenance Test TN725 Speech Synthesizer TN433 Speech Synthesizer TN457 Speech Synthesizer TN748 Tone Detector TN420 Tone Detector When another circuit pack is inserted in a SERVICE slot for example TN755 Neon Power Unit a MINOR alarm is generated against the Service Slot MO Instead of the illegal circuit pack s...

Page 2230: ...previous list of valid circuit packs The invalid circuit pack s TN code can be displayed by using the list configuration board UUCSS command where UU is the cabinet number C is the carrier letter and SS is the slot number always 00 of the alarmed circuit pack To retire the alarm remove the invalid circuit pack Table 8 589 Service Slot Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Lev...

Page 2231: ...oth a primary and secondary references are administered for Stratum 4 synchronization both references must reside in the same port network PN Traditional Sync Operation For a previous DEFINITY system or optionally for an S8700 Media Server Mulit Connect system synchronization is obtained from the public circuit switched network via either A DS1 or BRI interface The ATM network For DS1 or BRI based...

Page 2232: ...one Clock in the master PN can generate its own timing and keep every PN synchronized However these PNs would not be synchronized with any other public network interfaces that exist in any of the PNs When a center stage is implemented via an ATM network it is possible to obtain timing from the ATM network For more information See ATM SYNC ATM Synchronization on page 8 264 Clock Synchronization NOT...

Page 2233: ...tional If the primary synchronization reference is not providing a valid timing signal the system automatically switches to the secondary synchronization reference If the primary synchronization reference is invalid and secondary reference does not provide a valid timing signal or is not administered as a synchronization reference an IPSI s Tone Clock circuit or a Tone Clock circuit pack provides ...

Page 2234: ... the system synchronization reference to determine if a specific reference is providing a valid timing signal Troubleshooting Approach Slip errors are the primary symptom associated with being unsynchronized A correct Synchronization plan for the network keeps the systems within the network transmitting data at approximately the same rate to avoid situations where One system transmits data at a ra...

Page 2235: ...d If no service degradation is occurring no action is necessary Whenever the system switches synchronization sources slips can be expected from DS1 BD UDS1 BD and EXP INTF circuit packs If service degradation occurs after following the repair steps in the individual section use the following trouble shooting techniques Table 8 591 lists circuit packs that can report slips and related circuit packs...

Page 2236: ...on Troubleshooting Fig 1 of 6 Slips No Enable synchronization Yes Is synchronization enabled A Is reference a free running Tone Clock System is operating as a timing slave in network Synchronization is enabled in system operating as port network s timing master To Fig 2 Slips on DS1 facilities Slips on some DS1 facilities in same PN as reference Yes No Problem is in switch To Fig 5 To Fig 4 Proble...

Page 2237: ...n DS1 facilities Make changes to acccording to the network s plan Should this be the timing master No Yes Yes No Yes To Fig 5 From Fig 1 Refer problem for investigation at other 4 Slips on IPSI or Tone Clock EIs or SNIs Done synchronization plan end of facility have switch operate Problem is in switch or port network for network D A No 2 2 ...

Page 2238: ... Problem in switch Many Are there many facilities with excessive slips Few 7 Replace circuit packs IPSI Tone Clock in the timing master PN DS1 in timing master PN 8 Check the overall timing network to verify the source is traceable back to the same source for example Hillsboro Mo Use the facility fault sectionalization technique section with slip counts as the pass fail indication to isolate the t...

Page 2239: ...2 8 1517 555 233 143 Figure 8 90 Synchronization Troubleshooting Fig 4 of 6 B 9 10 B From Fig 1 Is the reference administered and SYNC enabled Is a reference on line Yes No Yes No Administer the reference and enable synchronization C To Fig 3 To Fig 3 ...

Page 2240: ...dia Sever Multi Connect s CSS the problem is in switch IPSI or Tone Clock EI SNI DS1 in PNs other than the timing master PN Slips on more than one slave PN Yes No 11 between timing master and slave PN Slips remain Replace Tone Clock slave PN Slips remain Yes No Yes No Direct Connect To Fig 6 associated with fiber Replace EIs in timing D Replace Tone Clock in master timing EPN E 12 ...

Page 2241: ...d no DS1s are connected to the Stratum 3 clock or no DS1 connection existed to the Stratum 3 clock for over 24 hours then the Stratum 3 clock is in free run mode 2 Check for slip errors against DS1 BD and UDS1 BD From CSS problem is in switch IPSI or Tone Clock EI SNI Slips on many EIs IPSIs or Tone Clocks or SNIs associated with an SN Carrier Figure 5 Yes IPSI or Tone Clock associated with the re...

Page 2242: ...ommand to interchange Tone Clocks If the problem goes away the previously active Tone Clock should be replaced 7 If a few facilities are experiencing slips or are unusable references the clock source for facilities with slips or that are unusable is not traceable to the same ultimate source as the clock source for the on line reference facility Examine the overall timing network for the interconne...

Page 2243: ...ing the Tone Clock circuit pack in systems where the Tone Clocks are duplicated is to run the set tone clock command to interchange Tone Clocks If the problem goes away the previously active Tone Clock should be replaced Also before replacing an SNC circuit pack the set switch node clock command can be used if SNCs are duplicated in the carrier If the problem goes away the previously active SNC sh...

Page 2244: ...eds to be looped around Figure 8 93 shows a sequence of units 1 though n that may be connected as the on site equipment A typical example is the case where the only on site equipment is channel terminating equipment designated Unit 1 A more complex less typical example might have a DACS as Unit 1 a protection switch as Unit 2 and a DS1 level microwave radio system as Unit 3 The flowchart in Figure...

Page 2245: ... NO Restore service enter release board for the DS1 Interface YES The fault lies beyond the loop around point Remove the loop around and rewire the connections Is the unit just tested the last unit on the G3r side of the maintenance boundary FAIL The fault lies before the loop around point Repair or replace the defective wiring or circuit pack If the problem cannot be identified escalate the probl...

Page 2246: ...f the hardware connected A few cases exist where access to the loop around cannot be easily provided at locations where the signal level is within the line compensation range of the hardware The line compensation can be changed via the change ds1 UUCSS command 2 Execute the test board UUCSS command for the TN722 TN767 or TN464 Look at results of Test 144 the Slip Alarm Inquiry test When this test ...

Page 2247: ... type 1281 a blue alarm error DS1 BD and UDS1 BD error type 1793 a red alarm error DS1 BD and UDS1 BD error type 2049 or a hyperactive angel error DS1 BD and UDS1 BD error type 1538 A corresponding alarm log entry is not required DS1 and UDS1 circuit packs can be administered with slips detection enabled via the Slip Detection field set to a y see the add ds1 change ds1 and display ds1 commands Wh...

Page 2248: ...ary reference or an external Stratum 3 clock when the Tone Clock is in the master PN The external synchronization reference used in a slave PN is an Expansion Interface circuit pack active An external timing source is being used as a synchronization reference flashing amber 0 3 seconds on 2 7 seconds off active The circuit pack is being used as a synchronization reference steady amber on active Th...

Page 2249: ...re slip errors then follow the procedures described in the previous troubleshooting section If no errors are listed in the Error Log for the primary DS1 Interface circuit pack continue with the following steps 4 Enter test Tone Clock UUC long to test the active Tone Clock circuit pack in the master port network Check the Error Log for TDM CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inq...

Page 2250: ...he enable synchronization switch command to enable Synchronization Maintenance reference switching and to resolve this alarm c This error indicates a problem with the secondary DS1 reference It will be cleared when the secondary reference is restored Refer to note a to resolve this error substituting secondary for primary in the preceding resolution steps d This error indicates that the Tone Clock...

Page 2251: ...rminator type is a ZAHF4 TDM LAN For a Single Carrier Cabinet verify that the bus terminator type is a AHF110 TDM LAN 3 Check for timing loops and resolve any loops that exist 4 Check the Error Log for any active as well as resolved Expansion Interface circuit pack errors and see EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circuit Pack to resolve any errors found 5 Duplicated Tone Clock circuit packs in the slav...

Page 2252: ...ne Clock in the master port network If the problem still persists enter set tone clock UUC to switch the Tone Clocks in the master port network back to their previous configuration Enter the test Tone Clock UUC long command to test the Tone Clock in the master and slave port networks Check the Error Log for TDM CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry test 148 passes If Test...

Page 2253: ...n the master port network If the problem persists and any slip errors remain follow the procedures described in the troubleshooting section above This error is cleared by a leaky bucket strategy and takes one hour to clear leak away the error counter once it is alarmed Therefore it may take up to one hour to clear the alarm after the problem is cleared h Noise on the DS1 line can cause transient a...

Page 2254: ...esult Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 1115 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times PASS The Synchro...

Page 2255: ...s When a link goes down an alarm is raised immediately For EAL INL and PACL link types a MINOR alarm is raised for every other link type a WARNING alarm is raised Other alarming conditions that do not cause the link to go down get a WARNING alarm regardless of the link type MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run Full Name of MO SYS LINK MINOR test sys link UUCSSpp SYSTEM LIN...

Page 2256: ...uely identified by its endpoint Common Procedure for Repairing Link Problems The state of a system link is dependent on the state of the various hardware components that it travels over To resolve any problems associated with a system link use the following procedure The switch maintains a list of hardware components over which the link travels called the hardware path There are two hardware paths...

Page 2257: ... Chapter 4 3 When every component is alarm free wait for 3 minutes to allow the links to recover 4 Test the system link test sys link PCSSpp long clear and notice any tests that fail 5 If there are any failures fix the problems indicated by the tests and repeat the procedure Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 595 Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Ala...

Page 2258: ...he link has experienced downlink flow control meaning that some information packets from the packet interface board have been lost The link is reset on first occurrence hence Error 1025 is also logged The system link is alarmed if 2 or more errors of this type are detected within 10 minutes 1 Follow the information in the previous section Common Procedure for Repairing Link Problems on page 8 1534...

Page 2259: ...ms on page 8 1534 2 Clear errors and wait for 10 minutes h This error indicates that the link has experienced slow transmit rate due to unknown causes meaning that the endpoint location may experience slower throughput rate and the Packet Interface may experience backup or congestion The system link is alarmed if 4 or more errors of this type are detected within 10 minutes 1 Follow the information...

Page 2260: ...s nondestructive This test queries the switch for the status of the system link and verifies that every switch component has the same view of the link state Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive System Link Status 985 X X ND Table 8 596 TEST 985 System Link Status Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1007 ABORT Could not ...

Page 2261: ...y and wait mechanism for maintaining the SYS PRNT link A minor alarm is raised when the link set up fails A warning alarm is raised when the server has been busied out up to two link retry attempts is made After the second attempt set up attempts are only made by the application software The 15 minute timer fires and jobs are printed unless an immediate job was entered After two unsuccessful attem...

Page 2262: ...ue with Step 3 3 Verify the availability of the external SYS PRNT output device Make sure that the output device is on line and ready for service Check the physical connectivity between the Data Module and the SYS PRNT output device 4 Verify that there is at least one C LAN port available The System Printer Link cannot be established without an available C LAN port For more information about C LAN...

Page 2263: ...or Check the connectivity of the wires and cables among the wall jacket data module and SYS PRNT output device Follow the instructions provided in Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link on page 8 1540 Table 8 597 SYS PRNT Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 0 Any Any Any test sp link 18 a 0 busyout sp link WARNI...

Page 2264: ...llocated for a System Printer Link is released after this test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Link Tear Down test 213 X D Link Retry test 215 X X ND Table 8 598 TEST 213 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 40 50 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to two tim...

Page 2265: ...ervals up to two times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 See Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link on page 8 1540 for recommended maintenance strategy 1010 ABORT The System Printer Link has been busied out 1 Enter the release sp link command to release the System Printer Link from the busyout state 2 Reissue the test sp link long command to execute the test 2012 ABORT Internal system err...

Page 2266: ...to recover from hardware problems caused by the loss of clock Errors logged under SYSTEM can help to determine the cause of a reset For more information about interchanges see Recovery on page 3 5 including Reset Level 1 Warm Restart Reset Level 2 Cold 2 Restart Reset Level 4 MultiVantage Application Reload Troubleshooting a Duplicated Server on page 4 10 The display initcauses screen should also ...

Page 2267: ...ms on the standby server that are preventing the server interchange e A reset system interchange health override command has failed The standby server s state of health SOH would not allow a spontaneous server interchange Enter the Linux server command to determine the current server status and resolve any problems on the standby server that are preventing the server interchange Table 8 600 System...

Page 2268: ...plication error occurred on the standby server See note m to diagnose the error using the aux data k Error 6103 indicates that an application alarm occurred on the standby server See note m to diagnose the error using the aux data l For error types 6002 6003 6102 and 6103 the aux data value points to the MO that the error or alarm is logged against The following table lists possible aux data value...

Page 2269: ...ociated with processor interrupts 1372 6 Minor alarm on standby SYSAM or PKT INT 1395 Server Duplication not administered 1396 3 PKT INT Link Migration failure in Begin Step 1397 3 PKT INT Link Migration denied peer test in progress 1398 3 PKT INT Link Migration failure in Completion Step 1399 3 PKT INT Link Migration failure in Finish Step 1400 4 Could Not Idle SW CTL dual port RAM 1401 4 Could N...

Page 2270: ...ents 3 Test the PKT INT on both carriers with the long test sequence Follow procedures for PKT INT Once every test of both PKT INTs passes try the interchange again 4 Consult SW CTL service documentation Test SW CTL on both carriers with the long test sequence Follow repair instructions for any failures Once every test of both SW CTLs passes try the interchange again 5 Make sure the standby server...

Page 2271: ...ntrol Element and then to the TDM bus The circuit switched connections have a Mu law or A law option for voice and operate as 64 kbps clear data channels The packet switched channels support the LAPD protocol and conform with the CCITT Q 920 Recommendations for D channel signaling LEDs The three LEDs on the circuit pack s faceplate indicate board status When illuminated the red LED indicates a boa...

Page 2272: ... interface R Interface between Terminal Equipment and Network Termination S Basic Rate network side 4 wire line interface S T 4 wire Basic Rate connection to a Network Termination1 T 4 wire Basic Rate interface to a Network Termination 2 TE Terminal Equipment U Basic Rate network side 2 wire line interface CO NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire 4 Wire 4 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire PBX PBX LT TE T...

Page 2273: ...hat terminates Layer 1 and monitors maintenance performance timing power transfer multiplexing and multidrop termination with contention resolution Table 8 602 TBRI BD Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS sh r 1 1 a Any None MINOR ON 257 b 65535 Control Channel Loop test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS r 2...

Page 2274: ...usyout board UUCSS and reset board UUCSS commands When reset the circuit pack executes a set of tests to detect the presence of any of the faults listed above Detection of one of these errors during initialization causes the circuit pack to lock up and appear insane to the system See the repair procedure in Note a d The circuit pack detects a program logic error While no action is required this er...

Page 2275: ...ance software removes the board from service replace the circuit pack i The circuit pack is has problems transmitting receiving data to from the Packet bus j Error Type 2305 3330 A critical failure in the Circuit Pack s Packet bus interface Possible causes include either a Packet bus fault or an on board fault for example the board received a bad CRC or invalid DLCI If the Packet bus is alarmed se...

Page 2276: ...tware takes the circuit pack out of service again If the circuit pack does not exhibit the problem for a certain time period then maintenance software resolves the alarm and the circuit pack is left in service l The circuit pack received an inconsistent down link message a bad header port number data subqualifier or logical link over the Control Channel m The board is receiving data from the bus f...

Page 2277: ...it Pack on page 8 1872 SAKI Sanity Test 53 This is a destructive test See the repair procedure described in XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack on page 8 1872 This test is only run as a part of a reset board procedure LAN Receive Parity Error Counter Test 595 This test is nondestructive The test reads and clears the circuit pack s LAN Receive Parity Error Counter This counter increments when it detect...

Page 2278: ...on board error counter 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail verify the validity of the Packet bus Run the Packet bus maintenance test with the test pkt P long command If any Packet bus tests fail see PKT BUS Packet Bus on page 8 1230 for recommended repair procedures 3 If the Packet bus test passes check the validity of the circuit pack Execute a ...

Page 2279: ... routed via the concentration highway to the NCE Network Control Element and then to the TDM bus The circuit switched connections have a Mu law or A law option for voice and operate as 64 kbps clear data channels The packet switched channels support the LAPD protocol and conform with the CCITT Q 920 Recommendations for D channel signaling LEDs The three LEDs on the circuit pack s faceplate indicat...

Page 2280: ...this 1 544 or 2 048 Mbps interface R Interface between Terminal Equipment and Network Termination S Basic Rate network side 4 wire line interface S T 4 wire Basic Rate connection to a Network Termination1 T 4 wire Basic Rate interface to a Network Termination 2 TE Terminal Equipment CO NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire 4 Wire 4 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire PBX PBX LT TE TE TE cydfisdn RPY 072397...

Page 2281: ...ers 2 and 3 2 Network Termination 1 NT1 that terminates Layer 1 and monitors maintenance performance timing power transfer multiplexing and multi drop termination with contention resolution Table 8 604 TBRI PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test Port UCSSPP sh r 1 1 a Level 1 Status test 1242 MINOR OFF 1292 257 b ...

Page 2282: ... end state c Error Type 513 On board hardware failure The FIFO RAM buffers have overflowed indicating a hardware problem d Error Type 514 Transmit FIFO Overflow This error indicates that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the TDM D channel This error only occurs only a system that switches the packet 3073 m Slip Query test 1244 MINOR OFF 3585 n Receive FIFO Overflow TDM D cha...

Page 2283: ... 15 minutes of the first set of 5 errors the port is taken out of service for 1 minute If 5 more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the previous 5 the port is taken out of service for 15 minutes This error is most likely due to a problem with backplane wiring a noise source or no termination an open circuit It usually does not indicate a problem with the circuit pack 1 Check the backplan...

Page 2284: ...administered for this port The user side supports automatic TEI assignment by the network Both fixed and automatic TEI assignment are supported on the network side p Error Type 3587 Service Profiler IDentifier SPID value is invalid or is a duplicate of another SPID that is already initialized at Layer 3 on the port SPIDs are not used on the TN2185 circuit pack However there will be related events ...

Page 2285: ...in No route to destination or Germany bcap not imp 6 admin Channel unacceptable 18 switch problems No user responding 38 switch problems Network failure 50 subscription Requested facility not subscribed 52 admin Outgoing calls barred 54 admin Incoming calls barred 62 subscription Service not authorized 63 admin sub Service option not available 65 admin sub Bearer capability not implemented 66 admi...

Page 2286: ...aintenance software is able to successfully send the downlink messages the test aborts otherwise Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive BRI Local LAN Port Loop Around test 618 X D BRI TDM Port Loop Around test 619 X D L1 State Query test 1242 X X D CRC Error Counter test 623 X ND Receive FIFO Overflow test 625 X ND Layer 3 Query test 1...

Page 2287: ... the station extension or trunk group member number of the port Use the status bri port UUCSSpp command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The por...

Page 2288: ...med across the Packet bus for the D channel The switch sends data over a packet connection which is looped back by the BRI port D channel and received back by the switch The test passes if the packet connection can be established and the transmitted data is received unaltered The test aborts if the Packet bus is alarmed in the Processor Port Network or the port network where that circuit pack resi...

Page 2289: ...nd verify the repair by viewing the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around test 618 1141 ABORT The PKT CTRL is out of service 1 Follow the repair procedures for the PKT CTRL 2 Run the test port long UUCSSpp command and verify the repair by viewing the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around test 618 2012 2100 ABORT Internal system error Could not allocate the necessary system resource...

Page 2290: ...rces required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status bri port UUCSSpp command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Wait until the port is idle befor...

Page 2291: ...ports on the board are idle 2 If this result occurs again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2103 ABORT The system could not make the conference connection for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 2 FAIL The TDM Looparou...

Page 2292: ...eive buffers The test passes if the value of the counter is 0 that is the error is cleared If the counter is non zero the test fails and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field This error can occur either if Signaling frames are being received from the Packet bus at a rate sufficient to overflow the receive buffers on the circuit pack for a port A hardware fault is causing th...

Page 2293: ...le 8 611 Test 625 Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly up to 5 times reset the circuit pack with the busyout board UUCSS and reset board UUCSS commands 2 If the test aborts again replace the circuit pack 2012 A...

Page 2294: ... TBRI PT only then release the port with the release port pp command and run the test again If the error is present for both TBRI BD and TBRI PT then release the board with the release board UUCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release a board you release every port associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the busyout port UUCSSpp command to busy them out 2...

Page 2295: ... fails proceed to Step 2 2 Follow the manufacturer recommended repair procedures for the NT1 Then execute the test port UUCSSpp command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify repair 3 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated the port is out of service 1 Issue the status bri port UUCSSpp command to verify that the service state of the port is out of service If the ...

Page 2296: ...ctivated or that software has taken the port out of service Table 8 613 Test 1243 Layer 3 Query Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1005 ABORT The test aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example a modem pool member or Music on Hold This error can be ignored 1019 ABORT Tes...

Page 2297: ...by a technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 busied out for TBRI BD or TBRI PT a If this error type is present for TBRI PT then release the port with the release port UUCSSpp command and run the test again b If the error is present for both TBRI BD and TBRI PT then release the circuit pack with the release board PUUCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit p...

Page 2298: ...type 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1 to 88 FAIL The circuit pack and the remote endpoint are not synchronized to the same clock rate which has generated the Slip alarm The error code equals the number of slips detected by the TN2185 circuit pack since the last Slip Alarm Inquiry test 1 Retry the...

Page 2299: ... CCITT Q 920 Recommendations for D channel signaling LEDs The three LEDs on the circuit pack s faceplate indicate board status When illuminated the red LED indicates a board failure or a major or minor on board alarm the green LED indicates that testing is in progress and the amber LED indicates that the board is in use MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 Where UU is t...

Page 2300: ... checks the current state of the signaling link The test looks at the board level translations checks that the board is physically inserted gets the state of the D channel and service state of the port The test passes if the signaling link D channel is connected and operating normally The test fails if the board is not installed the signaling link is disconnected or if the port is out of service T...

Page 2301: ...te the service state of a TN2185 Trunk Side ISDN BRI channel issue the status trunk trunk group trunk member command Table 8 615 Test 1251 Signaling Link State Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1018 ABORT The test is disabled 1 Enable the te...

Page 2302: ...etry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1116 ABORT The trunk is not in a service state which is appropriate for running the test This test is only performed in the OOS FE state 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding 1 Wait two minutes and then try again 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute interv...

Page 2303: ...257 Call State Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1018 ABORT The test is disabled 1 Enable the test by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1019 ABORT An audit is already in progress 1 Wait two minutes and try again 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk 1 Check ...

Page 2304: ...stablished over the TDM bus of the transmit and receive sides of the trunk side ISDN BRI facility to a digital trunk testing port on the Maintenance Test circuit pack The Maintenance Test Digital Port generates a pseudo bit stream 2 The test call connection is established over the TDM bus of the transmit and receive sides of the trunk side ISDN BRI facility to a data channel This method is selecte...

Page 2305: ...hat is no Maintenance Test circuit pack Issue the test trunk trunk group trunk member command and make sure there is a DATA CHL NETCON channel administered 1018 ABORT Test call is disabled 1 Enable Maintenance on the Trunk Group form 1024 ABORT M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port in use 1 Wait until yellow and green LEDs are turned off on the M T BD Maintenance Test circuit pack 2 Retry the test...

Page 2306: ... 1122 ABORT There is no test line number for the far end switch 1 Check the Trunk Group Administration form 1123 ABORT There is no Feature Access Code administration for this Facility test 1 Check the Dial Plan and Feature Administration forms 2012 None 2000 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 203...

Page 2307: ...ernal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2104 ABORT Call dropped or could not be originated 1 Make sure service is provisioned by the network 2 Check the administration of the fa...

Page 2308: ...lack of system resources 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2214 ABORT Call terminated by unexpected disconnect 1 Wait one minute and then try again 2215 2219 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2220 ABORT Call terminated p...

Page 2309: ...alysis of the facility including the transmission facility and any external equipment such as DACs CSUs etc PASS The call worked A test pattern was sent and received properly the communications path is OK if the synchronous test call command was issued An in depth analysis of the trunk side ISDN BRI facility including the transmission facility and any external equipment such as DACs CSUs and other...

Page 2310: ...switch any control tone and traffic channels to the other bus Service will still be provided though at a reduced capacity The set tdm PC command has the effect of putting both the control channel and tone time slots on a specified bus A or B P specifies the port network s number and C specifies the TDM bus A or B Throughout this discussion PC refers to a specific TDM bus References to port circuit...

Page 2311: ...ive to the port network that contains the TDM bus being tested If possible arrange to perform this procedure at a time when traffic is minimal As circuit packs are removed or entire carriers are disconnected any active calls terminating on those circuit packs or carriers will be dropped If you have any hints about a particular circuit pack that may be causing the TDM bus problem investigate those ...

Page 2312: ...oblem has been fixed 6 If every circuit pack in the list has been investigated go to Procedure 2 Procedure 2 Removing and Reinserting Port Circuit Packs Procedure 2 removes and reinserts port circuit packs those in the carrier s purple slots one or more at a time Use this procedure for each port circuit pack in the port network until the problem is resolved or until every circuit pack in the port ...

Page 2313: ... circuit pack 1 Remove one or several circuit packs as appropriate Any circuit packs that reside on the TDM bus that have been recently inserted should be checked first If you decide to remove multiple circuit packs consider working with an entire carrier at a time to more quickly and reliably determine which circuit packs are not the source of trouble 2 Run test tdm P to determine whether the TDM...

Page 2314: ...rchange The formerly active Expansion Interface will now be standby and can be checked without affecting the EPN s service For instructions at each step in a procedure that requires the removal and or replacement of a circuit pack refer to the documentation for the specific circuit pack s MO Server and or PNC interchanges may be required to complete these steps with the least amount of service dis...

Page 2315: ...e or both The procedure utilizes a PNC interchange in an EPN If the TDM bus fault disappears after an interchange takes place the newly standby Expansion Interface EPN is suspect and should be replaced If the problem still exists the Tone Clocks are then interchanged If the TDM bus failure then disappears the newly standby Tone Clock is suspect and should be replaced If the TDM bus problem still e...

Page 2316: ...rcuit pack has been tested execute reset pnc interchange followed by set tone clock to put the currently active circuit packs into standby mode so that this procedure can be run on each of them 1 Remove the inactive suspected circuit pack 2 As in Procedure 2 determine whether any backplane pins behind the removed circuit pack s slot are bent 3 If the pins are bent do the following a Remove power a...

Page 2317: ... isolate a TDM bus failure to a particular set of carriers Only the circuit packs in selected carriers are checked Procedure 4 is used if the preceding procedures fail because it can help locate failures of Multiple circuit packs The carrier s hardware itself In this procedure the TDM LAN cable assemblies and TDM LAN bus terminators are replaced If replacement does not resolve the TDM bus fault th...

Page 2318: ...parts Part 1 attempts to clear a TDM bus fault by replacing every bus cable and terminator within an EPN Part 2 attempts to isolate the fault to a particular carrier by extending the TDM bus from the control carrier to additional carriers one at a time WARNING Power must be removed from the entire EPN before any cables or terminators are removed Failure to follow this procedure can cause damage to...

Page 2319: ...not be able to run Bus that the non control channel was on will not be tested If this is the case run the set TDM PC command to move the control channel to the non active bus The status port network P command will show which bus is currently active After the bus switch has occurred run the test tdm P command again to determine whether the newly active bus is faulted Another option is to move a Ton...

Page 2320: ...wing methods depending on the circumstances Any normally functioning circuit pack i e not in reset state will ignore the restart message Procedure 1 Nondestructive If the control channel is on the same TDM bus as it was when the circuit pack entered the reset state issue the test tdm P command to execute the Idle Time Slot test 294 Procedure 2 Nondestructive If you are on site reseat the circuit p...

Page 2321: ...ted TDM bus corruption was on the Non Control channel bus c This error indicates the TDM bus was switched to the other bus due to TDM bus corruption The aux data value is not meaningful and no action is required Look for other TDM BUS errors to determine the cause of this error Table 8 619 TDM Bus Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 ...

Page 2322: ...st tdm P command and follow the procedures according to the error codes reported from the test The aux data value shows the Angel ID number for which a downlink message was lost System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below For example by clearing error codes associated with the Control Channel test 296 you may also...

Page 2323: ...ts that were detected The cause of this failure is most likely due to a bad port circuit pack and not the TDM bus itself 1 Execute the command again 2 If the error persists check the Error and Alarm Logs for alarms on the port network where the faulted TDM bus resides on port circuit packs from the NPE Crosstalk test Also check for EXP INTF alarms associated with error type 1537 3 Refer to the app...

Page 2324: ...nel bus This is a valid response Use the status port network command to verify which bus is the control channel bus None FAIL Communication through the Control Channel is not working The problem is not necessarily the TDM bus itself 1 Display the hardware error and alarm log for the Tone Clock circuit and for the Tone Detector circuit in the port network where the faulted TDM bus resides See TONE ...

Page 2325: ...valid response Use the status port network command to verify which bus is the control channel bus 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times None FAIL This failure indicates that communication on the Non Control Channel is not reliable 1 Execute the command again 2 If the problem persists test th...

Page 2326: ... and from Stratum 3 clock STRAT 3 facilities Only the TN780 tone clock supports a Stratum 3 clock Moreover the Tone Clock circuit aids in monitoring and selecting synchronization references The Tone Clock circuit after detecting that the external source of timing is not valid will automatically begin its escalation procedure according to the facilities administered In the following table successiv...

Page 2327: ...ne Clock Circuit on page 8 1659 for a discussion of the relationship of Tone Clock circuits with the various reliability options Tone Clock Role Synchronization Facilities Initial External Synchronization Source Backup External Synchronization Source Internal Source MASTER Stratum 3 clock Source A Source B Local oscillator DS1 Primary and Secondary DS1 Primary DS1 Secondary DS1 Primary Only DS1 Pr...

Page 2328: ...esolved before pursuing any other errors against PNC components Off board clock errors may be caused by other board errors and should usually be addressed once any on board errors have been resolved Test to Clear Value 02 2 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any A...

Page 2329: ... Clock circuit or Tone Clock circuit pack may be defective however it may be a software failure that can be corrected by testing 1 Check to see if the board is duplicated list cabinet and status port network on the affected port network 2 If the board is not duplicated use test tone UUCSS long to resolve the errors The long test resets the board and is required to reload on board RAM associated wi...

Page 2330: ...is problem and should be corrected first Otherwise continue with the following procedure 1 Use test tone clock UUC and examine the results of Test 149 to see if slip errors are still occurring If no new slip errors are reported and if these errors are not causing a TDM CLK alarm they may be ignored Use test tone clock UUC long clear to clear the errors 2 Otherwise enter the display errors command ...

Page 2331: ...acility i The Tone Clock circuit in the master port network was unable to detect the incoming synchronization signal but the other tone clock was able to detect the references If the aux data is 0 the problem is with the signal on the primary If the aux data is 1 the problem is with the signal on the secondary The system should switch clocks in this situation 1 If this error is against EPN 1 s clo...

Page 2332: ... were logged for either test then enter test tone clock UUC long clear to clear the TDM CLK errors The procedure is complete 4 For Port Networks with more than one Tone Clock circuit a Enter set tone clock UUC to interchange the Tone Clocks b Run test synchronization r 10 and check to see if new 2305 errors are reported against the new active Tone Clock circuit c If not replace the standby Tone Cl...

Page 2333: ...ock circuit pack in a port network with more than one IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack high or critical reliability option The Tone Clock circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware revision 2 or above or be a TN2182 e Test 149 is not run on the TN2182 Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive SAKI Reset test 53 a ...

Page 2334: ...If the Tone Clock circuit is a slave clock then the EI to which it is listening is providing a bad timing source Follow the diagnostic procedures specified for TDM CLK Error Code 2305 3 If no problem can be found with the incoming synchronization signal replace the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack See Replacing the IPSI or Tone Clock Circuit Pack on page 8 1666 2 FAIL This error indicates that Tone...

Page 2335: ...Use test tone UUCSS long to resolve the problem The long test resets the board and is required to reload on board RAM associated with the TN2182 s DSPs The effect is that tone detectors are taken out of service momentarily and tones are removed from the TDM bus for about 10 seconds This means that no dial tone or touch tones are available during this interval It probably will not affect calls in p...

Page 2336: ...1 A DS1 Interface circuit pack if DS1 Synchronization is administered and associated with the circuit pack tested 2 A Stratum 3 clock if that option is administered and the circuit pack tested was the active Tone Clock in the EPN 1 3 The local oscillator on the master IPSI s Tone Clock circuit or on the master Tone Clock circuit pack if it is providing the system s clocking signals 4 An EXP INTF c...

Page 2337: ...ailable 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times Any FAIL The error code represents the rate in Parts Per Million or PPM at which clock slip errors have been detected on the incoming synchronization source since the last PPM inquiry was sent to the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack A failure of this test indicates that we are outside of Stratum 3 or Stratum 4 timing specifications on ...

Page 2338: ...ching Set the number of slips to trigger loss of signal currently 30 per 5 millisecond period Enable the on board synchronization switching algorithm see above Enable holdover operation TN2182 and TN2312 only This is not a test and will always pass without identifying or reporting any IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack errors Table 8 628 Test 151 TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test Error Code Test Re...

Page 2339: ...error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times ANY FAIL Stratum 3 clock synchronization is administered for the carrier where this Tone Clock circuit pack resides but the Tone Clock does not have code TN780 1 If the Stratum 3 clock option is incorrectly administered remove it 2 Otherwise replace the circuit pack See Replacing the IPSI or Tone Clock Circuit Pack on page 8 1666 PASS T...

Page 2340: ... times 1184 ABORT This test requires an external synchronization source to be administered DS1 primary DS1 primary and secondary or Stratum 3 clock 1 Administer the external synchronization source and retry the test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Try the command again at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 0 FAIL The external synchronization timing source for side A of the Stratum 3 clock or for ...

Page 2341: ...MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 and so forth Full Name of MO TDMODULE MINOR test port UUCSSpp l Trunk Data Module TDMODULE WARNING test port UUCSSpp l Tru...

Page 2342: ...or related trunk information MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command To Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 Full Name of MO TIE BD MINOR test board UUCSS sh Tie Trunk Circuit Pack TIE BD WARNNG test bo...

Page 2343: ...s TIE DS1 section the term DS1 Interface applies to DS1 and UDS1 circuit packs MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run Full Name of MO TIE DS11 1 For additional repair information see DS1 BD DS1 Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 586 if the tie trunk is on a TN722 or TN767 DS1 circuit pack See UDS1 BD UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack on page 8 1707 UDS1 BD documentation if the tie t...

Page 2344: ...ming or outgoing calls In service The trunk is activated and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls Disconnect ready for service The trunk is in an activated state but can only be used for an incoming call Table 8 631 DS1 Tie Trunk Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test trunk grp mbr 1 a 57476 5...

Page 2345: ...sequence and generates off board alarms Test 7 is part of the long sequence and generates on board alarms Before entering busyout release reset or test board long commands check the vintage number of the circuit pack with list configuration board UUCSS If it is TN767B vintage 8 or 9 do not use the above commands until first making sure that Test 136 passes via test board short Otherwise extraneous...

Page 2346: ...o external release on PBX disconnect Check with the far end switch or operating company for proper trunk connection h Error Type 769 The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 tie trunk This error usually occurs after an occurrence of error type 513 The trunk has received the belated on hook that it has been waiting for from the far end switch The trunk is restored to in se...

Page 2347: ... in the testing sequence For TN767B vintage 8 or 9 circuit packs a failure of Test 136 causes a subsequent failure of Test 7 Test 136 is part of the short sequence and generates off board alarms Test 7 is part of the long sequence and generates on board alarms Before entering busyout release reset or test board long commands check the vintage number of the circuit pack with list configuration boar...

Page 2348: ...at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not a...

Page 2349: ...e appropriate DS1 BD or UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types FAIL This can be due to either on or off board problems Off board problems of concern include EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated with the tone detectors tone generators Clear every off board problem before replacing the board Keep in mind that a TDM BUS problem is usually the result of...

Page 2350: ...Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If this is not the case check to see that there is a valid ...

Page 2351: ...ermine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls check the error log for error type 1025 see the error log table for a description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up 3 I...

Page 2352: ...n command 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or because of a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources requ...

Page 2353: ...far end switches and any NTCE equipment the CSUs have the correct administration 6 Replace the circuit pack NOTE If the conference circuit test fails for every port on a circuit pack a 5 Volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective The 631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet pow...

Page 2354: ...an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board s translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should...

Page 2355: ...k is out of service determine why 3 If it is OK to put the trunk back in service issue the release trunk command to restore the trunk s service and then retry the test 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Int...

Page 2356: ...trunk if one of the following cases is true 1 The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk 2 The trunk is the 24th port on a DS1 Interface circuit pack which is administered using 24th common channel signaling 3 The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call 4 The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled 5 The outgoing signal type of the trunk is either automatic or ...

Page 2357: ...d Current test is designed to be aborted 1 Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible co...

Page 2358: ...BD UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The far end trunk did not respond to the seizure of the near end trunk within the allowable time period This test could have associated in line errors in the error log 1 Enter the list configuratio...

Page 2359: ...ance documentation 4 Retry the test at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board s translations are correct Use the list conf...

Page 2360: ... is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 2 If ATMS testing is enabled check the error log for ATMS errors 3840 and 3841 If the error log indicates that measurements exceeded acceptable thresholds and no other trouble is found with...

Page 2361: ...y making translation and cross connect changes circuit packs except for TN497 can be configured for back to back testing also known as connectivity testing Port operation is tested by connecting two tie trunk ports together in either E M or simplex modes See the section Analog Tie Trunk Back to Back Testing on page 5 26 Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Table 8 637 TIE Trunk Error Log Ent...

Page 2362: ... 0 None 3840 r 8000 Transmission tests ATMS 844 848 OFF test analog testcall 3841 r Transmission tests ATMS 844 848 MINOR OFF test analog testcall UUCSSpp r 2 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 2 Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the...

Page 2363: ...the far end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends This error does not apply to TN497 f This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware malfunction Run the short test sequence and investigate associated errors if any g This indicates that the trunk in question has been busied out by maintenance personnel h The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more tha...

Page 2364: ...any testing or generate any alarms This error comes from call processing and is generated when a second attempt retry to seize an outgoing trunk fails q Glare error This error is logged only It is not a hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any alarms This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a 2 way trunk from both the near and the far ends Attempt to place...

Page 2365: ...in the testing sequence Table 8 638 System Technician Demanded Tests TIE TRK Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Looparound and Conference Circuit test 33 X ND Tie Trunk Seizure test 73 X X ND Dial test 747 X X ND Tie Trunk EPF test 74 X X ND Port Audit and Update test 36 X X ND Transmission test ATMS 844 8...

Page 2366: ...tion of this error and required actions The port may be locked up 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available This could be due to a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The ...

Page 2367: ...EXP PN and EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults associated with the tone detectors tone generators Clear every off board problem before replacing the board Keep in mind that a TDM BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane 1 Resolve any EXP PN and or EXP INTF errors 2 Resolve any TDM BUS errors 3 Resolve any TONE BD and or TONE...

Page 2368: ...may be busy with a valid call Use the display trunk xx command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is active but the port is idle no...

Page 2369: ...a failure to seize the port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 7 FAIL The conference capabilities of the port failed Error Code 7 129 The reflective 404 Hz Tone test failed No transmission was detected to or from the port Error Code 129 131 or The reflective 1004 Hz Tone test failed No transmission was detected to or from the port Error Code 131 133 The reflective 2804 Hz Tone...

Page 2370: ... TN752 power unit circuit pack is on replace the pack If the test fails on more than 1 port check for errors on the TONE BD or the TONE PT If errors take appropriate actions When the tone errors are cleared rerun the test If the test fails again see FAULT ISOLATION in this table above PASS Tie trunk Looparound and Conference test is successful This port is functioning properly 1 If users are repor...

Page 2371: ... port 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times PASS This test passed Translation information was successfully updated on the circuit pack If the trunk is busied out the test does not run but returns a PASS except on TN439 and TN497 1 If signaling troubles are reported verify translation information fo...

Page 2372: ... of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is active but the port is idle no calls then check the Error Log for Error Type 1025 see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up The far end PBX may not be r...

Page 2373: ...etry the command at one minute intervals up to five times 2 If the test continues to fail check the far end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends 3 Check the facility 2000 FAIL Seizure message is not received back within 10 seconds 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail check the far end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends 3 Chec...

Page 2374: ...is idle no calls then check the Error Log for Error Type 1025 see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up The far end PBX may not be releasing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted Use the display trunk xx to...

Page 2375: ... has experienced an overcurrent condition perhaps due to the external M lead 1 To make sure the problem is on board disconnect the facility from the pack and retry the test 2 If the test fails replace the circuit pack Otherwise check the external wiring toward the far end PBX PASS Tie Trunk EPF test is successful This port is functioning properly 1 If users are reporting troubles examine loop conn...

Page 2376: ...mmendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Use display port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port unavailable for this test Refer to section on status co...

Page 2377: ...ally to see if the TTL is reached If it is not then either the number is wrong or the far end is administered incorrectly 1906 ABORT Reorder tone detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1907 ABORT Other unexpected tone detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1913 ABORT Audible Ring detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1914 ABORT Unidentified inter...

Page 2378: ...N771 circuit packs 1939 ABORT Loss self check at 0dBm at 1004 Hz failed 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 1940 ABORT Far end noise self check failed 1 The problem is with the far end system a technician at the far end should test the test line TN771 or ADFTC 1941 ABORT High frequency singing return loss self check failed 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 1942 ABORT Echo return loss self check failed 1 T...

Page 2379: ... as administered on the trunk group form Retrieve a measurement report via the list testcalls command Make sure that ATMS thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form Besides the facility test failures can be caused by faulty test lines or switch paths If the measurements point to a facility problem report the results to the trunk vendor 8000 FAIL Measured transmission performance...

Page 2380: ...up battery to save the time of day during power failures Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values To resolve the alarm do the following 1 Use the set time command to set the time of day 2 Use the display time command to display the time of day If the time of day is displayed correctly wait 15 minutes and verify that the alarm is retired MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command To R...

Page 2381: ...y tone needed by the system Clock that generates the system clocks for both the Time Division Multiplex TDM bus and the packet LAN bus It also aids in monitoring and selecting internal synchronization references When resolving an IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack s errors alarms the following sections should also be consulted For non IPSI EPNs use the set tone clock UC command to establish the tone ...

Page 2382: ...llowing sections describe the relationship between the various reliability options and the IPSIs or Tone Clock circuits S8700 Multi Connect architecture has three items that can be duplicated server IPSI and PNC Note that duplicated control networks and duplicated IPSIs go together that is when the IPSIs are duplicated the control networks must be duplicated While all items can be independently du...

Page 2383: ...port networks With this configuration every IPSI connected EPN must have duplicated IPSIs The control network is duplicated so that a single fault in the control network such as a bad Ethernet switch won t bring the whole system down The non IPSI connected port networks have unduplicated Tone Clock boards Each EPN s Tone Clock circuit is active for both tones and clock signals for its port network...

Page 2384: ...g options servers control networks IPSIs and PNCs bearer networks As with the high reliability configuration this configuration also requires that IPSI connected port networks have duplicated IPSIs This configuration also requires that the non IPSI connected port networks have duplicated Tone Clock boards either TN2182 or TN780 EI EPN 3 Server A Server B IPSI IPSI EI EPN 2 IPSI IPSI EI EPN 1 Contr...

Page 2385: ...ous interchanges initiated as a part of maintenance software strategy for the Tone Clock or IPSI circuit packs Manual interchanges initiated by entering the set tone clock or set ipserver interface command Firmware initiated Tone Clock interchanges IPSI IPSI EI EI EPN 1 IPSI IPSI EI EI EPN 2 Server A Server B Control Network A Control Network B Bearer Network A Bearer Network B T C T C EI EI EPN 3...

Page 2386: ...ilures serious enough to raise a MAJOR or MINOR alarm against the active IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack For IPSI Port Networks unscheduled IPSI Tone Clock interchanges may occur any time as a part of an unscheduled IPSI interchange The IPSI interchange may be the result of Tone Clock PKT INT or EAL faults 2 In an EPN with duplicated Tone Clock or IPSI circuit packs one circuit pack is always pref...

Page 2387: ...i Connect software has the Stratum 3 clocking hard coded to this port network Stratum 4 In G3r a PPN always resided in the system and was used as a backup synchronization source when either a Synchronization source was not administered Designated master and secondary synchronization source failed With S8700 Multi Connect EPN 1 PPN may or may not exist and thus cannot be relied on as the backup syn...

Page 2388: ...r its EPN When the circuit pack is removed every call is immediately dropped the EPN enters emergency transfer within one minute and no calls can be set up from or to that EPN When replacing an IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack in an S8700 Multi Connect system always be sure to replace it with the appropriate IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack for the system Four circuit pack codes are supported Tone N...

Page 2389: ...off within 30 seconds pull the circuit pack out and reseat it If the LEDs perform as expected this time continue with step 6 Otherwise there may be a problem with the TDM bus possibly a bent pin in the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack s slot Follow the directions in the TDM BUS maintenance section 4 If the red LEDs did light as explained above then go to Step 6 If the red LEDs do NOT light as expla...

Page 2390: ...m Verify the Tone Clock circuit pack switched to the other Tone Clock circuit pack or check the LEDs The amber LED of the new standby Tone Clock circuit pack should be off provided maintenance is not running on it and the amber LED of the active Tone Clock circuit pack should be blinking If the interchange was not successful the standby Tone Clock circuit pack may be defective In particular if the...

Page 2391: ...IPSI circuit pack there are four LEDs on the IPSI s faceplate The top three LEDs are the standard ones found on any TN circuit pack The fourth LED imitates the TN2182B Tone Clock s amber LED The active standby state of an IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack may also be determined by looking at its LEDs A continuously lit red LED on the circuit pack indicates a reported fault on one or more of its MOs ...

Page 2392: ...holdover mode other green and yellow patterns active Maintenance software is testing the active circuit pack random yellow standby If the circuit pack is a TN2182 the amber LED may come on and off intermittently as ETR PTs on the board are used for tone detection services 1 For a Tone Clock in the master PN the external source is a primary or secondary DS1 source or a Stratum 3 clock For a Tone Cl...

Page 2393: ...ol Channel test 52 MINOR ON test tone clock PC r 20 257 f Any None 513 g Any None 769 h 4358 None 1025 i 4363 NPE Audit test 50 test tone clock PC sh 1538 j Any None MINOR ON 2049 k 0 Clock Health Inquiry test 46 MAJOR ON set tone clock UC override3 2305 k 0 Clock Health Inquiry test 46 MAJOR ON set tone clock UC override3 2561 l Any None MAJOR ON 3329 m 0 None MINOR WARNING 2 2 Minor alarms on th...

Page 2394: ...d the system is unable to activate the standby Tone Clock Emergency Transfer is activated When this happens both circuit packs are faulty and must be replaced See Replacing the IPSI or Tone Clock Circuit Pack If a successful interchange occurs in response to a failure of the active Tone Clock or if a standby Tone Clock fails the faulty Tone Clock should be replaced b Error Type 18 The indicated IP...

Page 2395: ...t pack using the procedure described in Replacing the IPSI or Tone Clock Circuit Pack h Error Type 76 This error can be ignored but look for other errors on this circuit pack i Error Type 1025 This error is not service affecting and no action is required j Error Type 1538 The circuit pack was taken out of service because of an excessive rate of uplink messages Use test tone clock PC long to reset ...

Page 2396: ...duplicated Tone Clocks the problem may lie with the circuit pack responsible for selecting the active Tone Clock circuit the t c selector For an EPN the t c selector is the active EXP INTF circuit pack The t c selector circuit pack of interest is the one which was active at the time the error was logged This is the currently active t c selector unless there has been an EXP INTF link switch for an ...

Page 2397: ...BD DUPINT SW CTL and EXP INTF Follow the procedures indicated for any such errors found After eliminating the above potential problem sources proceed with the following steps 2 Determine which circuit pack was controlling the choice of Tone Clock at the time the error occurred For an EPN the t c selector is the active EXP INTF circuit pack that is connected to the active PN This is EXP INTF 2A01 o...

Page 2398: ...h the set tone clock PC command If the Tone Clock interchange failed for both t c selectors replace the standby Tone Clock circuit pack which could not be interchanged into and return to this step See Replacing the IPSI or Tone Clock Circuit Pack Test the new circuit pack as follows a Execute the set tone clock PC command b Execute set expansion interface if this is an EPN Tone Clock c Execute the...

Page 2399: ... Reliability If the B IPSI is active and the A IPSI is healthy when error type 3857 is reported then software attempts to initiate an IPSI interchange to activate the archangel and PKT INT on the A IPSI thereby ensuring that the active Tone Clock PKT INT and archangel are all on the same IPSI If the A IPSI is unhealthy then software initiates a transition to EI Fallback mode If the A IPSI is activ...

Page 2400: ...or Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system By clearing error codes associated with the SAKI Reset test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Sequence ResetBoard Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive SAKI Reset test 5...

Page 2401: ...stored in memory to determine if this IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack had a loss of any of three clock types SYSCLK SYSFM SYSDCLK If this data indicates this IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack had a loss of any of these clocks the inquiry reports FAIL In addition if TDM CLK error 1 is at threshold this test will FAIL TDM CLK error 1 indicates a suspect clock is at the edge of its specified frequency ...

Page 2402: ...k circuit pack IPSI s Tone Clock circuit Once this test fails for an IPSI circuit pack s Tone Clock circuit the only way to make it pass and to retire the associated alarm is to repair the problem to execute the busy ipsi command and then issue the release ipsi command against the indicated IPSI circuit pack 1 FAIL This IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack is suspected of having a clock at the edge of ...

Page 2403: ...ircuit pack IPSI Tone Clock Once this test fails for an IPSI Tone Clock the only way to make it pass and to retire the associated alarm is to repair the problem to execute the busy ipserver interface command and then issue the release ipserver interface command against the indicated IPSI circuit pack 1 FAIL This IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack is suspect of having a clock at the edge of its specif...

Page 2404: ...he system will be able to process certain type of calls that is internal calls will succeed while outgoing calls will not The IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack also provides the clocks for the system and can serve as the synchronization reference Therefore when resolving alarms on the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack use the TDM CLK TDM Bus Clock SYNC Port Network Synchronization and TONE BD Tone Clo...

Page 2405: ...hat tones have been connected as requested e The tone generation facility may or may not be able to generate tones Table 8 652 Tone Generator Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended ...

Page 2406: ...eration Set on page 1 or the custom tones beginning on page 2 of the system parameters country options form may have values not supported by the existing Tone Clock This error 1281 indicates that the system parameters country options form has custom tones translated and that the alarmed tone board does not support the customized tones TN768 tone boards do not support any customized tones TN780 ton...

Page 2407: ...n an EPN with more than one IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack high or critical reliability system The circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware revision 2 or above e Test 149 does not run on the TN2182 or TN2312 Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive SAKI Reset test 53 a X D Clock Health test 46 b X X ND Contro...

Page 2408: ...ied by a tone detector These tones are 440 Hz 2225 Hz Digital Count The tone generator is then told to generate a sequence of test tones whose output levels are measured by a tone detector These tones are 404 Hz at 0 dB 1004 Hz at 16 dB 1004 Hz at 0 dB 2804 Hz at 0 dB A Tone Detector s general purpose tone detector listens for tones and measures their quality If any of the measured values are not ...

Page 2409: ...g install one in the same port network 3 Allow approximately 1 minute for Tone Detector maintenance to run on the newly inserted IPSI or Tone Detector circuit pack 4 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1022 ABORT Tone detection for the system is administered as wide broadband tone detection mode 5 and the Tone Detector used for this test was not a TN420C the only circuit pack wit...

Page 2410: ...will attempt to move the tone generation function to the alternate IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack if one is present in the affected port network Users may or may not hear any noisy tones This type of failure affects maintenance on other objects Maintenance may not be able to run on other objects which use the tone generation facility that is Tone Detector circuit maintenance In this case the IPSI...

Page 2411: ...en it detects problems by itself A check is also made between the type of Tone Clock being tested and the type of Tone Clock needed based on system administration The administration on the system parameters country options form may imply that a TN780 is required Table 8 654 Test 41 Tone Generator Update Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation none ABORT The system was not able...

Page 2412: ...BORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The Tone Generator could be defective In a port network with more than one IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack the system will attempt to move the tone generation function to the al...

Page 2413: ... way only either incoming or outgoing not only at the S8700 Multi Connect switch but also at the CO switch This is necessary to avoid collisions i e glare and other highly undesirable conditions The TN797 Analog Trunk and Line circuit pack does not support Neon Lamp MWI Message Waiting Indication No maintenance of the terminal connected to the Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed For circuit...

Page 2414: ...established within a D channel without associating any B channel connections The connection provides user to user service by exchanging USER INFORMATION messages without associated B channel connections An Administered TSC is a special NCA TSC defined for the DCS over the ISDN PRI D channel The ADM TSC has an administratively defined endpoint and is established for an extended period of time There...

Page 2415: ...967 These error types provide the following additional data that may prove useful when tracking down problems Any of these errors indicates that a TSC Heartbeat Inquiry test was run on an active far end Administered TSC from the switch Upon receiving the heartbeat message the network communicated that the call was unable to complete As a result the error was logged Check the signaling group status...

Page 2416: ...respond to a USER INFORMATION TSC heartbeat message Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive TSC Heartbeat Inquiry test 604 ND Table 8 658 Test 604 TSC Heartbeat Inquiry Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Reissue the test tsc administered ...

Page 2417: ... change sig group group command NOTE To disable the Administered TSC display the administration Signaling Group Form via the change sig group group command where group refers to the number of the signaling group under which the suspect TSC is administered Change the Enable field to n To enable the ADM TSC change the Enable field to y 3 If congestion still does not clear check the other nodes in th...

Page 2418: ...ed command 2000 ABORT The Administered TSC is not responding to a TSC heartbeat inquiry 1 Retry the test tsc administered command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 If the problem continues to fail obtain the status of the D channel or D channel pair associated with the ADM TSC via the status sig group group command If the D channel is INS i e in service and the status of the ADM TSC appears to...

Page 2419: ...ed command 2 Verify that the Administered TSC node on the other side of the network is active 3 Disable and enable the Administered TSC 4 Retry the test tsc administered command 2 FAIL Facility IE Information Element reject 1 Check every other node in the network and make sure Administered TSC is active PASS The Administered TSC responded to a heartbeat Table 8 658 Test 604 TSC Heartbeat Inquiry T...

Page 2420: ...igits 0 through 9 and GPTD PTs detect call progress tones modem answer tones and transmission test tones TN744 Call Classifier circuit packs have 8 CLSFY PTs These ports detect DTMF tones and classify network and MFC multifrequency compelled signaling tones That is CLSFY PTs can function as DTMR PTs or GPTD PTs and have other additional capacities MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command...

Page 2421: ...ystem performance threshold levels for the 3 types of tone receivers are administered on the change system parameters maintenance form Whenever the number of tone receivers in service falls below the administered threshold for that type of tone receiver an alarm is logged against the TTR Level MO At this point the system is operating properly but call processing capacity is reduced Another alarm i...

Page 2422: ...Classifier circuit pack has 8 Call Classifier CLSFY PT ports For each type of tone receiver if the total number of ports installed in the system is less than the administered threshold then either add more circuit packs to the system or reduce the threshold to match the number already in the system If the TTR Level alarm is still present then proceed to Step 3 3 Display errors for error type 18 an...

Page 2423: ... alarm see Repair Procedure for TTR LEV on page 8 1700 c Error code 3 does not indicate a current error condition It indicates that the number of GPTD ports in service was below the administered threshold but is now equal to or greater than the threshold These errors are typically generated during boot time or other transitional states when the ports are being brought into service d The total numb...

Page 2424: ...the ports are being brought into service f The total number of Call Classifier ports CLSFY PT currently in service is below the administered threshold To clear the alarm see Repair Procedure for TTR LEV on page 8 1700 g There are currently no DTMR ports in service To clear the alarm see Repair Procedure for TTR LEV on page 8 1700 h There are currently no GPTD ports in service To clear the alarm se...

Page 2425: ...Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Linux Command to Run1 1 Usage testmodem s l t arg no argument Performs short test s Short test performs handshake and offhook this is also the default option l Performs short tests t arg Specific test to perform Possible values for arg are reset_usb handshake offhook Usage this Full Name of MO USB1 MAJOR testmodem USB Port Modem Testing USB1 MINOR testmodem US...

Page 2426: ...is destructive This test verifies that modem s hardware is attached and that the modem can handshake with the USB port The test 1 Tries to open the device 2 Sends a handshake string ATZ to the modem The modem should return an OK string The following errors can be detected Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Handshake test X X D Offh...

Page 2427: ...2 TEST Offhook Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Modem in use try again later ABORT Some other application is currently using the modem Try again later Could not open USB port ABORT System error An attempt to open the USB device failed Try again later Read error could not run test ABORT After the ATZ is sent a read of the USB device is done If the read fails a probable system ...

Page 2428: ...the modem to be reset even if the modem is in use Although no failures are produced by this test the following error can be detected Table 8 663 TEST Reset USB Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Could not open USB port ABORT System error An attempt to open the USB device failed Try again later Continued on next page ...

Page 2429: ...sis and recovery and raising or clearing maintenance alarms The TN464F or later circuit pack combined with an 120A1 CSU module forms an Enhanced Integrated CSU The 120A1 CSU module when combined with the functionality provided by the TN464F hardware and firmware and switch software provides functionality equivalent to an external stand alone ESF T1 CSU The 120A1 CSU module connects to the TN464F c...

Page 2430: ... functionally the same as the TN464F without ICSU with the following exceptions The Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 always passes for the TN2242 The test ds1 loop command is not executed for the TN2242 When reset board is run on a TN2242 a different initialization message is sent for the local loop around test Test 135 is executed Since an ICSU Integrated Channel Service Unit is not supported on this ...

Page 2431: ...ing the JRC Japan Radio Corporation external converter Figure 8 101 Japanese TTC public network connections Figure 8 102 shows the hardware connections for private network access using the TN2242 circuit pack Figure Notes 1 S8700 Multi Connect system 2 UDS1 BD DS1 CONV circuit pack 24 trunk digital tie trunk 3 JRC Japan Radio Corporation external converter 4 TDM facilities 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 cydfjap1 L...

Page 2432: ...t pack change ds1 and change trunk group n 3 Remove the UDS1 BD circuit packs 4 Remove the JRC Japan Radio Corporation external converter and cable 5 Insert the TN2242 circuit packs 6 Connect the TN2242 to the TDM with the H600 513 cable assembly 7 Administer the TN2242 circuit pack see Administration Figure Notes 1 S8700 Multi Connect system 2 TN2242 2 Mbit Japan trunk circuit pack 3 H600 513 cab...

Page 2433: ...ired for this interface to operate successfully in Japan Table 8 664 H600 513 cable assembly pinout TN2242 TDM 50 pin connection pin number Color Lead Designation Color 15 pinconnection pin number 22 W BL Line in W BL 4 23 W O Line out W O 9 47 Bl W Line in Bl W 11 48 O W Line out O W 2 Table 8 665 TN2242 administration Field Value Trunk Group form Page 1 Trunk Type in out wink delay immed every p...

Page 2434: ...r higher Incoming Partial Dial 18 PPS 10 or 20 Make for PPS 10 35 Break for PPS 10 65 Make for PPS 20 15 Break for PPS 20 35 Outgoing Disconnect 100 Outgoing Glare Guard 800 or higher Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit 800 Outgoing Seizure Response 5 Table 8 666 TN2242 LED interpretation LED Meaning Red MAJOR alarm MINOR alarm Firmware initialization during circuit pack insertion Amber A port on the ...

Page 2435: ...switching algorithm This algorithm determines whether timing references should be switched due to failure or restore conditions TN2242 Trunk Ports The TN2242 circuit pack MO is responsible for monitoring the health of the DS1 facility If a DS1 facility goes down then that facility s DS1 circuit pack instructs every MO associated with the DS1facility to place its trunks or ISDN PRI signaling link i...

Page 2436: ...a given TN464GP TN2464BP is driven by administrable parameters The TN464GP TN2464BP circuit packs are intended for use with ATM IP wideband or other complex services which are likely to have problems with echo The echo cancellation circuitry on a given TN464GP TN2464BP is a right to use feature activated via license file You can determine whether this option is active by viewing the System Paramet...

Page 2437: ... designed to support 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps DS1 link or 32 DS0 channels on a 2 048 Mbps link The 32 channel interface is not supported on G3r V1 systems The DS0 channels can be administered as trunks to other switches lines to off premises stations ports to line side PRI terminating devices or ports to other line side non PRI terminating devices DS0 channels on TN464 Bs can only be admini...

Page 2438: ...N SGR ISDN PRI Signaling Group WAE PORT Wideband Access Endpoint Port and PE BCHL PRI Endpoint Port The maintenance strategy for the TN464 UDS1 Interface circuit pack UDS1 BD is very similar to the maintenance strategy for the TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack DS1 BD The same commands are used for administering and testing the boards The differences in maintenance strategy between the boards result...

Page 2439: ...U These loop back tests are explained in detail later in this UDS1 BD MO but Figure 8 103 gives a high level overview of the loop back points Figure 8 103 High Level Overview Of Loopback Points CPE LPBK JACK NET SMRT JACK CSU MOD NET SMRT JACK CPE LPBK JACK DS1 BRD CSU MOD DS1 BRD NET WORK CSU module to CSU module Remote end NETWORK ENVIRONMENT Local end NETWORK SMRT JACK BLB R LLB CPE LPBK JACK D...

Page 2440: ...DN PRI implementations for example between two different countries US systems use country protocol 1 Near End CSU Type is set to other for no CSU installed or for an external CSU such as an ESF T1 CSU or set to integrated for the 120A1 CSU module or the 401A T1 sync splitter Answering integrated will cause additional fields to be displayed for administering the Enhanced Integrated CSU module E1 Sy...

Page 2441: ... Figure 8 106 shows how to configure the circuit pack for 24 channel or 32 channel DS1 The channel selection must match the parameters administered on the corresponding DS1 Circuit Pack form US applications use 24 Channels Backplane Connectors 24 32 Channel Selector 75 120 Ohm Selector Top Bottom Faceplate TN464C D Insert the jumpers into the blocks so as to join the center row of pins and the row...

Page 2442: ...o a source C LAN board using FTP The image is then copied to a target board s flash memory over the TDM bus The transfer of the download image from the source board to a target board is done under switch software s control This process is initiated using the S8700 Multi Connect SAT interface If the firmware download fails for this circuit pack an error is logged and an alarm raised See Error Type ...

Page 2443: ...one 513 f Any WARNING3 MINOR ON 514 g 46086 WARNING3 MINOR ON 769 h 46085 WARNING3 MINOR ON 770 i 46096 WARNING3 MINOR ON 1025 e 4363 NPE Audit test 50 1281 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING3 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS 1300 j Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1301 k Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1302 l An...

Page 2444: ...st 138 WARNING3 MINOR OFF test board UUCSS 1324 Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1400 1401 s Any Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 and Echo Cancellation test 1420 MINOR ON test board UUCSS 1537 t 46082 WARNING3 MINOR ON 1538 u Any WARNING3 MINOR ON 1793 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 WARNING MINOR MAJOR4 OFF test board UUCSS 1794 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry te...

Page 2445: ...Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 2 If ports are assigned to the circuit pack then a minor alarm is raised If no ports are assigned to the circuit pack then a warning alarm is raised The alarm is raised after the circuit pack has been missing for a period of 15 minutes...

Page 2446: ... correct slot or 2 Completely remove the UDS1 BD from the system using the following steps a Remove any administered DS1 trunks access endpoints or PRI endpoints associated with the circuit pack from their trunk groups b Execute the remove ds1 UUCSS and change circuit pack UUCSS commands If every administration condition is met for this circuit pack and the red LED is still on follow the instructi...

Page 2447: ...s logged more than once in a 24 hour period the circuit pack should be replaced g Error Type 514 LAN External RAM Error This error occurs when there is a hardware fault in the server s external RAM The RAM is used for message buffering to and from the Packet bus This error should not occur frequently If it does 10 times within 30 minutes the circuit pack should be replaced h Error Type 769 Transmi...

Page 2448: ...eplug the E1SS into the UDS1 circuit pack s connector on the I O connector panel on back of the carrier Otherwise change the E1 Sync Splitter field using the change ds1 form to n If this error remains after plugging the E1SS into the board s connector there could be a problem with the I O connector panel k Error Type 1301 CSU module T1 sync splitter not expected or E1 synchronization splitter not ...

Page 2449: ...rwise use the change ds1 command to change the E1 Sync Splitter field to n n Error Type 1310 BLB failure This error occurs when the DS1 Board Loopback BLB demand test fails Repeat the test using the commands busyout board UUCSS test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests release board UUCSS If the BLB test continues to fail then the TN464F circuit pack needs to be replaced o Error Type 1311 ELB fai...

Page 2450: ...span test release board UUCSS If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loop Back Jack continues to fail other steps must be taken to deactivate the loopback r Error Type 1314 Far CSU Loopback deactivation error This error occurs when the UDS1 circuit pack could not deactivate a far end CSU loop back on power up reset or upon software request Attempt to clear the alarm using the commands busyout board ...

Page 2451: ...30 minutes the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every trunk or port of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is then returned to the in service state If either the board is not restored to normal operation or the error recurs after the board was restored to normal operation escalate the problem v Error Types 3073 to 3160 For later releases of G3V4 and beyond only Error Type 30...

Page 2452: ...AM is detected but the call continues by using another translation location ab Error Type 3843 LAN Receive Parity Error This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an error in a received frame from the Packet bus These errors are most likely caused by a Packet bus problem but may be due to a circuit pack fault See PKT BUS Packet Bus on page 8 1230 to determine whether the problem is isolated t...

Page 2453: ...en the circuit pack was taken out of service due to hyperactivity If Error Type 1538 is absent then the circuit pack was not taken out of service but it has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods However if this error type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used it may indicate a problem with the ...

Page 2454: ...on Audit test 50 X ND Control Channel Loop test 52 X ND Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry test 138 X X ND Blue Alarm Inquiry test 139 X X ND Red Alarm Inquiry test 140 X X ND Yellow Alarm Inquiry test 141 X X ND Major Alarm Inquiry test 142 X X ND Minor Alarm Inquiry test 143 X X ND Slip Alarm Inquiry test 144 X X ND Misframe Alarm Inquiry test 145 X X ND Translation Update test 146 X X ND ICSU Status ...

Page 2455: ...SCOTCH NPE chip has been updated with its translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already admini...

Page 2456: ...with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the b...

Page 2457: ...ircuit pack is providing timing for the system and therefore it cannot be reset without major system disruptions 1 If the circuit pack needs to be reset then set synchronization to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack and try again See SYNC Port Network Synchronization on page 8 1509 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busyout the circuit pack 2 Execute ...

Page 2458: ...y administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board command 4 Issue the reset board command 5 Issue the release busy board command 6 Issue the test...

Page 2459: ... pack to put the circuit pack back into the normal operation mode Every trunk or port of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 8 672 Test 135 Internal Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic ...

Page 2460: ...eriod If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log follow the maintenance strategy recommended for this error type 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the reset board command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the reset board command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL The UDS1 Interface circuit pack...

Page 2461: ...operating manual for information 5 Check the physical connection of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the terminating device Check premise distribution system or intra premise wiring for physical connection failures If the error seconds measurement is severe investigate premise distribution system wiring for noise and distance limitation 6 Replace the local UDS1 Interface circuit pack and repeat ...

Page 2462: ...he signal has been lost for about 1 second It will not retire the alarm until the signal has returned for about 10 seconds 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS...

Page 2463: ...larm condition also queries the UDS1 board to confirm the I CSU Sync Splitter error A Minor or Warning alarm is raised depending on the severity of the I CSU Sync Splitter error The trunks on the board may be taken out of service if the I CSU Sync Splitter error is deemed serious If a Loss Of Signal alarm and an I CSU Sync Splitter error co exist the Loss Of Signal alarm condition takes priority a...

Page 2464: ...e or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited 1 The UDS1 BD tests such as Tests 138 and 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no effect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed When hyperactivity occurs the...

Page 2465: ...U module s Sync Splitter s NETWORK jack 2 If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch call the system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device such as a PRI terminal adapter...

Page 2466: ... form to n 2 Run the test again 1301 FAIL The 120A1 CSU module or the 401A T1 sync splitter or the 402A or 403A E1 synchronization splitter is not expected The 120A1 CSU module or the 401A T1 sync splitter is not expected The 120A1 CSU module T1 sync splitter is physically connected to the UDS1 board behind the port carrier but the Near End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not been administe...

Page 2467: ... Near End CSU Type field is set to integrated to allow for CSU module T1 sync splitter administration remove the circuit pack and replace it with a TN464F or later suffix board Otherwise use the change ds1 command to change the Near End CSU Type field to other The DS1 circuit pack Suffix is incorrect for E1 Sync Splitter administration The E1 Sync Splitter field on the add ds1 form has been admini...

Page 2468: ... continues to fail the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the CSU module T1 sync splitter 1312 FAIL The Integrated CSU I CSU Module Repeater Loopback RLB test 1211 failed This test is executed during I CSU Sync Splitter power up reset i e the UDS1 board is physically inserted and the CSU module or the Sync Splitter is already installed or when the CSU module Sync Splitter ...

Page 2469: ...is error code the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the CSU module Sync Splitter 1322 FAIL No 5 Volt power detected from the UDS1 circuit pack to the CSU module or the Sync Splitter Problem is probably due to an open fuse on the DS1 board or to a faulty ICSU Sync Splitter NOTE Do not immediately swap a DS1 board as this may blow the fuse on the new board 1 If the test con...

Page 2470: ...still fails replace the TN464GP TN2464BP PASS DS1 signal is present and the physical link is healthy In addition no Integrated CSU Sync Splitter errors or echo cancellation errors are detected 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Veri...

Page 2471: ...he service state before the Blue alarm occurs Line Loop Back Alarm The LLB Line Loopback is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the ICSU or DS1 board into a loop back mode When the ICSU or DS1 board is in the LLB mode the arriving bit pattern is regenerated and sent back The LLB Alarm activates when the in band activate LLB bit pattern arrives continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line The LLB ...

Page 2472: ...When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every UDS1 interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated t...

Page 2473: ... Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was alre...

Page 2474: ...very trunk or port of the circuit pack into the out of service state The inquiry test runs every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared When the Red alarm is cleared the UDS1 Interface circuit pack stops transmitting the Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint The maintenance software restores all trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the service state before the Red alarm occur...

Page 2475: ... 3 A busyout or a release command has no effect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 min...

Page 2476: ... UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 2 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer to the Line Side Termin...

Page 2477: ...le 4 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 2 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer t...

Page 2478: ... UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board is shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board command 4 Issue the reset board command 5 Issue the release busy board com...

Page 2479: ...arm Once the alarm is confirmed the maintenance software places every trunk or port on the circuit pack into the out of service state The Inquiry test runs every 10 minutes until the Yellow alarm is cleared When the Yellow alarm is cleared the maintenance software restores every trunk or port on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack back to its previous service state before the alarm was raised This Yel...

Page 2480: ... 3 A busyout or a release command has no effect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 min...

Page 2481: ...the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 2 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer to the Line Side Terminating Device Operating Manual for information 3 Cont...

Page 2482: ... test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 2 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer to the Line Side Terminating Device Operating Manual for informati...

Page 2483: ...peat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device such as a PRI terminal adapter 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 2 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer to the Line Side Terminating Device Operating Manual for information 3 Contact ...

Page 2484: ...for more than 20 minutes When the Major alarm is cleared the maintenance software restores every trunk or port on the circuit pack to its previous service state before a Major alarm occurs PASS Neither a Yellow alarm nor a Remote Multiframe Alarm nor a F5 state alarm is being received from the remote DS1 endpoint 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could ...

Page 2485: ...5 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every UDS1 Interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is ...

Page 2486: ...emise wiring for physical connection failures 6 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test PASS No Major alarm is detected in the UDS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the ...

Page 2487: ...nd 41 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition has cleared If ESF framing mode is selected the UDS1 Interface circuit pack takes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition has cleared When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition it sends a MINOR ALARM message to the maintenance sof...

Page 2488: ...ts 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and its ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operat...

Page 2489: ...de terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1 interface circuit pack and the line side terminating device is very poor Enter the list measurement ds1 log UUCSS command to read the error seconds measurement 2 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same signaling mode fr...

Page 2490: ...e state If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply the system synchronization source the MINOR alarm will initiate a synchronization source switch See TDM BUS TDM Bus and SYNC Port Network Synchronization for details PASS No Minor alarm is detected in the UDS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect t...

Page 2491: ...s 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and its ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operati...

Page 2492: ...ose the remote DS1 endpoint 6 Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1 interface circuit packs and the cable 7 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test 1 to 88 cont d FAIL cont d If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Enter the list measurement d...

Page 2493: ...age 8 1588 for details A Minor alarm against the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is raised but every trunk or port of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack remains in the in service state PASS No Slip alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect boar...

Page 2494: ...ults 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal oper...

Page 2495: ...times 2 If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN464C enter the list measurement ds1 log UUCSS command to read the error seconds measurement 3 Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 4 Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors against the synchronization SYNC Follow the suggested repair procedur...

Page 2496: ...ilures 7 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test PASS No Misframe alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Exe...

Page 2497: ...E Loop Back Jack Power etc Table 8 681 Test 146 Translation Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute interval s up to 5 times FAIL Internal system software error 1 Enter the display ds1 UUCSS command to verify the UDS1 Interface circuit pack translation PASS Translation data has been downloaded to the UDS1 Interface c...

Page 2498: ...tted and received pattern is different the test fails When the test is complete every trunk or port on the TN464GP TN2464BPTN UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 8 682 Test 1209 DS1 Board Loop Back Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu lo...

Page 2499: ...as not received within the allowable time period This may be due to hyperactivity Error Type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited 1 The UDS1 BD tests such as Tests 138 and 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board ...

Page 2500: ...anslations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseatin...

Page 2501: ...he board sets up the ELB loopback transmits a test pattern and verifies that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback If the transmitted and received pattern is different the test fails When the test is complete every trunk or port on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 8 683 Test 1210 CSU Equipment Loop...

Page 2502: ... command 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loop back mode line loopback or payload loopback The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loop Back Jack test Far CSU Loopback test or the One Way Span test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loop back mode Only one long duration loopba...

Page 2503: ...se faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times FAIL ...

Page 2504: ...ions are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board comma...

Page 2505: ...ack transmits a test pattern and verifies that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback If the transmitted and received pattern is different the test fails When the test is complete every trunk or port on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 8 684 Test 1211 CSU Repeater Loop Back Test Error Code Test Resu...

Page 2506: ...ch command 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loop back mode line loopback or payload loopback The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loop Back Jack test Far CSU Loopback test or the One Way Span test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loop back mode Only one long duration loop...

Page 2507: ...k within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every UDS1 Interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged agai...

Page 2508: ...tions are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board comm...

Page 2509: ...amed 3 in 24 test pattern begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern and returns a PASS result to indicate that the pattern was successfully sent If the loopback is not established within the 10 seconds the test returns FAIL or abort The status of the CPE Loop Back Jack test is available in the hardware error log via Error Type 3900 Several distinct Aux values give the user informatio...

Page 2510: ...k is providing timing for the system Executing this test could cause major system disruption If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 ...

Page 2511: ...isolated from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every UDS1 Interface trunk is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case...

Page 2512: ...sociated with the failing test 3 FAIL The CPE Loop Back Jack test was not set up properly The framed 3 in 24 test pattern generated by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through the CPE Loop Back Jack could not be detected properly by the UDS1 circuit pack 1 Retry the test ds1 loop UUCSS cpe loopback jack test begin command 2 If the CPE Loop Back Jack test continues to fail the proble...

Page 2513: ... translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout bo...

Page 2514: ... verify the loopback has been established transmits a framed 3 in 24 test pattern begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern and returns a PASS result If the loopback is not established within the 15 seconds the test fails The status of the Far CSU Loopback test is available in the hardware error log via Error Type 3901 Several distinct Aux values give the user information about the s...

Page 2515: ...providing timing for the system Executing this test could cause major system disruption If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 Lastl...

Page 2516: ...ity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 ...

Page 2517: ...e Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began executing The test will continue to run until the system technician enters the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board...

Page 2518: ...bit errors within the received pattern The status of the One Way Span test is available in the hardware error log via Error Type 3902 Several distinct Aux values give the user information of the status of the test The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test has been running Test Duration field and number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Cou...

Page 2519: ...ing timing for the system Executing this test could cause major system disruption If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the IPSI or Tone Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 Lastly issu...

Page 2520: ...d from the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every trunk for the UDS1 interface circuit pack is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility ...

Page 2521: ...that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issu...

Page 2522: ...pack must be busied out using the system technician busyout board command before running the Inject Single Bit Error test The list measurements ds1 summary command displays the number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Count field Injecting this single bit error should increment the bit error count of the loopback span test by one Table 8 688 Test 1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test...

Page 2523: ... the system and all of its trunks are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation Every trunk for the UDS1 interface circuit pack is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In suc...

Page 2524: ...dminister the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board command 4 Issue the reset board command 5 Issue the release ...

Page 2525: ...ng the system technician busyout board command before running this End Loopback Span test The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the test ran Test Duration field and number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Count field To restore the trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the in service state execute the release board command Tabl...

Page 2526: ...ion Every trunk for the UDS1 interface circuit pack is then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults such as slips misframes or blue alarms would be entered in the error log In addition many hardware errors would be logged against the associated trunk circuits If the facility is OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes re...

Page 2527: ...and to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If so the board was shut down Reseating the board will re initialize it 3 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 then issue the busyout board command 4 Issue the reset board command 5 Issue the ...

Page 2528: ... the 401A T1 sync splitter is not physically installed the status LEDs are always off and this test aborts Table 8 690 Test 1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1005 ABORT The ICSU Status LEDs test cannot be executed for the current configuration The test applies only to TN46...

Page 2529: ... to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Verify that the board s translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the boar...

Page 2530: ... test was not received within the allowable time period This may be due to hyperactivity Error Type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited 1 The UDS1 BD tests such as Tests 138 and 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no...

Page 2531: ...ack can still be used for a T1 E1 line interface without echo cancellation This capability provides limited service for the customer until the circuit pack can be changed out PASS The Echo Cancellation feature is functioning properly 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inser...

Page 2532: ...n 3 minutes elapse the server begins shutting down Trap 7 Event ID 7 Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 7 SUP power failure Shutting down in 4 minutes The UPS battery s power is in a critically low condition with an estimated 4 minutes of remaining holdover A warning is written to every logged in user of the server When 4 minutes elapse the server begins shutting down Trap 8 Event ID 8 Alarm string 1 ACT UP...

Page 2533: ...r A For example the battery may be bad low and a Shutdown is in progress Trap 3 Event ID 141 upsAlarmDepletedBattery Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 14 MAJ Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 14 is a miscellaneous environmental alarm sent from the UPS that supports server A For example the battery may be bad low and should be replaced Trap 4 Event ID 151 upsAlarmDepletedBattery Alarm s...

Page 2534: ... this case supports server A For example the alarm could mean that the battery may be bad and should be replaced Also a MAJOR alarm was sent to an alarm receiver and has been acknowledged Trap 4 Event 21 upsAlarmTempBad Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 21 WRN Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 21 is a miscellaneous environmental alarm This alarm is sent from the UPS that in this case s...

Page 2535: ...iscellaneous environmental alarm This alarm is sent from the UPS that in this case supports server A For example the alarm could mean that the battery may be bad and should be replaced Also a MAJOR alarm was sent to an alarm receiver and has been acknowledged Trap 3 Event ID 26 upsAlarmLowBattery Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 26 WRN Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 26 is a miscell...

Page 2536: ...t 30 is a miscellaneous environmental alarm This alarm is sent from the UPS that in this case supports server A For example the alarm could mean that the battery may be bad and should be replaced Also a MAJOR alarm was sent to an alarm receiver and has been acknowledged Trap 4 Event ID 31 upsAlarmOutputBad Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 31 WRN Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 31 is...

Page 2537: ...p Event 35 is a miscellaneous environmental alarm This alarm is sent from the UPS that in this case supports server A For example the alarm could mean that the battery may be bad and should be replaced Also a MAJOR alarm was sent to an alarm receiver and has been acknowledged Trap 3 upsAlarmFanFailure Alarm string 1 ACT UPS A 36 WRN Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 36 is a mi...

Page 2538: ...pports server A For example the alarm could mean that the battery may be bad and should be replaced Also a MAJOR alarm was sent to an alarm receiver and has been acknowledged Trap 3 upsAlarmGeneralFault 1 ACT UPS A 40 WRN Miscellaneous trap e g bad battery This UPS trap Event 40 is a miscellaneous environmental alarm This alarm is sent from the UPS that in this case supports server A For example t...

Page 2539: ...n Controls The switch activates congestion controls on VAL when it detects buffers exceeding the threshold The switch releases the congestion controls when the VAL reports that its buffer level has returned to normal levels MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 44 for CSS PNC 1 64 for ATM PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E ...

Page 2540: ... UUCSS l r 20 257 d 513 e 4352 4357 MINOR ON 769 f 4358 1281 1290 1295 g Any MINOR ON reset board UUCSS 1537 1796 h Any MINOR ON 1794 i MINOR ON 1798 j 2049 k Packet Interface test 598 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 3 2305 2306 l 2561 2668 m Any 2817 2819 n Congestion Query test 600 MINOR ON test board UUCSS s r 3 3073 o Link Status test 601 MINOR ON test board UUCSS s 3330 p MINOR ON reset board U...

Page 2541: ...0 circuit packs 1 Remove the circuit pack s against which the error is logged d Error Type 257 Transient communication problem between switch and circuit pack does not affect service and can be ignored 1 Ignore this error unless the Control Channel Loop test 52 fails 2 If Test 52 fails replace the circuit pack Repetitive failures of the Control Channel Loop test indicate circuit pack hardware fail...

Page 2542: ...ceeded the error threshold has been removed from service 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack i Error Type 1794 Packet bus transmit buffers have overflowed 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack 4352 External RAM error 4353 Internal RAM error 4355 ROM ...

Page 2543: ...k l Error Type 2305 230 Error in received frame from packet bus Most likely cause packet bus problem Other cause circuit pack fault Invalid LAPD frame errors occur when the frame contains a bad Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC is greater than the maximum length violates the link level protocol 1 Retry the command test board UUCSS and see if the condition clears 2 If condition persists execute PPE LANBI...

Page 2544: ... SNMP socket failure n Error Type 2817 2819 Congestion Query test 600 failed The Error Types correspond to the descriptions 1 See Congestion Query Test 600 on page 8 1830 for Abort and Fail 3601s o Error Type 3073 Remote Socket Control Link RSCL or Link Status test 601 failed This failure can be due to This circuit pack The packet bus The packet interface circuit pack p Error Type 3330 Critical fa...

Page 2545: ...ithin 15 minutes replace the circuit pack 5 If the same error occurs on a different circuit pack follow normal escalation procedures r Error Type 3840 Circuit pack received bad control channel message from switch Aux Data If Error Type 3999 And traffic volume is Then Does not accompany Error Type 3586 Heavy Circuit pack is in service but sent at least half hyperactive threshold With heavy traffic ...

Page 2546: ...or By themselves these errors do not affect service w Error Type 3846 Main interprocessor error By themselves these errors do not affect service x Error Type 3848 Main internal channel error By themselves these errors do not affect service y Error Type 3851 Unable to write LAN translation RAM error By themselves these errors do not affect service z Error Type 3852 LAN external RAM error By themsel...

Page 2547: ...IC Receive Parity Error Counter test 595 X ND Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter test 596 X ND Packet Interface test 598 X X ND Congestion Query test 600 X X ND Link Status test 601 X X ND Table 8 693 Test 52 Control Channel Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minu...

Page 2548: ...to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busyout the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the problem persists escalate the problem 1966 ABORT The board is in the process of running the autosave command to save announcements 1 Retry the command again later 2100 ABORT Could not allocate...

Page 2549: ...t pack test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the probl...

Page 2550: ...e period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 1 10 FAIL Ci...

Page 2551: ...ription Recommendation 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry t...

Page 2552: ... time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 2100 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem FAIL Cir...

Page 2553: ...minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If command continues to fail examine the VAL port measurements to determine which ports are heavily utilized and the processor occupancy of the circuit pack A Low processor occupancy when VAL is congested indicates circuit pack failure 1 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 2 If congestion recurs replace the circuit pack High processor o...

Page 2554: ...ists 2012 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2100 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 2 FAIL The RSCL control link disconnected 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail execute the Packet Interface test 598 test board UUCSS to s...

Page 2555: ...ardware Figure Notes 1 TN2501AP VAL announcement circuit pack 2 System access terminal SAT 3 Switch 4 Phone for recording announcements 5 TN799C C LAN is required when using IP SAT or VAL Manager 6 Your LAN See LAN cable 7 Computer or remote recording studio for recording and storing announcements FTP client application VAL Manager application PC only 8 Microphone Part Number Comcode TN2501AP 1 10...

Page 2556: ...shows the 9 LEDs on the TN2051AP faceplate Descriptions of each LED are in Table 8 701 Figure 8 108 TN2501AP faceplate LEDs The following table lists the TN2501AP faceplate LEDs the type of behavior on off flashing or intermittent and a description of the condition LINK TRMT RCV 100M FDX COL fpdfval LJK 032101 ...

Page 2557: ...cedure again Amber Fast flash 100 ms on 100 ms off Occurs during circuit pack insertion or circuit pack reset which the announcement files are being copied from FLASH to RAM If you reset the circuit pack during this time your announcement files remain intact Amber Slow flash 200 ms on 200 ms off Flashes during autosave while copying announcement files from RAM to FLASH CAUTION You can lose the ann...

Page 2558: ...cuit pack slot LAN cable that attaches to the Backplane Adapter Backplane Adapter The following figure shows the Backplane Adapter label reads IP Media Processor Figure 8 109 Backplane Adapter Comcode 848525887 Figure Notes 1 Amphenol connector attaches to the back of the switch cabinet corresponding to the TN2501AP circuit pack s slot 2 RJ 45 LAN cable connection 10 Mbps uses Category 3 cable 100...

Page 2559: ...usyout board Curtail activity on the circuit pack before resetting it reset board release board Resume activity on the circuit pack after busying out the VAL circuit pack or ports on it busyout board or busyout port busyout port Isolate a specific port usually during troubleshooting release port Resume activity after busying out a port on the VAL circuit pack busyout port reset board Re initialize...

Page 2560: ... an announcement or firmware image file on a VAL circuit pack enable filesystem Begin an FTP session into a specific TN2501AP circuit pack disable filesystem End an FTP session into a specific TN2501AP circuit pack set ethernet options Manually or automatically set the Ethernet connection s parameters get ethernet options Generate a report about a specific Ethernet connection set boot image Direct...

Page 2561: ...congestion controls when the VAL reports that its buffer level has returned to normal levels MO s Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial SAT Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 44 for CSS PNC 1 64 for ATM PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the number of the slot where the circuit pack resides 01 21 pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 etc Full Name of MO VAL PT MA...

Page 2562: ...1843 repair procedures to verify repair 3 Clear the alarm test port UUCSSpp long clear c Error Type 3585 TDM Port Loop Around test 1285 failed 1 Test the port test port UUCsspp long 2 See the TDM Loop Around Test 1285 repair procedure Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 There is no short test sequence for this MO Every test is available in the long...

Page 2563: ...and it has a tone receiver receive tones on another timeslot The tones are looped through the record playback port Test failure indicates failure of one or more of the following components VAL TN2501 circuit pack TDM bus Tone generator tone receiver circuit pack Table 8 703 System Technician Demanded Tests VAL PT Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive N...

Page 2564: ...esponse within the allowable time period 1 If this problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 Repeat the test 3 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system res...

Page 2565: ...with the busyout port UUCSS command This command is destructive tearing down every call and link using the port 1002 ABORT No TDM bus timeslots available for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 1963 ABORT The port is in use 1 Retry the command when the port is idle You can force the port to the idle state with the busyout port UUCSS c...

Page 2566: ...blem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS If the problem persists replace the circuit pack PASS Port circuitry functioning properly Table 8 705 Test 1275 SCOTCH Synchronous Loop Around Test Continued Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation Continued on next page ...

Page 2567: ... SAT Command to Run1 1 Where UU is the universal cabinet number 1 64 for ATM PNC 1 44 for CSS PNC C is the carrier designation A B C D or E SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack resides 01 21 and pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO VC BD MAJOR test board UUCSS l r Voice Conditioner circuit pack VC BD MINOR test board UUCSS l r Voice Conditioner circ...

Page 2568: ...e 2 or later it must be replaced b This circuit pack is busied out by the busyout board UUCSS command c Transient communication problems exist between the switch and this circuit pack Execute the test board UUCSS command and see the repair procedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 on page 8 1848 1025 f 4363 NPE Audit test 50 1281 g Any SAKI Sanity test 53 MAJOR ON 1293 to 1294 h 46088...

Page 2569: ...by release board UUCSS If Test 53 passes the on board circuitry is healthy Use test board UUCSS long clear to retire the alarm If Test 53 fails replace the circuit pack h The circuit pack detected a critical hardware failure Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS commands If the Circuit Pack Restart test 594 passes then the on board circ...

Page 2570: ...cribed in XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack as Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Control Channel Loop around test 52 2 2 See repair procedures described in XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack CAUTION If the TN788 Voice Conditioner circuit pack VC BD is not Vintage 2 or later it must be replaced X X ND...

Page 2571: ...Name of MO VC DSPPT MAJOR test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner DSP Port VC DSPPT MINOR test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner DSP Port VC DSPPT WARNING test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner DSP Port Table 8 707 VC DSPPT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence ...

Page 2572: ...n the VC circuit pack reported a firmware error No action is required System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below For example by clearing error codes associated with the DSP NPE Crosstalk test 1103 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence DSP NPE Crosstalk Test 1103 This test is...

Page 2573: ...03 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary resources for this test 1 Re...

Page 2574: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 143 8 1852 Issue 1 May 2002 Figure 8 110 VC Circuit Pack DSP Port Local TDM Loop Back Test ...

Page 2575: ...tervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port is seized by a user for a valid call Use the status station command for the station associated with this port and determine whether the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the VC BD circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If this result occurs re...

Page 2576: ...is test is destructive This test verifies the connectivity of a VC DSPPT across the TDM bus It aborts if calls associated with the port are in progress Failure of this test indicates an on board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack Figure 8 111 VC Circuit pack DSP Port DSP Loop Around Test ...

Page 2577: ... PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call Use the status station command for the station associated with this port and determine whether the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received ...

Page 2578: ...uired to run this test are not available or the port may be busy with a call 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1015 ABORT The VC DSPPT is not busied out 1 Busyout the VC DSPPT by executing the busy port UUCSSpp command and then retry the test 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the VC DSPPT within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute int...

Page 2579: ...ns form before the VCs field can be changed to a number greater than 0 For example administering 8 in that field means 1 circuit pack The algorithm for determining that a low level of VC resources exists uses the number entered in the VCs field and the number of VCs that are in service in the system Each VC circuit pack contains 16 physical ports 8 ports are reserved for VC DSPPT ports and the rem...

Page 2580: ...aised against VC BD or VC DSPPT MOs Therefore if a VC LEV error alarm exists and none has been raised against VC BD or VC DSPPT MOs a VC circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the VC LEV error alarm To resolve a VC LEV MAJOR alarm restore the number of VC ports available for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port capacity value entered in the VCs field To determin...

Page 2581: ...m by following the procedures below 1 See VC DSPPT on page 8 1849 and VC BD on page 8 1845 to resolve any associated alarms 2 If a VC LEV error alarm exist and none has been raised against VC BD or VC DSPPT MOs a VC circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the VC LEV error alarm To resolve a VC LEV MAJOR alarm restore the number of VC ports available for service to be equal to or mo...

Page 2582: ... in the carrier where the circuit pack resides 01 21 and pp is the 2 digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO VC SUMPT MAJOR test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner Summer Port VC SUMPT MINOR test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner Summer Port VC SUMPT WARNING test port UUCSSpp Voice Conditioner Summer Port Table 8 713 VC SUMPT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Boa...

Page 2583: ... The VC Summer Port Local TDM Loopback test 1100 failed System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below For example by clearing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk test 6 you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence...

Page 2584: ...ndicates an on board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack The Loopback test runs the following tests A Loop Around test across the TDM bus A conference circuit test Table 8 714 Test 6 VC SUMPT Port NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid...

Page 2585: ... 1 May 2002 8 1863 555 233 143 The tests are run in the above order If the first test fails the switch returns an error code and the second test is not executed Figure 8 112 VC Circuit Pack Summer Port Loop Back Test ...

Page 2586: ... up to 5 times 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call Use the status station command for the station associated with this port to determine whether the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received from the VC BD circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If this result occ...

Page 2587: ...e endpoints are administered as wideband access endpoints and have no signaling interface to switch they simply transmit and receive data Some applications detect and respond to the presence or absence of data Calls are initiated from these endpoints using the Administered Connections feature Multiple access endpoints on one line side UDS1 circuit pack facility are separate and distinct within the...

Page 2588: ...dentical on both line side and network facilities However because maintenance capabilities are limited to the Wideband Access Endpoint interface and because faults can occur end to end troubleshooting procedures based on an end to end view of the network is required Wideband access endpoint port maintenance provides a strategy to maintain a wideband access endpoint port via a port on the Universal...

Page 2589: ...Enter status access endpoint extension and verify the status of the port If the wideband access endpoint port is out of service enter release access endpoint extension to put it back into service Retry the test command Table 8 716 Wideband Access Endpoint Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence ...

Page 2590: ... s long test sequence and takes 20 to 30 seconds to complete Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Crosstalk test 6 X ND Conference Circuit test 7 X ND Port Audit and Update test 36 X X ND Table 8 717 Test 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT System resources required for this test are not a...

Page 2591: ...se status access endpoint extension to determine when the port is available for testing The port is available when it is in the in service idle state 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run because of a previously existing error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or ...

Page 2592: ...endpoint extension command to determine when the port is available for testing The port is available when it is in the in service idle state 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or because of a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or ci...

Page 2593: ...t of service If the port is busied out 1 Issue release access endpoint extension command to put the port back into in service 2 Retry the test command If the port is not busied out a Check the error and alarm logs for WAE PORT and UDS1 BD errors and alarms and follow the recommended repair procedures 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABO...

Page 2594: ...d alarm The time delay permits maintenance activity to be performed without triggering an additional alarm Alarms are logged against only those common port circuit packs on which ports have been administered In a heavily loaded system the interval between the removal of a Common Port circuit pack and the logging of the alarm may be several minutes longer The circuit packs in the following list con...

Page 2595: ...Dialing DIOD Trunk Port TN433 Speech Synthesizer Service TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN437 Tie Trunk Port TN438B Central Office Trunk Port TN439 Tie Trunk Port TN447 Central Office Trunk Port TN457 Speech Synthesizer Service TN458 Tie Trunk Port TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN464C D E F DS1 E1 Interface 24 channel T1 32 channel E1 Port TN465 B C Central Office Trunk Port TN4...

Page 2596: ... Port TN755B Neon Power Unit Power TN756 Tone Detector Service TN758 Pooled Modem Port TN760B C D Tie Trunk Port TN762B Hybrid Line Port TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Port TN767B C D E DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel Port TN768 Tone Clock Control TN769 Analog Line Port TN771D Maintenance Test Service TN775 B Maintenance Service TN776 Expansion Interface Port TN777 B Network Control Control TN778 Packet C...

Page 2597: ...g Trunk Port TN2140 B Tie Trunk Port TN2144 Analog Line Port TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2147 C Central Office Trunk Port TN2149 Analog Line Port TN2180 Analog Line Port TN2181 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Port TN2182 B Tone Clock Tone Detector and Call Classifier Control TN2183 Analog Line Port TN2184 DIOD Trunk Port TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface Port TN2199 Central Office Trunk Por...

Page 2598: ...rcuit pack via release board UUCSS Table 8 721 Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the short test sequence first If every test passes run the long test sequence Refer to each appropriate test s description and follow its recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS sh r 1 1 a 0 Cir...

Page 2599: ...nstalled and follow with reset board f This error applies to the Maintenance Test circuit pack TN771D Tone Detector TN748B TN748C or TN748D and Call Classifier TN748 circuit packs For the Maintenance Test circuit pack the error indicates that there is more than one Maintenance Test circuit pack in the port network For the Tone Detector or Call Classifier packs the error indicates that there are mo...

Page 2600: ...gital stations If the circuit pack is really hyperactive then this alarm will be upgraded to a MINOR alarm within 1 hour If the alarm level is a MINOR alarm then replace the circuit pack m This error indicates that no neon current is detected Run test board UUCSS short and follow the procedures for Test 220 This error is only applicable to TN769 and TN746 Analog Line circuit packs n This error is ...

Page 2601: ... a Only applicable to Analog Line circuit packs b The SAKI Sanity test is run in the long test sequence for the Tone Clock circuit packs TN768 TN780 only The test is run on other circuit packs only when they are reset via the reset board command c Only applicable to TN746 and TN769 Analog Line circuit packs Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 ...

Page 2602: ...w many circuit packs can be in the system or port network such as the Maintenance Test circuit pack TN771B or TN771C the Tone Detector circuit pack TN748B TN748C or TN748D and the Call Classifier TN744 The Maintenance Test circuit pack allows only one circuit pack per port network The Tone Detector and Call Classifier allow only 10 circuit packs in each system All additional circuit packs will ret...

Page 2603: ...ce strategy that is recommended for this error type 2 Run the busyout board reset board and release busy board commands and then retest 3 If the test still aborts dispatch with the circuit pack 4 Check the off board wiring and the terminal and if there are no problems found replace the circuit pack 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the d...

Page 2604: ... No ringing current is detected The ringing application circuitry on this circuit pack probably is not healthy 1 Retry the command again 2 If the test continues to fail look for RING GEN error in Error Log a If there are RING GEN errors see RING GEN on page 8 1357 and try to resolve any problem s b If there are no RING GEN errors then replace the circuit pack 3 Retry the command again PASS Ringing...

Page 2605: ...ue the busyout board reset board and release busy board commands and then retest 3 If the problem continues replace the circuit pack 4 Run the test again PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful EXTRA BD This result should only appear when more than one TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack has been installed in this port network Remove this circuit pack Any NO BOARD This is normal i...

Page 2606: ...uit pack needs to be reset then set synchronization to another DS1 interface circuit pack or the Tone Clock circuit pack and try again See SYNC Port Network Synchronization on page 8 1509 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busy out the circuit pack 2 Execute command again 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 tim...

Page 2607: ...t the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to the status commands described in Chapter 8 for a full description of all possible states You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 1008 ABORT Could not allocate a ringing circuit Either all the ringing circuits are in use or the ringing generator is defec...

Page 2608: ...ack 4 Retry the command again PASS This circuit pack is a TN746 or TN769 Analog Line circuit pack and the neon current is detected If this test passes it can also mean that this circuit pack is not a TN746 or TN769 Analog Line circuit pack Any NO BOARD This is normal if the test is being done when a the board is not physically in the system or b the system is booting up Otherwise there is some inc...

Page 2609: ...e level 1 22 quantization distortion loss 1 21 ANSI 1 18 application protocols 1 22 ASAI ISDN BRI port ABRI PORT 8 330 Asynchronous Data Unit proprietary signal 1 13 ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode B channel 8 253 circuit emulation service CES 8 253 D channel 8 253 signaling group 8 253 trunking 8 253 ATMS see Automatic Transmission Measurement System attendant console LEDs 6 4 audits tests see tes...

Page 2610: ...nterchange 4 104 SAT new 7 2 set tone clock 4 104 status 4 99 status port network 4 103 companding 8 755 8 1665 Conference Transfer and Call Forwarding Denial 1 18 connecting connectivity ISDN BRI packet bus 4 73 packet bus 4 84 connectivity rules 1 15 Control LAN Circuit Pack 8 411 CO trunk to digital interface frequency response 1 19 country codes 8 1665 D DAJ1 8 485 alarm log entries 8 485 erro...

Page 2611: ...des reset commands 7 15 codes test commands 7 15 messages commands 7 5 reporting maintenance objects MOs 1 4 ESD See electrostatic discharge European conference of postal telecom rate 1 see CEPT1 expansion interface EI circuit packs 8 774 fiber links viability 8 774 TN570 circuit packs 6 7 8 763 tone clock interactions 8 774 expansion port networks EPNs troubleshooting packet bus 4 110 F Facility ...

Page 2612: ...73 circuit packs 6 14 tone clock circuit packs 6 14 UPS 6 19 yellow 6 15 loop input impedances 1 22 loopback tests fiber fault isolation procedure 4 24 loopbacks DS1 CONV 4 26 DS1 CONV tests 4 26 loss echo return 1 22 insertion 1 20 quantization distortion 1 21 single frequency 1 22 M maintenance common port circuit pack 8 1872 packet bus 4 87 preventive 5 24 test circuit pack LEDs 6 15 wideband a...

Page 2613: ...1711 PMS printer link PMS PRNT JN 8 1278 PNC duplication PNC DUP 8 242 8 950 8 959 8 1283 TN775 circuit packs port networks 8 772 port network connectivity PNC 7 141 port networks Sanity Handshake test 106 8 1029 port networks PNs 8 773 TN775 circuit packs port networks 8 772 port to port insertion loss 1 20 power 8 398 distribution in multi carrier cabinets AC 8 394 AC DC 8 398 distribution unit ...

Page 2614: ...net environment DC POWER 8 498 single carrier cabinets power system 8 4 single frequency return loss 1 22 SNI circuit pack SNI BD 8 1429 SNI peer link SNI PEER 8 1491 SNI see switch node interface SNI SNI EI manual loop back procedure 4 23 specifications 1 10 to 1 22 spontaneous interchanges 4 10 4 11 SRP EPN 8 1495 standards electromagnetic compatibility 3 station to CO trunk frequency response 1...

Page 2615: ... Inquiry Test 8 626 8 1772 146 Translation Update Test 8 629 8 1068 8 1076 8 1775 148 TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test 8 1612 tests and audits continued 149 TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test 8 1614 150 TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test 8 1615 151 TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test 8 1616 16 DIG LINE Station Lamp Updates Test 8 557 8 734 8 1351 161 Loop Around Test 8 993 8 1565 163 Speech Synt...

Page 2616: ...573 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test 8 1237 574 Board Type Check Test 8 1617 58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test 8 915 tests and audits continued 589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test 8 811 59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test 8 917 595 LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test 8 328 8 421 8 1556 596 Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test 8 422 597 Invalid LAPD Frame Err...

Page 2617: ...4 TN1655 circuit packs 8 798 8 808 TN2182 circuit packs description 8 755 enhanced tone receiver ETR ports 8 756 interchanges 8 1663 international settings 8 1665 replacing 8 1666 time division multiplex TDM bus clocks 8 1604 tone clock 8 1014 8 1180 8 1659 TN2242 8 1708 TN2501AP integrated announcements faceplate LEDs interpretation 8 1835 TN264 circuit packs 8 1183 TN2793B 8 101 TN464 circuit pa...

Page 2618: ...ng Trunk Transmission U UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack 8 1707 uninterruptible power supply UPS 1 8 uninterruptible power supply see also UPS universal DS1 UDS1 interface circuit packs 8 586 8 929 8 1039 8 1069 8 1707 8 1718 UPS 8 398 8 1810 alarms 8 1810 LEDs 6 19 SNMP traps 8 1810 USB1 8 1703 handshake test 8 1704 offhook test 8 1705 resetting the modem 8 1706 V V 35 1 12 Voice Announcements over LA...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for S8700 Series

Brand: RTA Pages: 73

Brand: Dispel Pages: 17

Brand: McQuay Pages: 52

MGate 5118 Series

Brand: Moxa Technologies Pages: 8

Brand: tilgin Pages: 20

Brand: tilgin Pages: 20

Brand: Cooper Bussmann Pages: 115

Brand: Shenzhen Winext Technology Pages: 26

Brand: RTA Pages: 81

Brand: IAI Pages: 125

Brand: Syris Pages: 20

Brand: UfiSpace Pages: 11

Brand: TAIKO Pages: 29

Brand: ICP DAS USA Pages: 18

Brand: DASAN KYS Pages: 15

1813-A2-GB20-00

Brand: Paradyne Pages: 50

Brand: Sangfor Pages: 319

Brand: IFM Pages: 242

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands